Sptnimietioee nt
A aoe <n
ek renin cmon So eestor -

HARVARD UNIVERSITY

am

LIBRARY
OF THE

Museum of Comparative Zoology

ia

UA a
PY
au

ia

v Bay
iy iy

—AARVARD

UNIVERSITY

ey ae
uae sits

: 7
he B as
SORTER ROO epi neeii mins

a <r |

ae Wasson
Donsep G. Doon: 60

Bruce S. Waicut 62.

THE OTTAWA FIELD-NATURALISTS! ¢ CLUB

FOUNDED IN aks

) eae and Madame Vanier. Te club is a corporate member a the
Ontario Naturalists. 3 aE

MEMBERS OF COUNCIL

President: Donatp R. Beckett, 36 Canter Blvd., Ottawa, tae
First Vice-President: W. Winston Mair

Second Vice-President: DonaLp A. SMITH
Treasurer: Miss ANNE BANNING, Box 4099, Postal Station E, Ottawa, Odine®
Secretary: A. W. Frank BANFIELD, National Museum of Canada, Ottawa, Onta
Auditors: J. M. Gitietr and R. J. Moore
Additional Members of Council: Miss Cuartorte Dix, Mas, Coe Faves Mrs
Hawxssripcr, Miss Mary Stuart, Messrs. W. K. W. Batpwin, D. A. Benso a
BousFieLp, K. Bow es, A. H. CLARK, Jr., F. R. Coox, R. Friru, J. M. Giietr, Ww. E. §
Goprrey, H. Grou, J. W. GROVES, ee Hanes, D. D. Hocartu, H. Luoyp, A. S.A N i
LAREN, R. J. Moore, C. R. Patterson, A. E. Porsitp, Lis. RUSSELL, LD. ras bes he bi
F.H: ScHULTZ, Pia. ‘Scocean, V.E. F. Souman. Ey hae

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST |

Editor: Francis R. Cook Business Meas Ww
National Museum of Canada, Ottawa, Ontario Central pe F arm, Ottawa, “

Associate Editors: F. J. Aucock (Geology), Joun W. ARNOLD. (Entomology), V V
(Paleontology), J. SHERMAN Breaxney (Herpetology), ArrHur H. ‘Cus 3
(Malacology), Wittiam G. Dore (Botany), J. R. Dymonp Chae ae V
Goprrey (Ornithology), A. G. Huntsman (Marine Biology), PHILLIP Me "OU
(Mammalogy). ae

The Canadian Field-Naturalist is published ieee by the Ottawa F ield-Na ae oe
Club with assistance of the affiliated societies listed on the inside back cover. Manu scripts q
representing personal observations or the results of original research in any branch eo a
tural history are invited. In the preparation of papers authors should consult the 1
recent issue and the information for contributors on the inside back cover. Adver
rates and prices of back numbers of this journal and its predecessors, TRANSACTIC
OF THE OTTAWA FIELD-NATURALISTS’ CLUB, 1879-1886, and the ‘OTT: ;
NATURALIST, 1887-1919, are obtainable from the business apanage

reed ote AND SUBSCRIPTION:

of regular issues are $1.50. A money order should be mae aaa to “the: ‘Grae Bield
Naturalists’ Club and sent to the treasurer. Notice of iy of ee should also be
sent to the treasurer. ‘ee ante eo

Authorized as second-class mail by the Post Office Departinent at Ottawa, Ontario

The Canadian Field-Naturalist

VOLUME 76 JANUARY-MARCH 1962 Numper 1

a GUIDE TQ JHE GEOLOGY: OF THE
~ GATINEAU-LIEVRE DISTRICT

Donatp D. Hocartu
Department of Geology, University of Ottawa, Ottawa, Ontario

INTRODUCTION

The Gatineau-Liévre district has much to offer to the person interested
in earth science. For the naturalist there is the origin of such scenic features
as the Eardley escarpment, the Ottawa plain and the Meach Lake Valley.
Mineral collectors the world over regard the area as a source of showcase
minerals. Petrologists delight in discussing the nature of the ancient rocks
and the problems of establishing their origin. This guide attempts to combine
all three interests.

In the past it was difficult to examine some of the occurrences because
they were small and widely spaced, but new quarries and roadcuts now
present some excellent localities. Recent construction of the Gatineau Park-
way ‘has exposed a fine section of the rocks and given an opportune develop-
ment for the undertaking of this guidebook.

Excursion stops are easily accessible. All fall within a 30-mile radius of
the city of Ottawa. Most can be approached from paved roads and the
maximum walking distance is about 3 mile. Mileages have been clocked from
Baillot and Laurier streets in Hull, a mile from the cenotaph. Time and space
do not permit coverage of field trips in the area, which includes McGregor
and Donaldson lakes, a suitable area for future guidebooks.

Geological data for this region are obtainable from several publications.
No reports on the southern part of the Gatineau region other than those of
reconnaissance surveys by Vennor (1878)* and Ells (1901), have been publish-
ed. The Buckingham region has been mapped by M. E. Wilson (1920) and
the Wakefield area by Béland (1954). A brief guide to the geology of the
Gatineau-Li¢vre region was issued by Stansfield (1913) for excursion A8 of
the twelfth session of the International Geological Congress.

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

The manuscript was read by Professors D. M. Baird and D. L. Dineley of
the University of Ottawa, Dr. A. S. MacLaren of the Geological Survey of
Canada and Mr. V. McBride, Editorial and Information Division, Department
of Mines and Technical Surveys, Dr. N. R. Gadd of the Geological Survey
of Canada and Professor Baird accompanied the writer to several of the
excursion localities and contributed much through stimulating discussions.
Many minerals were identified by X-ray diffraction at the Geological Survey

*References are listed at the end of Part Three.

Mailing date of this number: March 2, 1962
1

2 THe CANADIAN FieLp-NATURALIST Vol. 76

by Miss A. P. Sabina. Mr. R. F. Dore of the National Capital Commission
supplied road plans of the Gatineau Parkway and Major S. F. Dadson of the
Army Survey Establishment prepared the print that was used as a base for the
location map. Colour photographs, loaned by Mr. C. Tanner of the Aluminum
Company of Canada, were helpful in constructing a geological cross-section
of the Maxwell quarry (Figure 22). Most of the photographs.used here were
printed by Miss A. McCain of the National Museum of Canada or by Professor
Baird. The project was suggested by Dr. L. S. Russell of the National Museum
of Canada. His interest and encouragement are gratefully acknowledged.

Credit for individual illustrations is as follows: HH. Finn (draughting), 4

Figures 10, 11, 12, 13 and location map, Professor D. M. Baird, Figures 2, 5,
19, 23, and 28; The Geological Survey of Canada, Figures 7, 8, and 9; The
Naticnal Museum of Canada, Figures 1, 3, and 4; Mineral Resources Division,
Department of Mines and Technical Surveys, Figures 6 and 17.

PART ONE

GEOLOGICAL OUTLINE

History oF THE Rocks
Rocks of the Gatineau-Liévre district can be placed in three distinct age

categories — Precambrian, Ordovician and Pleistocene. The earliest, Precam-

brian, consist largely of formations that were once similar to the limestones,
shales and sandstones that underlie the city of Ottawa. But they are now
metamorphic rocks, having ‘been drastically changed by intense heat and
material introduced from invading molten masses. Limestone has been
changed to a coarse-grained rock containing new minerals such as forsterite
and actinolite (Figures 1 and 2). The formerly important deposits of phos-
phate and amber mica can be regarded as ‘hybrid products of limestone and

the intruding pegmatite. Characteristic minerals include sahlite, apatite,

scapolite, and phlogopite (Figures 3 and 4). Shale has been converted to a
coarse-grained, banded rock or gneiss (Figure 5). The greenish black layered
rock of the Camp Fortune — Black Lake region was once limy shale. Sand-
stone now appears as sinuous bands of quartzite.

Precambrian igneous rocks are also common in the region. Syenite, a
pink or grey rock, is exposed in many roadcuts in the northern part of
Gatineau Park. A large mass, predominently composed of syenite, extends
from Lac la Péche for 20 miles towards St. Pierre de Wakefield, and is as
much as 10 miles wide. A late phase of the syenite near Meach Lake was
found to be 1000 million years old, based on the amount of lead, uranium and
thorium in its radioactive minerals. The metamorphic rocks and syenite are
commonly crisscrossed ‘by tabular bodies or dykes of coarse pink pegmatite.
Still later are black diabase dykes (Figure 6) that are discontinuous but every-
where trend east-west. The diabase does not intersect rocks younger than
the Precambrian formations.

Deformation due to great stresses in the earth produced the Laurentian
Mountain Range, which millions of years ago extended over much of southern
Ontario and Quebec. This was eroded away during the long period before

if ia Sie nats Fa tees EN BS eet

ee Se ae eee Stee ee ee Ys
Es See ee rs nS be ae SRI Smet Te

Re eae ee ee eee ae

on gs Trai ae SAR Soe

a ee en

1962 HocartH: GEoLtocy oF GATINEAU-LIEVRE District 3

Fieure 1. Minerals occurring in pegmatite and crystalline limestone: a. andradite in quartz
(pegmatite, Fortune Lake); b. tourmaline in albite (pegmatite, Battle Lake); c.
thorianite in microcline (pegmatite, Donaldson Lake); d. euxenite (pegmatite, Lac
Ecluse); e. actinolite in calcite (crystalline limestone, Kingsmere); f. forsterite in
calcite (crystalline limestone, Maxwell quarry).

Ficure 2. Folded and weathered outcrop of impure crystalline limestone (Masson).
Impurities stand up in relief.

4 Tue CanapiAN Fietp-NaATURALIST Vol. 76

ees

Figure 3. Minerals occurring in pyroxenite: a. apatite in calcite (Old Chelsea); b. apatite
(Old Chelsea); c. sahlite (Limbour); d. and e. sahlite (Champlain lookout).

rare,

Ficure 4. Minerals occurring in pyroxenite: a. scapolite (Donaldson Lake); 6. phlogo-
pite in calcite (Perkins); c. phlogopite (Limbour); d. phlogopite (Headley mine);
e. phlogopite (Limbour).

1962 Hocartu: GroLtocy oF GATINEAU-LIEVRE DIsTRICT 5

Ficure 5. Typical gneiss showing alternate dark and light layers (Masson).

Figure 6. Diabase dykes (Poupore).

6 Tue CaAnapiANn FieLtp-NATURALIST Vol. 76

the Ordovician rocks were deposited. What remain today are merely stumps
of the former mountains. Metamorphic rocks appear to have been squeezed
into trough-like folds between granites or syenites.

In the Ordovician period about 450 million years ago, the sea advanced ~
over the region and sediments were deposited on the ocean floor. These
sediments were later hardened to make sandstone and limestone. The lowest
member of this sequence is the Nepean Sandstone, deposited on an irregular
Precambrian surface. Above are limestones of the Beekmantown, Chazy, and
Black River — Trenton formations. The Ordovician rocks are exposed as
scattered outcrops in creek beds, roadcuts and other places in the Ottawa
Valley plain. Geologists believe that a large block of rock that now underlies
the valley moved downward along fractures. This block, which contains the
Ordovician limestone, has been preserved, while the higher regions have been
planed off by agents of erosion such as rainwater, rivers and ice. The northern
boundary of the subsided block is the Eardley escarpment, which is as much as
900 feet high and extends as a wall along the edge of the plain. East of the
Gatineau River there is no similar topographic boundary.

Some 450 million years elapsed between Ordovician and geologically
recent time, and little is known of what happened during this long period.
In the Bancroft region to the east, an estimated 5 to 7 miles of rock has been
removed since the Precambrian rocks, now at the surface, were formed. The
Pleistocene or Ice Age marked the climax of a long interval of erosion.

In comparatively recent time, large quantities of limestone were removed
by the solvent action of rainwater. Water, made acidic by dissolved carbon
dioxide, percolated through bedding and joint planes in limestone, dissolved
some of the surrounding rock and greatly enlarged the original openings.
Lusk Cave near Harrington Lake and Lafleche Cavern near Wilson’s Corners
were formed in this manner.

When the roof of a cave collapsed, a circular depression — known as a
sink — became evident at the surface. Some of the sinks were sealed by
insoluble material and became filled with water. A narrow limestone ‘band
southeast of the Champlain lookout can be traced on aerial photographs as a
series of sink lakes and depressions (see Figure 12, page 20).

Dissolved calcium carbonate sometimes redeposited in the cave. As the
water collected on the roof, it evaporated, precipitating aragonite or calcite.
This deposit developed into a stalactite — an icicle-like structure (see Figure
20, page 33). Additional evaporation after the water has dropped would
perhaps form a stalagmite — an inverted ‘icicle’ — on the floor of the cave. A
column formed where a stalagmite and stalactite met. :

Tue PLetstoceNe Erocu or Ick AGE
During the Pleistocene epoch Canada was covered by an immense ice-cap
similar to those of Greenland and Antarctica today. Glaciers planed the land.
and transported rock debris many miles to the south. ci
Arctic climate prevailed during this interval. However, the Pleistocene
was not continuously cold; it included warm interglacial periods. Although

1962 HocartH: GEoLocy oF GATINEAU-LIEVRE DiIstTRICT ik

Figure 7. Raised beaches (Ste. Rose de Lima).

evidence for these warm periods has not been found near Ottawa, sand that
was laid down under temperate conditions has been described from Toronto
and other places in North America. According to radiocarbon dating, the
final cold period lasted 25,000 years. Permanent snow disappeared about
10,000 years ago.

As the ice-cap melted, the rounded and grooved bedrock began to appear
through the snow. Material transported by the glaciers was deposited irre-
gularly as ground moraine. Large isolated houlders may be seen south of
Kingsmere Lake. A boulder of Precambrian rock transported from Quebec
was discovered in Rockcliffe and is now displayed in front of the National
Museum.

Drumlins — hills of glaciated debris moulded by overriding ice — are not
common in the Gatineau-Liévre region; these are most abundant in areas that
have been extensively covered by drift. They are oriented parallel to the
direction of glacial movement with the steeper sides pointing in the direction of
ice-retreat.

Rivers flowing beneath the ice deposited sinuous sand-and-gravel ridges
called eskers. “These narrow ridges may wind and branch, commonly dis-
regarding topography by climbing hills and descending valleys. An esker

north of Quinnville can be traced for about a mile.

During the Pleistocene epoch the burden of ice greatly depressed the
land, and ‘the southern Gatineau Valley and adjacent Ottawa River Valley
were flooded by sea water as the glaciers withdrew. This sea, the Champlain
Sea, advanced to points that have since been elevated to 700 feet above sea-level.
Radiocarbon dating indicates that the marine invasion began 11,500 years ago
and lasted about 2,000 years.

The extent of the Champlain Sea is shown by shorelines and marine
terraces. A well-defined beach (Figure 7) averages 225 feet above sea-level

8 Tue CanapiAN Firip-NaATURALIST Vol. 76

and can be traced continuously from Ste. Rose de Lima for about 5 miles
westward. It reappears on the west side of the Gatineau as a bank 75 feet
high, which forms the “Mile Hill” and the Dome Hill ski-slope. Higher ter-
races are seen at elevations of 440 feet (northwest of Chelsea) and 500 feet (on
the east side of the Gatineau River, facing Wakefield).

Marine clay from the Champlain Ser 1s widespread i in the Ottawa district.
When interbedded with silt, these clays are particularly susceptible to land-
slides. Notable is the 1908 landslide (Figure 8) at Notre Dame de la Salette
where 6 acres of hillside became dislodged and tumbled into the Lievre River,

causing partial destruction of the village on the opposite bank; 15 houses were

completely destroyed and 33 persons lost their lives. Landslides have also
occurred along the Gatineau. An example may be seen opposite the village
of Limbour where an area of about 110 acres was affected; the wrinkled and
hummocky scar extends from the Gatineau across Route 11. A comparable
slide occurred on the old-shore cliff of the Champlain Sea a mile east of
Ironside.

While the main Ottawa and Gatineau valleys predate the Ice Age, certain
valleys owe their origin to glaciers or have been greatly modified by them.
Meach Lake appears to have once drained southward through Chelsea Brook.
The drainage was later diverted to its present northerly course when the exit
at the south end of the lake was dammed by glacial debris. A lump of ice
buried in this moraine melted to form the deep hollow or kettle just west of
the road approaching Meach Lake. Similar kettles can be seen near Bucking-
ham (Figure 9).

Former deltas are in some places evident from gravel pits. The Gatineau
River apparently emptied into the Champlain Sea at a point just east of its
present course and 23 miles northwest of Pointe Gatineau. A former dis-
tributary in its central part has exposed the underlying marine clay.

HISTORY OF MINING IN THE REGION

PHOSPHATE (OR APATITE) AND Mica Mines

Mica and apatite were first reported in the area in 1831 by Lieutenant
F. L. Ingall, who was in charge of a Royal Commission exploring the region
between the St. Maurice and re rivers. Lieutenant Ingall noted mica and
“large quantities” of phosphate on the Lievre below Lac aux Sables.

Phosphate was not mined until about 1870, the first exports being to
England in 1872. By 1877 considerable quantities of apatite were being taken
from the Buckingham and Portland districts. In 1890, the peak year, some
29,500 tons was produced, although production from individual mines was
small. The largest mine, the High Rock, never produced more than 100 tons
of marketable phosphate in a day.

One of the largest of the early phosphate comipaliles was La Societé
frangaise des Phosphates du Canada, popularly known as “the French Com-
pany.” It was organized in Paris in 1881, with the equivalent of $500,000
capitalization. Its first action was a $60,000 purchase of all available lots in

a

Ss he

1962 Hocartu: Geotocy or GATINEAU-LiEvRE District 9

Ficure 8. An old photograph of Salette after the landslide of 1908.

Ficure 9. A kettle (Buckingham area).

10 THe CanapiAn Fre_p-NATURALIST Vol. 76

the phosphate district of Portland township. These lots were subsequently
sold, the last in May 1890.

Prior to the construction of the Buckingham branch of the Canadian
Pacific Railway (1884), phosphate was drawn south by team in winter. The
first attempt to use the Liévre River for transportation was made by the
Little Union Phosphate Company in 1883. In September of that year their
scow was wrecked at the Little Rapids and the mine operators sought construc-
tion of a dam near Poupore. (This does not seem to have been realized until
1888.) Some of the larger properties, such as the High Rock, Little Rapids
and Emerald, constructed tramways to the Li¢vre. Cars descended by gravity
and were drawn up the slope by horses. The Ottawa-Gatineau Railway was
opened in 1892.

_ In 1890 the General Phosphate Corporation Ltd. or “English Company”
was formed in London, with £ 1,000,000 capitalization. This organization’s
purpose was to acquire all the larger phosphate mines jin Canada and thus
corner the market. The founders and directors comprised prominent English
aristocrats and well-known Canadians including Sir Charles Tupper. Despite
the acquisition of such promising properties as the Murphy, Ross Mountain and
High Falls mines, the company was badly mismanaged and was never a success.
After a series of court investigations, it passed into receivership in 1893.

About this time, companies in Florida began making inroads to the phos-
phate market and the price of apatite dropped markedly. One after another
the phosphate companies were forced to close, and by the fall of 1894 the
High Rock was the only producing mine. During World War II many of
the old mines were reopened when American imports were curtailed. Among
the mines were the Little Union and High Rock of Portland West township.
Today no phosphate is mined in the Gatineau-Lievre district.

Large apatite crystals were sometimes found during active mining. An
almost perfect crystal weighing about 700 pounds, was taken from the Emerald
mine in 1883. A much larger terminated crystal — measuring 7 feet long and
4 feet wide and estimated to weigh 6 tons — was discovered in the Aetna mine
in 1889. An attempt to remove this crystal intact was unsuccessful.

Amber mica or phlogopite was commonly associated with apatite and
many of the old phosphate mines were reworked for mica after 1895. At
other mica properties, such as the Lac Girard and Parker mines, apatite was
very rare and never recovered. Annual production of mica seldom exceeded
1,500 tons for the entire district; but a relatively large proportion was of
splitting quality. The principal mica- -mining companies were E. Wallingford
in Templeton township, Lac Girard in Hull and Wakefield townships, and
Blackburn Brothers in Hull and Templeton townships. In recent years,
Canadian phlogopite has bowed to the competition of Indian and Madagascar
mica, and today the sole operating mill in the Gatineau-Liévre district is that
of Blackburn Brothers.

[Ron

Hematite deposits were first noted at what was probably the Haycock
mine by John Bigsby in 1825; they were described in a memoir of his works

1962 HocartH: GEOLOGY OF GATINEAU-LIEVRE DistrRIcT 11

published in 1827. The deposits, “near Hull”, were low in sulphur and con-
tained pyroxene-“coccolite”. ‘This description seems to fit the Haycock mine
but Bigsby also mentions graphite, which conforms more to the Forsyth mine.
The Haycock mine was operated in 1872 and a 64-mile aerial tramway to the
Gatineau River was constructed in 1873. Iron ore was excavated from
numerous small pits but the veins were very narrow and the ore high in
titantum. Work was apparently suspended in 1874.

The Forsyth magnetite occurrence has also been known for many years.
The deposit was briefly described by Lieutenant Baddeley in 1830 from data
submitted by Mr. Burrows, the Overseer of Works on the Rideau. It was
not until 1854 that active exploration and development were undertaken by
the Forsyth Iron Company. By 1858, a total of 8,000 tons of magnetite ore
had been shipped to the company’s iron works in Pittsburgh. A blast furnace
was erected on the property in 1867 but only operated for 6 months and was
dismantled in 1888. Production of ore continued intermittently until 1918.

Iron ore was taken from a number of excavations, the main pit being 730
feet long and as much as 50 feet deep. A shaft was put down 180 feet from
the bottom of this pit and connected with a stope 180 feet long and 20 feet
wide. Another area of pits (the Baldwin deposit) lies 2,000 feet to the west.

In late 1957 the property was acquired by Hull Iron Mines Ltd. which
explored the Forsyth deposit by diamond-drilling and underground work.

GRAPHITE

Graphite has long been known in the Buckingham district. The first
mines were south of Lac la Blanche. In the Progress Report of the Geological
Survey of Canada for 1863-1866, W. E. Logan notes that the Lochaber Plum-
bago Company operated a mill on the Blanche River. About this time a
number of smal] prospect pits were excavated near Donaldson Lake, principally
by Mr. J. Labouglie of Buckingham.

One of the first active companies near Donaldson Lake was the Canada
Plumbago Company (1866). A 20-ton-per-day graphite mill, powered by the
creek draining Twin Lakes, was erected in 1867. This became known as the
“Castle property,” and from 1870 to 1873 it produced graphite from ore mined
in the surrounding territory. In 1875 the mill was destroyed by a forest fire.

Another early producer was the Dominion of Canada Plumbago Company,
incorporated in England with £100,000 capitalization. Near their largest
mine — the “Dome” property 2 miles northeast of Donaldson Lake —a com-
munity sprang up which was given the aspiring title of “Graphite City.” The
village was complete with a barrel-making factory, post office, blacksmith
shop, sawmill, boarding houses, and a mill that turned out 15 tons of graphite
a week.

These early mills extracted graphite on the principle of its low specific
gravity. A slurry of ore was passed into a tank, or buddle, in which the liquid
was made to rotate. Graphite, being the lightest constituent of the ore,
gradually passed toward the periphery of the tank where it was drawn off as
a concentrate.

12 Tue CanapiAN FieL_p-NaATURALIST Vol. 76

Some of the later mills of the Donaldson Lake district, such as those of the
Dominion and North American mines, employed the quality of brittleness in
their extraction. The ore was dried, crushed and ground. ‘The flake graphite
was easily screened off from the more brittle and finer waste material (chiefly
calcite).

Bodie Ged was sporadic and rather small. Much of the graphite, how-
ever, was the valuable crystalline-foliated variety which was widely used in
certain types of crucibles. Columnar graphite was comparatively rare.

BRUCITE

Brucite was first identified in Canada by M. F. Goudge of the Mines
Branch during an investigation of Canadian limestones. The first occurrence
was discovered during the summer of 1937 at Rutherglen, Ontario. By the
autumn of 1939 other deposits were known at Bryson, ce Island, and
near Wakefield, Quebec.

At the present time Aluminum Company of Canada is nas two deposits
near Farm Point, 3 miles south of Wakefield. One of these, the Maxwell
quarry, was opened in 1942. Originally the deposit was 900 ee long with a
maximum width of 400 feet and depth of 650 feet below the highest point or
surface. In October 1960, the deposit had been mined to a depth of 250 feet.
The other deposit, known as the “Cross occurrence”, is about 500 feet in
diameter and has only recently been quarried.

The extraction of brucite nodules from crystalline limestone is unique.
This process, developed by Goudge, involves burning of the limestone and
removal of the brucite nodules. anneal ore is calcined in rotary kilns, water
is added and the finely-divided hydrated lime is removed by coneolled air-
currents. Any remaining impurity is removed by shaking tables where
separation is based on differences in specific gravity of minerals, and by wash-
ing and screening.

OruHerR Mryes AND QUARRIES

Feldspar has been taken from a number of pegmatite dykes north of
Ottawa. Early quarries (1880-1900) were near Templeton Station, Quinnville
and Mine de Mica. Except for a brief period around 1900 feldspar production
from this part of Quebec has been continuous. Today, production is almost
entirely confined to the properties of Canada Flint and Spar on the east side
of the Liévre River.

Chrysotile asbestos occurs in many places throughout the district. A
small deposit on the Dodds Lake Road in Portland West township was tested
with an inclined shaft in 1895, and with an adit by Eastern Asbestos Ltd. in
1956. A deposit at Paugan in Low township was worked in 1895 by the
International Asbestos Co. of Newark, N.J.; production during that summer
was said to average 75 tons of ore a day. Several attempts have been made to
mine asbestos near Perkins Mills, perhaps most actively by the Templeton
Asbestos Co. in 1892. At that time a shaft was put down 85 feet and the ore
was taken to Buckingham for milling. Other occurrences are at Old Chelsea
and various places in the Gatineau district.

pa eo eee

1962 HocartH: GEoLocy oF GATINEAU-LIEVRE DIstTRICT 13

Narrow barite veins are rather common in Hull and Templeton town-
ships. The Foley mine was worked by the Montreal Paint Company in 1898
and 1899 at a site 14 miles east of Cantley. Unfortunately much of the barite
was intimately mixed with calcite and fluorite. Another vein was mined near
Old Chelsea; the pit was subsequently filled and apparently now underlies the
Kingsmere road.

PROSPECTS

A few molybdenite prospects are known in the Hull-Eardley district.
The most promising is probably the National Molybdenite or Chaput-Payne
property. A number of trenches and pits were put down in 1917, the largest
being 25 feet in diameter and 15 feet deep. The average grade is low (less
than 0.2 per cent MoS,). Some drilling was done in 1956 by Noracme Mines
iit:

Gemstones have been taken from a few small pits in the Gatineau region.
About 1880, at the McBryde and Mullin properties near Wakefield, pits were
excavated and a few straw-yellow garnets and a little cat’s-eye wollastonite
were recovered. The Leduc mine, 2 miles west of Wakefield Lake, was
worked by M. J. O’Brien for gem tourmaline in 1908. Some clear-green
material was recovered but the proportion of crystals suitable for faceting
was small. The Villeneuve-mine peristerite and the Scott-mine jasper are
well-known lapidary materials.

In 1956, Frobisher Ltd. explored certain niobium-uranium occurrences
near Meach Lake. These appeared as breccias and dykes associated with the
Wakefield syenite. They were too small and scattered to be of economic
value.

PART TWO

EIELD: TRIP: f:
GATINEAU PARKWAY, HULL-KINGSMERE SECTION

Road Log

Distance

(miles)

0 Baillot and Laurier streets, Hull:
proceed to Route 11 and turn north;
2.0 turn left off Route 11 at Gamelin Street;

3.4 turn right onto Gatineau Parkway.

4.25 Srop 1: Biotite gneiss.

5.2 Srop 2: Crystalline limestone.

9.9 KinesmereE: Crystalline limestone, quartzite, diabase.

11.8 Brack Lake: Diopside-oligoclase gneiss.

Stop 1: Brorire GNEISS

Take the Gatineau Parkway 0.8 mile north of Gamelin Street. About
100 feet east of the road is a fine outcrop of gneiss. The rock probably repre-
sents an impure shale that has been changed by heat and pressure. Although
it has been steeply tilted, the osetia layering has been preserved and indeed

14 Tue CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST Vol. 76

accentuated by alternate zones of light and dark minerals (see Figure 5, page
5). The rock is no longer of simple mineralogy but is now made up of
quartz and feldspar (microcline and albite) with lesser amounts of biotite,
garnet, epidote (pumpellyite) and a number of other components. ‘The as-
semblage is one of low-temperature metamorphism.

The gneiss is not of uniform composition but certain layers differ notably
from others. There are, for example, bands rich in pea-sized grains of red
garnet. Other layers, rich in quartz, are presumably remnants of ancient
sandstone strata. The largest quartzite layer is 5 feet wide. The quartzite
contains considerable red microcline and jet-black tourmaline, the latter being
most abundant near the gneiss. The boron necessary to form tourmaline was
possibly derived from shale during metamorphism.

Near the west side of the outcrop are several dykes of diabase which
forced their way through the gneiss in molten condition. They are fine-
grained and dark green but on exposure to the weather turn a rusty brown.
The largest dyke is about 23 feet wide and trends roughly N80°E, approxima-
tely parallel to the main diabase dykes of the Gatineau-Liévre region. The
gneiss has been sheared within 6 inches of the contact by the forceful intrusion
of the diabase. Smaller dykes are not consistent in trend; some are cross-
cutting, others are chanelled by the layering of the rock to become sills. In
detail the dykes are irregular, they pinch and swell, change direction, and
branch.

Stop 2: CRYSTALLINE LIMESTONE

Next to gneiss, crystalline limestone or marble is the most common rock
type of the Gatineau region. ‘There are good exposures on the Parkway from
1.6 to 2.7 miles north of Gamelin Street. White rock in the roadcuts near the
northern part of this section and the isolated blocks in an open field to the
south are composed of metamorphosed limestone. Surfaces are precipitous
and rugged in detail but individual hills are low. ‘The highest cliff drops 75
feet into a field on the western side of the limestone mass.

An abundant and characteristic mineral is serpentine, which in some
places gives the rock a distinctive greenish tinge. Blocks composed mainly of
resistant serpentine are perched on a field at the south side of the road 2.0 to
2.1 miles north of Gamelin Street. The more soluble calcite has been dissolved
away. Phlogopite mica, altered diopside, and vermiculite are also common.
The abundance of the hydrous magnesium silicates, such as serpentine, phlogo-
pite and vermiculite, suggests that the original rock was an impure magnesium
limestone, which was later altered with the aid of hot solutions into a silicated
marble.

Examine the marble roadcuts to the north. The steeply dipping pink
layers may represent strata of slightly different composition in the original
sedimentary rock. Note the dark grey, included fragments which together
with the light matrix form a breccia. The fragments may belong to a brittle
stratum that was broken when the limestone flowed under pressure (see
Figure 15, page 24).

15

1962

a

HocartH: GrEoLocy oF GATINEAU-LIEVRE DiIsTRICT

Id Janes Wosmeg *:

4
S@III JO aje9S

usaz7ed Aq UMOYS Spual |

Se ia eee eaaen AjI/E20]

GZ
Je2l6o/086 6uj359183U/ aqjues6 asieo7) |G |

aziuel6 pue aq1UaAG ea
% r
sa O@segel
ove onena [ZA]

UaP4INGIOAC) Fone

SS = 1N3934 GNY 3NAD01SIaq1d

r

J

‘yieg neauner oy yo qed usayinos oyI

FA] (A TH
1d
L| i

NVIYEWVO3ud

afd
fH Wi

jo Asojoor) ‘OT aXNdI

HEY y

NIVLNNOW

ayDT Up

vorre (YY ci
\
\

2M €
SSS IS

16 Tue CanapiAn Fie_tp-NaATurRALIsT Vol. 76

KINGSMERE: CRYSTALLINE LIMESTONE, QUARTZITE, DIABASE

A short walk south from the Kingsmere parking lot below “the Ruins”
brings one to a roadcut in green rock. This was probably once an impure
limestone but is now mainly composed of quartz, diopside and tremolite with
occasional veins and cavities filled with coarse orange calcite. In other places
quartz is so abundant that the rock could be termed an impure quartzite.

Wine quartz-diopside-tremolite-calcite assemblage represents an intermedi-
ate stage between limestone and pyroxenite, and in this respect is similar to the
rock at the Headley mica mnie (see Field Trip 3, page 23). At Kingsmere,
phlogopite mica occurs irregularly in bunches. Elongated crystals of black
tourmaline and formless orange garnet are common in each deposit. Many
pyroxenites of the Gatineau region grade from limestone on one side into
quartzite on the other.

This rock contains considerable calcite that is easily attacked by water
and it is therefore not surprising that portions are cavernous. A natural well
at the upper end of the roadcut flows when the water-table is sufficently high
(normally until mid-July).

The flanks of this outcrop are covered by’a silty clay, full of stones and
boulders. "This is a till comprising material carried and laid down by the
glaciers of the Ice Age.

About 100 yards south is an outcrop of silicated limestone or impure
quartzite containing considerable feldspar. This is cut by a diabase dyke
about 75 feet wide — the middle dyke of the three principal diabase dykes of
the region. Each trends approximately east-west. They are not continuous
but pinch and reappear along their strike. “The two northern dykes can each
be traced about 4 miles but are rarely more than 150 feet wide. The southern
dyke is wider but shorter.

Diabase is a rock that can be recognized by its rusty and rounded surfaces.
It is much harder than most recks of the region and emits a characteristic ring
when struck with the hammer. Under the microscope it is seen to be com-
posed almost exclusively of long crystals of labradorite feldspar, stubby brown
grains of pyroxene and rounded crystals of magnetite.

This rock was intruded as a liquid and was rapidly cooled along its
borders. Such ‘chilled contacts’ are manifest by a zone of extremely fine
grain. Within 3 feet of the contact individual grains cannot be identified
with the unaided eye, whereas in the centre of the dyke grains are up to
+ inch across.

Brack Lake: DropsipE-OxLicocLiaAse GNEIsS

A dark-green rock underlies much of the Parkway and Camp Fortune.
This rock was probably a shale that has been altered by heat and pressure.
Although new minerals have been formed the bulk composition has remained
about the same.

The new rock is made up of approximately equal amounts of dark

minerals (diopside, subordinate mica and actinolite) and feldspar (oligoclase

and microcline). Compared with the paragneiss at the southern tip of the

Atak Hs 4

1962 Hocartu: GEotocy or GaATINEAU-LiEVvRE DIsTRICT 17

Parkway, this rock has been metamorphosed at a higher temperature — diopside
and oligoclase replacing biotite, actinolite and albite. In addition, the initial
shale was not interbedded with sandstone.

A fresh exposure of this rock is seen opposite Black Lake. ‘The gneiss is
crisscrossed by numerous pegmatite dykes and interlayered with a few small
pegmatite sills. The pegmatite is mineralogically simple, being composed
almost exclusively of quartz and pink microcline. These minerals are not
arranged in zones.

Stratification in the gneiss is hardly evident in fresh exposures but is
accentuated on weathering. A weathered surface is seen on the west side of
the lake. Stratification is due to bands of minerals alternately rich in pyroxene
and oligoclase. It is enhanced by oriented mica flakes.

FIELD: RIP: 2:
GATINEAU PARKWAY, FORTUNE-McCLOSKEY SECTION

Road Log
Distance
(miles)
0 Baillot and Laurier streets, Hull:
proceed north on Route 11;
8.9 turn left at Chelsea;

11.4 turn right onto Meach Lake Road at Old Chelsea,

12.9 turn left onto the Gatineau Parkway.

14.1 Forrune Lake: Syenite, pegmatite, breccia and schist.

15.6 Cuamprain Looxour: Pyroxenite, pegmatite, breccia and schist.

16.7 McCtroskry’s Fietp: Aplite, pegmatite and dolomite.

ForTUNE LAKE: SYENITE, PEGMATITE, BRECCIA AND SCHIST

The Parkway cuts through syenite near Fortune Lake (Figure 11). This
syenite is a mottled greenish rock, composed of pink microcline, grey plagio-
clase, black hornblende and a number of minor constituents. ‘The location is
near the southern extremity of the large Wakefield syenite mass.

At Fortune Lake opposite the parking lot the syenite is especially rich in
black mica and brassy pyrite. It appears to have been emplaced as a molten
rock at great depth but shows evidence of subsequent change (metamorphism).
Cavities are filled with orange-pink calcite that was introduced at high tempera-
ture and reacted with syenite to produce envelopes of green amphibole and
pyroxene surrounded by black biotite. Fracture planes are commonly coated
with blue-green amphibole asbestos, less commonly by yellowish green epidote.
Fragments of a dark rock appear to have been caught up in the molten mass.

A few pink dykes cut the syenite. Sugary-textured aplite, composed of
microcline and quartz, grades into coarse-grained pegmatite of the same com-
position. Aplite and pegmatite are very abundant in the Wakefield syenite
and in places are the most common rocks. They were introduced in the
molten state after the syenite had solidified.

18 THe Canapian Frirtp-NaATuRALIST Vol. 76

Scale of feet

—\—\

\

\
/

ne
Z

Geology of the Fortune L

Ficure 11,

Overburden
Pegmatite
Biotite schist pes :

LEGEND

PLEISTOCENE AND RECENT

NVIMEWV93uNd

1962 HoeartH: GroLocy oF GATINEAU-LIEVRE DistrRIcr 19

About 200 yards east of the last occurrence, the Parkway cuts through a
large pegmatite dyke. The pegmatite is composed of quartz, microcline and
plagioclase. As at Black Lake these minerals are not arranged in any specific
zones. In certain places a graphic intergrowth of quartz and feldspar can be
observed. The molten pegmatite reacted with the wall-rocks, particularly on
the east side, producing the dark garnet andradite (see Figure 1, page 3).
This garnet is unusual because it contains about 2 per cent yttrium.

Still farther east is a breccia containing fragments of syenite cemented by
biotite, iron oxide and microscopic apatite. “The occurrence is radioactive due
to smal! amounts of the rare mineral betafite. On the east the breccia is
bounded by a dark micaceous rock or schist.

CHAMPLAIN Lookout: PyYROXENITE, GNEISS AND MOLYBDENITE

At this locality the Parkway cuts through metamorphic pyroxenite, a rock
composed of dark green pyroxene or sahlite and lesser amounts of calcite,
actinolite, feldspar, sphene, mica and quartz. Solution cavities in calcite locally
contain loose books of mica and shiny pyroxene crystals coated with tiny
prisms of apatite (see Figure 3, page 4). Well-formed feldspar and quartz
crystals are occasionally found. A roadcut just before the Lookout exposes
a lens of sugary, green apatite.

Below the Lookout is the Chaput-Payne property that was tested for

molybdenite during World War I. It contains numerous small excavations,
the largest being a test pit 25 feet across and 15 feet deep. The main lead can
be traced for at least 250 feet. Its upper part is rich in mica — the vein having
the appearance of the mica-calcite-pyroxene lodes of the Gatineau Valley —
but below, it contains a pink calcite core rich in molybdenite. Some of the
molybdenite flakes are an inch across. The surrounding pyroxenite also
contains coarse-grained molybdenite. Other minerals are actinolite, phlogo-
pite, sphene, uraninite, scapolite, pyrite, pyrrhotite and sphalerite.

The pyroxenite grades imperceptibly into a rusty-weathering gneiss,
generally rich in pyroxene and sulphides but occasionally with dominant mica
and feldspar. The gneiss and associated pyroxenite and limestone have been
drawn out into long streamers, like tentacles of an octopus (Figure 12). The
gneiss contains finer-grained molybdenite than the pyroxenite and the molyb-
denite seems to be confined to fracture surfaces. It was possibly derived from
solutions genetically connected with pegmatite dykes that intrude the gneiss.
This locality is on the eastern side of a large molybdenite-rich area centred
around Quyon.

At the foot of the escarpment is the Ottawa Valley plain. The rocks
beneath the earthy covering are Ordovician limestones preserved in a trough
that sank many feet along faults bounding the plain.

McCtoskey’s Fietp: APLiTE, PEGMATITE AND DOLOMITE

McCloskey’s field (Figure 13) is in the southwest part of an area of
aplite, 1$ miles long and 1 mile wide. Aplite is a pink sugary-textured rock
composed of microcline and varying amounts of quartz and plagioclase. Dark

20 Tue CanapiANn FieLp-NaAtTurRALIsT Vol. 76

ANZA
Se

x Ke Lif
one WN
5 7

<<
fh

MOUNTAIN

LEGEND

PRECAMBRIAN
F= NSE

ot NN

Diabase Aplite Syenite Pyroxenite Diopside and Limestone
actinolite gneiss

Assumed Faulk. NNN
Mo-Molybdenite; mi-Mica 3
py-Pyrite

2000

Figure 12. Geology of the region near the Champlain lookout.

1962 Hocartu: Greotocy oF GATINEAU-LIEVRE DiIstTRICT 21

SEN

BR. R E Cc A M B R I A N
Al “ SS Crystalline limest
A BSS. J Cnstalline limestone 3

¢€p-dolomitic limestone
Geological boundary Strike and dip
(defined, assumed)... ~\_.--_ Gneissosity.. 2 of limestone..

Ficure 13. Geological map of McCloskey’s field.

DD, THe CanapiAN Frecp-NaTurRALIST Vol. 76

inches

WALL

aN
wl wii Lh /a/, 5

[iis

Fieure 14. Orbicular arrangement of amphibole in aplite (McCloskey’s field).

minerals are mainly confined to radiating tufts, circular structures and veins of
a bluish green amphibole, and are in places accompanied by a little brown mica.
Good examples of amphibole (Figure 14) may be seen below the large pegma-
tite dyke. The mineral is an unusual and beautiful one. It is actinolite with
a high percentage of sodium, the varieties highest in sodium are dark greenish
blue. It is commonly very coarse —in a vein east of the field, individuals a
foot long were observed. The crystals are elongated and tend to break in
planes or cleave along their length. Some crystals also display a marked
cleavage across their length. ‘This so-called basal parting is a feature distinc-
tive of pyroxenes and is almost never found in amphiboles.

The pegmatite itself is worth examination. It is composed mainly of
coarse-grained feldspar and quartz. By rotating a specimen of feldspar in
sunlight, reflections may be given from both the principal pink mineral (micro-
cline) and thin braids of a whitish mineral (plagioclase). ‘This is the inter-
growth perthite (so called because the original specimens came from near Perth,
Ontario). In other fragments the foreign matter is translucent grey quartz
and shows no mirror reflection. Quartz may be present in angular grains, and
to this rock the name graphic granite is sometimes applied. The failure of
two small feldspar pits is attributed mainly to the large amount of quartz
intergrown with the feldspar. Other interesting minerals are very dark
pyroxenes (especially in the eastern pit) and rare crystals of sphene and
uranothorite.

Within the aplite are isolated occurrences of carbonate rocks. “These are
very different from the limestones of Pinks Lake and Kingsmere because (1)

i \Fy

1962 Hocartu: GroLtocy or GaTINEAU-LIEvRE DistTRIcT 23

they hold a great deal of dolomite and are best classified as dolomites and
dolomitic limestones, (2) they are discontinuous, and (3) they contain con-
siderable quantities of distinctive accessory minerals.

The mineral dolomite is a calcium-magnesium carbonate in contrast to
calcite, the calcium carbonate. Calcite is much more soluble than dolomite.
On weathered surfaces coarse-grained calcite has dissolved away leaving salient
medium-grained dolomite. In addition the dolomite contains a little iron and
weathers to a brown colour. An idea of the dolomite content can therefore
be obtained from the colour of the outcrop. An occurrence of calcitic lime-
stone may be seen on the Ridge Road just south of the field.

Detailed examination has shown that the dolomites and dolomitic lime-
stones are very late in the geological sequence. They appear to have been _
squeezed into fractures in a hot plastic state. “Tongues in some places cut the
aplite and in certain instances blocks of aplite and syenite have been engulfed
in the limestone. The borders of the limestone are commonly lined with
several inches of biotite and in places considerable actinolite. “These minerals
may ‘have been formed by reaction of hot limestones with the aplite.

The mineral composition of the carbonate rocks is also striking. ‘There
are alternating bands of dolomite and calcite but within the dolomite are
bands rich in fine-grained apatite. Pyrite is universally present. Actinolite
is found in both calcite and dolomite. Occasionally we see magnetite crystals.
The rare mineral betafite occurs along fracture planes.

FIELD TRIP 3: MINE ROAD —TENAGA ROAD

Road Log
Distance
(miles)
0 Baillot and Laurier streets, Hull:
2.0 turn left from Route 11 onto Gamelin Street;
2.8 turn right onto Mine Road (Maurice Street).
5.8 ForsyTH Iron Mine.
7.6 Heraptey Mine: Apatite and mica.
8.4 Kingsmere Road, turn right;
8.7 Tenaga Road, turn left;
9.4 Crawley Films Ltd. and the Scorr Jasper OccurRENCE.
return to Kingsmere Road;
10.1 Kingsmere Road, turn right;
10.7 road to gravel pit on left;
11.2 KrnesMERE SAND Pits.

ForsytH Iron MINE

Magnetite at the Forsyth mine occurs in a lens that is parallel to the
stratification of the enclosing crystalline limestone. The lens dips almost
vertically. Magnetite occurs in massive form and also as small disseminated
grains. The boundaries of the lens are, however, rather sharp. Hematite

24 Tue CanapiaAn Fiecp-NatvrAaList Vol. 76

Figure 15. Breccia showing contorted dark inclusions of amphibolite in crystalline lime-
stone (Forsyth mine).

and jasper are commonly encountered near the margins of the deposit but are
rare in the central part. .

The magnetite body occurs in the eastern flank of a syncline, a trough-
shaped fold. When the structure was formed, successive beds slipped one
over the other. During this process brittle layers of dark metamorphic rocks
were broken and engulfed in the more plastic marble. The resulting breccia
has been encountered as discontinuous lenses in underground workings
(Figure 15). Some fine examples of breccia can be seen as blocks in the waste
dump near the Mine Road.

At this deposit the following minerals occur as collector’s items:

Chlorite — Large flakes of green and purple chlorite have been found in
the old pit.

Fluorite — Green fluorite is occasionally found in calcite veinlets.

Graphite — This is common in limestone, but generally in small flakes.

Magnetite —Some of the magnetite is intrinsically magnetic, when broken,
small chips tend to stand up on end on the parent fragment.

Scapolite —Large crystals of green scapolite have been observed in
pyroxenite blocks on the dump.

Cordierite — Deep blue cordierite is a rare constituent of the schist south
of the Forsyth mine.

1962 HocartH: GEoLocy oF GATINEAU-LIEVRE DistRIcT 25

TIT has

THpstearegronnsaueanunveuteel

aut

GEOLOGY
Bee ea 4 JAchnolite rock <5 Biotite

TF]. ay
7) Limestone. Pink, “white eee

Figure 16. White crystalline limestone grading into pink calcite (Headley mine).

Heapiey Mine: APATITE AND Mica

Take the Mine Road to the junction of the Notch Road and. walk west
along a well-worn trail. Proceed 4 mile (past the second field) to a fork in
the trail. Take the right-hand fork and proceed another 400 yards to the
main pit.

The Headley mine comprises a number of pits, the largest being 40 feet
long, 15 feet wide and 20 feet deep. The mine was worked many years ago
for phosphate and later for mica. The property is now owned by Walter C.
Cross and Co.; it was worked in 1960 by Leo Joanisse of Hull.

The best exposure is in the main pit where mica veins occur in crystalline
limestone and occasionally in a diopside-actinolite rock: Pyroxenite on the
West appears to grade transitionally into crystalline limestone on the east.
Some pockets of pink calcite containing isolated books of coarse silver-amber
mica occur directly in apatite-rich limestone, while others with a more vein-
like appearance are bounded by a zone of phlogopite. To the latter category
belong veins where the colour of calcite grades from white in the limestone to
pink in tongues within actinolite rock (Figure 16). In this case, limestone
appears to have been squeezed into fractures and its colour changes to pink.

Large and well-formed books of mica have been (and can still be) found
on the dumps. The mica is light silver-amber and a large proportion is of
premium grade. The six-sided plates may show light and dark zones, indica-
ting that the composition of the parent solution suddenly changed as the
crystal grew (see Figure 17).

26 Tue CANADIAN Fietp-NATURALIST Vol. 76

Ficure 17. Zoned phlogopite crystal (Quebec mica region).

A notable feature is the distinct double asterism. ‘Take a thin splitting
of mica and, holding it close to the eye, look at a point source of light (such
as a bare electric bulb across the room). You will see a strong six-rayed star
super- imposed on a weaker six-rayed star. ‘This is the phenomenon of double
asterism presumably caused by the channelling of light by oriented impurities
within the mica. All Ottawa Valley phlogopite displays this property but
none better than the silver-amber mica of the Headley mine.

The pit is remarkable for furnishing a large number of minerals from such
a restricted area: Calcite, phlogopite, apatite, diopside and actinolite have
already been mentioned, but the writer has also found garnet, tourmaline,
scapolite, wilsonite, pyrite, pyrrhotite, sphalerite, albite, vesuvianite, quartz
and sphene in place i in the main pit.

Scott JASPER OCCURRENCE

The jasper occurrence is off the Tenaga Road 0.7 mile north of Old
Chelsea. The Scott pits are just inside the woods and about 550 yards north-
west of Crawley Films. This mine has not been worked during this century.

1962 HocartH: GEoLocy oF GATINEAU-LIEVRE DIsTRICT 27

EEG EN) D

Ficure 18. Plan of the Scott mine.

It was originally opened as a phosphate property but the apatite was mixed
with too much hematite to be of value. Later it was mined for mica, and 10
or 12 tons of phlogopite was taken from the main pit.

Of interest to the lapidary is the abundance of jasper encountered in the
mine excavations (Figure 18). Occurrence No. 1 is a pit 20 feet long, 10 feet
wide and 5 feet deep. Pieces of jasper are common in the dump and small
veins may be seen cutting chloritic gneiss in the pit. The jasper has a frag-
mented or brecciated aspect. It may contain fragments of gneiss and quartzite
and is itself broken by veinlets of red hematite and specularite. The jasper
contains small opening or vugs lined with quartz crystals. It is generally red-
brown but commonly is orange or even yellow; on the dump, some pieces have
weathered pink.

Occurrence No. 2 is the remains of a small stockpile of apatite. A little
jasper is associated with apatite and pink calcite. The exact source of this
material is not known.

No. 3 is the main pit, 40 feet long, 10 feet wide and as much as 10 feet
deep. Jasper is visible at the contact of crystalline limestone and gneiss. The
jasper widens downward and is 24 feet wide at its base. Its colour is brick-red,
though it contains spheres of yellow material up to an inch across. Jasper is
commonly cut by quartz-hematite and calcite-barite veinlets. Cavities are
either filled with calcite or quartz.

No. 4 and No. 5 occurrences are small and badly weathered pits. The
waste pile of pit No. 4 shows some pink calcite with apatite and mica. The
mica is in places cemented with red hematite. Mica splittings cover the
ground at locality No. 6.

28 . THe CANnapiIAN FieLp-NaATURALIST Vol. 76

The occurrence farthest south, No. 7, exposes abundant but poor-quality
jasper. The vein is 2} feet wide. It dips into a 10-foot ledge of pegmatite at
about 30 degrees. Red jasper is flecked with calcite and barite grains, contains
some calcite bands, and is riddled with vuggy and glassy quartz. Both jasper
and the underlying pegmatite are sprinkled with a little specularite.

Jasper is not restricted to the pits of the Scott mine. It is found in wells ~
to the east and in veinlets cutting gneiss between occurrence No. 6 and No. 7.
Jasper boulders occur in the drift near Old Chelsea.

The origin of the jasper is uncertain. Except for the Scott mine, jasper is
almost unknown in the Gatineau region. G. J. R. Hannah notes (M. Sc.
thesis, Laval University, 1952) that microscopic textures and structures suggest
the mineral was deposited from dilute watery solutions at low temperatures
(less than 200°C).

Good-quality red jasper can still be obtained from locality No. 3 and
fair-quality yellow from No. 2. However, owing to many veins and inclusions
of soft material, large pieces are rarely found.

KINGSMERE SAND Pits

The Kingsmere sand pits are owned by William Ryan of Old Chelsea and
are at present worked by the National Capital Commission. They are ap-
proached by a road leading south off the Kingsmere Road into a field, 0.6 mile
west of Old Chelsea. Half a mile along, this road leads to the upper pit —a
shallow excavation about 300 yards long and 100 yards wide. A road from the
southeast corner of the pit connects to a smaller pit below.

A sump-hole at the base of the lower pit has penetrated silts containing
abundant marine fossils of species living to-day. The small size of the shells
indicates a cool climate.

The upper pit exposes sand that was apparently deposited in a river delta
shortly after the retreat of the sea. The inclined stratification may be trun-
cated, resulting in crossbedding (Figure 19). This is due to a sudden change
in the direction of current. In some places hollows have been filled with sand
resulting in a scour-and-fill structure. In others, irregular series of folds may
be seen. These were probably caused by slumping of the wet sand.

A stratified boulder bed near the base of the upper pit has been only
partly preserved. The boulders are angular but the bed lies on a rounded
rock surface has been smoothed by glaciers. A second boulder bed lies near
the top of the pit and, in contrast to the lower bed, the boulders are unsorted
and well-rounded. In places they are partly decomposed, at the lower pit,
some of the boulders from this bed can be dug into with the bare hand.

The origin of the decayed boulders is uncertain. They probably predate
the glaciers but certainly could not have been transported far in their non-
coherent state. Perhaps they were situated on a slope that was preserved
from glaciation and rolled down on the delta some time after the Champlain
Sea disappeared.

Some 2 feet of sand overlies the upper boulder bed. It appears to be
recent and windblown.

Pay ot

1962 HocartH: Grotocy oF GATINEAU-LIEVRE DISTRICT 29

Figure 19. Crossbedding of a type commonly seen in the Gatineau-Liévre region.

FIELD TRIP 4: WRIGHTVILLE —-MOUNTAIN ROAD

Road Log
Distance
(miles?
0 Baillot and Laurier streets, Hull:
1.4 Canapa Cement Company Quarry: Ordovician limestone.
1.7 turn right onto Route 11,
2.0 turn left onto Gamelin Street;
3.6 turn right onto Mountain Road.
4.6 Dawson GRAVEL Pir.

CANADA CEMENT COMPANY QuARRY: ORDOVICIAN LIMESTONE

This quarry is north of Montclair Avenue East in Wrightville. The
company’s permission is required before the property may be visited. The
local limestone is mixed with a slurry of marine clay pumped from near
Ironside and a small amount of sandstone brought from Bell’s Corners, Ontario.
This material is crushed, ground, calcined and bagged as cement at the plant.

Limestone has been taken from this site since the turn of. the century.
The quarry is about 520 yards long, 240 yards wide and 40 yards deep
(October 1960). Mining operations have taken place from two horizons or
benches. The rock is blasted from holes put down by 6-inch churn drills.

The limestone is rather uniform in composition, grading from 45 to 55
per cent lime. The only visible impurities are a few shale partings which, in
some places, contain nodules of chert. An alternating grey and black banding

30 Tue CaAnapiAN Fietp-NaTuRALIST Vol. 76

is due to variation in organic content; thus some rocks give a fetid odour when
struck with a hammer. The light-coloured limestone is notably coarse-
grained. Sandstone on the quarry floor has been derived from outside.

Use is made of natural fractures or joint systems and the bedding planes
in quarrying the rock. The bedding planes are by far the best-developed and
are almost horizontal. In some cases the joints are coated white with small
calcite crystals.

Fossils are most prolific in a horizon near the top of the quarry but may
be observed in the broken rock on the quarry floor. ‘The sediments laid down
in the Ordovician Sea have been correlated with the Black River — Trenton
strata of New York State by the index fossils they contain. Noteworthy are
the scarab-like tribolites (Jsotelus), lampshells (Rafinesquina), and cup-like
bryozoans (Prasopora).

Dawson GRAVEL Pir

The Dawson pit is on the Mountain Road 1.1 miles northwest of the
junction of Gamelin Street and the Brickyard Road. It is owned and operated
by the National Capital Commission. In November 1960 the pit was being
worked near the southeast corner, and excavation had disclosed a number of
interesting features. }

The section shows 5 feet of silty clay which overlies 1 foot of silt; this in
turn overlies pebbly sand, now largely obscured by talus. None of these layers
contains fossils. Their composition suggests they were laid down in fresh
water. The clay does not contain calcite which is common in the marine
clay of the Ottawa region. It is well stratified and includes oxidized layers.
Silt and clay were probably deposited in shallow quiet water. In contrast, the
pebbly sand may represent outwash from the glaciers.

At another face may be seen sand layers interbedded with grey silt. In
each sand layer the texture grades from coarse at the bottom to fine at the top.
This ‘graded bedding’ ‘has resulted from deposition in quiet water, the coarse
particles settling faster than the fine. Alternation with silky layers may be
due to seasonal variation.

At still another face in the pit, crossbedding is apparent. The structure
is on a much smaller scale than the crossbedding of the Kingsmere sand pit.
It may result from sand having been sculptured by shallow running water to
produce lamination of one set of ripples oblique to the next. The occurrence
of graded bedding close to crossbedding 1s unusual.

On a fourth face, layers have slipped along steeply inclined planes produc-
ing fault surfaces. This can be explained by slipping of the sediments in a
frozen or partly frozen state.

Another gravel pit is just east of the Gatineau Parkway, 2.0 miles north of
Gamelin Street. This also may represent a glacial outwash deposit. Part of
the gravel is made up of coarse crystalline limestone, a rather unusual compo-
nent indicating very rapid deposition and burial. Certain gravel layers are
rich in marine shells, but these are mostly broken and not in an upright position,
suggesting that they were transported from another site.

1962 HocartH: Grotocy oF GATINEAU-LIEVRE DiIsTRICT 31

FIELD TRIP 5: CANTLEY ROAD

Road Log
Distance
(miles)
Baillot and Laurier streets, Hull:
; proceed north on Route 11,
5.1 turn right onto Limbour Bridge;
5.6 Cantley Road, turn left.
9.6 Road leading on left to NELLIE anp BLancue Mica Mine.
14.5 Road leading on left to Dacry Mica Mine.
17.5 Road leading on left to LarLECHE CavERNs.
20.7. Road leading on left to the Sr. PrerRE pp WAKEFIELD
FELDSPAR QUARRY.

NELLIE AND BLANCHE Mica MINE

The Nellie and Blanche mine can be reached by turning left from the
Cantley Road at a point 4.0 miles above the Limbour Bridge, the turnoff is
marked ‘by a sign “Kunnamor Cottages”. Follow this road for 0.6 miles to a
clearing. The mine workings are in the field beyond the gravel pit on the
left.

This mine was worked by the Lac Girard System prior to 1900, and the
pits are now either flooded or partly grown over. The mine dumps however
furnish much information on the mineralogy of a typical occurrence of mica
and apatite. The largest dump is more than 100 feet long and 20 feet wide.

At this occurrence, pyroxenite, a coarse-grained dark green rock, is cut
by pegmatite containing hard pink feldspar and dark green amphibole. Py-
roxenite is the mica-and-apatite carrier and is interbedded with metamorphic
gneisses.

Green-coloured minerals are predominant in the pyroxenite, and include:

Diopside — dark green and dull,

Actinolite — somewhat darker and shiny,

Scapolite — light yellow-green cleavage pieces, which weather to woody

white or pale mauve,

Apatite — translucent grass-green (somewhat rare).

Scapolite, a characteristic mineral in these rocks, is unusually abundant
here. Salmon calcite is shredded through the pyroxenite. Where scapolite
occurs with calcite it is white and is commonly found with black tourmaline.

The origin of the Quebec pyroxenites has been subject of much debate.
Some people believe that molten pyroxenite invaded the gneiss, others think
that pyroxenite represents an alteration of impure limestone brought about by
heat from the intruding granites. The proponents of the former, or igneous,
theory maintain that pyroxenite is commonly not bordered by crystalline
limestone, it may transgress the strike of the enclosing rocks, and commonly
contains inclusions of pegmatite. The proponents of the latter, or metamor-
phic, theory draw attention to the fact that the pyroxenites are generally
interbedded with metamorphic rocks that were originally sediments, that they

rh

Tue CANADIAN Firip-NaTuRALIST Vol. 76

LS)

commonly contain considerable calcite; and that some of their principal con-
stituents such as diopside, phlogopite, scapolite, sphene and actinolite are lime
or magnesium silicates that are generally regarded as metamorphic.

Dacrey Mica Mine

The Dacey mica mine is operated by Suncrest Mines. Permission for
access should be obtained from Mr. G. A. Wheeler, 68 Kenora Street, Ottawa.
To reach the mine, drive north on the Cantley Road to a point 8.9 miles above
the Limbour Bridge. Turn left to John Holmes’ farm and continue past the
farm to the mine.

This is a very old mine — originally worked about 1890 for apatite, later
(1900-1904) for mica, then 1958-1959) for apatite and calcite as stucco material,
and finally (1960) again for mica. The Dacey and Blackburn Brothers mines
are the only operating mines in the Cantley — Wilson’s Corners district.

The principal workings are exposed over a length of 450 feet on the side
of a hill. Apatite and phlogopite occur in a large body of coarse calcite
surrounded by pyroxene- -rich rocks. The uppermost or western cut exposes
large cross-sections of green apatite crystals in pink calcite. About 100 feet
to the east is another cut containing apatite and calcite. Considerable ‘sugar
apatite’ may be seen there. Pink calcite is veined by white calcite. The
borders of the veinlets have been stained chocolate-brown by iron-rich solu-
tions that permeated from the openings. .

Beyond this is the main pit, about 60 feet long and 20 feet wide. The
pit is water-filled and, in part, covered with mined debris. It is said to have
been 50 feet deep. Coarse-grained mica is exposed on the lower or footwall
side of the vein. The mica lead averaged 4 feet in width. Mica crystals do
not appear to have much orientation but are positioned at random. Some
fine-quality splitting mica was recovered here. Still farther east and near the
lowermost part of the exposed area is another deep pit, recently excavated but
now flooded.

On the dumps, good-quality mica may be found in a friable banded rock
composed of calcite, sugar apatite and phlogopite. Somewhat rarer are six-
sided crystals of green apatite, light green crystals of pyroxene, dark green
crystals of amphibole and white translucent scapolite. Jet-black tourmaline
appears in several places on the dump.

The mica occurrences are ‘pocket and fissure’ deposits. They are lined
with intergrowing mica crystals and filled mainly with calcite containing
isolated crystals of mica and apatite. Calcite-rich mica and apatite deposits
are rather common in the Gatineau district but much rarer near the Lievre
River. Attempting to determine the origin of the calcite poses an interesting
quandary: it could have been derived from Precambrian limestone mobilized
through heat and ' pressure, or it could have been truly i igneous or carbonatite.
An old impasse to the igneous theory — the difficulty in melting calcite without
its decomposition — has now been removed. Laboratory experiments have
shown that water-rich carbonate rocks may still be liquid at 700°C and 1000
atmospheres, not improbable conditions for molten rocks within the earth’s
crust.

1962 HocartH: GEoLtocy oF GATINEAU-LIEVRE DiIstTRICT 33

Figure 20. Stalactites (Lafléche Caverns).

LAFLECHE CAVERNS

Lafléche Caverns are situated in a narrow band of Precambrian limestone.
The main passageway comprises a series of connected openings along a length
of 500 feet; the largest room is about 100 feet long, 30 feet wide, and in one
place 20 feet high. Another room is 90 feet high and displays notable stalac-
tites and stalagmites (Figure 20). A third room projects 30 feet upwards as a
series of chimneys, and at its ceiling, tree roots have penetrated from the
surface. Water has filled the lowest parts of the cave; an underwater chamber,
25 feet long, is known to connect with a lake to the east. The cavern remains
at a constant temperature of 45°F throughout the year.

The passageways were thought to have been formed in Pleistocene time
or earlier. When it was discovered, much of the cavern was filled with
stratified sand and gravel containing fossils typical of the Champlain Sea.
Deposition of this material must have occurred when the circulation of under-
ground water was much greater than it is today, possibly at the close of the
Pleistocene epoch.

Lafléche Caverns were discovered by a hunter in 1865 and were described
in detail by Dr. Grant of the Ottawa Natural History Society in 1869. The
The caverns were opened to the public in 1923. The present owner has
preserved the natural entrances and has opened a new exit with a tunnel 176
feet long. Guided tours are conducted during the summer.

St. PIERRE DE WAKEFIELD FELDSPAR QUARRY

Take the Cantley Road to a point just beyond a culvert 15.1 miles north
of the Limbour Bridge. A 4-mile hike along a road which leads off the high-
way to the left takes one to the quarry.

34 Tue CaNnabDIAN FieLD-NaATURALIST Vol. 16

9 . 35
| ¢ ) at D ST

=

Ta Ng &

36 Tue CanapiANn FreLtp-NaATUuRALIST ; Vol. 76

Figure 21. Pegmatite showing a white quartz core surrounded by a microcline zone which
has, in part, been mined out (St-Pierre de Wakefield).

This quarry was worked by Canada Flint and Spar for feldspar about 10
years ago. It cuts the top of a hill and is 275 feet long, 50 to 75 feet wide and
about 50 feet deep. These dimensions are not large for a quarry of this type.
The pit is dwarfed by the Back and Derry mines north of Buckingham.

The quarry is in granite pegmatite — a very coarse grained rock composed
almost exclusively of quartz and feldspar. Fortunately for the mine operators
the minerals have been arranged in definite zones (Figure 21). Near the
centre or core are several concentrations of white quartz that have been left
as pillars or horses while the more valuable rock has been excavated around
them. The bulk of the feldspar is pink microcline but there are local areas
rich in white plagioclase, especially near the walls. Also of importance in
mining is the way the rock breaks. ‘There is a series of natural vertical
fractures or joints running at right angles to the elongation of the pit. This
is especially apparent in the massive quartz.

The pegmatite is a dyke that appears to be inclined towards or dips
steeply to the northwest. It cuts a dark rock — amphibolite — composed of
hornblende, quartz and feldspar.

It might be noted that dark minerals in the pegmatite are rare. Near the
entrance to the quarry some rectangular cross-sections of black mica may be
seen in haphazard arrangement. On the walls are concentrations of radio-
active minerals, especially allanite and uranothorite. Someone has circled

1962 HocartH: GEoLtocy oF GATINEAU-LIEVRE DiIstRICT 37

these concentrations with white paint making them easy to locate. Observe
the fractures radiating from various radioactive minerals like spokes in a
wheel — a common feature associated with these minerals. Also observe how
quartz and feldspar have been darkened in their immediate vicinity.

Unfortunately the quarry has been partly flooded, making access to some
of the walls difficult. “he provenance of minnows in this pool without inlet
or outlet is a mystery.

Pegmatites were once molten rocks that intruded their surroundings but
never reached the surface. Their coarse grain is usually attributed to a high
content of volatile constituents such as water and phosphoric acid. The
volatiles were later given off when the pegmatite cooled, although some have
been preserved in hydrous minerals such as micas and rarely in phosphates
such as apatite. 7

FIELD TRIP 6: RIVERSIDE DRIVE —LAC PHILIPPE

Road Log
Distance
(miles)
0 Baillot and Laurier streets, Hull:
proceed north on Route 11;
14.8 turn right onto Riverside Drive;
17.2. Road on left to Cross BrucITE Quarry.
18.7. Road on left to Maxwety Brucire Quarry.
20.8 Flashing orange light in Wakefield, turn left onto Route 11,
21.5 turn right onto Masham Road;
26.5 turn left onto Gatineau Parkway at Masham;
31.4 Parking lot at south end of Lac Philippe, trail to Lusk Cave.

Cross BRUCITE QUARRY

This deposit is on the property of Mr. Stephen Cross. It is west of
Riverside Drive and approximately half a mile south of Farm Point. The
quarry is being worked by Aluminum Company of Canada, from whom per-
mission must be obtained before visiting. Mining only began in the fall of
1959 and the quarry face changes from day today. ‘The following description
is therefore strictly applicable only to the time of the writer’s visit (October
1960). ;

The brucite quarry is presently being worked from two benches, each
about 20 feet high. The most striking difference between the Cross and
Maxwell deposits is the coarseness of the brucite at the Cross quarry. Here
brucite nodules average 2 millimeters in diameter (approximately twice the
size of those from the Maxwell deposit) and may approach 5 millimeters. In
addition the upper bench at the Cross quarry exposes dark pyroxene and
forsterite rocks, which at the Maxwell deposit, are high on the quarry face and
inaccessible.

In the lower bench a fine exposure of coarse pink syenite may be examined.
This rock is composed of black hornblende and red microcline. Its joint faces

38 THE CANADIAN FIeELD-NATURALIST Vol. 76

are coated with epidote. At the contact with limestone is a narrow envelope
of pyroxene, scapolite, garnet and pink calcite. Here and there may be seen
tiny grains of pale blue-green chlorite in the adjacent marble.

The upper bench discloses a variety of rocks. Dark forsterite crystals
(almost entirely altered to serpentine) in grey calcite form the main rock type.
In one place this rock held black spinel crystals 4 inch across, surrounded by
fibrous pyroaurite. In another place, hard pink kernels of hydrotalcite were
observed in the serpentine ‘pseudomorphs’. Serpentine-limestone and pyrox-
enite are also exposed. A lens of granular diopside, 10 feet across, ‘has partly
weathered to a grey sand. The syenite also outcrops on this bench and, in
one place, contains molybdenite flakes.

MaxweE tu BruciTE QuaArRRY

Maxwell brucite quarry is off Riverside Drive about 2 miles south of
Wakefield. Permission for access must be obtained from the operator, Alumi-
num Company of Canada. ‘The material sought is brucite which occurs in
marble as nodules, each about a millimeter across. On a fresh surface brucite
is approximately the same white colour as the surrounding calcite. Fortunately
the brucite weathers into pits that are commonly partly filled with chalky
magnesium carbonates and therefore give a clue to the amount of brucite
below. Rarer, and of no economic importance, is colourless ‘foliated brucite’
which occurs as plates on joint surfaces. Rarer still are coarse fibres of
brucite which cross veinlets.

The quarry exposes a number of other rock types which, when present in
sufficient quantity, form boundaries of the orebody. On the southeast wall
may be seen large infolded masses or roof pendants of an overlying dark-
coloured layer (Figure 22). These rocks were once comparatively brittle,
and instead of bending and flowing with the crystalline limestone as it was
deformed, they broke and separated into isolated parts. In the pyroxene-rich
rocks or pyroxenites are cores of pink calcite. The calcite contains amber
mica (phlogopite) and green apatite which was once mined from shallow pits
above this section of the quarry. The arch-like folds are anticlines and the
troughs are synclines. On the west side of this face is an upfolded remnant of
grey syenite—the rock which underlies the deposit. This is part of the
Wakefield syenite, the same syenite mass that outcrops in the northern and
central part of the Gatineau Park. A yellowish green rock is serpentine-rich
limestone. Associated with the serpentine is a granular pyroxene (diopside)
that is quite different in appearance from the long dark crystals of pyroxene
in the infolded pyroxenite masses. The granular pyroxene is green, sky-blue
or mauve.

The ramp leading into the quarry on its west side passes several interesting
features. Near the top are grooved fault surfaces, or slickensides, smoothed
when rocks slipped along fractures. Lower down isa grey syenite surrounded
by an envelope of hard pyroxene and stringers of calcite. Then there are
veins of pink calcite holding green apatite crystals. Somewhat lower are
serpentine masses, some enclosing diopside, pyrrhotite and pyrite. Near the

1962 HocartH: GroLocy oF GATINEAU-LIEVRE District 39

FQ EK

Vv
KKK

OO
"he PLL

arate

GEOLOGY
Syenite
BSesd Pyroxenite

[=] Crystalline limestone 100 feet
y lice aes

(pattern shows trend)

Figure 22. Geological section along the south face of the Maxwell quarry, showing roof
pendants of pyroxenite in crystalline limestone.

bottom of the ramp are black crystals of forsterite, nearly completely replaced
by serpentine, in grey and mauve calcite.

The quarry is remarkable for the multitude of minerals which may be
collected. Besides those already mentioned we may list the following:
hydromagnesite (pulverulent white), pyroaurite (white pulverulent and
fibres), hydrotalcite (nodules in serpentine), aragonite (stalactitic), graphite
(occasional coarse flakes), chrysotile asbestos, talc, specularite and rare
sphalerite, galena, celestite, rutile and chondrodite. Spinel, periclase and
vesuvianite, while reported, have not been seen by the writer.

According to Goudge (1939) the brucite (magnesium hydroxide) was
developed from Precambrian dolomite (calctum and magnesium carbonate) by
the heat derived from the intruding molten syenite. The brucite limestone
contains essentially brucite and calcite (calcium carbonate). Its composition
differs little from an average Precambrian dolomite; only water need have been

added.

Lusk Cave

Lusk Cave may be reached by taking the road to the lower (southeastern)
end of Lac Philippe via Masham. A marked and well-worn trail leads uphill
half a mile to the cave. The cave does not contain any well-defined chambers
but is rather a tortuous tunnel with alternate passages and blind alleys. It
forms an underground route for the stream that drains Lusk Lake. It is
divided into two by a caved-in part or sink.

The upper half of the cave begins with a bridge 60 feet wide. The
passageway from there is skylit by a number of natural wells which extend

40 Tue CanapiAn Fre_p-NatTurRALIst Vol. 76

from the surface 20 or 25 feet to the base of the cavern. The remaining part
is subterranean. ‘This section is about 200 feet long (measured in a horizontal
straight line). The lower half of the cave includes steep plunges and water-
falls. It crosses an area 150 feet long. Unfortunately, the exit is underwater.

Lusk Cave crosses an exceptionally coarse band of pink and grey crystal-
line limestone. The direction of channelling was controlled by the layering
of the limestone and a joint system almost at right angles to it. “The cave
zig-zags along these preferred directions. The limestone contains inclusions
of pegmatite, biotite gneiss and pyroxenite. Rapids and waterfalls occur where
the stream crosses narrow ridges of hard pegmatite. At the surface, on the
scarp leading down to the cave exit, may be seen whitish syenite (mottled
pink when freshly broken) passing downward into greenish black pyroxenite
and finally grey crystalline limestone. For further details see Kirwan (1961).

FIELD TRIP 7: MASSON — ROUTE 35
Road Log

Distance
(miles)
0 Baillot and Laurier Streets, Hull: _
proceed east on Route 8,
18.1 Masson: Unconformity and potholes.
18.4 turn left onto the Buckingham Highway (Route 35);
29.2 Road to Capreux QuARTZITE Quarry on left.
29.8 Road to PepNAup FEeLpspar Mine on right.

Masson: UNCONFORMITY AND POTHOLES

This locality is on the west side of the Lievre River between Route 8 and
the CPR tracks. It is best examined in late summer or early fall when the bed
of the river is dry. Precambrian and Ordovician (Nepean) formations are
well exposed, having been swept clean by turbulent water.

The principal rocks are of Precambrian age. Crystalline limestone is
very common but pegmatite, gneiss, schist and quartzite may also be found.
The beds dip steeply, generally at an angle greater than 45 degrees to the
horizontal. Locally the plastic limestone flowed under pressure and engulfed
fragments of more brittle rocks.

The Precambrian is blanketed by the flat-lying Nepean Sandstone. Most
of this sandstone has since eroded away. A conglomerate of varying thick-
ness occurs at its base. “The pebbles are generally smaller and occur in greater
profusion than inclusions in the crystalline limestone. They are almost ex-
clusively quartzite; only within an inch or two of the Precambrian are
fragments and pebbles of crystalline limestone and gneiss to be found. At
the base of certain pebble beds, larger fragments have lodged in depressions.

It is obvious that considerable time elapsed between the deposition of
Precambrian limestone and Nepean Sandstone. At least one period of de-
formation and metamorphism separated the two. ‘The limestone, which

1962 HocartH: GroLocy oF GATINEAU-LIEVRE DIsTRICT 41

Figure 23. Potholes in crystalline limestone (Masson).

probably once resembled that quarried in Ottawa, has been tilted and subjected
to metamorphism. ‘The calcite grains became very coarse and new minerals
such as pyroxene and mica were formed. The overlying sandstone is hori-
zontal and has not been transformed into quartzite. Furthermore, sandstone
is found at different levels, suggesting deposition on an ancient eroded surface.
The well-rounded quartzite pebbles at its base have been derived from a
formation that is not now evident. We have here a good example of an
unconformity —a term used to describe the relationship of formations
separated by a great period of time.

Fine examples of well-like potholes (Figure 23) may be seen in Ordovi-
cian and Precambrian formations. ‘These are generally about a foot in dia-
meter. They have been drilled by pebbles circulated in the eddies. Pebbles
still remain at the base of most potholes.

An interesting locality (Figure 24) is just north of Route 8. A 15-foot
cliff of sandstone marks the west bank of the Liévre. Below is a horizontal
shelf of conglomerate which extends 50 feet into the river bed but is less than
a foot thick in most places. It is penetrated by potholes which expose pink
crystalline limestone at their base. Farther north, two crevices in crystalline
limestone have been filled with conglomerate and have the appearance of dykes.

Small exposures of unconformities can be seen at the west side of Wabassi
or Beauchamp Lake (Nepean Sandstone — Precambrian granite) and along an

42 Tue CANADIAN FieLpD-NATURALIST Vol. 76

10 feet

pi GEOLOGY
Ordovician

ERA)
Sandstone Conglomerate

U nconformity

Precambrian

ia Crystalline limestone

Figure 24. Geological cross-section of an unconformity (Masson).

Gl OLOGY

[eF)odiabase
ES eeeman
gsmatite

Figure 25. Geological plan of the Cadieux quartzite quarry.

1962 Hocartu: GroLtocy oF GaATINEAU-LIEVRE DiIstRICT 43

~~
N ‘

5 1G feet

a a Sea |

Pegmatite
| Biotite gneiss Amphibolite

Figure 26. Geological cross-section of part of the Cadieux quartzite quarry.

abandoned railway west of Ste. Rose de Lima (Nepean Sandstone — Precam-
brian quartzite).

CADIEUX QUARTZITE QUARRY

Turn left off the Buckingham Highway 10.8 miles north of Masson. A
gravel road leads to the quarry. This quarry is owned by Mr. Omer Cadieux
of Buckingham and was worked in 1955 to supply silica to the Electric
Reduction Company.

The quarry is remarkable for its good exposures of dykes (Figure 25).
These dykes are narrow but most can be picked up on both sides of the quarry.
At the entrance is a dark diabase dyke whose north contact is exposed. Note
how the grain size becomes very fine near the contact. This can be ascribed
to rapid chilling of the molten rock by quartzite. Two narrower diabase
dykes are easily located by virtue of their black colour.

Coarse pink pegmatite dykes are more common. ‘The largest one (7 feet
wide) appears near the quarry-widening. In its forceful intrusion it has
dragged the metamorphic rocks on its footwall through 90 degrees (Figure
26). The hanging wall has not been drag-folded but is noticeably sheared
parallel with the dyke contact.

These pegmatite dykes are composed mainly of quartz and microcline, but
instead of the common dark silicate minerals (such as hornblende or biotite) a
little magnetite is present; biotite is comparatively rare. It will be noticed that
the dykes are arranged in two parallel series, the diabase dykes dipping north
at 70 degrees. the pegmatites south at about 50 degrees.

44 THe CAnabIAN Firtp-NaTurRAList Vol. 76

TENNER
ORK

xx
q

> d
5
hs SOF RK

Figure 27. Geological cross-section of the pegmatite at the Pednaud mine.

Faults are also apparent. On the east side of the quarry is a dark rock —
amphibolite — composed of quartz, hornblende and mica. On its lower side,
the stratum is abruptly cut off by a fault which has deformed the plastic
amphibolite along a shear zone 6 inches wide. Quartzite nearby has fractured
irregularly but many of these fractures have been healed. ‘The fracture zone
is also apparent on the west side of the quarry.

PrepNAuD FELpsPpAaR MINE

The Pednaud feldspar mine is off the Buckingham Highway, 11.4 miles
north of Masson. Turn right at the sign “Chalet des Monts Ski Tow” and
continue 1 mile to the mine. The property is presently owned and operated
by Mr. F. Charette of Glen Almond.

The feldspar dyke has been mined in two sections, each from pits about
250 feet long. The lower quarry is now (October 1960) being worked for
microcline, which occurs in a narrow zone in the centre of the dyke.

The abundance of coarse white mica (muscovite) is remarkable and in
this respect the occurrence is similar to the famous Villeneuve mine, 12 miles
to the northeast. Biotite is relatively uncommon.

Here is a good example of a zoned pegmatite (Figure 27). Near the
walls is a medium-grained quartz-plagioclase-muscovite zone where individual
mica books up to 15 inches across have been found. ‘This is followed by a
plagioclase-microcline-quartz zone which is not everywhere present. In the
centre is a very coarse zone (or zones) of quartz and microcline. Zoning of

1962 HocartH: GEoLtocy oF GATINEAU-LIEVRE DIstTRICT 45

Ficure 28. Muscovite as seen under the microscope. The black inclusions are magnetite
crystals (Pednaud mine).

pegmatites has been the subject of much investigation. The zones are believed
to have been deposited successively inward from the molten rock.

Magnetite impurities in muscovite are arranged in an interesting manner.
A thin slice of mica held to the light reveals a triangular pattern of fawn
needles and interspersed dark brown dots. Under the microscope (Figure 28)
the dots appear to be made up of tiny crystals with edges parallel to the same
triangle. The brown stains preclude the use of this mica in electronics.

Abundant black tourmaline, muscovite and patches of clay-like chasmosite
occur with the microcline. Comparatively uncommon minerals include pyrite,
garnet, hornblende, epidote, chlorite and hematite. Very rare are calcite,
chabazite, monazite, uraninite, uranothorite, apatite and barite.

A number of other mines occur near Glen Almond (Figure 29). The
Aetna and Daisy phosphate mines are largely grown over. A look at another
old phosphate mine, the Emerald, is somewhat more rewarding, but the deep
pits are walled with rotten rock and therefore very dangerous. The Der
feldspar mine is now flooded but the Black mine is operated by Canada Flint
and Spar. ‘This last occurrence contains a little euxenite — a heavy coal-black
radioactive mineral — on its dumps. Neither the Derry nor the Back mine
contains appreciable muscovite.

SOME ADDITIONAL FIELD TRIPS

Other interesting sites include the Foley barite mine, the Haycock iron
mine and the Buckingham galena mine. These places are too small to accom-
modate a large number of visitors and parking facilities are limited, but they
can be easily examined by a small group.

46 Tue Canapian Fre_p-NaATURALIST Vol. 76

LEGEND
@ Pit or quarry
Ap Apatite
Fe/ Feldspar
Mi Mica
Qrz Quartzite
mes Paved road
—— Gravel road

Figure 29. Map showing mines and quarries in the Glen Almond area.

Haycock Hematite MINE

The Haycock iron mine may be reached in the following manner: ‘Take
Route 8 to Pointe-Gatineau and turn left just after the bridge. Continue for
2.25 miles and turn right. At the next intersection (1.1 miles) take the left-
hand fork and proceed 2.1 miles north to a concession road. Turn right,
proceed 0.65 mile and again turn left. After 2.7 miles the trail to the mine
leads left just before a small creek. (The trail is marked by a pile of logs).
The mine dumps can be seen to the north of this trail, 3 mile from its
entrance.

The workings here are the largest of several along the Hull-Templeton
line, extending from range 10 of Hull township to Rainville Creek, a distance
of 6 miles. The iron mineral is a bright crystalline hematite or specularite
that occurs in pink feldspar gneiss. Specularite is seen as disconnected pods
with a maximum width of about 2 feet. Associated with the hematite is a
little ilmenite and magnetite. A peculiarity of the hematite is its high content
of titanium (up to 15 per cent TiO,). With an increase in titania the streak
darkens almost to black.

Plums of specularite are common where the gneiss has been fractured and
recemented. Specularite is commonly enclosed in quartz between fragments
rich in dark green pyroxene. Grey barite and pink calcite are frequently seen
with the specularite, especially in the mine dump at the east of the Haycock.
mine.

1962 HocartH: Grotocy or GaATINEAU-LIEvRE DistRIcT 47

Haycock mine

LEGEND
Mineral occurrence
Fe Hematite, Mi Mica, G Gravel 6
— Gravel road Scale of yards
---Private road vee Igoe
Trail
" House

Figure 30. Map showing the Haycock locality and nearby mineral occurrences.

Geologically the occurrence is interesting because pods of titanium-rich
hematite are liberally dispersed along layers of a quartz-feldspar gneiss. “The
coarsest specularite is found in boulders north of a field about 500 feet west of
the Haycock mine. Magnetite octahedra, 4 inch across, are rarely found in
calcite. Brilliant prisms of green pyroxene up to 3 inch in diameter occur
in calcite and barite close to hematite. A granular pink quartz is attractive.

Pits at the Haycock site extend over a length of 300 feet. The two
largest ones are north of the dump at the east. Each is about 50 feet long and
20 feet wide but unfortunately are filled with water. A small adit, apparently
driven as a drainage tunnel, was abandoned after 15 feet. Near the west part
of the Haycock mine is a walled circular structure 35 feet across. This was
probably a charcoal kiln used for making lime. Nothing remains of the rail-
way constructed to transport ore to Pointe-Gatineau.

The Burke mica mine is about a mile to the west (Figure 30). It is
comparatively hard to reach, the best approach being from the next lot-line
road to the west. The mine has long been abandoned. As at the Dacey mine,
phlogopite and apatite occur in pink calcite. Notable is dark pyroxene in
coarse cleavable masses of basal parting. Parting surfaces 1 foot across have
been found on the dump.

Forey Barire MINE

The Foley mine is east of the Cantley Road. Turn right off this road at a
point 2.6 miles above the Limbour Bridge and proceed 0.8 mile on a good gravel
road to the mine. The road is bridged across the open pit at the property of

48 . THE CaNnapiaAn Frevp-NatTuRAList Vol. 76

G. Clermont. On each side of the road the pit is enclosed in a cluster of
cedars.

The Foley barite occurrence was worked many years ago by the Montreal
Paint Company, and workings are now largely grown over. The trench can
be traced for 200 feet on the north side of the road where it terminates in a
shaft, and on the south side of the road for 150 feet. At a rather inaccessible
locality near the southern end, the vein measured 3.6 feet wide. Here the
vein is not solid white barite but includes ‘horses’ of pink limestone and is
interbanded with fluorite and occasionally calcite and dolomite. It cuts across
pink biotitic limestone almost at right angles to the foliation. The vein dips
nearly vertically. In places it cuts pegmatite. Small grains of galena, sphale-
rite, pyrite and chalcopyrite are in many places embedded in barite at the
north side of the road.

Barite veins containing varying amounts of galena are common in the
Gatineau region. They are known to be late in the geological sequence —
certainly later than diabase which they sometimes transect. They perhaps do
not belong in the Precambrian at all. A galena vein cuts much younger
(Palaeozoic) rocks near Carleton Place, and barite-fluorite veins transect
Palaeozoic limestone near Madoc. Other barite veins may be seen north of
the intersection of the Meach Lake and Kingsmere roads (pink barite) and at
the intersection of the Notch and Mountain roads (white barite).

BuckINGHAM GALENA OCCURRENCE

The Buckingham galena property is on the farm of Mr. Dan Gorman.
It can be reached in this manner: “Take Route 8 from Hull to Masson, turn
left at the Esso service station just before the Li¢vre bridge and continue north
for 2.5 miles. Turn left on the concession road at Phillion’s store; after 3.0
miles turn right at a road leading north and proceed 3 mile to the farm of Mr.
Gorman (left-hand side of the road). ‘The barite-galena veins are in a pasture
just north of the farm buildings. A shaft on the main vein is marked by a
clump of cedars.

Many barite occurrences may be seen in this field. The two principal
veins are about 80 feet apart and have been exposed by trenches. ‘These veins
cut crystalline limestone and dip almost vertically. Each can be followed
north-westerly for about 340 feet. Here they enter pegmatite and are ob-
scured by swamp.

The veins are composed of coarse white calcite and barite, with a maximum
width of 6 inches. Most carry appreciable galena in places as well as a little
sphalerite, pyrite and pyrrhotite. The galena is occasionally covered with
a white coating of lead carbonate (cerussite). At one locality calcite has
been dissolved away, exposing crystals of barite carrying a few white octahedra
of fluorite.

The pits were excavated many years ago and the dumps are now largely
grown over. However, the vein is still exposed in a number of places.
Handsome specimens of barite enclosing brilliant galena cleavage surfaces up
to 4 inch across, can still be obtained.

1962 HocartH: GEoLocy oF GATINEAU-LiEvRE DIstRICT 49
PART THREE
MINERALS AND MINERAL VARIETIES FOUND
IN THE REGION

Actinolite Chrysotile Labradorite Sahlite
Adularia Columbite Limonite Samarskite
Aegirine Cordierite Magnetite Scapolite
Albite Cyrtolite Malachite Serpentine
Allanite Datolite Microcline Sillimanite
Almandine Diopside Molybdenite Specularite
Amazonite : : 5
Ries tice Dolomite Molybdite Sphalerite
A patite Epidote Monazite Sphene
Apophyllite Euxenite Montmorillonite Spinel
Arfvedsonite Fauyjasite Muscovite Talc
Augite Ferroprehnite Natrolite ‘Thorite
Barite Fluorite Oligoclase Tourmaline
Betafite - Forsterite Olivine Tremolite
Biotite Galena Periclase Uraninite
Brucite Graphite Phlogopite Uranothorite
Calcite Gypsum Prehnite Uvarovite
Celestite Hematite Pumpellyite Vermiculite
Cerussite Hornblende Pyrite Vesuvianite
Chabazite Hy dromagnesite Pyroaurite Wilsonite
Chalcopyrite Hydrotalcite Pyrrhotite Wollastonite
Chamosite Ilmenite Quartz Zinnwaldite
Chlorite Jasper Rutile Zircon

Except for columbite, faujasite, samarskite, periclase and uvarovite, these
minerals have all been observed by the writer.

A KEY TO THE COMMON MINERALS OF THE
GATINEAU-LIEVRE DISTRICT

The following identification table or key is based on colour, cleavage and
crystal form. ‘The primary distinction is that of colour because this property,
so easily recognized, is diagnostic. However, it should be emphasized that
this key relates only to minerals found within the particular area covered by
the report and the colours given may not be characteristic for the same
minerals in other areas.

Cleavage is the tendency of a solid to split along specific planes determined
by the arrangement of its atoms. Some minerals have one cleavage, others
two, and still others up to six. When four or more cleavage planes occur in a
crystal they may not all be identifiable in a single specimen. For example, in
broken crystals of black andradite the six cleavage or ‘parting’ planes can rarely
be found but usually four or five planes can be seen. When two or more
cleavage directions are present the angles at which they intersect may be of
great assistance in identification.

50 Tue CanapiaAn FieLtp-NaATuRALIST Vol. 76
Certain minerals appear more than once inthe key. For example, scapolite
may occur as a green, purple or white mineral but the properties of each
colour variety are distinctive. Green scapolite is soft and rarely found as
crystals; purple scapolite is soft and occurs as cleavable masses; but white
scapolite is a little harder and commonly occurs as crystals.
Only about one third of the local minerals are included. However, these

represent the most abundant and typical minerals.

Key

A. Mineral is brassy.

B.

No cleavage, crystals equidimensional,
powder black, non-magnetic .
Mineral is bronzy.
No cleavage, massive,
powder black, attracted to a hand-magnet .
Mineral is silvery.
(1) No distinct cleavage;
powder brownish red to brownish black;
about as hard as a knife-blade
(2) Perfect cleavage in platelets,
occurs as foliae or flakes;
(i) powder grey, olive-green when rubbed into paper,
softer than finger-nail, foliae inflexible é
(ii) powder lead-grey,
softer than finger-nail, foliae inflexible
(ili) powder white,
harder than finger-nail, foliae flexible;
occurs with calcite, sahlite, apatite .
occurs with quartz and feldspar .
(iv) powder brown (generally reddish brown) ;
harder than finger-nail
Mineral is grey to black.
(1) Good cleavage in six directions, crystals equidimensional;
light and non-magnetic, harder than a knife-blade;
occurs with quartz and feldspar in pegmatite .
(2) Good cleavage in four directions, crystals equidimensional;

about as hard as a knife-blade, heavy and strongly magnetic .

(3) Iwo good cleavages intersecting at 60 and 120°;
occasionally occurs as elongated crystals,
about as hard as a knife-blade, jet-black . 5
(4) Good cleavage in one direction, poor cleavage in two enon
stubby grey crystals;
about as hard as a knife-blade

(5) Good cleavage in one direction, crystals as folie! occasionally massive;

softer than finger-nail, brittle

(6) Cleavage very poor to absent; crystals apular
dull grey, commonly sal olive-green patches;
harder than a knife-blade (when fresh);
occurs in crystalline limestone

(7) Cleavage absent, ‘elongated crystals Setiared: along length;
harder than a knife-blade, jet-black,
occurs with quartz and feldspar in pegmatite

(8) Cleavage absent; short crystals with some faces striated;
harder than a knife-blade, jet-black to brown,
occurs in crystalline limestone and pyroxenite .

Pyrite

PyRRHOTITE
HEMATITE
MOoLyBpENITE
GRAPHITE
PHLOGOPITE

MUscovitE

SPECULARITE
ANDRADITE
MaGneETITE

HorNBLENDE
SAHLITE

GRAPHITE

.FORSTERITE

Tron- TOURMALINE

MacnesiumM- [ouRMALINE

1962 HocartH: GEoLtocy oF GATINEAU-LIEVRE DistRICT 51

E. Mineral is green.

(1) Good cleavage in four directions; commonly occurs as cubes
can be scratched with a knife, transhicente: een. Mea oeetan ta. ye OCU GRELE

(2) Good cleavage in two directions intersecting at 60 and 120°;
long crystals, dark yellow-green;
abouteasahanrd<assknite-plades 9a cs oy se eee ee ON CTINOLIEE

(3) Good cleavage in two directions intersecting at 60 and 120°;
long crystals, dark blue-green;
dbouteas- hard: asa, knife-bladeis. {a 4 re a oy PAREVEDSONIDE

(4) Good cleavage in one direction, poor cleavage in two others,

stubby crystals, light greyish green,

slightly softer than a knife-blade . . Lene aot y Pen Ca. SAREE T DE.
(5) Good cleavage in two directions intersection at 90°;

crystals rare; light-coloured braided streaks;

about as hard asa knife-blade . . . . . =. (‘Amazontre’) Micro.Line

(6) Poor cleavage in four directions giving splintery appearance,

rarely in elongated crystals, pale green;

Sonercthan ay dknite- blader sam Se ease ei nie iter nn ae ot SOAP OVINE
(7) Cleavage absent or poor cleavage in one direction;

sugary-textured or as long six-sided crystals;

slightly softer than a knife-blade;

occurs with calcite, sahlite, scapolite Bee SMe ea eS eat ee IAO UNG AID
(8) No cleavage; long crystals striated parallel to ienache
Ganmot be-scratched: with-al knife 2) .) \. nee TRoN- TOURMALINE.

(9) No cleavage; massive,
can easily be scratched with a knife;

occurs in crystalline limestone and dolomite . . . . . . SERPENTINE
(10) Flexible asbestos fibres;
occurs in crystalline limestone and dolomite. . . (‘Aspestos’) SERPENTINE

F. Mineral is brown.

(1) Two good cleavages intersecting at 55 and 125°;
wedge-shaped crystals, dark brown;
about as hard as a knife-blade BEE a Arched Maes lacuna Nia, Sag eile bo eeaoee © DETESNTTS

(2) Good cleavage in one direction; occurs as mica foliae,
softer than a knife-blade;
occurs with, calcite; ‘sailite: and japatite sf.) 1s.) ade PHY OGOPITE

(3) Cleavage absent or poor cleavage in one direction,
long six-sided crystals;
softer than a knife-blade;
deeurs wath salltesand phlogopite oy 8. ia). ete Apart

(4) Cleavage absent; short crystals with some faces striated;

harder than a knife-blade;

occurs in crystalline limestone . . . . . . Macnestum-TouRMALINE
(5) Cleavage absent; crystal form absent;

shell-like fracture, reddish brown;

handenethaneamiknite=blade ve coc ero ce tle keene ae PASPER
pulverulent-sbrick-rediatcrs. 60.0 oi Se Apo 8s . . Hematite
pulverulent, wust-browiwe 2 2 el | Clagee®) GOoETHITE

G. Mineral is pink or orange.
(1) Good cleavage in three directions intersecting at 75°;
crystals absent, effervesces in vinegar;
sOuren=thausamkiniheblademsis jist go ilo. te Ny tate ae he AE aor:

52

Tue Canapian Firr_tp-NaTuRALIST Vol. 76

(2) Good cleavage in three directions, two intersecting at 90°, the other
at 80° to these;
occurs as tabular crystals,
heavy, pale pink;
softer than a knife-blade . . . . Hue ba) fi ie CS RN Taal Ey ACR TOE
(3) Good cleavage in two directions intersecting at - 90°;
crystals rare, light-coloured braided streaks;
about as hard as a knife-blade. . . . . . MiIcroLine
(4) Cleavage absent or poor; rounded equidimensional crystals;
deep red or purple;
harder than a knife-blade;
OCCUTS), IM’ PUEISS OF) SEhISt Pe. wit ae far eae te wh ia Oe eNO eT)
(5) Cleavage absent; massive,
resembles tinted glass,
pale rose;
harder than a knife-blade >. 6.0.4 8) Roses @Owariz
Mineral is purple.
(1) Good cleavage in four directions; commonly occurs as cubes;
umelneare deep purple;
Softer athaig as lente plage serra SO cag \ie oR hers ey re ae RI ORCS
(2) Poor cleavage in four directions giving splintery appearance;
cleavable masses; light mauve,
softer than a lecesnied
occurs with apatite, phlogopite and sahlite . . . (‘WisoniTe’) SCAPOLITE
Mineral is blue. i
(1) Cleavage absent or poor in one direction; long six-sided
crystals or massive;
aquamarine (crystals), greenish-blue (massive) ,
slightly softer than a knife-blade,
crystals found in marble, massive variety with sahlite . . . . APATITE
(2) No cleavage; massive;
impure, harder dpers a knife-blade;
full of inclusions and holes;
light blue, with apatite and sablite) © 2.9929.) ae
Mineral is white or colourless.
(1) Good cleavage in three directions intersecting at 75°,
six-sided crystals, pyramidal,
effervesces with vinegar;
softer than a knife-blade . . . OSA Sar AD OTE)
(2) Good cleavage in three directions, two intersecting at 90°,
the other at 80° to these;
occurs as tabular crystals;
softer than. a) knifetblades Neavy (09). 3s ae, ck ee ea
(3) Cleavage in two directions intersecting at 90°,
crystals rare;
occasionally striated on best cleavage;
may show play of colours;
about as hard asa knife-blade. . . . SO A ah Pe AGIOCHASE
(4) Good cleavage in one direction, poor in two woke
stubby white or very pale green crystals;
about as hard as a knife-blade . . . . . =. +. +. +. +. + #£=DIoPsIDE
(5) Poor cleavage in four directions, giving splintery appearance,
commonly occurs as elongated crystals with square cross-section;
weathering gives ‘woody’ appearance;
somewhat softer than a knife-blade . . . . . . +. +. + #£SCAPOLITE
(6) No cleavage; occasionally occurs as six-sided crystals,
harder’ than a‘ :knife“bladey 3°62. nu hia see a rae ie ain a reine reat

Ai Vat eee

Se

1962

Hocartu: GEoLocy or GATINEAU-LIEVRE District 53

GLOSSARY OF SELECTED TERMS

Apvir. A tunnel driven into the side of a
hill for exploring of mining a mineral
deposit.

AmpuHIBOLE. A group of dark-coloured,
rock-forming minerals including tremo-
lite, actinolite and hornblende, which
commonly occur as shiny, green, needle-
like crystals.

AMPHIBOLITE. A metamorphic rock com-
posed essentially of hornblende and plag-
ioclase.

Anticiine. A fold that is convex upward.

Apuite. A sugary-textured rock composed
of quartz and feldspar.

AsterisM. The ability of certain minerals
to concentrate light into star-like rays.

Brack River. A Middle Ordovician forma-

tion.

Breccia. A rock consisting of angular
fragments cemented by finer material.

Bryozoan. A colonial animal which builds
cylindrical, cup-like or branching struc-
tures.

CuampiaIn SEA. A sea that extended up
the Ottawa Valley after the final reces-
sion of the Pleistocene glaciers.

Cuittep Contact. A_ fine-grained part of
an igneous rock close to its contact with
another rock. Its fine-grained nature is
believed to have been caused by rapid
cooling.

Conctomerate. A rock consisting of
rounded, water-worn fragments cemented
by finer material.

CrossBEDDING. Lamination oblique to the
principal direction of bedding of a sedi-
mentary rock.

CrystaL. A solid body bounded by smooth
‘faces that are related to an ordered in-
ternal arrangements of atoms.

Diapase. A dark-coloured igneous rock
consisting of rounded pyroxene grains
intersected by tabular feldspar crystals.
In the Gatineau-Lievre region it occurs

as dykes.

Dr. The inclination of a statum measured
downward from the horizontal.

Dotomite. A rock corresponding in com-
position to the mineral dolomite

[CaMg(COQ,).].

Drirt. Unconsolodated material such as
sand, clay or gravel deposited by a glacier
or its meltwaters.

Drumuin. A teardrop-shaded hill of glacial
drift moulded by the action of ice so
that its long axis parallels the direction of
ice-movement.

Dyke. A tabular body of igneous rock that
cuts across the stratification or structure
of the enclosing rocks.

Esker. A sinous ridge of drift generally
believed to have been deposited by rivers
flowing beneath a glacier.

Fautr. A fracture along which movement
has taken place.

Footway. The lower wall of a fault, dyke
or vein.

Gnetss. A foliated and coarsely crystalline
metamorphic rock.

Grapep BeEppine. Stratification in which
each layer grades from coarse at the bot-
tom to fine at the top.

Grounp Moraine. Material carried within
and at the base of a glacier and deposited
as the ice receded.

Haneinc WALL. The upper wall of a
fault, dyke or vein.

IenEous. A rock solidified from the molten
state.

Jotnts. Fractures separating rocks into
blocks.

Kerrie. A depression in drift formed by
the melting of a buried block of ice.

Limestone. A sedimentary rock composed
essentially of calcite. Recrystallized and
metamorphic limestones are called crystal-
line limestones or marble.

Marste. A metamorphic rock composed
predominantly of calcite.

MeramoreHic Rock. A rock that has been
transformed by agencies of heat and
pressure. ©

54 Tur CANnapDIAN Firip-NaTuRALIST

Mrinerat. A_naturally-occurring inorganic
solid of reasonably constant chemical
composition and atomic structure.

Moraine. Accumulated debris deposited by
a glacier.

Ocranepron. An eight-sided crystal form
with each face an equilateral triangle and
common in pyrite, magnetite, galena and
fluorite.

Orpvovician. A period in the earth’s history
lasting from about 500 to 400 million years
ago.

Partinc. The quality of a crystal to split
along certain planes which are not
normally cleavage planes.

Pecmatite. A very coarse grained igneous
rock, generally of granitic composition.

PuoseHate. The mineral apaite (collo-
quial).
PieistoceNe. An _ epoch extending from

about 1,000,000 to 10,000 years ago when

an ice-cap covered most of North
America.
Porsote. A hole with circular cross-section

that was drilled in solid rock by stones
rotating in a river current.

PRECAMBRIAN. A period in the earth’s
history before the Cambrian and ending
about 500 million years ago.

PseupoMoreH. A mineral displaying the
crystal from of another mineral species
from which it was derived by alteration
or replacement.

Pyroxene. A group of rock-forming min-
erals including diopside, augite and sah-
lite, which occur as stubby black or green
crystals.

PyroxeniteE. A rock composed essentially
of pyroxene but commonly including
considerable amounts of amphibole, mica,
scapolite and other minerals. Pyroxenites
near Ottawa have been classed by some
authors as igneous rocks, by others as
metamorphic rocks.

Quarrzite. A compact metamorphic rock
composed essentially of quartz.

Rock. Material composed of one or more
minerals and occurring in large masses.

Vol. 76

Roor Penpanr. Older rocks preserved as
(folded) masses projecting downward
into an igneous rock.

Sanpstone. A sedimentary rock composed
essentially of grains of quartz.

Scuist. A well-foliated metamorphic rock
predominantly composed of micaceous
minerals.

SEDIMENTARY Rocxs. Rocks laid down as
sediments from water or air.

Siricatep Marsie. Marble containing sili-
cates such as pyroxene, amphibole or
garnet, formed by reactions during meta-
morphism.

Sn1. A tabular body of igneous rock inter-
layered with the stratification or structure
of the enclosing rocks.

Sink. A depression resulting from solution
of limestone.

Sravactitre. An icicle-like deposit of
mineral matter on the roof of a cave.

SraALAGMITE. An inverted ‘icicle’ of mineral
matter rising from the floor of a cave.

Srope. An underground
which ore has been taken.

opening from

STRATIFICATION. Layering in
rocks.

sedimentary

Srreak. Colour of the powder of a mineral
which is best seen by scratching the
mineral on a piece of unglazed white tile.

Srrike. The line of intersection of a plane
with a level surface.

Syenite. A rock composed of microcline,
albite, or both, and a dark mineral.

Synciine. A trough-like fold or downfold.

Tur. A glacial deposit consisting of clay
rich in boulders.

Trenton. A formation of Middle Ordovi-
cian age.

Triuosire. An extinct invertebrate whose
body can be divided into three parts or
lobes.

Unconrormiry. A time-break or surface
of erosion associated with this time-break.

Vue. A cavity in rock commonly lined
with well-formed crystals.

1962

HocartH: GEeoLtocy or GATINEAU-LIEVRE DistRIcT 55

SELECTED REFERENCES

Journal titles are abbreviated according to recommendations in the
Style Manual for Biological Journals.

Amprose, J. W. 1943. Brucitic limestones
and hastingsite syenite near Wakefield,
Quebec. Trans. Roy. Soc. Canada, 3rd
ser., sec. 4, 37: 9-22.

Beranp, Rene. 1954. Preliminary report
on the Wakefield area, Gatineau county,
Quebec. Quebec Dept. Mines, Prel. Rept.
No. 298.

Gin press). Wakefield region,
Gatineau county, Quebec. Quebec Dept.
Mines, Final Report.

CirkeL, Fritz. 1909. Report on the iron
ore deposits along the Ottawa (Quebec
side) and Gatineau Rivers. Canada, Mines
Br., Pub. 23.

Earptey-Witmor, V. L. 1925. Molybde-
num: metallurgy and uses and the occur-
rence, mining and concentration of its
ores. Canada, Mines Br., Pub. 592.

Exits, R. W. 1901. Report on the geology
and natural resources of the area included
in the map of the city of Ottawa and
vicinity. Geol. Surv., Canada, Ann. Rept.
(for 1899), 12, pt. G.

Gounce, M. F. 1939. A preliminary report
on brucite deposits in Ontario and Quebec
and their commercial possibilities. Canada,
Mines Br., Mem. Ser. No. 75.

Jounston, W. A. 1917. Pleistocene and
recent deposits in the vicinity of Ottawa,
with a description of the soils. Geol.
Surv., Canada, Mem. 101.

Kirwan, J. L. 1961. Caves in the Gatineau
district of Quebec, Can. Geog. J., 62:
100-105.

DE ScHmip, Hueu S. 1912. Mica: its oc-
currence, exploitation and uses, 2nd ed.,
Canada, Mines Br., Pub. 118.

1916. Feldspar in Canada. Canada
Mines Br., Pub. 401.

Spence, HucH S. 1920. Phosphate in
Canada. Canada, Mines Br., Pub. 396.

1920. Graphite. Canada, Mines
Bre Pub. odd:

STANSFIELD, J. 1913. Excursion A8. Miner-
al deposits of the Ottawa area. Intern.
Geol. Congr., 12th Sess. Guide Book No.
3: 81-115.

Vennor, Henry G. 1878. Progress report
of explorations and surveys made during
the years 1875 and 1876 in the counties of
Renfrew, Pontiac and Ottawa. Geol. Surv.,
Canada, Rept. Progr. for 1876-1877: 244-
320.

Wiuson, Auice E. 1956. A guide to the
geology of the Ottawa district. Can.
Field Nat. 70: 1-68.

Witson, M. E. 1914. Southeastern por-
tion of the Buckingham map-area, Quebec.
Geol. Surv., Canada, Sum. Rept. for 1913:
196-207.

1916. Southwestern portion of
the Buckingham map-area, Quebec. Geol.
Surv., Canada, Sum. Rept. for 1915: 156-
162.

sheet.

1920. The Buckingham
Geol. Surv., Canada, Pub. 1691.

WZ

OBSERVATIONS ON SOME MAMMALS IN CUMBERLAND
PENINSULA, BAFFIN ISLAND, IN 1953

ApamM WATSON

Grouse and Moorland Ecology Unit, Natural History Department,
University of Aberdeen, Aberdeen, Scotland

Tus PAPER records my observations on the mammals seen on Baffin Island in
1953. The occasion was on an expedition for the Arctic Institute of North
America. This expedition visited the mountainous Cumberland Peninsula on
the east coast of the island, at about 67°N. ‘There are brief accounts about the
weather, vegetation and topography of this area in the general report on the
expedition by Baird (1953). I have published notes on the lemmings Lemmus
and Dicrostonyx (Watson, 1956).

In May I sledged along the east coast and fjords around Padloping, and in
early June up the long Padle Fjord to Padle Valley. From June to August I
worked in Owl Valley, the northern part of Pangnirtung Pass, which cuts
right through the mountains and icecaps of the peninsula. ‘Iwo passes run
eastward from Owl Valley to the June and Naksakjua valleys, which lead to
Padle Valley. The southern part of the pass leads down to the fjord near the
village of Pangnirtung. The largest icecap, the Penny Icecap, lies to the west
of Pangnirtung Pass.

_ Iam grateful to P. D. Baird for asking me to join his expedition, to the
Arctic Institute’s Carnegie Program for their generous financial grant, and to
several members of the expedition for their notes on mammals.

Notes on SPECIES SEEN

Arctic Fox Alopex lagopus. Foxes were rare in all areas visited. I saw one in
Owl Valley on July 9, and heard calls from this place on several other days.
When I saw the fox, it barked loudly, but it seemed inquisitive and unwilling
to move away. F. H. Schwarzenbach heard one in Naksakjua Valley later in
July, not more than 5 km from where I saw the earlier one. W.H. Ward
twice saw tracks at about 1800 m on the Penny Icecap at passes where there
were also many lemming tracks. Local people at Padloping, Pangnirtung and
Frobisher Bay said they were scarce, and we saw none there. According to —
the Hudson’s Bay Co. manager there they had increased around Pangnirtung
by late 1954.

Worr Canis lupus. A fresh track at the top of Owl Valley on June 11 was
probably of this species.

ERMINE Mustela erminea. Rare in all areas visited. None was seen in Owl
Valley or in the valleys and coastal lowlands to the east. There was a very
inquisitive one, at the top of Pangnirtung Pass (400 m) in the first week of
August. It had completely molted, and had brown upper parts and bright
creamy yellow under parts. In late August H. R. Thompson saw one or two
in summer coat in the southern part of Pangnirtung Pass. They were also
reported rare at Frobisher Bay.

56

1962 Watson: MamMats IN CUMBERLAND PENINSULA 57

BarREN-GROUND CariBou Rangifer arcticus. Only one caribou was seen by
the expedition: a young male in Owl Valley on June 25. Schwarzenbach also
saw a few fresh tracks in Naksakjua Valley on July 25. Eskimos at Padloping
told me that a south-facing slope halfway up Padle Fjord was still a favorite
caribou place, where they had seen six in late May 1953, and where I saw
fresh tracks in early June. In Owl Valley we found many skulls, bones and
antlers, mostly very old and covered with lichens. Nearly all the antler points
were intact, but a few had been chewed. Well-beaten caribou paths were
common, especially on passes through the mountains, such as from Owl Valley
to June and Naksakjua valleys. Some of the ruined stone huts at the top of
Pangnirtung Pass contained great numbers of caribou bones; probably the
Eskimos had used these huts as meat caches and this spot had been a hunting
headquarters. This pass is one of the few practicable caribou routes through
the Penny Highlands. On the east coast, I saw only one skeleton, a very old
one on Durban Island southeast of Padloping. Soper (1928) recorded that
many winter in Cumberland Peninsula but move to the western lowlands in
summer.

Arctic Hare Lepus arcticus Seen in all areas visited, but uncommon. Only
one was seen on each of three counts over a two-square-mile area of Owl Valley,
and on a fourth count none at all. There were more on the outer coast: four
on a square mile of heathy island near Durban Island, ten on about 1% square
miles of Cape Searle, and four on one square mile of Padle Fjord. Such counts
were easily done in May and early June when the hares were still white, when
most vegetation was not high enough to hide them, and when most of the
snow had melted.

I collected notes on the color change of 43 hares and others on the expedi-
tion gave me notes about a further 13 (see Appendix). To standardize these
observations, I used a formula which I had already found suitable for a similar
study in Scotland. ‘There were five different categories and category symbols:
LL (all white), L (mostly white), LD (half white, half dark), D (mostly dark),
and DD (all dark). Animals that were LL also had dark ear tips, and animals
that were DD had white fur on abdomen and feet. If a figure is assigned to
each category symbol, it is easy to work out the average molting state of a
number of individuals during any period (Table 1).

All the following records are from field observations, unless shot specimens
are mentioned. ‘en hares at Cape Searle at 400 m on May 23 and four at sea
level near Padloping on May 31 were all pure white. One shot at sea level on
June 1 was white without any brown under fur, and five more looked pure white.
Another shot there was white externally, but had light brown patches around
the eyes and lips, and also a dense growth of short brownish-gray fur all over
the upper parts, underneath the long white winter fur. One on June 1 or 2 in
Pangnirtung Pass, and two in Owl Valley on June 11 and 13 were white. In
Owl Valley one was white on June 27, and two on June 27 and two on July 2
were largely dark on head and neck; a third of the back was dark. One at
600 m on July 9 was white except for brown patches on head and neck. Two
on July 24 were dark except for white patches on the sides and neck, and white

58 THE CANADIAN FieLp-NaATURALIST Vol. 76

legs, tail, breast and belly. Two in the Pass about July 20 were also half
white, and one there at the end of July had only a little white. One in Owl
Valley on July 26 was white. A female shot at the Pass summit on August 5
showed no external signs of molt and was light gray-brown all over its
back and slate-gray on head and flanks. However the legs, tail, and belly were
wholly white and many of the long white winter hairs had not been shed,
especially on the flanks and belly. ‘This specimen was already in molt to the
winter pelage, with dense winter white hair growing on the flanks and elsewhere.
At the Pass summit, two on August 6 were slightly darker, with some dark on
the upper part of the fore legs. Another on August 8 was whiter, with large
white patches on the flanks, neck and rump. ‘Two more seen in dim light on
August 8 looked gray. Four at the Pass summit on August 12 were completely
dark blue-gray except for white legs, breast, belly and tail, and two on August
13 were half white. Two on August 23 in Owl Valley had large white patches
on the neck and back, and there were gray-brown hairs nearby sticking to the
heather. One near the Pass summit on August 25 was dark with some little
white patches. One in the south of the Pass at 900 m on August 28 and one on
August 29 were white, and one on August 30 still half gray. “Iwo at Pangnir-
tung on September 4 were white.

To summarize, the color change became noticeable in the field in the second
half of June, and the hares were at their darkest for a brief time at the beginning
of August. By the second half of August, they were already rapidly changing
to the white winter coat, and by early September were completely white again.
Summer molt begins before dark patches are visible in the field, and white
winter fur is growing underneath in autumn when the animal is still dark.
Such details are apparent when specimens are examined. ‘The earliest spring
specimen started growing its brown fur in late May, and the earliest in autumn
probably started winter molt about late July.

This molting pattern is much the same as in northeast Greenland, where
the summer molt occurs from late May to late June, and where winter molt
begins in mid-July and nearly all have finished by September (Salomonsen,
1939). However, our Baffin hares in 1953 grew a more complete summer coat
than in Salomonsen’s specimens from northeast Greenland, which at the most
changed color only partly on the head and had some scattered dark hairs along
the center of the back. We saw no hare in a completed summer coat with
dark fur on lower legs and breast. Even well-molted ones usually had largely
white legs and belly and some white patches on the upper parts, and many
unshed white hairs from the long winter coat could often be seen in the field,
sticking far above the short summer fur. Kumlien (1879) also noticed that
there was no more than a partial color change in Cumberland Sound hares. |

Kumlien believed that many hares in this area stayed white throughout
the year, though he gave no proof of this. Adult hares in Devon Island are said
to remain white throughout the year (Soper, 1928); and on Prince Patrick
Island, Macdonald (1954) noted a color change in some but wrote that some
seem to remain white in summer. Like us, Kumlien and Macdonald saw white
hares in every summer month, but this does not prove that some hares stay
white the whole summer. We saw white hares as late as June 27 and as early as

1962 Watson: MAMMALS IN CUMBERLAND PENINSULA 59

TABLE 1
FIELD NoTES ON COLOR CHANGE OF HARES, CUMBERLAND PENINSULA, 1957

Number of hares in each category
Mean
Period All Mostly Half Mostly All category!

dark dark white white white

@p) Dy) apy aw) (LL)
May 16-31 14 4.0
June 1-15 10 4.0
June 16-30 2 1 Sue
July 1-15 3 3.0
July 16-31 1 4 1 Die)
August 1-15 9 3 138
August 16-31 1 3 D BES)
September 1-15 2 4.0

1The mean is calculated by assigning the following figures to each category symbol: 0 for DD,
1 for D, 2 for LD, 3 for L and 4 for LL,

_ July 26, so there might be only one month between those late in turning dark
and those early in turning white. In Baffin Island on September 3 Manning
(1943) saw a hare that was white except for dark fur on the head, and which
had a white body coat that he thought might have been worn all summer.
However, even this animal had partly changed color, and a Greenland specimen
similar to it was described by Salomonsen. So far, there is no record of any
pure-white hares having been seen in the field, far less white specimens without
a trace of dark fur underneath, in this part of Baffin Island in early and mid-July,
which is probably the crucial time for a clear answer to this problem.

SUMMARY

1. Notes on mammals are recorded from the mountainous area of Cumber-
land Peninsula, Baffin Island.

2. Foxes, ermine and caribou were rare. Arctic hares were uncommon,
varying from one hare per two square miles to four or more per square mile.
3. The hare’s color change was studied by standardized field observations.
Summer molt started in late May and winter molt in late July. The color
change was noticed in the field in late June; the hares were darkest in early
August, and were white again by September. White hares were seen in every
month, but there is no proof that some stay white all summer.

REFERENCES
Barep, P. D. 1953. Baffin Island expedition Macponatp, S. D. 1954. Report on’ bio-
1953: a preliminary field report. Arctic 6: logical investigations at Mould Bay, Prince
226-251. Patrick Island, N.W.T. Bull. nat. Mus.

ree Can. 132:214-238.
Kumuien, L. 1879. Contributions to the Mannine, T. H. 1943. Notes on the mam-

natural history of Arctic America. Bull. mals of south’ and central west Baffin
US. nat. Mus. 15:69-105. Island. J. Mammal. 24:47-59.

60 THe CANADIAN Fir_p-NaTuRALIstT Vol. 76

SaLOMONSEN, F. 1939. Moults and _ se- southern Baffin Island. Bull. nat. Mus.
quences of plumages in the rock ptarmigan (Cam, 53,
(Lagopus mutus (Montin)). Vidensk. Watson, A. 1956. Ecological notes on the
Medd. dansk naturh. Foren. Kbh. 103: lemmings Lemmus trimucronatus and
1-491. Dicrostonyx groenlandicus in Baffin Island.

Soper, J.D. 1928. A faunal investigation of J. Anim. Ecol. 25:289-302.

Received for publication 9 June 1961

WZ

|

LATE BREEDING IN NEWFOUNDLAND
SNOWSHOE HARE

Donatp G. Donpps -

Department of Lands and Forests, Kentville, Nova Scotia

SEVERAL authors have recorded snowshoe hare pregnancies as late as September.
Criddle (1938) stated that pregnancy may occur as late as October. Grange
(1932), Aldous (1937), MacLulich (1937), and Severaid (1942), all found
August to be the terminal month of pregnancy. Adams (1959) believes
pregnancies terminate in Montana about August 1.

Embryos from 52 gravid female hares collected in Newfoundland between
1956 and 1959 were aged from known age collections provided by Joseph Dell
of the New York State Conservation Department. From these data and a study
of the male reproductive cycle it was determined that the normal breeding
season for Newfoundland hares extends from late March to early August
(Doods, 1960).

Siegler (1954) reported a New Hampshire hare collected on November 28
carrying two fetuses, each measuring about 115 mm. Fetuses this size would
normally be close to term so that the breeding date was probably about
October 23.

Through the co-operation of the Newfoundland Department of Mines and
Resources nine records of abnormally late breeding in Newfoundland hares
have been obtained by the author since 1950. Fetuses were collected and aged
in seven of these instances. The ages of the gravid hares were undetermined.
Five of the nine records were from western Newfoundland, three from the
central portion, and one from the Avalon Peninsula in the eastern section of
the province. ‘Table 1 provides collection dates, numbers and ages of fetuses,
approximate breeding dates and collection areas.

1962

Dopps: Late BREEDING IN SNOWSHOE Hare 61

TABLE 1. ABNORMAL BREEDING RECORDS IN NEWFOUNDLAND SNOWSHOE HARES

Number | Approximate Approximate
Date collected of age of fetuses breeding Collection area
fetuses in days date

November 29, 1953 4 29 October 31-November 1 South Brook-

Humber District
November 22, 1954 4 36 October 17-18 St. Georges-

St. Georges District
November 22, 1954 4 34 October 19-20 St. Georges-

St. Georges District
November 30, 1955 2 36 October 25-26 Calvert-

Ferryland District
January 1-10, 1959 3 36 November 26-December 6| Lewisport-

Gander District
November 11, 1960 1 36 October 5-6 Badger-

Grand Falls District
January 22, 1961 2 34 December 18-19 Millertown-

Grand Falls District
(Reported ) = = = Cormack-
December 3, 1950 Humber District
(Reported) = — = Cormack-
November 29, 1953 Humber District

REFERENCES

ApaMs, L. 1959. An analysis of a popula-
tion of snowshoe hares in northwestern
Montana. Ecol. Mon. 29:141-170.

Aupous, C. M. 1937. Notes on the life his-
tory of the snowshoe hare. J. Mammal.
18:46-47.

Crore, S. 1938. A study of the snowshoe
rabbit. Can. Field Nat. 52:31-40.

Dopps, D. G. 1960. The economics, biol-
ogy and management of the snowshoe hare
in Newfoundland. Unpublished Ph.D.
thesis, Cornell Univ., 320 pp.

GranceE, W. B. 1932. Observations on the
snowshoe hare, Lepus americanus phaeno-
tus. J. Mammal. 13:99-116.

MacLuricH, D. A. 1937. Fluctuations in
the numbers of the varying hare (Lepus
americanus). Univ. Toronto Stud. Biol.
43.

SEVERAID, J. H. 1942. The snowshoe hare,
its life history and artificial propagation.
Maine Dept. of Inland Fisheries and Game.

S1eGLER, H. R. 1954. Late-breeding snow-
shoe hare. J. Mammal. 35:122.

Received for publication 12 June 1961

Ys

CORRECTION NOTE
In Vol. 75, No. 4, of this journal, on p

174, line 2, for 50° read 53°; on p. 183, left
column, after Star-Nosep Mote delete the

third cristata.

NOTES ON NORTH ATLANTIC WHALES

Bruce S. WRIGHT

Northeastern Wildlife Station, University of New Brunswick
Fredericton, New Brunswick

I seRVED as a watch-keeping officer in the Royal Canadian Navy in the Gulf of
St. Lawrence, Newfoundland and Iceland waters, and the trans-Atlantic convoy
routes during 1941 and 1942. My duties as the Anti-Submarine Control
Officer of the ship included the classification of all sounds and echoes picked
up on the asdic as “sub” or “non-sub.” ‘Therefore I was always called when
whales were in the vicinity. These observations giving dates and positions:
may be of value to cetologists.

The assistance of Raymond M. Gilmore, who, when biologist of the Office
of Foreign Activities of the U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service made a preliminary
inspection of these notes, is gratefully acknowledged. |

Spring and Summer Observations

April 3, 1942. 44°N 60°W (North of Sable Island). A small pod of fin
whales Balaenoptera physalus was observed at close range while they were
mating. Several white-sided dolphins Lagenorhynchus acutus, or pos-
sibly white-beaked dolphins L. albirostris Gray were observed at a distance.

May 16, 1942. 55°N 14°W. One adult male and two smaller killer whales

Grampus orca L. were observed at close range. One of the small ones —

jumped clear in the wake.
May 17, 1942. 54°N 20°W. ‘Two killer whales were seen.

May 19-21, 1942. Vicinity of 45°N 37°W. At least six fin whales were
observed.

May 22,1942. 47°N 39°W. An unidentified large whale was seen blowing.

June 2, 1942. 45°N 45°W. Thirty-forty unidentified dolphins or porpoises
were seen in one herd. ‘The largest was 10 feet, average 6 feet, color was
solid dark at a quarter of a mile. They jumped continuously.

June 4, 1942. 50°N 45°W. At 3.35 a.m. the asdic operator reported tor-
pedoes approaching. It was a herd of dolphins or porpoises traveling fast
in an extremely compact group and leaping high out of the water. The
loud whistling noise they made in the earphones was almost deafening, and
as it was quite unlike anything the operator had heard before, he identified
it as torpedoes.

June 6, 1942. 55°N 31°W. A group of five killer whales was depth charged
with a five-charge pattern, which exploded within a hundred yards. They
rose to blow, apparently unperturbed and moving leisurely and not the
least alarmed. “There were two large and three smaller ones in the herd.
One large male came over to inspect the ship. It came to within 10 yards
before sheering off. The dorsal fin of this whale was at least four feet
high. When last seen, the whales were still traveling slowly on the
surface in a compact group.

62

1962 Wricut: Nores on NortH ATLANTIC WHALES 63

June 21, 1942. 56°N15°W. A curious patch in the sea was observed at close
range. It was red and 40 to 50 feet across, and rose from the depths in a
column. This may have been a swarming of Meganyctiphanes norvegica
(M. Sars), or Rhoda inermis (Kroyer), euphausid crustacean zooplankters
which rise to the surface in this manner and then spread out. They are an
important food of the baleen whales. There was no opportunity to take
a sample.

June 25, 1942. 56°N 28°W. A small pod of fin whales was seen at a distance.

June 26, 1942. 45°N 57°W. A large school of dolphins or porpoises was
observed but it was too far off to identify. They were accompanied by
several young 3 or 4 feet long. They were not jumping but traveling
on the surface.

July 12, 1938. The St. Lawrence River, 8 miles above Quebec City. A large
specimen of the Delphinidae jumped clear of the water opposite the
Chaudiere Bridge. It was at least 10 feet long and of a uniform dark
color all over. It was a mile away.

July 14, 1942. Gulf of St. Lawrence, off Gaspé coast. A very large whale,
considerably larger than the fin whales frequently seen here, passed the
ship. It was assumed to be a blue whale Balaenoptera musculus.

July 21-Aug. 2, 1942. Gulf of St. Lawrence. Many fin whales were seen off
Cape Gaspé and in the Gulf.

July-September, 1942. A humpback whale Megaptera novaeangliae (Borow-
ski, 1781) was often seen off Cape Gaspé. It was always alone and was
never seen far from the mouth of Gaspé harbor.

July 22, 1942. Gulf of St. Lawrence. The common porpoise Phocoena
phocoena (L.), was seen frequently on this date. The pilot whale
Globicephala melaena (Traill) was also seen in small numbers.

Aug. 3, 1942. Bic Island, Lower St. Lawrence. A lone bull killer whale was
observed at close range. It was very large.

Aug. 4-Sept. 1, 1942. Gulf of St. Lawrence. Fin and pilot whales were seen
almost every day during this period.

Aug. 26, 1944. Two hundred miles west of Ireland in 55°N. I found a large,
dead whale covered with gulls. Discovery was made from an aircraft and
it could not be further identified. This was apparently a case of natural
mortality as no whaling was carried on in those waters in wartime.

Aug. 30, 1941. Gulf of St. Lawrence, off Gaspé coast. Three fin whales were
traveling together up river.

Sept. 1, 1941. Nova Scotia coast, between Cabot Strait and Halifax. Many
common porpoises played around the ship.

Fall and Winter Observations

October 31, 1941. South of Cape Race, Newfoundland. Two large unidenti-
fied whales were blowing.

December 5, 1941. At the mouth of Hvalfjordur, on the west coast of Iceland.
A raft of ducks and geese was feeding at the mouth of the fiord. They

64 THe CANADIAN FieL_p-NaATURALIST Vol. 76

periodically opened out leaving a circular open space in the middle of the
raft, and a few seconds later a small whale blew in this opening. ‘There
were several whales and they were apparently feeding on the same shoal
of small creatures that attracted the ducks and geese. “The whales appeared
to be 10 to 15 feet long, light in color, and with no visible dorsal fin. They
were, at the time, considered to be narwhales Monodon monoceros, because
of size, color, and lack of dorsal fin, although no tusks were seen. How-
ever, Saemundsson (1939) has only four records of this species from
Iceland in the past century. These records were on this coast, but in
spring migration, so this identification must be considered doubtful.

December 13, 1941. 46°N 48°W. A herd of about 15 white-sided dolphins
played about the ship.

February 28, 1942. Grand Banks of Newfoundland. A pod of six small sperm
whales Physeter catoden crossed the bow and one was cut in two. They
were swimming in pairs and traveling north. They were probably young
males, as the Newfoundland whaling station very rarely takes a female in
these waters.

March 3, 1942. 42°20’N 52°50’W. Grand Banks of Newfoundland. Three
fin whales in Whale Deep.
The only other whale seen was the white whale Delphinapterus leucas

(Pallas). It was seen on August 31, 1942, in the lower St. Lawrence River,

and on October 16, 1938, off the Island of Orleans below Quebec. Both these

records agree with the autumn distribution of the species as given by Valdykov

(1944). '
Noises heard on the asdic from dolphins or porpoises were of two distinct

types. The first was a squealing, squeaking noise from a herd, particularly

when they were very active and jumping. The second type was made by a

straggler from a large herd which was obviously trying to catch up. This

noise resembled the grinding of teeth and was very loud.

A third type was heard from a fin whale. ‘his individual separated from
a small pod and approached cautiously to within 20 yards of the ship as if
trying to identify it. It appeared to see the ship for the first time at this
distance. It fled sounding an alarm call that alerted the others, and they all
rushed off at full speed. ‘The alarm call lasted for 30 seconds and then ceased
abruptly. It sounded like “tock! ...tock!... tock!” at the rate of one every
three seconds. ‘The asdic operator commented that it sounded like the echo-
sounder running fast. he whole pod altered 90° from the ship’s course and
disappeared in the distance still on the surface.

SUMMARY

Dates and positions of twenty-six observations on Cetacea in North Atlantic,
Iceland, and eastern Canadian waters are recorded. Observations of ten species
in spring and summer and also fall and winter are given, and a doubtful record
of narwhales in Iceland is discussed. The date and position of a possible
swarming of crustacean zooplankters is given.

1962 Wricut: Notes on NortH ATLANTIC WHALES

REFERENCES

65

SaEMuUNDsSSON, B. 1939. Mammalia. The Vrapyxov, V.D. 1944. Chasse, biologie et

Zoology of Iceland, Vol. 4, Part 76. valeur économique du marsouin blanc ou
Copenhagen and Reykjavik, Einar Munsks- Beluga...du fleuve et du Golfe St.
gaard. - Laurent. Département des Pécheries de la

SERGEANT, D. E., and H. D. FisHer. 1957 Province de Québec.
The smaller Cetacea of eastern Canadian
waters. J. Fish. Res. Bd. Canada 14:
83-115.

Received for publication 24 April 1961

Ws

REPORT OF COUNCIL

THE EIGHTY-THIRD ANNUAL MEETING OF THE

OTTAWA FIELD-NATURALISTS’ CLUB
December 5, 1961

There were five Council meetings at the National Museum of Canada
during the past year: December 15, 1960, February 14, 1961, April 20,
September 14, and November 8, with an average attendance of 17 council

members.

Unfortunately the President, Mr. W. W. Mair was forced to relinquish
his duties because of an out-of-town posting and Dr. Solman resigned as
Second Vice-President because of increased work load. However, the re-

mainder of the Club’s executive rallied to carry on the Club’s business.

The Club was saddened to learn of the passing of two long-time members,
Dr. R. M. Anderson (former President, 1920-22) and Mr. H. A. C. Jackson.

Appointments for 1961 offices were made as follows:

Editor, CaNnapIAN Fre_p-Naruracist — R. A. Hamilton
Business Manager, Canapian Fietp-Naturatisr — W. J. Cody
Chairman, Publications Committee — W. J. Groves

Chairman, Excursions and Lectures Committee — D. R. Beckett
Chairman, Reserve Fund Committee — H. Lloyd

Chairman, Bird Census Committee — V. E. F. Solman
Chairman, Membership Committee — R. J. Moore

Chairman, Macoun Field Club Committee — H. J. Scoggan
Chairman, F.O.N. Affairs Committee — D. A. Smith

Chairman, Public Relations Committee — EF. L. Bousfield
Chairman, Preservation Historic Sites Committee — W. K. W. Baldwin

66 Tue CANADIAN Firi~p-NaATURALIST Vol. 76

REPORT OF THE PUBLICATIONS COMMITTEE
During 1961 four numbers of Volume 75 of the CaNapIAN FieLp-NaTuraL-
ist have been published comprising a total of 268 pages plus index. Papers,
notes and reviews were distributed as follows:

BO Pam) i482 ies) set nme 6 2
EMtOmMOlo ey ies ia ihe oes aetna 4 1
Geology Die hectares Sa SLO i,
lemme cology wise: sNiieMie teens 1 4
ichichy olop yj Sse aiteny aa 1 1
Malacolopy jai natn eases 1 2
iievenvenelkoyan, Mase 6 6 1
Marine sBiolopy ais aint aia 2
Ocnichology, 2 wen aan 7 15 9
Miscellaneous) aann. eauenn nue 2 11
26 29° 32

The committee has approved accounts totalling $3,404.17 for Vol. 74,
No. 4, and Vol. 75, Nos. 1-3. This amount includes $368.47 for reprints which
will be recovered from the authors. Contributions totalling $55 have been
received from affiliated societies. Sales of back numbers in 1961 totalled
$149.53. 5

The supply of back numbers has been moved to new and better storage
quarters in the K. W. Neatby Building.

On the death of Mr. H. A. C. Jackson in July 1961, ‘his family requested
that donations be made to the Ottawa Field-Naturalists’ Club in lieu of floral
tributes and that this money might be used for the publication of some fo
of memorial article. “The fund now totals $337.

The publication of the Canapian FieLp-NaTuRALIsT was materially saeea
this year by a grant of $500 from the Conservation Council of Ontario. The
size of the journal was increased in 1961 over 1960 by approximately eighty
pages. ‘This assistance is eratefully acknowledged.

REPORT OF THE ExCURSIONS AND LECTURES COMMITTEE

During the past year, the Excursions and Lectures Committee have con-
ducted four indoor workshop evenings, two spring field trips and one fall
field trip, four morning bird walks and the annual dinner. A total of eight
Committee Meetings were also held.

Although our attendance has not been large, it has been fairly steady
averaging about 50 at the indoor meetings and 25 on our excursions.

The Annual Dinner held at the Experimental Farm was attended by
approximately 110 persons. The speaker, Dr. J. D. Ives of the Geographical
Branch, gave an illustrated lecture on the deglaciation of Labrador-Ungava.

One copy of the Newsletter was published during the year.

REporT OF THE RESERVE FUND COMMITTEE
Thirty-five rights to purchase Bell Telephone stock and five shares of
Bell Telephone were bought, increasing our holdings in this company to
twenty shares.

1962 ReEpoRT OF CoUNCIL 67

Report oF THE MemMBERSHIP COMMITTEE

No meetings were held during the year.

At the suggestion of Council, a letter of welcome to new members was
prepared and mimeographed. This has been sent to new members immediately
upon receipt of their application and fee.

The Chairman has presented to Council applications for the following
new members: active members: 5 local, 12 non-local, 5 institutions; associate
members: 5.

The circulation of the Canapran FreLtp-NatTuraListT stands at 738, a net
decrease of 54 over the comparable 1960 figure. The decrease is due to a
more rigorous deletion of unpaid members and does not indicate an unusually
high drop in memberships.

Report OF THE Brrp Census CoMMITTEE
Our forty-second Christmas Bird Census was held on December 31, 1960.
Thirty-eight observers reported a record total of 46 species, surpassing the
1959 record by one. Five new species were added to the all-time list, bringin
it to a total of 87 species. The details were published in the Audubon Field
Notes, Vol. 15, No. 2.

Report oF THE Macoun Fietp CLuB COMMITTEE

The usual weekly meetings were held in the spring, with Cedric Pearson,
Mark Blackburn, and Gary Kaiser presidents of the Junior, Intermediate, and
Senior groups, respectively. Eleven of the meetings featured guest speakers.
Some short field trips were made in the Museum area. The thirteenth birthday
party was held in May, at which badges were presented to qualifying new
members, No. 19 of the Club’s magazine, The Little Bear, was distributed, and
a programme of nature films was shown, followed by a visit to the Club’s
exhibits in its headquarters.

The Club’s room at the National Museum has been taken over for other
functions and we welcome the coming move to a more attractive and spacious
location on the third floor.

Report oF F.O.N. Arrarrs COMMITTEE
The committee continued liaison with the Federation of Ontario Natural-
ists’ headquarters at Toronto. The routine business included: distribution
of brochures and announcements of the F.O.N. sponsored camp, recordings
and The Young Naturalist; sale of 27 dozen F.O.N. Christmas cards and hasti-
notes, on which the Club will profit by $6.75; and advice on nature education
to local young people referred to us by the F.O.N.

Report OF THE Historic Sires COMMITTEE
The committee considered two sites but was inactive for most of the year.
REPORT OF THE PuBLic RELATIONS COMMITTEE ‘
During 1961, the newly formed Public Relations Committee assumed
responsibility for coverage of Club activities by the local press, radio, and
television wherever deemed necessary or desirable by committees concerned

with these activities. A. W. F. BanFIeELp, Secretary

68 THe CanapiAn Fre_p-NATURALIST

Vol. 76

STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL STANDING
THE OTTAWA FIELD-NATURALISTS’ CLUB, November 30, 1961

CURRENT ACCOUNT

ASSETS LIABILITIES
Balance in bank, Nov. 30, 1961.... $2,929.62 Cheques outstanding.......... $ 125.00
Bills receivable, separates......... (iS aSi-y Balancers "CSUs fata ena 2,980.49
3,105.49 3,105.49
RECEIPTS EXPENDITUERS
Balance in bank, Nov. 29, 1960... 1,329.68 Can. Field Nat. 4 numbers.... 2,710.81
Fees: Separates & Illustrations...... 650.89
Current...... $2,566.30 Editor’s honorarium.......... 100.00
Advance...... 309.15 Business Managers honorarium 15.00
Arrears....... 203.35 Newsletter:..6 5p 2a 7.05
Associate .... 69.15 3,147.95 Excursions & Lectures Committee 49.71
Separates & illustrations.......... 1,131.61 Postage & Stationery........- 226.43
Sale of back numbers............ 14) 53) Bennie IDNIGCOUIMES ue be 31.11
Donations: Foreign Exchange.......... aie 15.01
Conservation Council, Miscellaneous eee ee 58.91
Ontariomga. eee 500 .00 Bank Balance Noy. 30, 1961...
H.A.C. Jackson Gifts... 337.00 2,929.62 less 125.00 o/s
Affiliate Societies....... 55.00 Cheques A a Maye cee 2,804.62
—— 892.00
Miscellamecousvis enna eto 18.77
$6,669.54 2 $6,669.54
RESERVE FUND
ASSETS LIABILITIES
$3,000 Ontario Hydro 3% Bonds
rameye ae WAIIIG. 655. os be cs occ bee 2,700.00
20 shares Bell Telephone stock,
nei ee WANE) 2 Lc eed oe 1,160.00 NIL
Balance in Bank Nov. 30, 1961... . 125.94
3,985 .94
RECEIPTS EXPENDITURES
Balance in Bank Nov. 29, 1960.... 229.86 Safety Deposit Box........... 5.00
Bank Wnterest--25 oe emia ee 1.73 Purchase Bell Stock.......... 190.00
BondGlinterest: 23s ene 90.00 Purchase of Rights........... 39.00
Dividends Bell Telephone ........ 3850.2 Bank: Si Gains ce ke: ee pS
Balance in Bank, Nov. 30, 1961 125.94
360.09 360.09
PUBLICATIONS FUND
ASSETS LIABILITIES
$1,500 Ontario Hydro 3% Bonds
Mavelete WANS ogc uw ew eee ios Seven 15) ’ NIL
Balance in Bank Nov. 30, 1961.... 190.58
1,529.23
RECEIPTS EXPENDITURES
Balance in Bank Nov. 29, 1960... . 141.75
Bankalmiterest asco aida eens: 3.73 Balance in Bank, Nov. 30, 1961 190.48
Bondiinteresthek: a eee ee 45 .00
190.48 190.48

Audited and found correct, November 30, 1961

(Signed) I. L. Conners
C. Frankton, Auditors

(Signed) J. M. Gillett, Treasurer

1962

69

REVIEWS

The Garden Flowers of China
By H. L. Li. New York, Ronald Press,

1959. 240 p. $7.00 (Chronica Botanica No.

19)

_ Few writers can skillfully combine art,
floristics, history, legend, geography —
humanity, indeed. But in The Garden
Flowers of China Hui-lin Li has done
just this.

The first chapter sets the scene, and
does it admirably. When we read that
eraeke are more kinds of .. . plants
growing in China than there are in all
other countries in the whole Northern
Hemisphere combined,” we know that a
rich reward awaits us as we continue
through this book. When we learn that
such garden delights as peony, tiger lily,
camellia and daphne assumed importance
in the Sung Dynasty, about A.D. 1100,
we are not surprised to learn that this
age also saw the flowering of art and
literature. The Chinese are always close
to the good earth. For them, art is some-
thing to be lived, not acquired. And their
love of flowers is only surpassed by a
love for the people who grow them.

Fact and fancy pour from every page.
Knowledge that the facts come from a
professor of botany at the University of
Pennsylvania is enough to assure us of
their veracity. The fancy gives the book
an intriguing charm. We discover that a
wine is made of chrysanthemums, and
the lotus is idealistic because it “emerges
from muddy dirt but is not contamin-
ated”; we learn the fascinating story of
the Chinese sacred lily (Narcissus tazetta)
and the even more absorbing account of
the mysterious jade flower.

It is hardly to be expected that so
comprehensive a book should be without
a flaw. The demerits are regrettable be-
cause they seem to be due to hastiness,
which is certainly not a Chinese trait.
The general reader will wish that some
simple convention of type face had been
_ used to distinguish personal names from
other Chinese names, and will regret the
lack of consistency in manner of writing

and capitalizing multiple names of plants.
(Shao-yao, which is better hyphened,
varies in the same chapter.) Specialists in
Chinese will find, ’m afraid, a good
many errors, orthographic and otherwise.
(On page 14 the second element of a
well-known book title incorrectly reads
Ssu and, following this, Eulogies appears
for Elegies; on page 53 a plant name is
written P’in Tsa Mei, but the error in
the second word is corrected in the
index; most of the more complex ideo-
graphs, though recognizable, are indis-
tinct, and in at least one instance, at the
bottom of page 230, the character for La
is incorrect.) Botanists will probably be
just temporarily confused by discrep-
ancies. (On page 46 the Chinese aster is
said to be Callistephus chinensis but in
the reference on page 47 it is called Cal-
listephus hortensis; on page 151 the refer-
ence to Shirai is haplessly placed after
Catalpa ovata instead of after C. bungei.)
Such lapses as the above, however, can,
and I hope, will, be corrected in future
editions.

The particular importance of the book
to this country lies not only in its addi-
tion to our knowledge of a Pacific neigh-
bor. It must suggest a serious desideratum
in Canada. In 1919 Berthold Laufer wrote
that “the Chinese furnish us with an im-
mensely useful material for elaborating a
history of cultivated plants.” Further-
more, as a part of the last chapter of Mr.
Li’s book implies, collectors are still
introducing Chinese plants to the West-
ern world. From a rough check of the
trees and shrubs in the Dominion Arbor-
etum, I believe that about a third of the
natural species in this collection come
from China. And yet, to the best of my
knowledge there is in Canada no botanist
working in the prodigiously fertile field
of Chinese plants.

In format this book is satisfying. The
brush type on the cover and spine is
appealing and harmonious. Line draw-
ings. from Chinese books are interesting

70 Tue CanapiAn Frietp-NaTurRAList

and decorative, especially with their
identifying matter in wood block, seal
characters or running hand. The half-
tones, exceedingly well done and well
displayed, are, in fact, a distinct feature
of the book. The author’s direct but
flowing prose style might well be emu-
lated even by writers whose mother
tongue is English. Because of its lively
presentation of the main subject the book
deserves a place in every library of the
literature of plants. More than this,
Garden Flowers of China may well serve
to introduce to some readers the tre-
mendous riches of the literature of China.
Rosert A. HAmiILtTon
Manotick, Ontario
Mr. Hamilton, former editor of this jour-
nal, is a nurseryman and a member of the
American Oriental Society.

A Flora of the Alaskan Arctic Slope
By Ira L. Wicctns anp JoHN HUNTER

Tuomas. Arctic Institute of North

America Special Publication No. 4 Uni-

versity of Toronto Press, 1962. vii 425 p.

$9.50.

In recent years we have seen a notable
upswing in arctic-alpine biological study
Largely because of the establishment of
the Arctic Research Laboratory at Bar-
row in 1946, by the United States Office
of Naval Research, northern Alaska has
had an important part in such studies.
This volume, by two of the Stanford
botanists who worked at Barrow, is a
most valuable contribution to the biolo-
gy of the region. It will be especially
useful to biologists working in northern
Alaska and to students of plant geogra-
phy.

An introductory chapter discusses geo-
graphic limits, edaphic factors, climat-
ological factors, permafrost, biological
factors and he Naar. The main body of
the book contains full keys, detailed
descriptions, habitat data, general range,
citations, and: a numerical summary. Four
appendices (gazetteer, distribution maps,
glossary, and references) and an index
complete the book. The citations include
all specimens not seen by Hulten except

Vol. 76

for the commonest species at a few
localities. The maps, each with two to
four species, are large enough to allow
quite accurate plotting. The gazetteer,
facing a key map, is a highly commend-
able feature. For most species coverage

seems to be adequate except for the ex- |

treme eastern and the southeastern areas,
for which there are almost no records.
The taxonomy is conservative, no new
taxa being recognized and no transfers
being made. Two minor omissions may
be a hindrance to some users, especially
those without ready access to a tax-

onomic library. Virtually no synonymy

is given, and the specific authority is
omitted when the nominate subspecies
or variety is absent from the region.
This compilation throws considerable
light on the climatic range of the arctic
slope. The numerical summary reveals a
total of 466 species and lower taxa, which
is impressive in view of the whole region
being north of the 68th parallel. It is
surprising to see Compositae as the
largest family in species and second
largest in genera, until one realizes the
extraordinary range in summer climate
encountered as one passes some 200 miles
south from Barrow. Barrow, exposed to
the Beaufort and Chukchi Seas, has a
cold summer with a July mean of 40°F,
about that of Resolute. As one studies
the distribution maps one is impressed
by the concentration of high-arctic spe-
cies at Barrow and along the coast. The
more southerly species that we associate
with montane and subalpine situations
do not reach the coast but are confined
to the foothills and mountains.
adequate weather data are available for
any station except Barrow, but summer
temperatures at Umiat, only 80 ‘miles

from the coast, are said occasionally to. —

approach 90°F. With willow, alder and
balsam poplar attaining heights of 20 to
30 feet in sheltered sites, the foothills
region is scarcely arctic in climate, al-
though spruce, the frequently accepted
marker for limits of the Canadian arctic,

is absent. D. B. O. SaviLe

No a

eS ts :
SS . i

_ Edmonton, Alta.;
Librarian, P.

hological | Club :
500K; Past President, Dr.
President, Wee: Jarman;
abe - F. ae

Palas,

'N. 33

“hier

uble-spaced. Only those words
in italics should be underlined.
t 0 th manuscript : should be numbered.

ea
onal Dictionary is the

pelling of a common name, and
name, a decision of a

ms of measurement follow

gineering Terms or ee equivalent
: id:

s ae ie ae
a after the list of

reasurer, = ie Law:

ASTER; “Audubon Eee

952:

ae Soars, Box e200 k

nea muaeieans. a
e references, and legends for

wever, in a case of

pat he oa Sane

3 ssociation (Z10.1-

Beaute Pace. Second Vice-President. James Pp:
CorisTINE; Secretary-Treasurer, Gronces’ A. Leg-
CLERC, 628 Fraser St; Quebec, Que.

Province of Quebec Society for the
Protection of Birds .

_ President, W. H. Rawuines; Vice-President, J.
DELAFIELD, ‘Mass R. B. BLANCHARD; Treasurer, Miss
G. E. Hiwsarp; Secretary, Miss Rutu S. ABBOTT,
164 Senneville Road, R.R. 1, Ste Anne de Bellevue,
Que.; Librarian, Mrs. P. HE pu Bouray.

‘Toronto Field Naturalists’ Club
- President, Fre Bopswortu; Vice-President, Dr.
Bruce Fats; Secretary-Treasurer, Mrs. Hinton
Rosson, 47 Craighurst Avenue, Toronto 12, Ont.;
Assistant Secretary, Mrs. J. B. Srewanrt; ‘Junior
T.F.N.C., Roserr J. MacLetian, 416 St. Clements
Ave, Toronto 12, Ont.

Vancouver Natural History Society

isaerey: President, Dr. N. A. M. MackENzIE;
Past President, FRANK Sanrorp; President, Dr. R.
SrAce- Smitu; Vice-President, De K. I. Beamisy;
Honorary Secretary, J. Y. Nemo) 622 East 8th St.,
North Vancouver, B.C.; Recording Secretary, Miss
K. Murroy; Program Secretary, Mrs. E. N. Cop-
pine; Honorary Treasurer, Mrs. J. Y. New;
Librarian, Mrs. H. Prnver-Moss; Editor of Bulletin,
C. B. W. Lee

ADVICE TO CONTRIBUTORS

Shae are asked. to share the cost of publication by paying for each
page of an article that is in excess of the limit of twelve journal pages,
nee cost of illustrations and He ‘setting small-sized type and tables.

references. Each table and all the Jegende should

_ be on separate pages.

Notes should bear the name of one author only
and references in notes should be incorporated

directly i in the text.
Illustrations -

All figures, including each Gaae of the She
should be numbered consecutively in arabic

‘numerals. The author’s name, title of the paper,
and figure number should be written in the lower

left corner of the sheet on which the illustration
appears. The legend should not be incorporated
in the figure.

Line drawings should be made with India ink
on white drawing paper, blue tracing linen, or

blue-lined co-ordinate paper. Co-ordinate lines

that are to appear in the reproduction should be
tuled in black ink. Descriptive matter should be
lettered, not typewritten, and all parts of the
drawing should permit easy ceunny even if a
reduction is made. —

Photographs should have a glossy aaa cot
show sharp contrasts. For reproduction as a com-

_ plete plate they s should be mounted without space

between prints.
For large drawings and mounted photographs
the ratio of height to width should conform to
that of the journal page (43 by 73 inches) but the
height should be See to allow for the legend.

Reprints
Reprints, with or atligue covers may be bought.

The cost is given on the reprint order form which
is attached to the galley proofs.

THE OTTAWA FIELD-NATURALISTS” CLUB

FounDED IN 1879

Parone pe . Gees en
Tuer ExceLLencies [HE GoveRNOR GENERAL A AND > Mapane Vv

The objects of the club are to foster an acquaintance with and alo
encourage investigation and to publish the results of original se
in all branches of natural history.

The club is a corporate ineniber of the Federation oe ‘Onno:
affiliated with the Boe Association for the ee of. Science

MEMBERS OF COUNCIL

President: DoNALD R. BECKETT, 36 Canter Blvd., ae Ontario
First Vice-President: W. Winston Mair |

Second Vice-President: DoNnaLp A. SMITH ; ii
Treasurer: Miss ANNE BANNING, Box 4099, Postal Station E, Ores On
Secretary: A. W. FRANK BANFIELD, National Museum of ‘Canada, Ott av
Auditors: J. M. Gittett and R. J. Moore te Bee
Additional Members of Council: Miss CHARLOTTE Dit, Mrs. es R
Hawkssripce, Miss Mary Sruart, Messrs. W. K. W. Batpwin, D.
Bousrietp, K. Bowes, A. H. CLARK, Jr., F. R. Coox, R. Frith, J M. Gi
Goprrey, H. Grou, J. W. Groves, Cc R. Hanes, D. D. Hogartu, H. Luoy
LAREN, R. J. Moore, C. R. PATTERSON, ALE, Porsii, |e S. Russe:
F. H. ScHurz, Ade i ‘Scoccan, V. E. F. SoLman.

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

Editor: Fonae ReCaoks oe ont Business M. i
National Museum of Se Ottawa, Ontario ‘Central Experimental F

Associate Editors: F. j. ALCOCK (Geology), jou w. ARNOLD. (Entomology
(Paleontology), oe SHERMAN BLEAKNEY (Herpetology), ArTHuR H.
(Malacology), Wiuiam G. Dore (Botany), J. R. DyMonD (Ichthyo )
Goprrey (Ornithology), A. G. Huntsman By md “eT

(Mammalogy). — ia

The Canadian Field Nataraliee is eine ee os che Orn Fielc
Club with assistance of the affiliated societies listed on the inside back cover. :
representing personal observations or the results of original research in any br
tural history are invited. In the preparation of papers authors should consul
recent issue and the information for contributors on the inside back cover.
rates and prices of back numbers of this journal and its predecessors, Ti
OF THE OTTAWA FIELD-NATURALISTS’ CLUB, 1879-1886, and
NATURALIST, 1887-1919, are obtainable Hee the business nae

Pon

MEMBERSHIP AND SUBSCRIPTION |

The annual membership fee of $5 covers subscription to the ne
however, may subscribe at the same rate as that for membership. Single
of regular issues are $1.50. A money order should be made payable to th tay
Naturalists’ Club and sent to the treasurer. Notice of ene of address hov
sent to the treasurer. | : j at nes

Authorized as second-class mail by the Post Office Department at. Ottawa, Ontario

The Canadian Field-Naturalist _

VoLUME 76 APRIL-JUNE 1962 cae 2 2 UB PAD y ce
4 1962 |
MAMMALS OF THE DELTA MARSH REGION OF ee ak
LAKE MANITOBA, CANADA | avery

James R. Tamsitr
University of the Andes, Bogota, Colombia

The field work from which this report is drawn was conducted from

a |

June 6 through August 12, 1958. The base of operations was the Delta Water- _

fowl Research Station at Delta, Manitoba. Most of the collections and ob-
servations were made in the vicinity of Delta and in areas to the south of the
Delta Marsh. Mammal records were obtained by live trapping, by steel traps,
by tumble-in traps, from information supplied by local residents and station
personnel, from sight records and from the literature. Seventy-two speci-
mens of 19 species of mammals were collected in the area, and sight records of
seven other species were made. In addition, five specimens of four species
collected near Winnipeg in September 1957 and 20 specimens of 12 species in
the Delta Waterfowl! Research Station Collection (DWRSC) are reported.

The study was supported by a grant from The University of Manitoba.
H. A. Hochbaum, Director, Delta Waterfowl Research Station, made available
the station’s facilities. I am indebted to Roland LaFleche, Richard Phillips,
Kitson Vincent, George Hochbaum and Peter Hochbaum for information and
for aid in collecting; to Jennifer Walker for identifying the plants collected by
the author, to Peter Ward for suggesting trapping localities and for supplying
pertinent information concerning the distribution and abundance of the mam-
mals in past years; and to the various residents of the Delta Region who allowed
me to trap on their land. I am indebted to R. L. Peterson for reading the
manuscript.

EcoLocy

The Delta Marsh, about 50 miles northwest of Winnipeg, is a flat expanse
of 36,000 acres and one of the largest remaining marshes in the Canadian wheat
prairies. ‘The area is part of the lakebed of glacial Lake Agassiz, where over
long periods of time water has deposited thick layers of lacustrine sediments.
Further modification of the soils of the marsh by the addition of large quantities
of plant material from decaying vegetation has resulted in black, rich soils high
in organic content (Ellis, 1938).

In his discussion of the major vegetational regions of Manitoba, Scoggan
(1957) places the Delta Region in the Aspen Parkland, a region of transition
between the true prairie and the coniferous forest and characterized by forest
extending far into the prairie along the rivers and by groves of trees inter-

Mailing date of this number: August 29, 1962
71

G2 Tue CanapiAn FieLtp-NaTuRALIST Vol. 76

spersed by prairie. This region is assigned to Thornthwaite’s (1931) CCd ~
climatic province, that is, it is subhumid, microthermal, and moisture-deficient
at all seasons. The mean annual temperature at Portage la Prairie, 16 miles —
south of Delta, is 35° F. Summer temperatures above 100° F and winter
temperatures of -30° F are not uncommon (Thomas, 1953).

The study area lies at the southern end of Lake Manitoba. A low wooded
sand ridge averaging 100 yards in width separates the marsh from the lake. -
Because of the ridge, there are few water connections between the lake and the
marsh to the south of it. The marsh, an area of large open bays and smaller
isolated sloughs and potholes between the bays and the lake, is fed by surface
runoff alone. ‘The bays and sloughs are bordered by bulrush (Scirpus acutus)
and cattail (Typha latifolia), but the predominant marsh plant is phragmites
(Phragmites communis), which forms large expanses in shallow water. Broken
by occasional meadows, hayfields and pastures, the phragmites extend from the
marsh waters to the ridge on the north and to the prairie wheat fields on the
south.

Three general habitats were trapped. At localities east and west of Delta,
traps were set along the beach ridge in woody associations in which willows
(Salix niger, S. amy gdaloides, S. lucida and S. interior), green ash (Fraxinus
pennyslvanica), burr oak (Quercus macrocarpa), cottonwood (Populus del-
toides) and elm (Ulmus americana) formed dense overstory. Understory was
composed of such woody plants as saskatoon (Amelanchier alnifolia), elder-
berry (Sambucus pubens), American hazelnut (Corylus americana), poison ivy
(Rhus radicans) and choke cherry (Prunus virginiana) and several species of
grass (Agropyron repens, A. trachycaulum, Agrostis stolonifera and Poa pra-
tensis). In several localities the woody areas of the ridge were interrupted by
grass meadows on sandy soil, and Agropyron trachycaulum was the common
grass in such situations.

In grassy areas adjacent to the marsh and in places that had been marsh in
the past but because of low water levels had been drained and invaded by
secondary vegetation of grass, Microtus and Blarina were taken. In these
situations the principal grasses included Hordeum jubatum, Puccinellia nut-
talliana, Scholochloa festucacea and Spartina pectinata.

Fringing the marsh and irregularly distributed in the prairie between
Delta and Portage la Prairie were many groves, locally known as bluffs. These
islands of woody vegetation were ecologically distinct from the surrounding
prairie, and in such places smaller rodents such as Peromyscus, Clethrionomys
and Zapus were common. ‘The plant constituents of the groves varied con-
siderably, and although some groves of pure aspen fringed the marsh on the
southeast, trapping was conducted in groves in which the dominant trees were
pure stands of burr oak or mixtures of oak and Manitoba maple (Acer negun-
do). Such woody plants as wild black current (Ribes americanum), choke |
cherry, elderberry and wolfberry (Symphoricarpus occidentalis) were found
beneath the tall dominants, and various species of grasses and composites com-
prised the ground cover. Surrounding the groves were either prairie or fields.
In fallow field melilot (Melilotus officinales) was the common plant.

1962 Tamsitt: MAMMALS OF THE DELTA MarsH ; 73

ACCOUNTS OF SPECIES

The list includes all the species of mammals that are known to occur or to
have occurred recently in the Delta Marsh Region. Species which may exist
in the region but for which no definite information is available have not been
included. The phylogenetic order and scientific names are those of Miller and
Kellogg (1955), and specimens collected are preserved in the Delta Waterfowl

Research Station Collection and in the Royal Ontario Museum.

Masked SHREW Sorex cinereus (Say).
Tumble-in traps yielded three specimens of
this species. On June 27, an adult female
was taken from tall grass one mile east of
Delta; and on August 6 and 7, two adult
females were trapped from tall wet grass
bordering the marsh at Delta. Sanderson
(1950) obtained a specimen from a grove of
choke cherry, burr oak and dogwood three
miles south of Delta. Two adult females
from Delta are in the Delta Waterfowl Re-
search Station Collection.

Arctic SHREw Sorex articus Kerr. Two
specimens of this species, which occurs in
the Canadian Zone of the eastern Manitoba
and ranges locally westward in the Transi-
tion Zone to Delta, were recorded from
Delta by Soper (1946).

Water Surew Sorex palustris Richardson.
In Manitoba this shrew ranges as far west as
Aweme (Criddle, 1929) and Robinson Por-
tage (Jackson, 1928), but is considered rare
in localities which it has been taken. No
specimens were collected in 1958, but Soper
obtained a young adult male from the shore
of the Delta Research Station pond
(DWRSC).

SHORT-TAILED SHREW Blarina brevicauda
(Say). Although not abundant in any of
the localities in which it was taken, indivi-
duals were more readily taken from tumble-
in traps than from live traps set in moist

situations. On June 27, an adult female was.

obtained from a tall stand of Spartina one
mile east of Delta; and on July 13, two adult
females were trapped from the grassy peri-
phery of an aspen grove three miles south-
west of Clarkleigh on the southeast shore
of Lake Manitoba. Anderson (1946) listed
five specimens from Delta, and two speci-
mens, an adult male and a young adult
female, are in the Delta Waterfowl Re-
search Station Collection. ;

Littte Brown Bar Myotis lucifugus (Le-
Conte). Five adult females and an adult
male were collected from the attic of a
farm house four miles south of Delta in the
afternoon of August 6. These were only a
small sample of the total colony, which
must have been 50 or more in number, This
species was the common bat in the Delta
region, and although often heard at night,
only an occasional solitary individual was
seen. Seton (1909) recorded a specimen
from Poplar Point, 17 miles southwest of
Delta; this bat is probably widely distributed
but as yet unreported from other areas in
southern Manitoba.

SiLver-HatRED Bat Lasionycteris noctiva-
gans (LeConte). Two specimens of this
species are known from Delta (DWRSC).
Although these specimens lack collecting
data, H. A. Hochbaum informed me that
they had been taken several summers ago
from behind shutters in one of the local
cottages.

Wuite-taitep Jack Rapsir Lepus town-
sendii Bachman. Sight records and signs of
this jack rabbit were noted especially in the
dense growths of Spartina found in the
transition zone between the marsh and dry
land south of Delta. An adult female that
measured 578 mm was collected in such a
habitat three miles southeast of Delta.
Specimens from Delta were mentioned by
Soper (1946), but in 1958 no individuals
were seen in the vicinity of the hamlet or
on the beach ridge. 3

SNowsHoE Hare Lepus americanus Erxle-
ben. Widely distributed in varying num-
bers over all southernmost Manitoba, this
hare was relatively common in_ heavily
wooded vegetation on the beach ridges east
of Delta. A specimen was shot July 11 in
dense woods on the beach ridge half a mile
east of Delta.

74 Tue CANADIAN FigLp-NATURALIST

Woopcuuck Marmota monax (Linnaeus).
This animal was observed by Peter Ward
on the beach road four miles east of Delta
on June 23 and by George Hochbaum in the
hamlet of Delta on the same date. The
flooding of the Delta area in 1955 had a
deleterious effect on populations of wood-
chucks established on the beach ridge, and
these individuals were the first seen in the
vicinity in two years.

RicHarpson’s GrouND SquirreEL Citellus
richardsomii (Sabine). Strictly a prairie
animal, this species was characterized by
large local populations in short grass of fal-
low fields south of the Delta marsh. This
squirrel and the thirteen-lined ground
(Citellus tridecemlineatus) occurred together
in transition areas at the edge of open
prairie.

Sanderson (1949) found this species to be
common on the beach ridges of Lake Mani-
toba in 1945, but only C. franklinu was seen
on the ridges in 1958. The flood of 1955
completely eliminated squirrel populations
in this area, and only C. franklinu has sub-
sequently re-invaded the habitat.

Record stations of occurrence are: 9
miles southeast of Delta, 1; 5 miles north of
Portage la Prairie, 2; 1.6 miles northwest of
St. Laurent, 1. Two additional specimens
collected near Delta in 1940 are in the
Delta Waterfowl Research Station Collec-
tion.

THIRTEEN-LINED GRoUND SQuiIRREL Citellus
tridecemlineatus (Mitchill). The smallest
of the Manitoba ground squirrels, this spe-
cies was frequently seen in brush or timber-
ed areas at the edge of open prairie. In July
1958 four specimens were shot in short
grass situations at the following localities:
5.6 miles north of Portage la Prairie, 1; 2.5
miles south of Delta, 1; 6 miles south-south-
east of Delta, 2. An additional specimen, an
adult albino female, was obtained September
10, 1957, near the hamlet of St. Norbert, 6
miles south of Winnipeg.

FRANKLIN'S GROUND SQUIRREL Citellus
franklini (Sabine). This species was the
only squirrel inhabiting the wooded lake
ridges and stream and marshland borders
south of Lake Manitoba. When trapping
started in early June only a few adult ani-

Vol. 76

mals were present. However, by late July -
juvenile and young adult animals were seen
in large numbers. Three specimens were ob-
tained in June and July from the following
localities: 1.5 miles west of Delta; 3 miles
east of Delta; 7 miles east of Delta.

Sowls (1948) studied Citellus franklinii
periodically from 1938 through 1946 and
presented considerable evidence to indicate
that Franklin’s ground squirrel is a serious
predator on duck eggs. In 1958 this squirrel
and the striped skunk (Mephitis mephitis)
accounted for most of the damage to nests
of ducks in the Delta Marsh.

Gray SouirreL Sciurus carolinensis Gmel-
in. Although quite rare in the district 15
years ago, populations of this species have
reached the size where they are considered
to be pests by farmers in the Portage la
Prairie — Delta region. Individuals were
seen in many oak groves and shelter belts
of the area, and an adult female was taken
July 9 from an oak grove three miles south
of Delta. An additional specimen was ob-
tained by William Carrick from near West-
bourne, a small hamlet 10 miles west of
Delta.

This squirrel was not found on the beach
ridges of Lake Manitoba, and although the
dense overstory of woody plants appeared
to be a suitable habitat, the marsh that
separates the beach ridges from the adjacent
farmland apparently acts as a barrier to the
dispersal of this species.

NortHEern Pocket GopHer Thomomys tal-
poides (Richardson). This was the only
gopher in the area, and mounds were com-
monly seen in dry meadows, fields and |
clearings in scattered timber where the soil
was of a sandy nature. This species was not
present on the beach ridges of Lake Mani-
toba nor in areas immediately adjacent to
the Delta Marsh. None were obtained, des-
pite repeated efforts to secure them. Two
adult specimens that lack locality data are in
the Delta Waterfowl Research Station Col-
lection.

Deer Mouse Peromyscus maniculatus
(Wagner). This species was the most
abundant rodent of the hardwood forests of
the area, and traps set in woody vegetation
on the beach ridges and oak groves near the
marsh yielded 178 specimens in 440 trap

1962

nights. In 1947 Sanderson (1950) investigated
small mammal populations of a prairie grove
south of Delta and found P. maniculatus
abundant in adjoining fields and Microtus
pennsylvanicus the dominant rodent in the
grove. In 1958, however, traps set adjacent
to prairie groves yielded M. pennsylvanicus
and Clethrionomys gapperi but no P. mani-
culatus.

Populations of P. maniculatus in 1958 were
at a peak, and an examination of the catch
during June and July showed considerable
difference in age composition. In early June
twice as many juveniles as adults were taken.
Of 26 individuals taken from 40 traps on
June 9, 17 were juvenile animals and nine
were adults, whereas on July 26 only three
of 24 animals captured were adults. The
remainder were young adults.

Specimens of the dark eastern subspecies
(P. m. bairdii) have been recorded from
various localities in the province, including
the general region of Delta. Soper (1946)
has records of typical specimens from Win-
nipeg, the south shore of Lake Manitoba,
Stony Mountain, Mowbray and Aweme.
Soper (1946) found that animals west of
these localities for a distance of 150 miles
showed considerable individual variation,
and that in this area intergradation between
P. m. bairdiu and P. m. osgoodii is most evi-
dent. Specimens from the Delta area were
typically dusky, but there was one exception.
An adult male taken eight miles east of
Delta possessed the pale coloration typical
of the race P. m. osgoodii. Although this
locality is to the east of the supposed inter-
gradation area, if intergradation between
the two subspecies is occurring in the Delta
region, it is of an extremely limited nature.

Specimens were obtained from the fol-
lowing localities: Winnipeg, 1; half a mile
east of Delta, 3; 1 mile east of Delta, 2; 1.5
miles east of Delta, 4; 8 miles east of Delta,
2; 1 mile south of Delta, 5; 3.4 miles south
of Delta, 3; 3 miles southeast of Delta, 1;
Delta, 1.

Gapper’s Rep-BackeD Mouse Clethriono-
mys gapperi (Vigors). Specimens were
trapped in wooded areas of the beach ridge
and in oak groves where the understory was
quite dense. Record stations of occurrence
are: half a mile east of Delta, 2; 1.5 miles
east of Delta, 1; 3.4 miles south of Delta, 2;
Delta, 2. Two additional skins from Delta

Tamsirt: MAMMALS OF THE DeLtta Marsu 75

are in the Delta Waterfowl Research Sta-
tion Collection.

Meravow Vote Microtus pennsylvanicus
(Ord). Although probably one of the com-
mon rodents in the area, repeated attempts
to trap them alive met with little success,
This vole was frequently seen in the day-
time in meadows peripheral to the marsh,
and runways were most frequently seen in
dense stands of Phragmites communis, Hor-
deum jubatum and other grasses. An adult
female with six embryos averaging 13.6 mm
in length was captured in a fallow field 3.4
miles south of Delta on June 11. On July
15, an adult female was taken from dense
grass near an old railroad bed one mile
south of Delta; and on July 13, two speci-
mens were collected in the grassy peri-
phery of an aspen grove three miles south-
west of Clarkleigh on the southeast shore of
Lake Manitoba. Microtus apparently are not
adverse to swimming (Criddle, 1956). On
June 23, one was taken from a Phragmites
mat 300 feet from the shore of Cadam Bay,
one mile east of Delta.

Muskrat Ondatra zibethicus (Linneaus).
During the summer of 1958 populations
were low, and muskrat houses were seen
only at the edge of sloughs and areas of
limited water. In previous years fluctua-
tions in the water level of the marsh, heavy
trapping by local residents and a severe out-
break of Errington’s disease (Olsen, 1959)
had caused the reduction of the population
to approximately 10 per cent its normal size.

According to Olsen (1959), the muskrats
in the Delta Marsh are a composite of the
three races O. 2. zibethicus, O. z. cinnamo-
munus and O,. z. albus. Southern Manitoba
appears to be an area of intergradation
between the three subspecies, and in size the
Delta muskrats show the dominance of the
smaller northern subspecies albus. In colora-

‘tion, however, the cimmamominus compo-

nent appears to dominate.

Record stations of occurrence are: 1
mile east of Delta, 1; 1.5 miles west of Del-
ta, 1; 6 miles southeast of Delta, 1.

Norway Rar Rattus norvegicus (Berken-
hout). According to reports of residents
rats have not occurred in the Delta area for
many years. There is a single skin in the
Delta Waterfowl Research Station Collec-
tion.

76 THe CANapIAN Fie_p-NATURALIST

House Mouse Mus musculus Waterhouse.
This species was rare in inhabited situations
at Delta. One was taken from the duck
hatchery at the Research Station on July
19.

Meapow Jumpine Mouse Zapus hudsonius
(Zimmermann). In Minnesota Quimby
(1951) found jumping mice to be more
common in the moist lowlands than in drier
lowlands, and Tamsitt (1960) found the
favored habitat to be hydrosere communi-
ties near streams and lakes in Riding Moun-
tain National Park, Manitoba. In the Delta
area, however, this mouse was taken only in
dry upland situations and never in moist
habitats. On the beach ridges near Delta,
jumping mice inhabited the higher portions
in association with Clethrionomys gapperi
and Peromyscus maniculatus.

Four adult females were collected near
Delta in June; they were from upland areas
dominated by Manitoba maple. Krutzsch
(1954) records one specimen from Delta.
Two adult specimens from Delta are in the
Delta Waterfowl Research Station Collec-
tion.

Coyote Canis latrans Say. Although none
were seen on the Lake Manitoba beach
ridges, coyotes do roam in areas south of
the Delta Marsh. In late June Richard Phil-
lips heard several calling one morning. Oc-
casional individuals have been seen from
time to time by farmers of the area.

Timser Wo tr Canis lupus Miller. In past
years the abundance of the wolves in the
area, has varied, but populations are con-
trolled. to a considerable extent by local
residents. H. A. Hochbaum stated that
tracks of these animals have been seen on
the beach ridges east of Delta, and this is
entirely possible if the animals moved
across the frozen lake during the winter
months and became stranded after the
spring thaw. No tracks or signs were seen
during the summer of 1958, but two large
wolves were killed the previous winter near
East Meadow, a goose sanctuary located on
the southeast shore of Lake Manitoba.

An early record of this species is that of
Gresham (1938), who recorded that a large
wolf was killed in November 1937 at
Dacotah, a hamlet 30 miles southeast of
Delta. The Great Plains gray wolf (C. J.

Vol. 76

nubilus) formerly ranged across the Great
Plains region from southern Alberta
through southwestern Manitoba (Miller and
Kellogg, 1955; Young and Goldman, 1944),
but it is probably now extinct in Manitoba.
The Dacotah locality may be one of the last
nubilus records but is more likely griseoal-
bus, the subspecies that invades the Delta
Marsh from the north.

Rep Fox Vulpes vulpes (Linn). Indivi-
duals of this holarctic species (see Churcher,
1950) were common in the Delta Region.
During June and July a family of four
young foxes and an adult were frequently
seen on an oak ridge 1.5 miles south of
Delta. Another family of three young foxes
and an adult were seen by H. A. Hoch-
baum in July five miles southwest of Delta.
On June 12, a skull of a red fox was found
3.5 miles south of Delta by Richard Phillips.

Raccoon Procyon lotor (Linnaeus). The
raccoon reaches the northern limit of its
range in southern Manitoba, and although
the animal has been exterminated in many
districts, populations are well established in
the Delta region. During June and July
tracks were seen in various localities along
the edge of the marsh; and on July 26, four
young raccoons were seen by Richard
Phillips in a tree 1.3 miles east of Delta. On
August 6 Jennifer Walker saw two young
individuals near the south shore of the
marsh, four miles southeast of Delta.

The animal was recorded from the area
for the first time when tracks were seen at
Delta by Aldo Leopold in 1939. In August
1940 a young raccoon was found in the
Delta Marsh by Sowls (1949), and in
February 1948 Sowls (1949) obtained two
additional specimens from an oak grove
south of Delta.

Marten Martes americana (Turton).
One record of this species in the Delta area
has been provided by Hagmeier (1956).
This animal was captured from a poplar
grove near the Research Station during the
winter of 1951-1952.

Ermine Mustela erminea (Merriam). A
mumified specimen was recovered from a
muskrat burrow four miles south of Delta
on July 10. In early May an adult and
several young were seen in the vicinity of

1962

the Research Station, and several times
during the summer months an individual
was seen in the duck hatchery. Two adult
specimens from Delta are in the Delta
Waterfowl Research Station Collection.

Least WeaseL Mustela rixosa (Bangs).
This weasel is recorded by Soper (1946)
from Delta and from the Big Grass Marsh
northwest of Delta, and Hall (1951) report-
ed specimens from Gypsumville and Lake
St. Martin Reserve in southern Manitoba.

Lone-TaiLteD WeaseL Mustela frenata
Lichtenstein. In early June a long-tailed
weasel was seen crossing the east beach
road one mile east of Delta; and on August
1, an individual was seen in a clearing among
Phragmites immediately south of the Re-
search Station. Sanderson (1949) trapped a
female from a sandy ridge near Delta, and
Sowls (1948) observed a long-tailed weasel
killing a Franklin’s ground squirrel after
having taken it from its hibernating burrow.
One specimen of this species from Delta is
in the Delta Waterfowl Research Station
Collection, and Hall (1951) has additional
records from Portage la Prairie, Carberry,
Carmer and Max Lake, Turtle Mountain.

Minx Mustela vison Schreber. An adult
female was obtained on August 8 at Fort
White, four miles southwest of Winnipeg.

Tamsitt: MAMMALS OF THE DELTA MarsH TG

No specimens were seen or trapped at Del-
ta in 1958. According to Olsen (1959) mink
populations in the Delta Marsh were low in
1956 and 1957, with seven to 10 adult fe-
males in residence along the beach ridge and
up to 25 or 30 hunting through the marsh
during the winter.

Bapcer Taxidea taxus (Schreber). Be-
tween 1934 and 1943 Soper (1946) saw only
a few scattered signs of badger in southern
Manitoba. Although the species apparently
was common a few years ago in the Delta
Region, previously inhabited burrows were
found to be abandoned in 1958.

Srripep Skunk Mephitis mephitis (Schre-
ber). Skunks were quite common in the
Delta Marsh and were most commonly seen
on dirt roads at dusk and toward sunrise.
Records of occurrence are: 1 mile south of
Delta, 2; 3 miles east of Delta, 1; 4 miles
west of Minnedosa, 1

Whuite-Taitep DEER Odocoileus virgimana
(Zimmermann). According to Seton (1909)
this deer first entered Manitoba in 1880 and
since then has steadily increased in number
until the animal is common to abundant in
prairie areas of southern Manitoba. This
species was often seen on the beach ridges
of Lake Manitoba, and tracks were seen in
other areas adjacent to the Delta Marsh.

REFERENCES

Anperson, R. M. 1946. Catalogue of Cana-
dian recent mammals. Bull. nat. Mus.
Canada 102.

Cuurcuer, C. S. 1959. The specific status
of the New World red fox. J. Mammal.
40: 513-520.

Cripple, Stuart. 1929. An annotated list
of the mammals of Aweme, Manitoba.
Can. Field Nat. 43: 155-159.

1956. Drummond’s vole in Mani-
toba. Can. Field Nat. 70: 78-84.

Exuts, J. H. 1938. The soils of Manitoba.
Manitoba Economic Survey Board.

GresHaM, B. 1938. A wolf record from
the Winnipeg area. Can. Field Nat. 52:
29

Hacmerr, E. M. 1956. Distribution of
marten fad fisher in North ATEN Can.
Field Nat. 70: 149-168.

Harr, E. R. 1951. American weasels.
Publ. Mus. nat. Hist. Univ. Kans. 4:
1-466.

Qumspy, D. C.

Jackson, H. T. 1928. A taxonomic review
of the American long-tailed shrews (Gen-
era Sorex and Maicrosorex), N. Amer.
Fauna 51: 1-238.

Krurzscu, P. H. 1954. North American
jumping mice (Genus Zapus). Publ. Mus.
nat. Hist. Univ. Kans. 7: 349-472.

Muter, G. S., Jr., AND REMINGTON KELLOGG.
1955. List of North American “recent
mammals. Bull. U.S. nat. Mus. 205.

Otsen, P. F. 1959. Muskrat breeding biol-
ogy at Delta, Manitoba. J. Wildl. Mgmt
23: 40-53.

1951.
ecology of the jumping mouse,
hbudsonius. Ecol. Mon. 21: 61-95.

Sanperson, G. C. 1949. Growth and be-
havior of a litter of captive long-tailed
weasels. J. Mammal. 30: 412-415.

1950. Small-mammal population

of a prairie grove. J. Mammal. 31: 17-25.

The life history and
Zapus

78 THE CANADIAN FieLp-NATURALIST Vol. 76

Scoccan, H. J. 1957. Flora of Manitoba. ————— . 1949. Notes on the raccoon
Bull. nat. Mus. Canada 140. (Procyon lotor hirtus) in Manitoba. J.
Seton, E. T. 1909. Life histories of north- Mammal. 30: 313-314,

ern animals. An account of the mammals !AMsiTT, J. R. 1960. Some mammals of
of Manitoba. 2 vol. New York, Double- Riding Mountain National Park, Mani-

d AGA tae toba. Can. Field Nat. 74: 147-150.
abiy ee sees Tuomas, M. K. 1953. Climatological atlas
Soper, J. D. 1946. Mammals of the north- of (Canada... Ganada. Numonaleamecnea

ern great plains along the international

boundary in Canada. J. Mammal. 27: 127- THorRNTHWaITE, C. W. 1931. The climates
153. of North America according to a new

Sowis, L. K. 1948. The Franklin ground classification. Geogr. Rev. 21: 633-655.
squirrel, Citellus franklinii (Sabine), and Youn, S. P., anp E. A. Gorpman. 1944.
its relationship to nesting ducks. J. Mam- The wolves of North America. Washing-
mal. 29: 113-137. ton, American Wildlife Institute.

Council.

Received for publication 29 September 1960

We

EIGHTH CENSUS OF NON-PASSERINE BIRDS IN THE
BIRD SANCTUARIES ON THE NORTH SHORE
OF THE GULF OF ST. LAWRENCE

Gaston Molsan
Canadian Wildlife Service, Ottawa, Ontario

The eighth quinquennial census of non-passerine birds in the sanctuaries —
on the North Shore of the Gulf of St. Lawrence was conducted during the
period of June 16 to June 29, 1960. “Transportation was provided by the
Royal Canadian Mounted Police ship “Irvine”, which left Rimouski June 15
and returned on July 1. We enjoyed good weather most of the time and so
were able to complete the census in a relatively brief period. ‘The ship’s
crew was very co-operative and even assisted with the field work. I was
assisted also by Mr. John Pippy, a student from Memorial University, St.
John’s, Newfoundland.

The census was carried out about two weeks later than the seventh census,
conducted in 1955, to insure that all the birds would be nesting at the time of
our visit. This change in dates proved to be desirable, except that the eggs of
the Red-throated Loons had all hatched prior to our arrival.

79

Census oF Birp SANCTUARIES

Motsan

1962

64618 | OOLSTT | ChP8) 88ZLLS| C8LS | HS9Z | 9001 | FEL | 9ITL97Z| COLLT| 6FSSZ | Z98TZ | 9T6T | OLOF | 6P8Z | 99IT | 1S9z | 988E | OL8E OLSE | 86TE | CLIZ STVLOL

TLPET | OOLTO | O8TZ | 8SZ6r SE8P | 8ESC | OPZIT| 0496 | Z (6 SO? | c€~ | T 0 uygnid WOUurwto)
OZ6l 166 HIT | OL vst 002 | 06€ cle Las Oot 9ET | 97T Lt 8T OV 02 SCI | Stl JOW[[IND Yel,
SOLIT | POcZT | OST | OOSZ OZSOT | OLOL | SLOT | FSOZ | 0 OL9 etn, WouU0)
OTCOL | 6O8P8T | OOTT | 0009 SPVS | 906£ | OFZ6 | O£08 | 6F 9S £¢ PE STE | bP PE SZ 4NY pel[iq-10zey
SP OL SP OL utoy uerdseD
CHET | OSE 0 OT PvP 0 O£7 8 8 VP cOT | C8 19S | 8c |€ G 097 | 9LT SUI9} STOIY pue UOUIUWIOD)
667 8672 0 OZT | 0Sz |0 Ore | SLT oTEMIADS
TOC | 06L72 OOET | HIE 99PF 0 SEL | ZOLT OOS | FIZ IIMS pelirq-sury
CE6OT | C6F9 O80¢ | PS8IT | Z8E | 9LZ | S8ST | ZEOT | OOZT | F9E tS 99 SOT | 99 OS8 | v2L | OOZT | O€ET | OTT | OSFT 1M sua
168I | PCLT 0 v Sv | 06 PIT 9S SOF 8PL V6F 8h7 £67 | 892 | LOE | O6T | 79 $9 v9 Vs L G IIND peyseq-yselg 7ee15)
caus (aa OT oT 0 Z t 8 87 91 L Zt 9€ |F2 Iz |0 Or 9 0 97 0 G qedidputs pa}j0dg
ST iS ‘4 ¥ T 0 L T S 0 IAOCTq psyeuyedruras
L 9¢ 0 9 0 oe € 0 Si 0 i 0 dgsuesIsIY pe}see1q-pay
O£OTT | 8898 OCTET | OS6 | £972 CHL | 8P9T | OSHE | OZ9T | 9OZTT | S86 | O16 | OFT | OFF | SOL | OBST | SZOZ | OZ61 | ZZT | OF1 Joply WOUTWIOD
¢ C S$ GC [P2L PpesuIM-uUsdI5)
9 G 0 4 € 0 T 0 c 0 [reqwUlg
14 19 0 02 Y (6 (4 T c 8 0 0} eT 0 ONG YAU
£9S OL 0 97 0 vas TOT O8T OSZ | OL (a! 0 002 | 07 JUCIOUIIOT) po}Se19-9[Gnod
ccs 829 css 819 JULIOWIOD uesdomng
1S C8 (6 Vas 8 1X4 8 OT Or i ¢€ V7 uoOT pe}eO1Y}-pay
096T SS6T | 0961 | SS6T | O96T | SS6T | OOGT | SS6T | O96T | SS6T | O96T | SS6T | O096T | SS6T | 0961 | SS6T | O96T | SS6I | 096T | SS6I | O96T | SS6T

aR ray PreK Pe a sataadsg
s[e}OL ce oe BUl}eII/[ See Aeg JIOM pueysy soy | nysrysie AA | suUeNOYyd}og Pane eetoas i

EE Ee eee ee a ee

HINAYMVT] “LS 4O ATINS) AHL AHO AYOHS HLUYON AHL NO

0961 — SSot

SHIAVALINVS Gulq AHL NI sdulg ANIWASSVG-NON AO SASNAD — "J ATAV

80 . Tue CanapiAn Fietp-NatTurRALIST Vol. 76

The procedure used was that described by Lewis (1942) and modified by
Lemieux (1956). The census was taken by counting the birds present, with-
out trying to estimate the number of birds away fishing or breeding. Estima-
tion of birds not actually present would seem to be too subjective a procedure,
taking into account that the census is often conducted by different people in
different years. Estimates presented herein and by Lemieux are thus con-
servative.

The total number of birds counted in 1960 was 81,979, a drop of 29 per
cent from 1955 and 17 per cent from 1950. The bird population had increased
in seven sanctuaries and decreased in three; the decline in the whole population
resulted, in great part, from the 90 per cent drop in the puffin colony of
Bradore Bay Bird Sanctuary. Common Eiders had increased by 26 per cent,
Herring Gulls by 65 per cent, Common and Arctic terns ‘by 200 per cent.
Except for Common Puffins, which had decreased by 62 per cent, the other
species were holding their own, and only slight changes were noted. :

On Caroussel Island Bird Sanctuary, the total population had increased by
almost 50 per cent. The increase was due to a higher number of Herring
Gulls and Kitttwakes. Other species showed only slight variations, mostly
upward from 1955.

The bird population in the Birch Islands Sanctuary was almost exactly the
same as in 1955, except for the appearance of a small colony of 250 Kittiwakes.

The Betchouane Sanctuary showed a sharp decrease in the number of
eiders, and the colony of Kittiwakes which was there at the last census had
disappeared. No significant changes in the other species were noted. We
observed some evidence of egging, and we suspect that this might have been
the cause of the decrease in population.

All species showed a sharp increase in Watshishu Sanctuary, particularly
eiders, gulls, and terns. “his Sanctuary, which had been constantly deteriorat-
ing for ten years, may recover following the closing down of a mine at Baie
Johan Beetz which was bringing heavy boat traffic into the area. We also had
the opportunity to observe carefully a Black Tern which had jomed some 200
Common Terns in a colony.

In Fog Island Sanctuary, the population showed a 50 per cent drop since
1955. This was the result of the disappearance of a colony of Common
Murres and a 90 per cent decrease in the Ring-billed Gull colony which prob-
ably had moved elsewhere. Only slight variations were noted for other
species. “This Sanctuary was without a caretaker for two seasons and this may
account for the wiping out of the murre colony.

Wolf Bay Bird Sanctuary is one of the best on the North Shore. Eiders, |
Herring and Great Black-backed gulls, terns, auks, and puffins showed an
increase, while murres, Double-crested Cormorants, and Black Guillemots de-
creased. A new colony of Ring-billed Gulls has established itself on one of
the islands. The total bird population has grown by 15 per cent.

St. Mary’s Islands Bird Sanctuary also showed a sharp increase. Eiders,
Herring Gulls, terns, auks, murres, and puffins were in substantially greater
numbers, whereas slightly lower numbers of European Cormorants and Great

1962 Motsan: Census oF Birp SANCTUARIES 81

Black-backed Gulls were observed. No Double-crested Cormorants were
noted, but it is possible that some were missed among the European Cormorants.
Here again, as everywhere, all the Red-throated Loons had finished nesting
and a few broods were seen. The pair of Thick-billed Murres has not been
observed this year.

The Mecatina Sanctuary, which had been deteriorating for many years,
seems to be holding its own now. We noted a slight upward trend in most
of the species, even though only a total of 1000 birds was observed. A few
terns have made their appearance and bred this year, but the cormorants have
left.

The bird population of St. Augustin Sanctuary had more than doubled.
This increase was due mostly to the establishment of a new Ring-billed Gull
colony and to the continued growth of the Herring and Great Black-backed
gull populations. The eider stock was also slightly better. No Black Ducks
or terns were observed this time.

The tenth and last sanctuary, Bradore Bay, has taken an alarming dip.
This Sanctuary had 57,000 birds in 1955 and 8,000 in 1960. All species have
suffered —auks and murres, and particularly puffins. We are unable to ex-
plain this phenomenon. Many things may have happened since 1955 when
the Sanctuary was last visited by a biologist. Two years without a caretaker
and the appointment of a new one make it impossible to know whether the
sharp decline happened gradually or suddenly. It is hard to believe that
poaching alone could have had this effect, since no evidence of digging or
disturbance could be found. There is a possibility that puffins may live in
discrete populations. In that case, the whole population may have moved
somewhere else or been wiped out at sea by oil pollution on the east coast of
Newfoundland. At any rate, the situation will be watched closely every
year from now on to check whether or not this puffin colony will recover.

In summary, species showing an increase in 1960 included Common Eider,
Herring Gull, Kittiwake, Common and Arctic terns, and Black Guillemot.
Decline of some importance has been found for Common Puffin, Common
Murre, Razor-billed Auk, Caspian Tern, Double-crested and European cormo-
rants. [he other species occurred in numbers comparable to 1955 — Spotted
Sandpiper, Great Black-backed Gull, Ring-billed Gulls —or their numbers
were too small to have any significance.

To conclude, we may say that the general situation is good. We note,
however, that the three sanctuaries which show a decrease in bird number are
all locations where caretakers had to be replaced, which means a period of one
or two years without anybody on the spot. This seems to point to the im-
portance of good supervision and enforcement.

REFERENCES

Hewitt, Oxiver H. 1950. Fifth census of Lewis, Harrison F. 1925. The new bird
non-passerine birds in the sanctuaries of
the north shore of the Gulf of St. Law-
rence. Can. Field Nat. 64: 73-76, Can. Field Nat. 39: 177-179.

sanctuaries in the Gulf of St. Lawrence.

82 Tue CanapiANn FieLtp-NATURALIST Vol. 76

a . 1931. Five years’ progress in the — the north shore of the Gulf of St. Law-

bird sanctuaries of the north shore of the rence. Can. Field Nat. 56: 5-8,

Gulf of St. Lawrence. Can. Field Nat. 45: TENEr, J. S. 1951. Sixth census of non-

73-78. passerine birds in the bird sanctuaries of
===> . 1937. A decade of progress in the north shore of the Gulf of St. Law-

the bird sanctuaries of the north shore of rence. Can. Field Nat. 65: 65-68.

the Gulf of St. Lawrence. Can. Field. Nat. Lemieux, L. 1956. Seventh census of non-

51: 51-55. passerine birds in the bird sanctuaries of
———— . 1942. Fourth census of the non- the north shore of the Gulf of St. Law-

passerine birds in the bird sanctuaries of rence. Can. Field Nat, 70: 183-185.

Received for publication 3 August 1961

Ws

SOME NEW DATA ON INTROGRESSION IN FLICKERS
FROM BRITISH COLUMBIA*

ANTHONY J. ERSKINE
Canadian Wildlife Service, P.O. Box 180, Sackville, New Brunswick

In 1843 Audubon illustrated Colaptes ayresti, which was later recognized
as a hybrid or intermediate between C. cafer and C. auratus (Baird et al, 1860).
Since then, Flicker hybrids have been found to be widely distributed through
North America, mainly in the Great Plains and the Great Basin. Many
workers (e.g. Allen, 1892; Short, 1959) have discussed the distribution, varia-
tion, and relationships of such forms.

In this study are discussed some of the variations in a group of nestling and
adult Flickers handled for banding in the Cariboo district of British Columbia,
near the center of the hybrid zone. The Flickers breeding in that region
have been described (Munro and Cowan, 1947) as C. cafer with an infusion
of C. auratus blood.

The present data were collected while the writer was working as a
graduate student in the Zoology Department of the University of British
Columbia, under Wildlife Fellowships from Canadian Industries Limited.
Thanks are extended to W. D. McLaren and to M. T. Myres, for permission
to use their Flicker data in this paper, to A. J. Wiggs, for assistance in the
field, and to L. L. Short, for helpful discussion during the preparation of the
manuscript.

*Contribution from Department of Zoology, University of British Columbia, Vancouver 8, British
Columbia.

1962 ERSKINE: INTROGRESSION IN FLICKERS 83

TABLE 1. — FLICKERS EXAMINED IN THE CARIBOO DistrIicT, BRITISH COLUMBIA

Bander Year No. Adults No. Nestlings No. Broods*
Myres 1955 0 17 3(1)
Erskine 1958 7+ 90 16(3)

1959 6T 45 10(5)
McLaren 1959 1 25 6(2)
Total 13+ 179 35(11)

* The number of broods in which not all young were examined is given in parentheses.
+ One adult was examined both in 1958 and 1959. :

Hysrip CHARACTERS

Allen (1892) listed seven characters distinguishing C. cafer from C. auratus,
and Short (1959) used six of those in computing “hybrid indices”. Several of
those characters, however, are not suited to objective estimation except in
comparison with selected series of specimens. Deakin (1936) used only four
characters: colour of wing and tail linings, of malar stripes, of throat, and of
the nuchal region, and the same four were used in the present study. It was
not possible here to make fully objective estimations of throat colour in the
field with no specimens for comparison, and data for that character are rather
unsatisfactory.

Besides variations due to hybridization, black malar stripes in C. auratus
occur only in males among adults, but are said to occur in nestlings of both
sexes, (Allen, 1892). Burns (1900) stated that nestling females of C. auratus
have a narrower nuchal bar than have males. Differences between the sexes
in C. cafer are considered to be parallel in nestlings and in adults, males having
red malar stripes and females brown, fawn, or gray stripes, often little differ-
entiated in colour from adjacent areas.

MarTeriats AND METHODS

Table I lists the birds examined for hybrid characters during banding, near
100 Mile House, Springhouse, and Riske Creek, in British Columbia. Myres’
data were gathered independently, and are not completely comparable with
the rest, but have been used where possible.

In this study, three classes in colour of wing and tail linings — red, orange,
and yellow — were distinguished. Seven classes of malar stripe colour — 0, 10,
25, 50, 75, 90, and 100 percent of red, and six levels of expression of the nuchal
bar—0, 5, 25, 50, 75, and 100 percent — were used. Five classes in throat
colour — 0, 25, 50, 75, and 100 percent of fawn or gray — were listed, although
assignment to a given class was sometimes less certain than for the other
characters.

84 Tue CANADIAN FieLp-NATURALIST Vol. 76

TABLE 2. — OCCURENCE OF MALAR STRIPES OF DIFFERENT COLOURS

Malar Stripe
Malar Stems black ancien ad (% red)
not black or red (males)
(females)
0 10 25 50 75 90 100
Complete (a) 19 5 1 4 5 4 3 15
Broods
(b) 42 2 3 49
Partial Broods 9 1 2 1 4 4 5
Totals 70 aes 3 4 6 11 RG

(a) critical examination; (b) uncritical examination.

RESULTS AND Discussion

1) The apparent sex ratio was obtained on the assumption that only
males showed either red or black in the malar region. Examination for this
character was at first uncritical. The distribution by colour classes is given
in Table 2. The overall total gives an apparent sex ratio of 109 males to 70
females, a ratio of 156:100, but that figure includes. the uncritical data.
Furthermore, on several occasions it was noted that females were less docile
during handling, and tended to leave the nest first when fledging took place;
inclusion of data for partial broods may thus also introduce inaccuracies. The
apparent sex ratio for the ten complete broods examined critically is 37 males
to 19 females, or 195:100, which departs significantly (p < 0.05) from an even
sex ratio. That suggests that the original assumption is incorrect, and that
some females may show red and/or black in the malar region.

Nestlings with completely black malar stripes are said to be distributed
equally between the sexes in C. auratus, so the birds with black malar stripes
may include some females. One may also compute sex ratios using other
criteria, based upon colour of malar stripes, as indications of each sex, and that
is done in Table 3. From those data, it appears probable that some birds
showing small amounts of red in predominantly black malar stripes may be
females, and the sex ratio is probably less unbalanced than it appeared at first
sight.

2) The expression of the nuchal bar appeared to be linked to the colour
of the malar stripe. Only one bird having neither red nor black in the malar
region had even a 50 percent expression of the nuchal bar, whereas over half of
the “males” had 50 percent or greater expression. Varying combinations of
malar stripe colour are tabulated against the expression of the nuchal bar in
Table 4. In view of the scatter away from the “cafer-auratus axis’, those two
hybrid characters probably vary independently. On the other hand, it is also

1962 ERSKINE: INTROGRESSION IN FLICKERS 85

TABLE 3. — SEX RATIOS CALCULATED ON VARIOUS CRITERIA OF SEX*

Number of :
Males are those whose Sex Ratio URE
Malar Stripes show M:100F (chi-square)
Males Females 4

any red or black 37 19 195:100 . _ 5.79
any red, and half those se

with all black 34 22 _-155:100 2.57
over 10% red, and half of ; ‘

others with some black 34 22 ~~...) -* 155:100 Deh
over 25% red, and half ie

of others with some black 32 24 133:100 1.14
over 50% red, and half

of others with some black 29 27 107:100 0.07
over 75% red, and half

of others with some black 27 29 93:100 0.07
all red, and half of others .

with some black 26 30 87:100 0.29

* Data for complete broods examined critically.

TABLE 4. — EXPRESSION OF THE NUCHAL BAR RELATIVE TO MALAR STRIPE COLOUR*

Nuchal Bar
Percent Red in
Malar Stripe

0 5 25 50 75 100

cafer
90-100 6 1 3 1 8 7
75 2 1 Z, 1 1 1
50 3 2 1
25 D 2
5 1 1 1
0 4 2
auratus
no red or black
in malar stripe 16 6 5 1

* Only critical data for malar stripe colour.

86 Tue CanapiAN Fietp-NaTuRALIstT Vol. 76

apparent that expression of the nuchal bar is repressed, not only in birds
lacking red and black in the malar region (females), but also in the classes
having a little red in predominantly black malar stripes. Besides suggesting
that the nuchal bar is repressed in female Flickers, those data also lend support
to the hypothesis that some birds having mixed red and black malar stripes
may be females.

Some data on variations of nuchal bar expression within a family group
appear to be significant. Among 24 complete broods, only four had all birds
with less than 25 percent expression of the nuchal bar, and in all of those
broods no birds showed any trace of red on the nape. Presumably both
parents of those broods lacked the genes for red colour in the nuchal region.
Of 11 partial broods, five had all young with 25 percent or less of nuchal bar,
and three of those broods had all birds with no trace of red on the nape. It
seems evident that the genes for the nuchal bar show great variation in expres-
sivity, so that only if such genes are absent will all young show less than 25
percent expression.

The female parents of three banded broods were handled, and female
parents of three others were seen; eight male parents were seen, of which four
were handled. Female parents gave rise to four, out of a total of 13, female
offspring (31 percent), with more expression of the nuchal bar than they
themselves showed, but 15 of 21 male offspring (71 percent) showed more
red than did their mothers. Male parents had eight, out of 20, male offspring
(40 percent) having more red in the nuchal region than had their parent,
whereas none of the 13 female offspring had more red than had their fathers.
This again tends to confirm the greater expression of the nuchal bar in male

birds.

3) The colour of the wing and tail linings varied very little in the
sample examined. Only three birds, one handled by Erskine and two by
McLaren, were felt to warrant use of the term “orange”. Finer variations in
colour of wing and tail linings may be detectable only by comparison with a
museum series.

4) In the sample studied, cafer characteristics predominated, but not all
characters were equally skewed to the cafer end of the scale. With the 50
percent class (orange in the case of colour of linings) taken as neutral, per-
centages of the other estimations on the cafer side of the mid-point were com-
puted, as follows: colour of linings 91, colour of throat 89, expression of
nuchal bar 70, colour of malar stripe (critical estimations only) 67. Differ-
ences between the sexes were significant only in the case of the nuchal bar.
Possibly a more critical study might modify the values for colour of linings
and of throat towards the level found for the characters receiving particular
attention in this study.

Among birds actually handled, 7 of 13 adults, and 58 of 179 nestlings,
were phenotypically pure C. cafer, if the rather unsatisfactory data on throat
colour are not considered. Throat colour estimates were available for only
about one-third of the birds examined. Of three adults considered as pure
cafer on other characters, one had some fawn in the otherwise gray throat; no

1962 ERSKINE: INTROGRESSION IN FLICKERS 87

less than 14 out of 20 nestlings otherwise classed as cafer showed some fawn
throat colour. It is possible that variations due to age and plumage develop-
ment make use of that character unsuitable for nestlings.

SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONS

A group of Flickers, chiefly nestlings, from British Columbia have been
examined for hybrid characteristics. A study of the data suggests the follow-
ing conclusions:

1) Unbalance in the apparent sex ratio among nestlings may be brought
about by the occurrence of some female birds having some red in predominant-
ly black malar stripes, such birds being classed as hybrid males at first sight.

2) The nuchal bar is strongly repressed, both in obvious female birds,
and in birds having small amounts of red in predominantly black malar stripes.

3) The Flickers in the study area show a preponderance of C. cafer
characteristics, but most birds show some influence due to C. auratus.

4) Taken together, the data here presented suggest that external mor-
phology is an unsafe indication of the sex of all Flickers showing intergradation
between Colaptes cafer and C. auratus. Sex determinations of Flickers banded
in the hybrid zone should be used with extreme caution.

REFERENCES

Auten, J. A. 1892. The North American Deraxin, A. 1936, Natural © hybridization
species of the genus Colaptes, considered and genetics of Flickers (Colaptes).
with special reference to the relationships Amer. Nat., 70: 585-590.

of C. auratus and C. cafer. Bull. Amer. Nato J) AS cadet Mole Gotan: (1947

Mus. Nat. Hist. 4: 21-44. : : We
Berets | Cicsnyland GN Lawsence. | ee Ot ne bd ae ee
1860. The birds of North America. 2. 1-285 Se) gatas res . +

Salem, Naturalists Book Agency.

Burns, F. L. 1900. A monograph of the Suorr, L. L. Jr. 1959. Hybridization in
Flicker (Colaptes auratus). Wilson Bull., the Flickers (Colaptes) of North America.
12: 1-82. Ph.D. thesis, Cornell University, Ithaca.

Received for publication 8 May 1961

STUDIES ON CRUSTACEA OF THE RED SEA

The important work by O. Paul’son, Studies on Crustacea of the Red Sea with notes
regarding other seas. Part I. Podophthalmata and Edriophthalmata (Cumacea) (Izsledo-
vaniya Rakoobraznykh Krasnago Morya s Zametkami otnositel’no Rakoopraznykh drugikh
morei), Kiev, 1875, has recently been translated into English by Francis D. Por and
published for the National Science Foundation and Smithsonian Institution by the Israel
Program for Scientific Translations. Copies may be obtained for $1.75 from the Office of
Technical Services, U.S. Department of Commerce, Washington 25, D.C. (OTS-60-21821).

OBSERVATIONS ON THE FOOD OF THE BLUE-TAILED
SKINK IN RONDEAU PARK, ONTARIO

WitiiaM W. Jupp

Department of Zoology, University of Western Ontario, London, Ontario

During the period September 20 to 25, 1959, seven skinks (Eumeces
fasciatus) were captured at three locations in Rondeau Park, Kent County,
Ontario. This park is a sandy point, about six miles long, extending southward
into Lake Erie. ‘The peninsula is about a quarter of a mile wide at its base
and broadens out towards its southerly tip, which is about a mile and a half
wide. ‘The first skink was found in the north end of the park under the bark
of a white pine stump, and the second under the bark of an oak log about a
- mile from the base of the park.’ The other five skinks were captured in a
large trash pile on the south side of Dillon Trail, which runs across the park
near its southerly tip. All seven were young males with characteristic azure-
blue tails and distinct yellowish stripes on a black body.

After being killed with cyanide the skinks were dissected and the three
parts of the digestive tract, the esophagus and stomach together, the midgut
and the rectum, were snipped out separately. The ingested food was removed
and the recognizable items found in the seven skinks are shown in Table 1.

The food of the skinks consisted of 18 items: 11 crickets, 2 snails, 2
spiders, 1 cockroach, 1 sow bug and 1 caterpillar. The crickets were too
greatly broken up to be identified from their external features but five of them
were found to be Nemobius sp. by examining the structure of the gizzards and
using keys and descriptions in Judd (1948). ‘The two snails were 2 mm and
4 mm in diameter and their shells had been dissolved, leaving only the coiled
bodies. The spiders were Xysticus sp. and Trochosa pratensis (Emerton),
identified by Dr. C. D. Dondale, Research Station, Department of Agriculture,
Kentville, Nova Scotia. Comstock (1948) reports that crab spiders of the
genus Xysticus live under stones and leaves or under loose bark and that T.
pratensis is a common species found under stones in the northeastern part of
the United States and in Canada. The cockroach was Parcoblatta pennsyI-
vanica (Deg.), a common species in Rondeau Park (Judd, 1957). The sow
bug was identified as Porcellio rathkei (Brandt) (Walker, 1927). The remains
of the caterpillar were 8 mm long and consisted of the head, thorax and a few
abdominal segments. Only in the esophagus and stomach of the skinks were
any invertebrates intact.

The six different items of food found in the skinks were also found pre-
viously to be food of Jefferson’s salamander in Rondeau Park (Judd, 1957).
The chief difference in the food of the two animals was that snails were the
commonest food found in the salamander whereas crickets were commonest in
the skinks. The predominance of crickets, spiders and cockroaches in the
food of the skinks bears out the observations by Judd (1955, 1957) and Fitch

88

1962 Jupp: Foop oF THE BLUE-TAILED SKINK 89

TABLE 1. — FooD IN THE DIGESTIVE TRACT OF SEVEN SKINKS

Skink Stomach Intestine Rectum
1 1 Parcoblatia pennsylvanica; segments of insect eggs and leg segments
head and forewing of leg of cricket
cricket
2 empty empty head and thorax of
caterpillar; wings

and sclerites of cricket

3 1 Xysticus sp. empty empty

4 sclerites of insects empty 2 snails; wings _
sclerites, ovipositor
ana eggs of cricket

5 sclerites, eggs and empty integument, epigynum
gizzard of 1 Nemobius sp. and leg segments of
Trochosa pratensis

6 heads, wings, Ovipositors, head, eggs and heads, sclerities and
eggs and gizzards of 4 sclerites of 1 cricket leg segments of 2
Nemobius sp. crickets

7 1 Porcellio rathker empty empty

(1954) that active creatures form the bulk of the diet and that slow or
motionless invertebrates are generally left untouched.

REFERENCES
Comstock, J. H. 1948. The Spider Book ————— . 1955. Observations on the blue-
(revised by W. J. Gertsch). Ithaca, Com- tailed skink, Eurueces fasciatus, captured
stock Publ. Co. in Rondeau Park, Ontario and kept in
Fitrcn, H. S. 1954. Life history and ecol- captivity over winter. Copeia 2: 135-136.
ogy of the five-lined skink, Eumeces fas- ——-——— . 1957. The food of Jefferson’s
ciatus. Univ. Kansas Publ. Mus. Nat. Hist. salamander, Ambystoma jeffersonianum,
8(1): 1-156. in Rondeau Park, Ontario. Ecology 38:

Jupp, W. W. 1948. A comparative study 77-81.
of the proventriculus of orthopteroid in- Waker, E. M. 1927. The woodlice or
sects with reference to its use in taxonomy. Oniscoidea of Canada (Crustacea, Iso-

Can. J. Res., D. 26: 93-161. poda). Can. Field Nat. 41: 173-179.
Received for publication 18 November 1960

We

THE COMPARATIVE NUMBER OF SPECIES OF
AMPHIBIANS IN CANADA AND OTHER COUNTRIES

Il. SUMMARY OF SPECIES OF CAECILIANS
AND SALAMANDERS

STANLEY W. GorHam
National Museum of Canada, Ottawa, Ontario

‘THE PRESENT paper is a continuation of the author’s previous (Gorham, 1957)
work. (The third and final section which deals with frogs and toads is now
being compiled).

In this work an attempt has been made to include the names of all valid
species of caecilians and salamanders up to the year 1957. (Part 1 contained
' the names up to the end of 1954 only). The subspecies and synonymous names
have not been included. Names that have been synonymized and later revived
are preceded by a “?” mark. If the species contains two or more subspecies
the number is marked following the specific name, ex. (2r). “This would include
the nominate plus one other race.

Boulenger (1882, 1895) revised all the genera and species of caecilians
known at the time. Nieden’s (1913) work was the last complete checklist of
the caecilians of the world. Dunn (1942) monographed the American forms
and since that time five new species have been described: Dunn (1944) one
from Colombia; Dunn (1945) one from Brazil; Taylor (1955) under the
generic name Dermophis, three from Costa Rica. I have followed Dunn’s (1942)
work in using the name Gymmopis, rather than Dermophis, since Dunn was the
last revisor. Subspecies, synonymies, keys and range are included in Dunn’s
(1942) work. There is no recent complete checklist of the Asian caecilians.
However, since Nieden (1913) up to the year 1957 only four new species have
been described: Annandale (1913) one from India; Taylor (1920, 1923) two
from Philippines, both of which have been synonymized by Inger (1954),
Seshachar (1939) one from India. Noble (1924) provided a checklist of the
African species; and Loveridge (1957) treated all the East African forms.
Parker (1927) reviewed the genus Geotrypetes and reduced G. petersii to a
synonym. Parker (1936) described a new species from French Guinea and
(1936a) a new genus and species from the Cameroons. The species of the
Seychelles are covered fully by Parker (1941, 1958).

Except for Boulenger’s (1882) monograph there does not appear to be any
recent complete checklist of the salamanders of the world. Dunn (1926)
monographed the family Plethodontidae; and Taylor (1944) revised the genera
and species found south of U.S.A. Dunn (1923) monographed the family —
Hynobiidae. Wolterstroff and Herre (1935) revised the family Salamandridae.
The checklist for North America is Schmidt (1953). Smith & Taylor (1948)
is available for Mexico. Other Central American countries are covered by the
following authors: Stuart (1943) Guatemala; Schmidt (1941) British Honduras;

90

1962 GoRHAM: COMPARATIVE NUMBER OF AMPHIBIANS 91

Dunn & Emlen (1932) Honduras; Mertens (1952) El Salvador; Taylor (1952)
Costa Rica; Dunn (1931) Panama. For Europe, Mertens & Miiller (1940) is
the basic checklist. “Terentjev & Tschernov (1949) covers those species found
in U.S.S.R. There is no complete checklist for Asia, however certain countries
are covered by the following authors: Sato (1943) Japan, Pope & Boring (1940)
and Liu (1950) China; Inger (1947) Ryukyu Islands; Bourret (1942) Indochina,
Boulenger (1890) India; Bodenheimer (1944) Asia Minor; Mendelssohn & Stein-
itz (1944) Israel. Noble (1924) is the basic checklist for Africa. ‘The three
species of African salamanders are found north of the Sahara.

The Zoological Record, published yearly since 1864, is the best single
source of information available. In compiling this list I have checked all the
Records (Amphibia and Reptilia section) from 1881-1956.

A bibliography of the more important checklists, catalogues and mono-
graphs which were consulted will be found in part I (Gorham, 1957).

With regard to the distribution of the American caecilians the majority of
the species are found south of Panama, but the following are known north of
Colombia: Gymmnopis costaricense, glandulosus, mexicana, multiplicata, oligoz-
ona, parviceps and Caecilia tentaculata (the latter species being found both in
Panama and Columbia). The opposite situation occurs with the American
salamanders, by far the greatest number being found north of Columbia. The
following species, however, are found south of Panama: Bolitoglossa altamazon-
icus, ?andicola, ?paraensis, ?peruviana; Magnadigita adspersa; Oedipina parvipes.

The author is not familiar with all the literature on caecilians and sala-
manders that has appeared since 1957 and has not referred to any works later
than that year, with the exception of Parker (1958). Several important works
published since 1957 should be mentioned: Mertens & Wermuth (1960)
Checklist of the Amphibians & Reptiles of Europe; Logier & Toner (1961)
Checklist of the Amphibians & Reptiles of Canada and Alaska, Taylor (1960)
has described a new genus and nineteen new species of caecilians from southern
Asia. Mr. A Brame, Jr. (University of Southern California) has in preparation
a checklist of salamanders of the world and he has kindly sent me a preliminary
list of the species he considers valid. Gorham (in press) Checklist of Caecilians
contains full synonymies for all species.

I wish to thank Mr. Francis Cook, herpetologist of the National Museum
of Canada and Dr. Sherman Bleakney, Acadia University, for reading the
manuscript and to Mr. Robert Hamilton, past editor of the Canadian Field-
Naturalist, for helpful suggestions.

Apoda (Caecilians)
Number of species in each country:

South America: Argentina 2; Bolivia 2; Brazil 15; British Honduras 1?,;
Colombia 17; Costa Rica 5; Ecuador 9; EF] Salvador 1; Guatemala 3; Guianas
7; Honduras 2; Mexico 2; Nicaragua 2; Panama 6, Paraguay 1, Peru 8,
Trinidad 1; Uruguay 1; Venezuela 3.

92 Tue CaANnapiAN Fiectp-NaTuRALIST © Vol. 76

Asia: Borneo 2; Burma 2; Ceylon 2; India 8; Java 2; Malaya 2; Pakistan 1?;
Philippines 1; Sumatra 2; Thailand 2; Vietnam 1.

Arrica: Belgian Congo 1; Dahomey 1; French Equatorial Africa 6; French
Guinea 2; Ghana 1; Ivory Coast 1; Kenya 3; Liberia 1; Nigeria 1; North-
ern Rhodesia 1; Sierra Leone 1, Tanganyika 6; Seychelles 6.

List of Species by Continents
SouTH AMERICA
(including Central America and Mexico)
Caeciliidae

Caecilia Linnaeus 1758: abitaguae Dunn 1942; armata Dunn 1942; bassleri
Dunn 1942; caribea Dunn 1942; degenerata Dunn 1942; dunni Hersh-
kovitz 1938; elongata Dunn 1942; gracilis Shaw 1802; guntheri Peters
1879; nigricans Boulenger 1902; ochrocephala Cope 1866, pachynema
Ginther 1859; polyzona Fischer 1879; swbnigricans Dunn 1942; tenta-
culata Linnaeus 1758; thompsoni Boulenger 1902.

Chthonerpeton Peters 1879; indistinctum (Reinhardt & Liitken) 1861;
petersi Boulenger 1882; viviparum Parker & Wettstein 1929.

Gymmnopis Peters 1874; albiceps (Boulenger) 1882; braziliensis Dunn 1945;
costaricense (Yaylor) 1955; glandulosus (Yaylor) 1955; mexicana
(Duméril & Bibron) 1841 (3r); sultiplicata Peters 1874 (3r); nicefori
Barbour 1924; occidentalis (Taylor) 1955; oligozona (Cope) 1877,
parviceps (Dunn) 1924; pricei Dunn 1944; unicolor (Dumeril) 1863.

Rhinatrema Duméril & Bibron 1841: bicolor (Boulenger) 1883; bivitatum
(Cuvier) 1829; columbianum Rendahl & Vestergren 1938, nigrum
Dunn 1942; parkeri Dunn 1942; peruvianum Boulenger 1902.

Siphonops Wagler 1828: annulatus (Mikan) 1820; brasiliensis Liitken
1851; hardy: Boulenger 1888, inswlanus Ihering 1911; paulensis Boett-
ger 1892.

Typhlonectes Peters 1879: compressicauda (Duméril & Bibron) 1841 (2r);
Rkaupu (Berthold) 1859.

ASIA

Gegeneophis Peters 1879: carnosus (Beddome) 1870.

Herpele Peters 1879: fulleri Alcock 1904.

Ichthyophis Fitzinger 1826: glutinosus (Linnaeus) 1754, monochrous
(Bleeker) 1858.

Uraeotyphlus Peters 1879: malabaricus (Beddome) 1870; menoni Annan-
dale 1913; narayani Seshachar 1939; oxyurus (Dumeéril & Bibron) 1841.

AFRICA
Boulengerula Tornier 1896: boulengeri Tornier 1896, changamwensis
Loveridge 1932; taitanus Loveridge 1935; uluguruensis Barbour &
Loveridge 1928.

1962 GoRHAM: COMPARATIVE NUMBER OF AMPHIBIANS 93

Geotrypetes Peters 1880: angeli Parker 1936; seraphini (Duméril) 1859
GY);
Herpele Peters 1879: bornmuelleri Werner 1899; multtplicata Nieden 1912;
: squalostoma (Stutchbury) 1834.

Hy pogeophis Peters 1879: rostratus (Cuvier) 1829 (3r).

Idiocranium Parker 1936: russeli Parker 1936.

Prashnia Boulenger 1909: alternans (Stejneger 1893, brevis (Boulenger)
1911; cooperi Boulenger 1909; larvatus (Ahl) 1934; sechellensis (Bou-
lenger) 1911.

Schistometopum Parker 1941: gregorii (Boulenger) 1894; thomensis (Bo-
cage) 1873.

Scolecomorphus Boulenger 1883: attenuatus Barbour & Loveridge 1928;
kirkii Boulenger 1883 (2r); vittatus (Boulenger) 1895.

Caudata (Salamanders)

Number of species in each country:

SourH America: Bolivia 1; Brazil 2?; British Honduras 2; Colombia 3?; Costa
Rica 28; Ecuador 1; El Salvador 2; Guatemala 25; Honduras 2; Mexico 70;
Nicaragua 8?; Panama 6; Peru 1; Venezuela 2?.

NortH America: Canada 17; U.S.A. 84.
Europe: Europe 20.

Asia: Afghanistan 1; Burma 1; China 21; Formosa 2; India 1, Iran 5; Iraq 3;
Israel 2; Japan 18; Jordon 2?; Korea 3; Mongolia 1, Pakistan 1, Ryukyu
Islands 3; Syria 2; Thailand 1; Turkey 7; U.S.S.R. (Asiatic) 5; Vietnam 2.

Arrica: Algeria 2; Libya 1; Morocco 3, Tunisia 1.

List of Species by Continents

SouTH AMERICA
(including Central America and Mexico)

Sirenidae
Siren Linnaeus 1766; intermedia LeConte 1827.
Ambystomidae
Ambystoma Tschudi 1838: amblycephalum Yaylor 1939, bombypellum
Taylor 1938; granulosum Taylor 1944, fluvinatum Taylor 1941, lacus-
tris Taylor & Smith 1945; ordinarium Taylor 1939, rosaceum ‘Taylor
1941 (3r); schmidti Taylor 1938; subsalsum Vaylor 1943, tigrinum
(Green) 1928.

94 Tue CanapiAn FieLtp-NaATURALIST Vol. 76

Bathysiredon Dunn 1939: dumerili (Duges) 1870.

Rhyacostredon Dunn 1928: altamiram (Duges) 1895; leorae Taylor 1943;
rivularis Taylor 1940, zempoalaensis ‘Vaylor & Smith 1945.

Siredon Wagler 1830: lermaensis Vaylor 1939; mexicanum (Shaw) 1789.

Salamandridae
Diemictylus Rafinesque 1820: kallerti Wolterstorff 1930; meridionalis Cope
1880.
Taricha Gray 1850: torosa Rathke 1833.

Plethodontidae

Aneides Baird 1849: lugubris (Hallowell) 1849.

Batrachoseps Bonaparte 1839: attenuatus (Eschscholtz) 1833.

Bolitoglossa Duméril & Bibron 1854: ?ahli (Unterstein) 1930; altamazon-
icus (Cope) 1874; alvarodoi Taylor 1954; ?andicola (Posada) 1909;
arborescandens ‘Yaylor 1954; borburata Trapido 1942; colonnea |
(Dunn) 1924; doffleim: (Werner) 1903; flaviventris (Schmidt) 1936;
lignicolor (Peters) 1873; mexicana Duméril & Bibron 1854; 27nulleri
(Brocchi) 1883; occidentalis Taylor 1941; ?odonnelli (Stuart) 1943;
palustris Taylor 1949; ?paraensis (Unterstein) 1930: ?peruviana
(Boulenger) 1883; platydactylus (Gray) 1831; rufescens (Cope)
1869; salvinii (Gray) 1868; schaudti (Dunn) 1924, striatula (Noble)
1918; veracrucis Taylor 1951; yucatana (Peters) 1882.

Chiropterotriton Taylor 1944: abscondens Vaylor 1948, arborea (Yaylor)
1941; bromeliacia (Schmidt) 1936; chiroptera (Cope) 1863, chon-
drostega (Yaylor) 1941; dimidiata (Yaylor) 1939, lavae (Taylor)
1942; mosauert (Woodall) 1941; multidentata (Taylor) 1938; nasalis
(Dunn) 1924; prisca Rabb 1956, terrestris (Taylor) 1941; xolocalcae
(Taylor) 1941.

Ensatina Gray 1850: eschscholtzn Gray 1850.

Magnadigita Taylor 1944: adspersa (Peters) 1863, brevipes Bumzahem &
Smith 1955; cerroensis Taylor 1952; cuchumatanus (Stuart) 1943,
dunni (Schmidt) 1933; engelhardti (Schmidt) 1936; flavimembris
(Schmidt) 1936; franklini (Schmidt) 1936; helmrichi (Schmidt) 1936;
lincolm (Stuart) 1943; macrini (Lafrentz) 1930; morio (Cope) 1869,
nigrescens Vaylor 1949; nigroflavescens (YVaylor) 1941; omniumsanc-
torum Stuart 1952; pesrubra Vaylor 1952; robusta (Cope) 1894; ros-
trata (Brocchi) 1883; subpalmata (Boulenger) 1896; swlcata (Brocchi)
1883; torresi Taylor 1952.

Oedipina Keferstein 1868: alfaroi Dunn 1921; alleni Taylor 1954; bonita-
ensis Taylor 1952; collaris (Stejneger) 1907; complex (Dunn) 1924,
cyclocauda Taylor 1952; ?elongatus (Schmidt) 1936; gracilis Taylor
1952; ignea Stuart 1952; inusitata Yaylor 1952; lineola (Cope) 1865;
longissima Vaylor 1952; pacificensis Yaylor 1952, parvipes (Peters)
1879; salvadorensis Rand 1952; serpens Taylor 1949, syndactyla
Taylor 1948; uniforms Keferstein 1868.

Parvimolge Taylor 1944: praecellens Rabb 1955, richardi Taylor 1949;
townsendi (Dunn) 1922.

1962 GorHAM: CoMPaARATIVE NUMBER OF AMPHIBIANS 95

Pseudoeurycea Vaylor 1944: altamontana (Yaylor) 1938; barbouri
(Schmidt) 1936; belli: (Gray) 1849; brunnata Bumzahem & Smith
1955; cephalica (Cope) 1865 (3r); cochranae (Taylor) 1943; exspec-
tata Stuart 1954; firscheimi Shannon & Werler 1955; gadovii (Dunn)
1926, galaenae (Taylor) 1941; gigantea (Taylor) 1938; goebeli
(Schmidt) 1936; leprosa (Cope) 1869; melanomolga Taylor 1941;
migromaculata (Laylor) 1941, picadoi (Stejneger) 1911; rex (Dunn)
1921; robertsi (Taylor) 1938; ‘scandens Walker 1955; smithi (Taylor)
1938; unguidentis (Taylor) 1941; werleri Darling & Smith 1954.

Thorius Cope 1869: dubitus Taylor 1941; macdougalli Taylor 1949;
minutissimmus ‘Laylor 1949; narisovalis Taylor 1939; pennatulus Cope
1869 (2r); pulmonaris Taylor 1939; troglodytes Taylor 1941.

NortH AMERICA

Cry ptobranchidae
Cry ptobranchus Leuckart 1821: alleganiensis (Daudin) 1802 (2r).
Proteidae
Necturus Rafinesque 1819; ponies (Rafinesque) 1818 (5r); punctatus
(Gibbes) 1850 (2r).
Sirenidae
Pseudobranchus Gray 1825: striatus (LeConte) 1824 (5r).
Siren Linnaeus 1766: intermedia LeConte 1827 (3r); lacertina Linnaeus
1766.
Ambystomatidae
Ambystoma Vschudi 1838: annulatum Cope 1886, cingulatum Cope 1867
(2r); gracile (Baird) 1859; jeffersonianum (Green) 1827; mabeei
Bishop 1928; macrodactylum Baird 1849 (2r); maculatum (Shaw)
1802; opacum (Gravenhorst) 1807; talpoideum (Holbrook) 1838;
texanum (Matthes) 1855; tigrinum (Green) 1825 (6r).
Dicamptodon Strauch 1870: ensatus (Eschscholtz) 1833.
Rhyacotriton Dunn 1920: olympicus (Gage) 1917, Qe).
Salamandridae
Diemictylus Rafinesque 1820: meridionalis Cope 1880; viridescens Rafines-
que 1820 (4r).
Taricha Gray 1850: granulosa (Skilton) 1849 (4r); rivularis (Twitty)
1935; torosa (Rathke) 1833 (2r).
Amphiumidae
Amphiuma Garden 1821: means Garden 1821 (2r).
Plethodontidae
Aneides Baird 1849: aeneus (Cope & Packard) 1881, ferreus Cope 1869,
flavipunctatus (Strauch) 1870 (2r); hardy: (Yaylor) 1941; lugubris
(Hallowell) 1849 (2r).
Batrachoseps Bonaparte 1839: attenuatus (Eschscholtz) 1833 (3r); pacifi-
cus (Cope) 1865 (4r); wrighti (Bishop) 1937.
Desmognathus Baird 1850: aeneus Brown & Bishop 1947 (2r); fuscus
Rafinesque) 1820 (Sr); monticola Dunn 1916 (2r); ochrophaeus Cope

96 Tue Canapian Fietp-NAatTurRALIstT Vol. 76
1859 (2r); ocoee Nicholls 1949; perlapsus Neill 1950; planiceps New-
man 1955; quadramaculatus (Holbrook) 1840; wrighti King 1936.
Ensatina Gray 1850: eschscholtzu Gray 1850 (71).
Eurycea Rafinesque 1822: bislineata (Green) 1818 (4r); longicauda
(Green) 1818 (4r); lucifuga Rafinesque 1822; maultiplicata (Cope)
1869 (2r); neotenes Bishop & Wright 1937 (4r); troglodytes Baker
1957; tynerensis Moore & Hughes 1939.
Gyrinophilus Cope 1869: danielsi (Blatchley) 1900 (3r) ; Jutescens (Rafines-
que) 1832; palleucus McCrady 1954; porphyriticus (Green) 1827 (3r).
Haideotriton Carr 1939: wallace: Carr 1939.
Hemidactylium YVschudi 1838: scutatum (Schlegel) 1838.
Hydromantes Gistel 1848: brunus Gorman 1954; platy cephalus (Camp)
1916, shastae Gorman & Camp 1953.
Leurognathus Moore 1899: marmorata Moore 1899 (Sr).
Manculus Cope 1869: quadridigitatus (Holbrook) 1842.
Plethodon Tschudi 1838: caddoensis Pope & Pope 1951; cinereus (Green)
1818 (3r); dixi Pope & Fowler 1949; dorsalis Cope 1889; dunni Bishop
1934; elongatus Van Denburgh 1916; glutimosus (Green) 1818 (4r);
hubrichti Thurow 1957; ?jacksoni Newman 1954; jordani Blatchley
1901 (8r); neomexicanus Stebbins & Riemer 1950; ouachitae Dunn &
Heintze 1933; richmondi Netting & Mittleman 1938 (3r); vandykei
Van Denburgh 1906 (3r); veliculum (Cooper) 1860; webrlei Fowler
& Dunn 1917; welleri Walker 1931 (2r); yonahlossee Dunn 1917.
Pseudotriton Yschudi 1838: montanus Baird 1849 (4r); ruber (Sonnini)
1802 (4r).
Stereochilus Cope 1869: marginatus (Hallowell) 1857.
Typhlomolge Stejneger 1896: rathbumi Stejneger 1896.
Typhlotriton Stejneger 1892: spelaeus Steyneger 1892.
EuROPE
Hynobiidae
Hynobius Tschudi 1838: keyserlingii (Dybowski) 1870.
Proteidae
Proteus Laurenti 1768: anguinus Laurenti 1768 (2r).
Salamandridae

Chioglossa Bocage 1864: lusitanica Bocage 1864.

Euproctus Gene 1838: asper (Duges) 1852 (2r); montanus (Savi) 1839,
platy cephalus (Gravenhorst) 1829.

Pleurodeles Michahelles 1830: walt] Michahelles 1830.

Salamandra Laurenti 1768: altra Laurenti 1768; salamandra (Linnaeus)
1758 (10r).

Salamandrina Fitzinger 1826: terdigitata (Lacépéde) 1788.

Triturus Rafinesque 1815: alpestris (Laurenti) 1768 (6r); boscai (Lataste)
1879; cristatus (Laurenti) 1768 (5r); helveticus (Razoumowsky) 1789
(2r); italicus (Peracca) 1898; marmoratus (Latreille) 1800 (21);
montandoni (Boulenger) 1880; vulgaris (Linnaeus) 1758 (5r.)

1962 GorHAM: COMPARATIVE NUMBER OF AMPHIBIANS 97

Plethodontidae
Hy dromantes Gistel 1848: genei Schlegel 1838; italicus Dunn 1923.

ASIA

Hynobiidae

Batrachuperus Boulenger 1878: cochranae Liu 1950; karlschamdti Liu 1950;
mustersi Smith 1940; pinchonii (David) 1871, tibetanus Schmidt 1925;
yenyuanensis Liu 1950.

Hynobius Tschudi 1838: abei Sato 1934; chinensis Gunther 1889; dunni
Tago 1931; keyserlingii (Dybowski) 1870; kimurai Dunn 1923; leechii
Boulenger 1887; lichenatus Boulenger 1883; naevius (Schlegel) 1838;

nebulosus (Schlegel) 1838; nigrescens Stejneger 1907; okiensis Sato

1940; retardatus Dunn 1923; sadoensis Sato 1940; shibi Liu 1950;

sonami (Maki) 1921; steyjnegert Dunn 1923; tokoyensis Tago 1931,

tsuensis Abe 1922.

Ony chodactylus Vschudi 1838: fisheri (Boulenger) 1886; japonicus (Hout-

tuyn) 1782.

Pachy palaminus Thompson 1912: boulengeri Thompson 1912.
Ranodon Kessler 1866: sibiricus Kessler 1866.

Cry ptobranchidae
Megalobatrachus Vschudi 1837: japonicus (Yemminck) 1837 (2r).

Salamandridae

Cynops Tschudi 1838: chinensis Gray 1859; ensicaudus (Hallowell) 1860;
orientalis (David) 1875; pyrrhogaster (Boie) 1826.

Ay pselotriton Wolterstorff 1934: wolterstorffi (Boulenger) 1905.

Martensiella Wolterstorff 1925: caucasica (Waga) 1876; luschani (Stein-
dachner) 1891.

Neurergus Cope 1862: crocatus Cope 1862 (4r).

Pachytriton Boulenger 1878: brevipes (Sauvage) 1877.

Paramesotriton Chang 1935: deloustali (Bourret) 1934.

Salamandra Laurenti 1768: salamandra (Linnaeus) 1758 (3r). .

Triturus Rafinesque 1815: cristatus Laurenti 1768 (3r); vittatus (Gray)
1835 (Sr); vulgaris (Linnaeus) 1758 (2r).

Tylotriton Anderson 1871: andersoni Boulenger 1892; ?asperrimms Unter-
stein 1930; ?chinhaiensis Chang 1932; ?kweichowensis Fang & Chang
1932; taliangensis Liu 1950; verrucosus Anderson 1871.

AFRICA
Salamandridae
Pleurodeles Michahelles 1830: poireti (Gervais) 1835; waltl Michahelles
1830 (2r).

Salamandra Laurenti 1768: salamandra (Linnaeus) 1758.

98 Tue CanapiAn FrieLtp-NaTuRALIST

Vol. 76

REFERENCES

ANNANDALE, N. 1913. Some new and in-
teresting batrachia and lizards from India,
Ceylon and Borneo. Records Indian Mus.
9: 301-305.

Bopennemer, F. S. 1944. Introduction in-
to the knowledge of the amphibia and
reptilia of Turkey. Rev. Fac. Sci. Univ.
Istanbul 9B, 1: 83.

Boutencer, G. A. 1882. Catalogue of the
Batrachia Gradientia s. Caudata and Bat-
rachia Apoda, in the collection of the
British Museum. London, Brit. Mus.

Bourencer, G. A. 1890. The fauna of
British India, including Ceylon and Bur-
ma: Reptilia and batrachia. London, Tay-
lor and Francis.

Bourencer, G. A. 1895. A synopsis of the
genera and species of apodal batrachians,
with description of a new genus and
species (Bdellophis vittatus). Proc. zool.
Soc. Lond. 1895: 401-414.

Bourret, R. 1942. Les batraciens de )’'In-
dochine. Mem. Serv. oceanogr. Indoch.
6: 547.

Dunn, E.R. 1923. The salamanders of the
family Hynobiidae. Proc. Amer. Acad.
Arts Sci. 58: 446-523.

Dunn, E.R. 1926. The salamanders of the
family Plethodontidae. North Hampton,
Mass., Smith College.

Dunn, E. R. 1931. The amphibians of
Barro Colorado Island. Occ. Pap. Boston
Soc. nat. Hist. 5: 403-421.

Dunn, E. R. 1942. The American caecil-
ians. Bull. Mus. comp. Zool. Harv. 91:
439-540.

Dunn, E.R. 1944. A new caecilian of the
genus Gymmopis. Caldasia, 11 (10): 473-
474.

Dunn, E.R. 1945. A new caecilian of the
genus Gymmopis from Brazil. Amer.
Mus. Novit. 1278.

Dunn, E. R., ano J. T. Emten, Jr. 1932.

Reptiles and amphibians from Honduras.
Proc. Acad. nat. Sci. Philad. 84: 21-32.
Gavow, H. 1901. Amphibia and reptiles.
Cambridge Natural History, v.8. London,

Macmillan.

GoruaM, S. W. 1957. The comparative
number of species of amphibians in Can-
ada and other countries. Can. Field Nat.
71: 182-192.

Incer, R. F. 1947. Preliminary survey of
the amphibians of the Riukiu Islands Fieldi-
anna Zoology, Chicago nat. Hist. Mus.
Bull. 32: 297-352.

Incer, R. F. 1954. Philippine zoological
expedition 1946-1947; systematics and
zoogeography of Philippine amphibia.
Fieldiana Zoology, Chicago nat. Hist. Mus.
Bull. 33; 183-531.

Liv, C. 1950. Amphibians of western
China. Fieldiana Zoology, Mem. Chicago
nat. Hist. Mus. 2: 400.

Locigrr, E. B. S., anp G. C. Toner. 1955.
Check-list of amphibians and reptiles of
Canada and Alaska. Cont. R. Ont. Mus.
Zool. Palaeont. 41: 88.

Loverwér, A. 1957. Check list of the rep-
tiles and amphibians of East Africa
(Uganda, Kenya; Tanganyika; Zanzibar).
Bull. Mus. comp. Zool. Harv. 117: 153-362.

MeEnpbeEtssonn, H., ann H. Sretnirz. 1944.
Contributions to the ecological zoogeog-
raphy of amphibians of Palestine. Rev.
Fac. Sci. Univ. Istanbul, 9B, 4: 289-298.

Mertens, R. 1952. Die Amphibien und
Reptilien von El] Salvador. Abh. Sen-
ckenb. naturf. Ges. 487: 120.

Mertens, R., ann L. MUrter. 1940. Die
Amphibien und Reptilien Europas, 2d list.
Abh. Senckenb. naturf. Ges. 451: 56.

Niepven, F. 1913. Das Tierreich, Gymno-
phiona (Amphibia Apoda). Berlin, R.
Friedlander und Sohn.

Nosie, G. K. 1924. Contributions to the
herpetology of the Belgian Congo, based
on the collection of the American Museum
Congo Expedition, 1909-1915. Bull. Amer.
Mus. nat. Hist. 49: 147-347.

Parker, H. W. 1927. The caecilian gen-
era Uraeotyphlus and Geotrypetes. Ann.
Mag. nat. Hist. (6) 15: 328.

Parker, H. W. 1936. Amphibians from
Liberia and the Gold Coast. Zool. Meded.
19: 87-102.

Parker, H. W. 1941. The caecilians of
the Mamfe Division, Cameroons. Proc.
zool. Soc. Lond. 1936: 135-163.

Parker, H. W. 1941. The caecilians of
the Seychelles. Ann. Mag. nat. Hist. (11)
WE Mis

Parker, H. W. 1958. Caecilians of the
Seychelles Islands with description of a
new subspecies. Copeia: 71-76.

1962

Porr, C. H., ann A. M. Bortne. 1940. A
survey of Chinese amphibia. Peking nat.
Hist. Bull. 15: 86.

Sato, I. 1943. “General account of the

Japanese tailed amphibia.” Osaka, Japanese

Pub. Co.

Scumipr, K. P. 1941. The amphibians and
reptiles of British Honduras. Zool. Ser.
Field. nat. Hist. Mus. Bull. 22: 475-510.

Scumipt, K.P. 1953. A checklist of North
American amphibians and reptiles. 6th ed.
Chicago, Univ. Chicago Press.

SesHacHar, B. R. 1939. On a new species
of Uraeotyphlus from South India. Proc.
Indian Acad. Sci. 9: 224-228.

SmitH, H. M., ano E. H. Taytor. 1948.
An annotated checklist and key to am-
phibia of Mexico. Bull. U. S. nat. Mus.
194: 118.

Stuart, L. C. 1943. Taxonomic and geo-
graphic comments on Guatemalan sala-
manders of the genus Oedipus. Misc.
Publ. Mus. Zool. Univ. Mich. 56: 1-32.

GorHaM: CoMPpaRATIVE NUMBER OF AMPHIBIANS 99

Taytor, E. H. 1920. Philippine amphibia.
Phil. Jour. Sci. 16: 213-359.

Taytor, E. H. 1923. Additions to the
herpetological fauna of the Philippine
Islands, III. Phil. Jour. Sci. 22: 515-557.

Taytor, E. H. 1944. The genera of ple-
thodont salamanders in Mexico, Pt. I.
Kans. Univ. Sci. Bull. 30: 189-232.

Taytor, E. H. 1952. The salamanders and
caecilians of Costa Rica. Kans. Univ.
Sci. Bull. 34: 695-771.

Taytor, E. H. 1955. Additions to the
known herpetological fauna of Costa Rica
with comments on other species. Kans.
Univ. Sci. Bull: 37: 499-575.

TERENTJEV, P. V., ann S. A. TscHERNOV.
1949. Opredelitel) presmy kajuschtachichs-
ja 1 semnowodnych Moskwa [Amphibians
and Reptiles of Russia] 3d ed. Moscow
State Pub. House Govt. Sci.

Wo terstorFF, W., ann W. Herre. 1935.
Die Gattungen der Wassermolche der
Familie Salamandridae. Arch. Naturgesch.
4: 217-229.

’

AppENDA (Major references since 1957)

Locier, E. B. S., ann G. C. Toner.

1961.

Check list of the amphibians and reptiles

of Canada and Alaska.

Mus. Zool. 53: 92.
Mertens, R., ann H. WermMvTH.
reptilien Europas, 3.

amphibien und

Cont. R. Ont.

1960. Die

Frankfurt-am-Main, Waldemar Kramer.

Taytor, E. H.

1960. A new caecilian

genus in India. Kans. Uniy. Sci. Bull. 40:

31-36.
(PAVTOR: § Es ET:

1960. On the caecilian

species Ichthyophis monochrous and Ich-
thyophis glutinosus and related species.
Kans. Univ. Sci. Bull. 40: 37-120.

Received for publication 7 November, 1961

w

THE BLADDERNUT SHRUB AT OTTAWA*

WitiiaM G. Dore

Plant Research Institute, Central Experimental Farm, Ottawa, Ontario

THE PRESENCE Of the American bladdernut, Staphylea trifolia, along the
Rideau River at Ottawa represents an isolated occurrence of the species at
the northern fringe of its general range covering much of eastern North
America. Specimens in Ottawa herbaria have been collected at various
times in the past: in 1878 by James Fletcher on “river-side, Billings Bridge”
and “by Whyte railroad bridge over Rideau below Hog’s Back”; in 1898 by
John Macoun “on an island piers Billings Bridge”; in 1908 by W. cee Harring-
ton on “moist low ground, Billings Bridge” ; in 1937 by Claude Johnson “on
the Rideau near Ottawa”; a 1943 by M. N. Zinck in “woods at foot of Leonard
Street.” All these specimens apparently come from essentially the same spot,
and since they were collected independently by six different persons, it seems
safe to conclude that the shrub occurs nowhere else in the Ottawa District, an
area quite well worked botanically. The label data indicate moreover that the
plants originally extended for about a mile along the Rideau River. They are
now conained to an acre or two. of alluvial w aodland on its north bank a quarter
of a mile above Billings Bridge at the foot of Osborne Street.

The closest other stands to Ottawa are at Casselman, 30 miles to the south-
east (not collected since 1891 by John Macoun and 1911 by J. M. Macoun),
at Prescott, 50 miles to the south (not collected since 1860 by Billings), and at
Grenville, 55 miles to the east (collected first in 1960 by Dore, Hainault and
Mulligan). These and the records cited by Raymond (1947) for Quebec and
by Fox and Soper (1952) for Ontario are incorporated in the map centred on
Ottawa (Figure 1). This map, together with that given by Soper and Heim-
burger (1961), will complete the known distribution of the species in Canada.

The 30th of October, 1960, proved to be a good date on which to relocate
and study the old Rideau River stand; the leaves had just fallen and the bare
shrubs, heavily laden with their browning bladdery fruits, stood out conspicu-
ously in the patch of woodland by the river. The shrubs grouped themselves
into more or less discrete groves, each with certain minor differences in height
or bushiness, in abundance or shape of pods, in color of seeds, etc. The groves
undoubtedly represented individual clones enlarged over the years by vegeta-
tive sprouting from the roots.

The shrubs varied in height from 7 to 10 feet and the greatest size of their
trunks was about two inches; none of the dead stumps was broader. Presum-
ably the shrubs had fruited as heavily in many previous seasons, but why had

oe *Contribution No. 154 from Plant Research Institute, Canada Department of Agriculture, Ottawa,
ario.

100

1962 Dore: BLaDDERNUT SHRUB AT OTTAWA 101

Figure 1. Occurrence of American bladdernut, Staphylea trifolia, in southeastern Ontario
and adjoining Quebec as known from preserved specimens. The hypothetical routes
of migration are indicated by dashed lines.

the whole woodland not grown up to a solid stand from seedlings? — and, why
had not plants established all along the riverbank for miles below from the seed-
bearing bladders floated down? ‘The bony seeds after sacrification and freezing
were found to be germinable. Perhaps the conditions at the present, although
favorable for the persistence of establishing shrubs, were not favorable for the
germination of the seeds or for the establishment of new seedlings in the wild.

The most striking of all the morphological differences was in the shape of
the inflated mature fruits, broad-elliptic to obovate vs. pear-shaped with a
slender-tapered base. The difference seems sharp enough to warrant formal
recognition. The two shapes of fruit are illustrated in the photographs, Figures
2 and 3 respectively. Besides the difference in general outline, the sinus between
the tips of the carpels is less deep and narrower in fruits with the pyriform shape.
When opened, their seeds were found to have an olive-brown color in contrast
to a reddish brown in those from the broad-elliptic bladders. This correlated
feature, however, proved evanescent and after a few days the color of the
threshed seeds from both types of bladders was the same, reddish-brown.

The Linnaean specimen of Staphylea trifolia consists of leaves only — at

least, no flowers or fruits are visible on the photograph available in the Depart-
ment of Agriculture herbarium at Ottawa. In the original description, Linnaeus

102 Tue CANADIAN Fieitp-NaATuRALIST Vol. 76

(1753) gives us no information to help us know what shape of pod is typical of
the species. ‘The prevalent shape on specimens from the eastern States (which
would include the “Virginia” from which his plant came), however, is broad-
elliptic, so we can take this as characteristic of forma trifolia. Plants bearing
the other pod-shape, the pryiform pod tapering slenderly to the base with only
a narrow space between the carpellary tips and suspended on a slightly upward-
thickened pedicel, may be named as follows:

Staphylea trifolia L., forma pyriformis n.f.. Fructus maturus pyriformas.

The type specimen deposited in the herbarium of the Department of
Agriculture, Ottawa (Herb. DAO), consists of pressed fruits with other
portions taken from the same marked shrub the next season. ‘The label
data read: alluvial woods along Rideau River at foot of Osborne Street,
Ottawa, Carleton County, Ontario, Canada; fruits, October 30, 1960, No.
18872A W. G. Dore & C. Frankton; flowers, May 31, 1961, No. 18872B
W. G. Dore; leaves, July 15, 1961, No. 18872C W. G. Dore.

Other plants of forma pyriformis represented by specimen are: No. 18875
W. G. Dore from site (DAO); on the Rideau River near Ottawa, November 6,
1937, Claude E. Johnson (CAN); au bord de la route, Saint Armand, Compte
Missisquoi, 15 juin 1941, No. 56443 Marie-Victorin et al. (CAN). Numerous
specimens of the typical form, forma trifolia, are available in herbaria, but Nos.
18873 and 18874 from plants at the Rideau River site have been made particularly
to illustrate the contrast. Perhaps it is timely to state that the current filling of
the land along Osborne Street for building purposes threatens to exterminate all
the remaining shrubs. An attempt is therefore being made to propagate them
by seeds and cuttings for conservation in the Arboretum at the Experimental
Farm.

The elimination of this natural site at Ottawa would be regrettable also
from the standpoint of several other interesting species associated with the
bladdernuts, more or less localized there: Menispermum canadense, Zanth-
oxylum americanum, Celtis occidentalis, Elymus wiegandii, Helianthus tuberosus
and Rhus radicans (the high-climbing variety). A short distance upsteam some
other rare species occur: Andropogon scoparius, Andropogon gerardn (until
1943), Sorghastrum nutans, Apios americana, Acer nigrum, Desmodium cana-
dense, Lycopus asper and Samolus floribundus. Vhe occurrence of such an
assemblage brings up the question of its origin and persistence at the particular
vicinity. Some of the species, the Jerusalem artichoke, groundnut, hackberry,
bladdernut, prickly-ash, tick-trefoil and Indian grass for example, might have
been transported to the site by the aborigines as food or for ceremonial purposes,
or just dropped there accidentally. ‘The broad flat at the foot of the Hog’s
Back rapids could have provided a good portage and camping site for the
Indians in their travels between Lake Ontario and the Ottawa River, so perhaps
aboriginal transport is the answer.

On the other hand, there are several species in the assemblage which would
not likely be carried in this way. All of them, however, have unit floristic

1962 Dore: BLADDERNUT SHRUB AT OTTAWA 103

Ficure 2. The broad-elliptic fruits typical of the American bladdernut, Staphylea trifolia
forma trzfolia, from Rideau River site at Ottawa. Specimen No. 18873A, 3 natural size.

Figure 3. Pear-shaped fruits of S. trifolia forma pyriformis from a shrub at the same site.
Type specimen No. 18872A; 4 natural size.

affinity — with a more southern flora — and it is just as plausible that they might
have spread northward together by ordinary means at a time when the climate
was more favorable. They would then represent a relict community persisting
in a sedentary state at that particular site by virtue of the local conditions created
by the continuing shoreline processes of the river.

REFERENCES

Fox, W. SHERWoop, AND JaMes H. Soper. Raymonp, Marcer. 1947. Coup d’oeil sur

1952. The distribution of some trees and la flore de Vaudreuil. Naturaliste canadien

shrubs of the Carolinian zone of southern 74: 67-75.

Ontario (Part 1). Trans. Roy, Can. Inst. Soper, James H. ann Marcarer L. Hem-

29: 69-84. BURGER. 1961. 100 shrubs of Ontario.
Linnazus, C. 1753. Species Plantarum. Department of Commerce and Develop-

Holmiae. Vol. I, 560 p. ment, Toronto.

SORBARIA SORBIFOLIA (L.) A. BR., FALSE SPIRAEA, |
PERSISTING AND SPREADING AFTER :
CULTIVATION IN CANADA*

W. J. Copy

Plant Research Institute, Central Experimental Farm, Ottawa, Ontario

Sorbaria sorbifolia (L.) A. Br., a native shrub of eastern Asia, has been
cultivated sparingly in eastern Canada for many years. It is now found in
cultivation mainly in old gardens and is only rarely planted in new situations.

The first report of the occurrence of Sorbaria sorbifolia outside cultivation
in Canada was that of James M. Macoun (1898) “Along roadsides near Bad-
_deck, Cape Breton Island, N.S. 1898 (John Macoun). Escaped from cultiva-
tion, but not before recorded as well naturalized” (sub Spiraea sorbifolia).
Three years later, Prof. James Fowler (1901a, 1901b) reported this shrub from
St. Andrews, N.B. “. . . probably mark the sites of former gardens” (sub
Spiraea sorbifolia). Again James Macoun (1906) reported it “Escaped from
cultivation and well naturalized on the bank of the Gatineau River at the
railway station, Wakefield, Quebec, 1903. (John Macoun)” (sub Spiraea
sorbifolia).

The first report in a regional flora of the occurrence of Sorbaria sorbifolia
outside cultivation in northeastern North America was in the seventh edition
of Gray’s Manual (Robinson and Fernald, 1908), where the following note
appeared: “Common in cultivation, and escaping to waste land and copses.”
However, no indication was given as to where it might be found. Britton and
Brown (1913) in their Illustrated Flora (sub Schizonotus sorbifolius) stated
that it was “locally spontaneous after cultivation, Ontario to New York and
Maryland.” Marie-Victorin (1935) gave this information: “Echappe des
jardins dans le nord-est de Amérique. Dans le Québec, occasionnel aux
environs de Montréal.” More recently, Fernald (1950) stated: “Common in
cult., and esc. to waste land and copses, N.B. to Pa., Ind. and Minn.” but
Gleason (1952) reverted to the broader distribution: “Commonly cultivated
and frequently escaped along roadsides and fence-rows, especially in the e.
states and e. Canada.”

Recent local lists have recorded Sorbaria sorbifolia from several areas in
Canada: Prince Edward Island (Erskine, 1961); New Brunswick (Hagmeier,
1959); Marmora District, Ontario (Gillett, 1954); Norfolk Co., Ontario
(Landon, 1960); southern Ontario (Soper, 1949); Ontario (Montgomery,
1957); and Saskatchewan (Russell, 1954; Breitung, 1957).

The Saskatchewan record is based on a specimen from Clearwater Lake,
J. B. Campbell, s.n., Jane 5, 1940 (DAS, Photo DAO). Campbell i Jit. has
reported the following: “My feeling at the time of collection, and particularly

*Contribution No. 144 from the Plant Research Institute, Research Branch, Canada Department of
Agriculture, Ottawa, Ontario.

104

1962 Copy: Fatse Spirraca PERSISTING AND SPREADING 105

after I identified the material, was that at least one plant had been planted.
However other plants were growing at the site, and I assumed that some of
these were from natural seedlings. Recent development at Clearwater Lake
will have destroyed the stand. Thus my memory suggests that the plants at
the site were introduced by planting.” S. sorbifolia should therefore not be
considered a part of the flora of Saskatchewan.

In the present study, specimens have been examined in the herbarium of
the Canada Department of Agriculture, Ottawa (DAO), the herbarium of the
National Museum, Ottawa (CAN) and Queen’s University Herbarium, King-
ston (QUK). In addition, records have been obtained from the curators of
herbaria at the University of Toronto (TRT) and Ontario Agricultural Col-
lege, Guelph (OAC). On the basis of these records, S. sorbifolia is now
known to occur outside cultivation in six Canadian provinces: Nova Scotia,
Prince Edward Island, New Brunswick, Quebec, Ontario and Alberta. The
records are as follows:

Nova Scoria: ANwnapouis Co.: roadside, Tupperville, H. Groh, s.n., July
26, 1928 (DAO); Lunensure Co.: a few shrubs growing on railway
embankment by overhead railway bridge near Stanford’s Lake, Chester,
M. N. Zinck, 381, July 16, 1938 (DAO); Vicrorta Co.: along roadsides,
escaped from cultivation, Baddeck, Cape Breton Island, J. Macoun,
19,070, July 22, 1898 (CAN).

Prince Epwarp Istanp: Querens Co.: escaped to roadside and doing well,
Bonshaw, Erskine & Dore, 1125, July 1, 1952 (DAO).

New Brunswick: Cuartorre Co.: thicket near dwelling, St. Stephen,
H. J. Scoggan, 12521, July 18, 1955 (CAN); St. Andrews, J. Fowler,
sm.» July 9, 1900, and July 11, 1900 (QUK): Kunes Co.: thicket,
Hampton, about 25 miles northeast of St. John, H. J. Scoggan, 12377,
July 12, 1955 (CAN); Resticoucue Co.: Dalhousie, Mf. O. Malte, 877,
Aug. 10, 1926 (CAN); Kenr Co.: or WesrmMorLanp Co.: St. Joseph,
Rev. J. Fiset, s.n., Jaly 1919 (DAO). -

Quesec: Gasper Co.: Gaspé Basin [cult?] J. Fowler, s.n., July 28, 1905
(QUK); Gatineau Co.: between the Gatineau River and M. Gamble’s,
Wakefield, J. Macoun, s.n., July 13, 1903 (IRT); well established on
the bank of the Gatineau River, Wakefield, J. Macoun, 59934, July 18,
1903, (CAN); Huntinepon Co.: a small patch, 3 miles east of Hun-
tingdon, Bassett © Hamel, 2619, Aug. 19, 1952 (DAO); Sransteap Co.:
paturage sur vieux jardin, Massawippi, Marie-Victorin et al., 2010, 1
juillet, 1943 (CAN); roadside three miles south of East Hatley, Frank-
ton & Bassett, 1796, Aug. 11, 1961 (DAO); Vaupreum Co.: Rigaud,
Roy, 3263, 14 juillet, 1934 (DAO); same place, Roy, 3789, 16 juillet,
1935 (CAN, DAO); bord de la route, St.Rédempteur, Cimg-Mars &
Gagnon, s.n., 4 aout, 1945 (DAO).

Ontario: Acoma Disr.: a few plants in the area near railway tracks,
sandy soil, Blind River, Bassett & Bragg, 3125, July 9, 1954 (DAO),
near sheds of Railway Station, Blind River, Montgomery & Shumovich,
1252, Aug. 10, 1952 (OAC, TRT); Cartetron Co.: edge of swamp,
probably escaped, Arboretum, C. E. F., Ottawa, R. M. Horner, s.n.,
July 26, 1947 (DAO), near side road and abandoned house site close
to deciduous woods, well established shrubs to 6 ft. tall, probably
cultivated at one time, just south of Dow’s Swamp and west of C.P.R.
track, Ottawa, L. Jenkins, 5765, June 23, 1955 (DAO); rank-growing
6 ft. shrubs cultivated along roadside ditch and spreading into ditch,

106 THe CanapiAN Fie_p-NATURALIST Vol. 76

Carlsbad Springs, Cody & VanRens, 11190, July 7, 1960 (flowering) and
11234, Aug. 18, 1960 (fruiting) (DAO); roadside by deserted house,
Carlsbad Springs, W. H. Harrington, s.n., July 8, 1906 (CAN); Carlsbad
Springs, J. Macoun, 85519, Sept. 4, 1911 (CAN); Beechwood, Ottawa,
J. Macoun, 85520, June 29, 1911 (CAN); Hattsurtron Dist.: roadside
near edge of woods 4; mi. S.W. of Wilberforce, Senn et al., 5118, July
23, 1949 (DAO), Hasrtines Co.: escape in pasture on fixed sand dunes
2 miles northwest of Cordova Mines, J. M. Gillett, 6512, July 12, 1952
(DAO); Leeps Co.: shrubs 2 m tall, forms a thicket in a pasture,
Delta, Highway 42, R. E. Beschel, 10561, June 23, 1960 (QUK); Mus-
KoKA Disr.: West Gravenhurst, H. Grob, s.n., Sept. 2, 1936 (DAO),
Norroik Co.: Woodhouse Twp., Lot 12, Gore, M. Landon, s.n., Aug.
8, 1952 (OAC); Onrario Co.: dense stand on sandy roadside near
Erskine Cemetery, Dunbarton, Shumovich, 40, July 19, 1952 (OAC);
Prescotr Co.: rank-growing shrub to 4 ft. in height forming a dense
stand 50 x 20 ft. in sand of old clearing, spreading by underground
roots, shorter sterile plants on periphery, 4 miles northwest of Pendle-
ton, Cody & VanRens, 11199, July 7, 1960 (flowering) and 11235, Aug.
18, 1960 (fruiting) (DAO); bord d’une ancienne voie ferrée pres d’un
jardin, inconnu ailleur dans la région, Hawkesbury, R. Hainault, 134,
July 20, 1953 (QUK); roadside and in partial shade in moist open
woods, Clarence, W. J. Cody, 11182, June 29, 1960 (DAO); THUNDER
Bay Disr.: Nipigon, H. Groh, 73, July 10, 1939 (DAO).
Aperta: roadside, Peace River, H. Groh, 1022, Sept. 16, 1939 (DAO).

Although S. sorbifolia was first collected in Canada at Baddeck in Nova
Scotia by John Macoun in 1898, and reported from there in the same year by
his son James Macoun, it escaped the notice of Dr. Roland (1947) when he
wrote the flora of that province. The Erskine & Dore specimen cited here
from Bonshaw, Prince Edward Island, is the basis for the only record in
Erskine’s (1961) flora of that province. The basis for the New Brunswick
occurrence given in the eighth edition of Gray’s Manual (Fernald, 1950) is
probably Fowler’s (1901a, 1901b) report from St. Andrews, but there may
also be either a Fowler or a Malte specimen preserved in Gray Herbarium.
In this list of New Brunswick plants Hagmeier (1959) probably included S.
sorbifolia on the basis of the report in Gray’s Manual. The Ontario report
given in Britton and Brown (1913) may possibly be based on a duplicate
specimen at New York Botanical Garden collected at Carlsbad Springs or
Beechwood by John Macoun. _ S. sorbifolia may have been included in Soper’s
(1949) list for southern Ontario on the basis of the report in Britton and
Brown (1913) or the Groh collection from West Gravenhurst, although this
latter collection is from within the Canadian Shield and thus north of the area
treated by Soper. It is now known to occur outside cultivation in 11 districts
and counties in Ontario. The records from Gatineau, Huntingdon, Stanstead
and Vaudreuil counties in Quebec indicate that this species is not restricted to
the Montreal region, as recorded by Marie-Victorin (1935). As previously
mentioned, the species was first recorded from Quebec, from Wakefield, in
Gatineau County, by James Macoun (1906). S. sorbifolia can now be record-
ed as new to the flora of Alberta and deleted from the flora of Saskatchewan.

It will be interesting to follow the extent of spread of this species, parti-
cularly in eastern Canada.

1962 Copy: FALsE SPIRAEA PERSISTING AND SPREADING 107

Thanks are hereby extended to Prof. F. H. Montgomery, Department of
Botany, Ontario Agricultural College, and to Dr. J. H. Soper, Department of
Botany, University of Toronto, ie kindly furnished the records of Sorbaria
sorbifolia from their respective herbaria and to Dr. R. Beschel for the loan of

specimens from Queen’s University, Kingston.

REFERENCES

Breirune, A. J. 1957. Annotated catalogue Flora. Fredericton, Privately mimeograph-

of the vascular flora of Saskatchewan.
Amer. Midl. Nat. 58: 1-72. 1957.

Brirron, N. L. anp A. Brown. 1913. An
Illustrated Flora of the Northern United
States, Canada and the British Possessions,
2nd ed. Vol. 2, New York, Charles Scrib-
ner’s Sons.

Erskine, D. 1961. Plants of Prince Ed-
ward Island. Bull. Canada Department of
Agriculture. Publ. 1088. [December, 1960].

Fernatp, M. L. 1950. Gray’s Manual of
Botany, 8th ed. New York, American
Book Co.

Fowter, J. 1901a. Report on the flora of
St. Andrews, N.B. Contrib. to Can. Biol.:
41-48.

1901b. A visit to St. Andrews,
N.B. with a catalogue of plants collected
in its vicinity. Proc. Nat. Hist. Assoc.
Miramichi 2: 21-28.

Gutett, J. M. 1954. Plants collected in
the vicinity of Marmora [Ontario]. Canada
Department of Agriculture, Mimeograph-
ed.

Greason, H. A. 1952. The new Britton
and Brown Illustrated Flora of the North-
eastern United States and adjacent Canada.
Vol. 2. Lancaster, Lancaster Press Inc.

Haemetrr, E. M. 1959. New Brunswick

ed.

Lanpon, M. 1960. Vascular Plants of Nor-
folk County, Ontario. Simcoe, The Big
Creek Conservation Authority.

Macoun, J. M. 1898. Contributions to
Canadian Botany. Ottawa Nat. 12: 167.

—. 1906. Contributions to Cana-
dian Botany. Ottawa Nat. 20: 163.

Marte-Vicrorin, Frere. 1935. Flore Lau-
rentienne. Montreal, Imprimerie de la
Salle.

Monrteomery, F. H. 1957. The introduced
plants of Ontario growing outside cultiva-
tion (Part II). Trans. Roy. Can. Inst. 32:
3-34.

Rosinson, B. L. ann M. L. FEeRNatp. 1908.
Gray’s New Manual of Botany, 7th ed.
New York, American Book Co.

Rotanp, A. E. 1947. The flora of Nova
Scotia. Proc. N.S. Inst. Sci. 21(3 & 4): 96-
642.

Russeti, R. C., G. F. LepincHamM anp R. T.
CoupLanp. 1954. An annotated list of
the plants of Saskatchewan. Saskatoon,
University of Saskatchewan.

Soper, J. H. 1954. The Vascular Plants of
Southern Ontario. Toronto, Department
of Botany, University of Toronto.

Received for publication 28 August 1961

NOTICE TO CONTRIBUTORS

The editor will be absent from Ottawa on field work from April 16 to July 20.
Manuscripts should still be addressed to him at Ottawa during this period but a delay

in their acknowledgment must be expected.

Beginning with Vol. 76 No. 3 of the CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST all titles
of periodicals in reference matter of articles and in the text of notes should be written

in full, not abbreviated.

GEOLOGY OF PART OF THE TOWNSHIPS OF
MARCH, HUNTLEY AND NEPEAN,
CARLETON COUNTY, ONTARIO :

Joun L. Kirwan
Department of Geology, Carleton University, Ottawa, Ontario

INTRODUCTION

The Ottawa Sheet, as standardized in the National Topographic System,
lies between latitudes 45°15’ and 45°30’ and longitudes 75°30’ and 76°00’.
This area, which is partly in the Province of Quebec and partly in the province
of Ontario, is underlain mostly by Palaeozoic rocks of the Ottawa-St. Law-
rence lowland, but includes some Precambrian rocks of the Canadian Shield.

In that part of the sheet that is in the province of Ontario, the Shield rocks
form an area of about 15 square miles. This is the eastern half of a south-
easterly trending ridge of such rocks which joins the main mass of the
Canadian Shield near the town of Arnprior, about 10 miles to the west.

Brief mention is made of the Precambrian rocks of the area in the geolo-
gical reports by Ami (1904), Ells (1902) and Wilson (1946).

GENERAL GEOLOGY

Principal rock types are quartzite, crystalline limestone and granitic
paragneisses which are deformed into a vertically plunging, S-shaped fold and
intruded by stocks of granite, diorite and syenite. Northward and eastward
these rocks are overlain by flat-lying Palaeozoic sandstones, but to the south
they are in fault contact with Ordovician limestone (Figure 1).
METASEDIMENTARY GROUP :
Quartzite. Good outcrops of banded quartz rock occur on lots 7, cons. III
and IV of March tp. (in a road cut on the Trans-Canada Highway), on lots 14
and 15, con. I, Huntley tp. and in a wide band through lots 1 to 5, con. I,
Nepean tp. Although massive and feldspathic varieties of this rock do occur,
its sedimentary origin is indicated by the regular stratiform partings within the
rock as well as by its occasional interbanding with the limestones and banded
gneisses (Figure 2). In thin-section the rock was seen to consist of elliptical,
interlocking grains of quartz about 3 mm in length, sutured and minutely
brecciated and containing fine needles of sillimanite and rutile. Microcline
and biotite, the latter broken down to muscovite and hematite, are also present.

Locations of particular outcrops in this report have been given by lot, concession and township, but
space did not permit showing these on the accompanying map. Nepean township is covered only at the
northeast corner of the map-area, its western boundary being the straight road which runs a little west
of north and which meets the northern boundary of the map about a mile east of the title block. Con-
cession I is south of the Trans-Canada Highway, its lots being numbered eastward from the township
boundary so that lot 5 covers the intersection of the railway tracks. The southwestern comer of the map
is mainly concession I of Huntley township and the lots, which are each about .4 of a mile wide, are
numbered so that number 15 is southeast. and number 16 is northeast of the Trans-Canada Highway
which separates them. The rest of the map is March township. Concessions I to IV appear on _ the
map, each a little less than a mile deep and.jnumbered from the boundary with Huntley township. This
boundary is the northwesterly running road a little southwest of the words “Hazeldean Fault’. Lots are
numbered as in Huntley township.

108

109

Kirwan: Grotocy or Marcu, HuntLtey anp NEPEAN

1962

"JodYsS BMLIIO 249 Jo os8pa

qsaa, oy? qw sodAi yor uvriquiessrg soleut yo uonnqmsip oy2 Sutmoys dey -] TUN]

PUD

‘pewnsso; 17nb4

tumouyun ‘pausjous *j0921J18A
‘yopuozssoy dig “FH1HLS

pesnjoe/uos ‘ pawnsso
aou/xosddo pausjag “SLIVLNOD
‘esaaxosAd 'ajijogiydwo =(0/)
"OG pej0/20SSo0 awos sapnjou/
‘ayjzjsonb soulw “auojseu)
‘auojsews) aulj/josshsg

RU

—_—

-
a

—$_____.

ae

ADM|!DY +40}9D444sOUIW ‘OloW: SQYON pp —} —

*€ JoujWw sepnjouy -2/YyJodsp/ay

JO #A/SSoW ‘pepung:as/zjs0ND

‘ayszidonb soujw ‘sassiaubosod
I/4/UDs1B “$syeub voljoasus

*S3IN3S JTIIANSYDS

Sy90/ pajo/90ssb puo af/401g

*S31Y¥3S WVHONINONG

. S
= len Yoo

‘assuads zjsonb of af/u0sJ6 = (05) -o'¢'z
JO sjunowWo JOU/W sSapnjou/ *“SsjauB a4;u0I6
‘ayjuosB jo abojgwesso a/qosso,

ssjaub ajiuaks ‘ajiuahs

@fo/awo/bu09
“asoys0 ‘ayizjs0nb ‘euojspuos

NOILYVWYHYO3S NV3d3N

eu0ssawi)
aul/jo{shs9 ‘au0fsewi7 1NO\LYWYHOS TINH 2
‘NOLN3SYL —Y3AIN HOVIE

NVISIAOGYO

QN3951

:3TIW 3NO S1VNO3 31VOS

JTONVYGVNO VMVLLO eu} 40
t40d $0 GVW 1V91901039

110 THE CaNapIAN FieLp-NATURALIST Vol. 76

Sometimes, both across and along strike, the feldspar content of these
quartzites increases so that the rock has a composition approaching that of
granite. For this reason, and because quartzites and granite gneisses are often
interbanded, contacts between the two rock types are somewhat arbitrary.
On the accompanying map, the term “quartzite” refers to those rocks in which
quartz predominates over all other minerals and which form more than half of
the outcrop.

Crystalline Limestone. Bands of crystalline carbonate rock were found par-
ticularly useful for outlining geological structure in the map-area because they
form marker horizons which are easily traced in the field. “The bands typically
consist of grey-weathering medium- to coarse-grained calcite euhedra and often
have biotite, quartz, apatite, hornblende and other minor constituents aligned
so as to give the rock a stratified appearance (Figure 3). Other types include
a massive cryptocrystalline grey and purple variety which outcrops on lot 15,
con. I, Huntley tp. and a medium-grained pink crystalline variety which
occurs interbanded with white quartzite on lot 2, con. I, Nepean tp.

A prominent feature of the limestones is their association with white,
coarse-grained granite; whenever the white granite occurs it indicates the
presence of carbonate rock nearby. Often the granitic material appears as
spheroids 2 to 10 inches in diameter imbedded in the limestone (such as on
lots 5 and 7, con. II, March tp.), otherwise the granite is massive and has a
gradational contact with the carbonate. A thin-section from the white granite
was composed of microcline feldspar, quartz, scapolite and graphite in grain
sizes from 0.1 to 10 mm in diameter.

The significance of the association of the white granite and crystalline
limestone is not known, but there is some evidence that the granitic spheroids
resulted from the brecciation of granitic dykes and the rounding of the frag-
ments by rolling in the plastic carbonate during folding.

Amphibolite, Pyroxenite, Serpentinite. A band of rock composed chiefly of
hornblende and calcite, with a little serpentine, outcrops on lot 3, con. III,
March tp. This amphibolite, being associated with crystalline limestone, was
likely produced by metamorphism of an impure facies of the carbonate.

A grey weathering mass of dark green to black rock outcrops along the
south edge of lot 4, con. II of March tp. In thin-section the rock was seen to
consist of diopside, in crystals about 4 mm in diameter, with a little interstitial
calcite and quartz. Field relationships show that this pyroxenite is part of a
band of crystalline limestone. It probably represents the metamorphic pro-
ducts of a quartzose, magnesium-rich segment of the limestone.

On lot 16, con. I, March tp., serpentine-rich carbonate rocks occur.
Because the outcrops are small but elongate and the serpentine is platy it seems
likely that this occurrence indicates local faulting.

GNEISSIC GROUP

The banded feldspathic rocks form the commonest occurring map-unit
of the area. They consist of a wide variety of rock types ranging in composi-

1962 Kirwan: GeoLocy or Marcu, HuntTLEY AND NEPEAN 111

tion from quartz diorite to feldspathic quartzite, with granite predominating.
That many of these are of sedimentary origin is suggested by their regularity
of banding, their conformable association with quartzites and limestones, their
confinement to definite stratigraphic layers and, occasionally, a mineralogy
suggestive of altered pelitic sediments. Drag-folds, boudinage and questionable
crossbedding are also present.

Several types are noted, but not differentiated on the accompanying geo-
logical map. Hornblende gneiss is composed of medium-grained perthitic
feldspar, green hornblende, quartz and some biotite and crops out chiefly in
the western part of the area. Biotite gneiss is virtually the same, except that
biotite predominates over hornblende. Djioritic gneiss is a term applied to
banded rocks having a composition and appearance similar to the intrusive
diorites of the area and which usually outcrop near such bodies. Rusty
weathering gneiss describes a fissile arrangement of quartz, mica and potassium
feldspar, with pyrite and magnetite, the weathering out of which stains the
outcrop a rusty brown. One or two small outcrops of this rock type were
observed on lots 4 and 5, cons. II and III, March tp. Garnet gneiss is a dis-
tinctive rock type which contains abundant red garnets segregated into irregu-
lar bands, the garnets usually being arranged into a series of ellipses about 2
inches in diameter. Outcrops of this rock are common on lots 6 and 7, con.
III, March tp., a thin-section from the latter showing garnet, abundant biotite,
antiperthitic feldspar and quartz.

In virtually every outcrop of the banded gneisses, lenses and layers of
granitic material which show crosscutting and other intrusive relationships
with the gneisses appear. When the intrusive material was prominent in the
outcrop- such as on lot 5, con. II, March tp. — the rock was termed injection
gneiss.

As with the boundary of the gneisses with the quartzites, the boundary of
the gneisses with the intrusives is poorly defined. An attempt was made to
restrict the banded rocks to the gneissic group (to include as many paragneisses
as possible) and massive rocks, including those having truly gneissic texture,
to the intrusive group (to exclude as many paragneisses as possible). Never-
theless, when banded rocks become truly gneissic along strike —such as on
lots 10, 11 and 12, con. I, March tp.—contacts are necessarily somewhat
arbitrary.

INTRUSIVE GROUP

Diorite and Allied Rocks. Several bodies of massive, or occasionally gneissic,
crystalline rock with a medium grey weathered surface and dark grey to dark
greenish grey fresh surface outcrop within the map-area. These bodies con-
sist of fine- to medium-grained assemblages of andesine, augite and biotite with
hornblende, diopside, quartz, scapolite or calcite sometimes present. Sphene
and iron ores are characteristic. The masses are fairly variable (with sharp
contacts between different phases), but generally they have the composition of
a diorite. “That the bodies are at least locally intrusive into the gneisses is shown

112 THE CANADIAN Fie~tp-NATURALIST Vol. 76

by the presence of banded xenoliths in the diorite (lot 4, con. I, March tp.)
and by dykes of dioritic composition in the gneisses (lot 5, con. III, March.tp.).

Granite. Massive granitic rocks are restricted to the crest of the fold appear-
ing in the western part of the map-area and to the rims of the diorite masses.
A thin-section from the granite on lot 10, con. I, March tp..taken from an
outcrop about 1000 feet from massive diorite consists of about 70 percent albite
(Ab,;-Ab,,.), 20 percent quartz and some microcline and biotite, all showing a
medium-grained granoblastic texture. This unusual composition, as well as
the field association of diorite, suggests that this granite was derived from the
more mafic rock. On the other hand, the massive and gneissic granite from
lot 12, con. I of March tp. has a composition similar to that of the surrounding
gneisses, which might indicate that it was derived from these rocks.

The granite from the edge of a diorite mass on lot 4, con. II, March tp. is
interesting. Although massive, it can be traced into banded gneisses southward
_ and is made up of minerals similar to those in the gneisses, yet it has a grada-
tional contact with the diorite and contains minor amounts of minerals typical
of the diorite, such as andesine and sphene. _ That this was derived from fusion
of the gneisses seems apparent, the mechanism involved being either melting
from the heat from the diorite during intrusion or, noting that this rock out-
crops at the nose of a fold, from plastic flow of the gneisses along a prose
gradient during folding. r

The Geological Survey of Canada’s aeromagnetic map of the area (1950)
shows distinct magnetic anomalies over some of the granitic bodies, reflecting
the occurrence of disseminated magnetite present in some of these rocks.

Syenite. At the extreme west end of the area a large body of crystalline rock
outcrops. This rock was termed syenite on the basis of field relationships
west of the map-area, but its composition is much more variable than the name
implies. Quartz-rich and highly mafic facies were noted in the field and thin-
sections show some minerals typical of the diorites. Perhaps the rock repre-
sents a contaminated diorite. ;

Pegmatite and Aplite Dykes. Conformable and discordant veins of aplite and
pegmatite are present in most of the outcrops near plutons and in dilated zones
at the crests of folds. Large masses of coarse pegmatite have mtruded the
diorites and gneisses in many locations and feldspar quarries have been made
in some. The quarries — the principal ones being on lots 3 and 6, con. II,
March tp. — have all been abandoned.

PALAEOZOIC SEDIMENTS

The lowest member of the Palaeozoic sequence in the Ottawa area iS the
Nepean formation of A. E. Wilson (1946), the nearly flat-lying strata which
unconformably overly the Grenville-type rocks of the Precambrian. Because

1962 Kirwan: Grotocy or Marca, Huntiry ann NEPEAN 113

Ficure 2. Well-banded quartzite interbanded with injected diorite and granitic rocks and
cut by pegmatite dykes. Location is just southeast of the main diorite mass in the area.

Ficure 3. Crystalline limestone west of the Trans-Canada Highway, showing well-
developed stratiform banding.

114 Tue CanapiAn Fretp-NATURALIST Vol. 76

of the virtual absence of fossils in the clastic rocks which comprise the forma-
tion. there is uncertainty as to whether the formation is Cambrian or Ordovi-
cian. .

Conglomerates are relatively rare and poorly exposed. They occur on
lots 14 and 15, con. I, March tp. and a few feet south of the intersection of the
railway tracks at the east end of the map-area. The first mentioned is an
assemblage of rounded quartz pebbles which range in size from sand grains to
about 18 inches and whose occurrence defines part of the northern boundary of
the Precambrian. The second is composed of quartz pebbles about one inch
in diameter in an arkose matrix which overlies the Precambrian but whose
total area is only about three square feet. The third is an assemblage of
subangular quartz pebbles about one inch in diameter held in a matrix of
feldspathic quartz sandstone outcropping within 20 feet of Precambrian quart-
zite. Uniform, cream coloured or white strata of orthoquartzite are common
in the area and may be observed on lots 2, 3, 10 and 11, con. II, March tp. and
: in cliff facings along the eastern margins of the map-area.

On lot 9, con. I, March tp., a small hill of bedded, medium- to coarsely-
grained crystalline limestone containing abundant broken fossil shells, and
dipping about 20 degrees to the northwest, outcrops. On the same lot and on
the adjoining lot 8, horizontal strata of normal, microcrystalline, fossiliferous
grey limestone outcrops to form a small hill about 200 feet long. Specimens
from these two outcrops were dated by A. E. Wilson of the Geological Survey
of Canada (personal communication) as belonging to the Hull member of the
Ottawa formation, Trenton group of the Middle Ordovician.

CENOZOIC DEPOSITS

Unconsolidated glacial and lacustrine deposits, consisting of sand, gravel,
clay and silt occur throughout the area and reach their greatest development
eastward and southward. They are described in detail in the memoir by
Johnston (1917) so are not elaborated upon here.

STRUCTURAL GEOLOGY

The accompanying geological map of the area (Figure 1) shows that the
rocks have been deformed into a nearby S-shaped fold which plunges nearly
vertically. Evidence of folding is found in individual outcrops as drag-folds,
boudinage, slickensides between beds and, on lot 5, con. II, March tp., the
nose of a fold. Unfortunately, top determinations could not be made with
certainty.

In the Precambrian rocks, minor faulting occurs in almost every outcrop,
but no major displacements were detected. “The post-Ordovician Hazeldean
fault, which defines the southern edge of the Precambrian in the area is
demonstrated by the tilted beds of Hull limestone. These outcrop within 200
feet of the Precambrian rocks but are at a lower elevation. ‘This location is
on strike of the Hazeldean fault defined by Wilson (1946) a few miles to the

1962 Kirwan: Geo.ocy or Marcu, HunTLEY aNnp NEPEAN 115

TABLE 1. — FORMATIONS

CENOZOIC P Teena and Sant, Gera Gaa Sk

Unconformity

PALAEOZOIC ORDOVICIAN: Trenton Hull Member: Crystalline
Group Limestone
Ottawa Formation
CAMBRIAN or Orthoquartzite, Arkose,
ORDOVICIAN Conglomerate

Nepean Formation

Unconformity

PRECAMBRIAN Intrusive Group Pegmatite and Aplite Dykes
Syenite
Granite
Diorite and Allied Rocks

Gneissic Group Injection Gneiss

Granitic Paragneisses
Garnet Gneiss

Rusty Weathering Gneiss
Dioritic Gneiss

Biotite Gneiss
Hornblende Gneiss

Metasedimentary- Group Serpentinite
Pyroxenite
Amphibolite
Crystalline Limestone
Quartzite

southeast, so must be a continuation of it. Total displacement is not known
with accuracy because of the uncertainty associated with the thicknesses of
some of the sedimentary formations, but from the figures contained in Wilson’s
memoir (1946) a vertical displacement of over 700 feet is calculated.

REFERENCES
Ami, H. M. 1904. Geology of the Carp Jounston, W. A. 1917. Pleistocene and
Area. Ottawa Nat. 19: 92-93. ~ Recent Deposits in the Vicinity of Ot-
Etts, R. W. 1902. Report on the Geology tawa, with a Description of the Soils.
and Natural Resources of the Area In- Geol. Surv, Canada, Mem. 101: 1-69; Map

cluded in the Map of the City of Ottawa No. 1662.
and Vicinity. Geol. Surv. Canada Annu.

Rept. 12, (Part G.): 35. Wuson, A. E. 1946. Geology of the Ot-
GerotocicaL SURVEY OF CANADA. 1950. tawa-St. Lawrence Lowland, Ontario and
Aeromagnetic Map, Ottawa} Ontario. Quebec. Geol. Surv. Canada, Mem. 241:

Geol. Surv. Canada, Geophysics Paper 8. 9-26, Maps 852A, 413A, 414A.
Received for publication 26 September 1961

116

Tue CanapiAn Fietp-NaTURALIST

Well 76

REVIEWS

Birds of the Caribbean
By Roserr Porter ALLEN. New York,

Viking Press; Toronto, Macmillan, 1961.
256 p., 98 colored plates. $17.50.

This handsome volume is a popular
introduction to the rich avifauna of the
Caribbean region. Its geographic scope
includes the Caribbean Sea and _ its
islands, coastal Central America from
the Yucatan Peninsula south to Panama
and coastal South America from Panama
east to about Trinidad.

The approximately 1000 species of
birds found in the region are represented
in the book by 98 species of 50 families.
All 98 species are beautifully illustrated
by color photographs, mostly of out-
standing quality, and are the work of 23
photographers. Many cover a full page,
several two pages, and show excellent
detail. The book is built around avail-
able high-quality photographs which
from that region are limited in number.
Yet this reviewer has seen only two or
three of the photographs reproduced
elsewhere (Saffron Finch, Glossy Cow-
bird, Barn Owl). Unfortunately, plates
66 and 68 appear to be missidentified and
should be captioned Pyroderus scutatus
and Rupicola peruviana respectively
(Wetmore, 1962, Atlantic Nat. 17:60).

The species accounts, in popular vein,
are informally informative, occasionally
narrative, and contain many well-chosen
- quotes and much other documented in-
formation from various sources. There
is also an Identification Guide (pp. 207-
242) giving descriptions, ranges in con-
siderable detail, and a compilation of
additional vernacular names. A_ short
chapter (pp. 243-248) contains the names
of the photographers, a few biographical
- details and for camera enthusiasts data
on equipment (camera, lenses, film) and
techniques used for particular photo-
graphs. An introductory chapter outlines
the-region and discusses the origin and

distribution of the avifauna. Finally,
there is a useful 5 -page bibliography.

The book is aimed at the layman and
jet-age traveler to the Caribbean and
makes no pretenses of being an exhaus-
tive treatise or a complete field guide to
all the birds of this rich region. For
those who want to continue further,
however, it contains plenty of sugges-
tions. From its attractive jacket depicting
a Blue-gray Tanager through its multi-
colored pages, superb photographs, and
lively writing it is a beautiful book that
will be enjoyed by just about anybody.

W. Eart GopFrrey

The Cloud Forest

By Peter Martuiessen. New York, The Vik-
ing Press, 1961. 280 p. $7.75.

The title of this book leads one to
expect an ecological work, but in fact
it is a wonderfully told chronicle of a
journey which begins in New York and
continues to Peru by way of the Carib-
bean Sea and the Brazilian ports along the
Amazon River, to Tierra del Fuego and
Mato Grosso, ending with a journey on
little-known jungle rivers in Peru.

In his 20,000 mile expedition to South

America, Matthiessen observes the land,

the people, their customs and the wildlife.
He has captured the somber character
of the American indian and pictures well
the quasi-modern, historic aspects of the
larger South American cities. His per-
ceptions of the silent, mysterious Ama-
zonian jungle and descriptions of wildlife,
particularly the conspicuous and easily
observed insects and birds, are vivid ex-
periences for the reader.

The region traversed is fantastically
large, but the author is a keen observer,
realistically noting what others before
him have not, and he has succeeded in
picturing the paradoxical nature of the

1962

continent, particularly the abundance of
nature, yet the danger of extinction of
many species and the need for conserva-
tion. Interference with the balance of

mature is tending to cause extinction of |
wildlife in Patagonia as it did in North _

America. Seals and sea otters, once com-
mon, are now scarce on the coasts of
Tierra del Fuego, and the senseless per-
secution of the red fox of this region has
resulted in an excess of geese. Full pro-
tection of many species and control of
others will be needed if wildlife in South
America does not follow the fate of its
North American brethren.

The book is divided into two sections.
The first is a travelogue of the Amazon-
as, the Andes, Tierra del Fuego and Mato
Grosso, with brief notes on the cities
visited. The second, the most interesting
to this reviewer, is the chronicle of a
dangerous river trip in the jungles of
Peru in search of a large fossil reptile and
rumored Inca ruins. Four maps and 43
of the author’s photographs illustrate the
text, which has only a few typographi-

cal errors.

Perhaps while reading the book one is
left with the sensation that the terrain
covered was done too rapidly and the
experiences described were too vivid to
leave lasting impressions. Segments of the
travalogue, if elaborated, would make
interesting books in themselves. It is hop-
ed that other books will come from this
author, particularly detailed accounts of
the indians of Goias or about the varied

land of Tierra del Fuego. As stated by

Matthiessen, “One must hurry if one is
to glimpse the earth’s last wild terrain,”
and this excellent book is highly recom-
mended for those who enjoy the exper-
lence of adventure mixed with a well-
written account of the vast latin land to
the south.

J. R. Tamsirr

University of the Andes
Bogota, Colombia

ReEvIEWS

ISL

Fishes of the Pacific Coast of Canada

By W. A. Cremens and G. V. Wirsy. Ot-
tawa, Queen’s Printer, Second Edition,
1961. 433 p. 281 fig. $5.00 (Fisheries Re-
search Board of Canada Bull. 68).

Fishes of the Pacific Coast of Canada

has long been the finest handbook on a

North American fish fauna. It now ap-
pears in a considerably improved second
edition.

The new edition is embellished with
six new color plates and new type face
in the keys and bibliography. Iwenty-
nine species, three families and 75 pages
have been added. The characters: in the
keys have been improved and the page
of the species description has been placed
after each species in the key. This facili-

“tates turning to the description. The

classification has been modified. Most
common names are brought into agree-
ment with the AFS-ASIH list. The
bibliography, although enlarged, is not
complete; perhaps this should have been
stated. As in past printings the volume
presents keys, illustrations, descriptions,
distributions and notes on the habits of
each of the species, a history, glossary
and bibliography. A map bf the coast
might be useful.

The ranges given include only the
west coast of North America, although
some species are found elsewhere. “This
may be misleading to the uninitiated. Al-
though it is reported that the 1908-1909
collections of Messrs. C. H. Young and
W. Spreadborough are in the U.S. Nat-
ional Museum, a good portion of these
are actually in the National Museum of
Canada. (Despite an age of over half a
century they are still in fine condition).
According to Svetovidov who revised
their respective families, Gadus macro-
cephalus and Clupea pallasii are subspecies
of the Atlantic forms.

The attitude of the authors towards
potential records is to be much com-
mended—“The authors have not attempt-
ed to anticipate records, in the hope that

118
the pleasure of discovery will be an in-
centive to persons and organizations to
make collections throughout the exten-
sive waters along the coast.” It is to be
hoped that other authors will emulate
this attitude.

It may be noted that a similar work is
in preparation on the fishes of the At-
lantic coast of Canada and for a later
date on the fishes of the Arctic coast of
Canada. It is to be wished only that
similar works be written on Canadian
fauna other than fish.

This elegantly green cloth bound book
with gold lettering is to be heartily re-
commended to all interested in fishing,
sport or commercial, or in ichthyology.
- The price of only $5.00 makes it a well
worth while purchase, even to those who
have an earlier printing.

D. E. McAtuisrer

Curator of Fishes
National Museum of Canada

Michigan Wildflowers

By Hexen V. Smiru. Cranbrook Institute of
Science Bulletin 42, Bloomfield Hills, 1962
(dated 1961). xii + 465 p. $5.00.

As cities expand, wild habitats shrink;
as more people have more leisure time
to appreciate Nature, Nature becomes
more elusive. Sensing the situation, con-
servation groups in Michigan have be-
come active, the State has passed a law
to protect certain rare plants, and the
Cranbrook Institute has admirably pro-
vided reliable botanical information to
satisfy an interested public.

Cranbrook’s publication No. 42 has
been expertly constructed by Dr. Helen
Smith, a dedicated naturalist as well as
professional botanist, into a manual of
no uncertain significance describing all
the wildflowers of the State. About its
only difference from a strictly technical
manual is the elimination of some non-
essential details and addition of brief
notes on the lore, soil preferences and
garden potentialities of the plants. Michi-
gan’s corps of critical botanists has made

Tue Canapian FieLtp-NaTuRALIST

Vol. 76

sure the facts are straight. One will need
to have some previous training in botany
to use the book properly. And this being
the case, one wonders why its use has
not been facilitated by setting the keys
in the now-standard progressively indent-
ed style. The page space that publishers
seem to think is saved by tabulating the
statements is far outweighed by the dif-
ference made between running a key and
running a maze.

The drawings, too, are by a competent
botanist, the well-known illustrator Ruth
Powell Brede. Her plates occupy more
than half the total pages. Many owners
of the book will undoubtedly be tempted
to color in the neat line-drawings to
match their finds, a practice perhaps
more popular with naturalists in the past,
but still gratifying.

The manual has been kept within
bounds by restricting its content to the
quarter of the State’s plant species which
have some flower-appeal, whether native
or naturalized. Ferns, grasses, shrubs,
waterweeds and the like are excluded —
but there are other books on these. Michi-
gan has a considerable diversity of flor-
istic elements related to both the decidu-
ous and coniferous forest as well as to
the prairie and Great Lakes communities.
The book could therefore be of equal
use in Canada from southern Manitoba
to southern Quebec, and Canadian users
will be satisfied to note that the Canada
Thistle, for once, is designated as not
coming from Canada.

W. G. Dore

Island of the Lost

By Paut Fentmore Cooper. New York,
Putnam’s Sons, 1961. 256 p. $4.95.

This is a book about King William
Island and its “. . . unique role in the
history of the (Canadian) Arctic”. The
story is accompanied by helpful charts,
is beautifully told, and is a generally true
enough tale. To readers particularly in-
terested to know the truth of the Franklin

1962

tragedy, but who have not the time to
look into the records for themselves, I’d
specially recommend it along with Dr.
L. H. Neatby’s In Quest of the North-
west Passage.

However, there are a few details here
and there which, although they don’t
- much affect the general truth of the story,
do not quite agree with my understand-
ing of the “Kikertarmiut” part of it, as
acquired from living on the island and
serving its people over the course of
many years.

Of the very numerous old village and
house ruins scattered throughout the
King William Island area there are two
main types — such as at Creswell Bay of
a whaling and sealing people, mainly,
(Thule?) and at Malerualik of a caribou
hunting, fishing and sealing people, main-
ly, although these overlap at many places.
But there are others which seem to be
different again. Tent rings, especially at
the fishing places, are very numerous.
Then there are the more or less recent
ancestors of today’s natives — of decided-
ly mixed types — who do not seem to
have built permanent houses anywhere
but lived in skin tents spring, summer and
fall, and snow houses during the winter
‘months. This might indicate a more
complicated history than in Mr. Cooper’s
simple tale. Some of these, perhaps,
archaeologists and others may dig out
in time and piece together.

In my time the numbers of caribou
migrating to and from the whole King
William Island area fluctuated consider-
ably — there were lean years and fat

years. But I doubt if caribou were ever \
very numerous on the island itself be- \

cause it is extremely barren with only
scant and scattered grazing available. A
few hundred animals gathering at such
crossing places as at Simpson Strait dur-

ing late summer and early fall might -
well give a rather false impression to ,

passers-by, such as Schwatka, for in-

stance. The favourite caribou hunting

places of the Netsilingmiut were on the

REVIEWS

119

Boothia Isthmus to Murchison River area
and of the Ilivillermiut round about Ade-
laide Peninsula and Sherman Inlet. But
always, be it noted, there was a scattered
residue of caribou which remained wan-
dering around all over the area the year
round. A few small whiter caribou from
Victoria and Prince of Wales Islands
also sometimes visited it. Again, caribou
cross back and forth over the sea ice at
will from island to island or island to
mainland and vice versa during ten
months of the year. A very early freeze-
up and very late break-up can affect the
movements of caribou considerably be-
cause if the ice is good enough to walk
on you don’t find them collecting so much
at the crossing places. But truly for ten
months of every year so far as it affects
the movements of the people or the cari-
bou Kikertak is not really an island.

On pages 21-22 it is stated: “At the
narrowest point the caribou crossed in
autumn from the island to the mainland
and the Eskimos waited for them at
Malerualik — the place where one follows
caribou”. Although caribou did, and do,
cross as described, the name Malerualik
has reference to the swift current there
and its rough water and waves, and not
to caribou.

L. A. LeaRMoNTH
Georgetown, Ontario

OruHer New Tires

On an Unnamed Population of the Great
Horned Owl. By L. L. Snyper. Toron-
to, The Royal Ontario Museum, 1961. 7 p:
(Life Sciences Division, Contribution No.
54)

\

Distribution and Abundance of Pheasants

_/-in Illinois. By Frepertck Gnreevey,

Ronatp F. Lasisky and Sruart H. Mann.
Urbana, State of Illinois, Natural History

- Survey Division, 1962. 16 p, Free (Biol.
Notes No. 47)

120

Tue CanapiAN Fietp-NATURALIST

Vol. 76

NOTES

First New Brunswick Record
for the Cattle Egret

On Aprit 29th, 1961, a flock of about 20
birds came down in a field on a farm
about one mile east of the St. Croix
River in New Brunswick and about ten
miles up river from St. Stephen. It was
reported that they were attacking the
family cat and the farmer’s boy fired
into the flock killing one of them.

Mr. Howard Moore of Fredericton
calling at the farm soon afterwards
heard the story and was given the dead
‘bird which he took with him to Freder-
icton where it was identified as a Cattle
Egret, Bubulcus ibis. There through his
aunt, Miss Nettie Moore, it was mounted
and later placed in the New Brunswick
Museum.

This is the first Cattle Egret reported
in New Brunswick and there seems no
reason to doubt that all 20 birds were

Cattle Egrets, the largest number to be |

reported in one flock so far to the north-
east.
W. AustTIN SQUIRES

Curator, Natural Science Dept.
New Brunswick Museum

Saint John, N.B.

14 December 1961

Fulvous Tree Duck
in New Brunswick

On Novemser 4, a party of deer hunters,
including Otis Green, at Middle Dam on
Seal Cove Brook on Grand Manan Id. saw
a flock of 21 strange ducks, later identified
as Dendrocy gna bicolor, fly in and light
in the pond. They seemed exhausted and
one was later shot by a hunter. This speci-
men will be preserved. Nine or ten were
seen at Seal Cove Meadow about a mile
south on November 11 and one at Big
Pond half a mile west on November 12.

On November 21 near Evandale in
Kings County on the St. John River
Donald Cameron fired at a flock of six
unfamiliar ducks and shot five of them.
A week later one of these was identified
by me at the New Brunswick Museum
as the Fulvous Tree Duck and eventually
four, three males and one female, all
adults, were made into study skins. The
fifth had been plucked. All were emacia-
ted. There was no visible fat and the
remaining flesh seemed shrunken. There
were a few seeds, ground up vegetation
and ground up insects in the stomachs.

It seems logical to suppose that the six
at Evandale were a remnant of the flock
of twenty-one found at Grand Manan
seventeen days earlier.

It appears that the only Canadian
record previous to this influx was one
taken at Alberni, British Columbia, Sep-
tember 29, 1905 and preserved im the
Provincial Museum of British Columbia.

W. AvusTIN SQUIRES ©

Curator, Natural Science Department
New Brunswick Museum

Saint John, N.B.

14 December 1961

Trumpeter Swans Nesting
in Saskatchewan

TRUMPETER swans, Olor buccinator,
were found nesting in the Cypress Hills
of Alberta in 1948 by Robert Lister
(Can. Field Nat. 65:157, 1951). While
visiting in the Cypress Hills Provincial
Park in Saskatchewan I was told of the
presence of a pair of swans by Conserva-
tion Officer R. Zaff who said that they |
had nested in the same spot for at least
three years. Following his directions on
June 20, 1961, I found a family of
trumpeter swans, and was able to photo-
graph the parent birds with their four

1962

young about the size of a mallard. They
occupied a pond with extensive reedy
margins. Although only about a mile
from the resort area the pond was not
easily accessible and the presence of the
swans was not generally known. Mr.
Zaft informed me also of the presence of
another pair of nesting swans in a more
remote part of the Hills but I was un-
able to get into this area to check the
report.

During the past fifteen years at least

two, and possibly three, pairs of trump-

eter swans have established nesting sites
in the Cypress Hills and it would appear
that the region has been selected as a
permanent nesting area. Suitable habitat
is scattered throughout the Hills but I
lack a sufficient knowledge of the ter-
rain to hazard a guess at the population
of swans which might be supported. Any
extension of the breeding range of such
a localized species, however, is of con-
siderable importance to its future exist-
ence.

Parts of the Cypress Hills are already
set aside as provincial game sanctuaries
but hunting is allowed on adjacent parts.
It is to be hoped that the swans are not
molested by hunters. A study of dates of
arrival and departure of the swans would
be of considerable value to the authori-
ties who have the responsibility for set-
ting the dates of the hunting seasons for
legal game.

W. Ray Satt

Department of Anatomy, University of
Alberta

Edmonton, Alberta

17 July 1961

Poison Sumac in Eastern Ontario

Ir 1s always well to know Poison Sumac
and where it grows, even though of rare
occurrence, so that contact can be
avoided. A new site, near Summerstown,
has now been reported by George N.
Gogo of that town who apparently is

Nores

121

immune to the toxin. Formerly no oc-
currences were known in Ontario east
of Toronto and Muskoka some 250 miles
away (see Soper & Heimburger, 100
Shrubs of Ontario, 1961). Stations in the
province of Quebec are closer but still
at considerable distances: Templeton, 56
miles northwest of Summerstown, and
Laprairie, 60 miles east. The stands at
these points, as well as others in Quebec
at Sorel and Missisquoi Bay (see Ray-
mond, Mem. Montr. Bot. Gard. 5, 1950),
are quite small and apparently strictly
localized; all are quite distant from the
main population which extends north-
ward to about central Vermont and
New York.

The pearly clusters of fruit distinctive
of the shrub are much more conspicuous
in the wintertime when not hidden by
the foliage of pinnately compound leaves.
Mr. Gogo says that in the past he was in
the habit of going on snow-shoes to
gather pockets-full of the fruit to scatter
for the Ruffed Grouse at a feeding sta-
tion. He has now provided a fine speci-
men of leaves and fruiting panicles for
deposit in the herbarium of the Plant
Research Institute to substantiate his
identification and record. The label data
read: Rhus vernix L., Poison Sumac.
LOCALITY: roughly two to two and a
half miles west of Summerstown Station,
Charlottenburg Township, Glengarry
County, Ontario; growing south of the
C.N.R. track and both nerth and south
of the new Highway 401 which has cut
through the area. HABITAT & ABUN-
DANCE: wet and mucky swampland;
growing over a very considerable area,
quite plentiful but in larger amount
south of the new highway. DESCRIP-
TION: a shrub, fairly tall. DATE:
September 20, 1961. COLLECTOR:
George N. Gogo, Summerstown.

~ Wituiam G. Dore
Department of Agriculture

Ottawa, Ont.
29 November 1961

122 Tue CanapiAn FieLtp-NaTuRALIST

' Yellow-headed Blackbirds
Breeding at Rainy River, Ontario

Durine THE period May 13 to June 9,
1961, male and female Yellow-headed
Blackbirds, Xanthocephalus xanthoce-
phalus (Bonaparte), were observed in the
regions of the mouth of Rainy River
and the shores of Lake of the Woods by
members of a Royal Ontario Museum
field party excavating an Indian mound
some three miles upstream from the
mouth of the river. The birds were
usually observed in reed islands isolated
from the mainland. The reed islands are
located south of Quick Island at the
northeastern end of Sable Island in Lake
‘of the Woods, within the Inner Passage
behind Sable Island leading from Quick
Island to Four Mile Bay at the mouth of
Rainy River, and upstream in Rainy.
River on both shores as far as Church
Point, Wabanica Creek, Minnesota.

A minimal count of 35 males was
made on a boat trip on June 7. Many of
the males exhibited territoriality and
singing. Only two nests were observed,
but the presence of others was suspected
from the behavior of a number of fe-
males. One male and one nest with four
eggs were collected on this trip. These
are preserved as specimens in the Royal
Ontario Museum, Life Sciences Division,
Department of Birds, Numbers 91628
(male skin) and 7544 (nest and eggs).
The male obtained was singing near the
nest, and was probably the male of the
pair, the female of which was put off the
nest when it was collected. The four
eggs were fertile, the vitelline plexus and
blood islands being well developed, as
observed upon blowing.

This is the first breeding record of the
Yellow-headed Blackbird in Ontario.
However, previous reports of nesting
and summering are as follows: One un-
confirmed nesting report by John D.

Jacob, game warden, at Saganagons Lake’

near Quetico Park, on May 14, 1931
(ROM files); one summer observation
by L. Paterson at Quibell on the Cana-

Vol. 76

dian National Railway west of Sioux
Lookout for which no date is available
(L. L. Snyder, Trans. Roy. Can. Inst.,
30: 84, 1953); one bird on May 24 and
four birds on June 3, 1959, seen at Dry-
den by Mrs. Laura A. Howe; one on
May 5 in the Black Sturgeon area by T.
Swift; one on May 24 in Fort William
by W. Zaroski and possibly another in-
dividual by A. E. Allin (J. M. Speirs,
Bull. Fed. Ont. Nat. 85 (3):24, 1959),
and one male specimen collected at Mac-
diarmid on Lake Nipigon on June 20,
1933 (L. L. Snyder, Trans. Roy. Can.
Inst., 16: 266, 1928). An additional sight —
record of a male Yellow-headed Black-
bird can be noted from Indian Reserve
35C, on the south shore at the base of
the Aulneau Peninsula, Sabaskong Bay,
Lake of the Woods, by the author, on
May 24, 1961.

Cuares S. CHURCHER
Department of Zoology
University of Toronto
Toronto 5, Ontario
19 June 1961

First Record of the Keeled Slug,
Milax gagates (Drap.), in
Nova Scotia*

‘THE FIRST OCCURRENCE Of the keeled slug,
Milax gagates (Drap.) in Nova Scotia
was authenticated with the collection of
a single specimen at Amherst, Nova
Scotia, in early May, 1961. It was later
identified by Dr. Aurele La Rocque, De-
partment of Geology, The Ohio State
University, Columbus, Ohio. The original °
specimen and subsequently several more
were collected in the cellar of a house
by R. S. Horsburgh of the Nova Scotia
Department of Agriculture and Market-
ing. It was immediately seen to be an
unfamiliar species, possibly the great slug |
of Europe, Limax maximus L. ‘The
strongly keeled back, elliptical impression
on the mantle, and frequently darker
colour in M. gagates will differentiate it
from L. maximus. The specimens col-

1962

lected were quite black, and between 60
and 70 mm. long when alive.

In England this species is one of three
members of the genus Milax that are re-
garded as very destructive pests especially
of root crops and potatoes. They are
evidently largely subterranean in habit.

Milax gagates was not found during
1960 when rather intensive surveys of
the slugs in fields and field margins were
conducted in the vicinity of Kentville
and Hall’s Harbour, Kings County; Dig-
by, Digby County; and Cow Bay, Halifax
County. Nor did Ord and Watts (1950,
New records for the distribution of cer-
tain land Mollusca in Nova Scotia. Proc.
N.S. Inst. Sci. 22:16-35) find it in their
extensive surveys. La Rocque (1953,
Catalogue of the Recent Mollusca of
Canada, National Museum of Canada
Bulletm No. 129) gives its range in
North America as California, Oregon,
Washington, Idaho, Colorado, Pennsyl-
vania, and probably British Columbia.

Gee7S2 Box
Research Station
Canada Department of Agriculture
Kentville, Nova Scotia

6 October 1961

*Contribution No. 1085, Research Station, Can-
ada Department of Agriculture, Kentville, Nova
cotia.

An Observation of a Callen
Eagle Dominating Coyotes

On SEPTEMBER 11, 1961, the writers dis-
covered the fresh carcass of a bull elk
in the Cascade River Valley of Banff
National Park.

On September 15, at a vantage point
about 400 yards from the elk carcass, we
watched with binoculars as a golden eagle
fed on the remains and two coyotes
moved about them. On three occasions
one of the coyotes rushed forward and
each time the eagle drove him away by
advancing with a flapping of wings, and
then resumed feeding. We watched for
several minutes during which time the
eagle maintained possession of the kill,
the coyotes skulked nearby, and a raven

Nores

123

and three magpies flew from tree to tree
over it. No vocal activity of either the
eagle or the coyotes could be detected
from our observation point.

We returned three hours later to find
the eagle still in possession of the kill.
When we approached, the eagle and the
coyotes departed, and the magpies moved
in to pick up scraps. We found that most
of the remains had been covered with a
light layer of soil and debris scraped
from around them, evidently the work
of a bear.

Dona.p R. FLoox
Donatp C. THomas

Canadian Wildlife Service’
Edmonton, Alberta
20 October 1961

Exceptional Height for
Rhododendron lapponicum

UnusuaLLy Tati Rhododendron lapponi-
cum were collected by me in June 1961
along the Yellowknife Highway, N.W.T.,
some 66 miles west-northwest of Yellow-
knife. The specimens were growing in a
rich black spruce-feather moss forest.
Plants 15 to 24 inches (38 - 61 cm) were
frequent. The tallest plant observed was
30 inches (76 cm). In contrast, some
manuals that include this species give 5
to 12 cm as its maximum height. Cody
(1956, Can. Field Nat. 70: 121) comments
upon the “tall stature’—15 to 18 inches
(38-46 cm)—of certain of his specimens
of R. lapponicum. Eighteen inches (46
cm) is recorded as the maximum authen-
ticated height of the species by Polunin
(1959, Circumpolar Arctic Flora), who
does, however, suggest that a far greater
height may be reached: “R. lapponicum
. . . iS an attractive little bush 4-25
(-46) (-100?) cm height.”

Joun W. Turret

Chicago Natural History Museum
Chicago 5, Illinois
28 September 1961

124

The Brassy Minnow, River
Shiner and Sauger New
to Alberta

WHILE STUDYING SPECIMENS at the Nat-
ional Museum of Canada three species of
fishes were found which had not yet
been recorded from Alberta. Since there
are only 27 collections of Albertan fish
in the National Museum and these con-
tained three unreported fishes, further
exploration of Alberta’s fish fauna would
probably be rewarding. These new re-
cords bring the known number for the
province to 39 native species, while ad-
jacent Saskatchewan has 52 and British
‘Columbia has 56. Following the paper of
Holt (1960, Copeia (3) 192-200), Pro-
sopium oregonium may be removed from
the list of Alberta fishes, as it is a synonym
of Prosopium williamsoni.

Three specimens of the brassy minnow,
Hybognathus hankinsoni WHubbs, were
taken from a shallow pool in Lodge
Creek streambed (Milk River-Missouri
drainage) crossing highway 48, 31.6 miles
north of Wiaildhorse, about 42 miles
southeast of Medicine Hat, southeastern
Alberta. They bear catalogue number
NMC61-205. They possessed the follow-
ing characters: preserved colour yellow;
broad midlateral stripe fading anteriorly;
dark middorsal stripe; dorsal origin an-
terior to pelvic base; mouth inferior,
short, terminating before eye; scale radii
21; 8 dorsal rays; 7 or 8 anal rays; 37 to
38 lateral line scales; intestine long and
coiled; peritoneum solid black.

Ichthyologists were puzzled to find the
brassy minnow in ditches at Stave River
near Vancouver, British Columbia in 1952,
the closest collection to these being Mon-
tana. Because of the hiatus between col-
lections it was surmised that the Stave
River population was the result of an
introduction. They were found in Sum-
mit Lake, north of Prince George, B.C.
and in the upper Peace River, weakening
the introduction hypothesis. The discov-
ery of the brassy minnow in Alberta

Tue CanapiANn Frecp-NATURALIST

Vol. 76

further reduces the hiatus between Bri-
tish Columbia and Montana populations.

Along with Hybognathus hankinsoni,
were collected Castostomus commersonii,
Pimephales promelas, Chrosomus eos,
Rhinichthys cataractae, Couesius plum-
beus, and Eucalia inconstans. Also col-
lected with these were unusual specimens
of the Iowa darter, Etheostoma exile
(Girard). These darter specimens had
few or no scales on the operculum and
none on the cheek, unlike eastern speci-
mens examined from Saskatchewan (As-
siniboine-Red drainage), Ontario, and

Michigan. Simon (1951, Wyoming fishes,

Bull. 4 Wyoming Game Fish Dept., p.
101) describes Wyoming specimens as
cheeks naked, opercles scaled, so that
they would seem to be close to Albertan
material in this respect. Meristic charac-
ters of Albertan material were similar to
eastern specimens. The above fishes were
collected by Mr. Francis R. Cook, her-
petologist of the National Museum and
his assistant, Mr. M. G. Foster, July 9
1961.

The river shiner, Notropis blennius
(Girard) is not listed for Alberta by
Scott (1958, A checklist of the freshwater
fishes of Canada and Alaska, Royal Ont.
Mus.), although several other authors
record it from there. Our specimens were
collected from Morrin, in the Red Deer-
South Saskatchewan drainage about 65
miles northeast of Calgary, on September
18, 1916 by George F. Sternberg. They
bear catalogue number NMC58-187. Sev-
eral specimens were sent to Dr. W. B.
Scott of the Royal Ontario Museum.
According to him (in litt.) “. . . these
specimens are the first positive record
we have for this species in Alberta”. As
the river shiner is known from Saskatche-
wan its occurrence in Alberta is not
unexpected. The specimens have the
following characters: scales, opercle and
cheek silver; middorsal stripe faint but
surrounding the dorsal base and not ex-
panded at the dorsal origin; no dorsal or
caudal spots; mouth almost horizontal,
extending to below front of eye; dorsal
origin over pelvic origin; posterior edges

1962

of dorsal and anal slightly emarginate;
pharyngeal teeth 2, 4-4, 2 or 1; dorsal
rays 8; anal rays 7 and 36 to 37 lateral
line scales.

The sauger, Stizostedion canadense
(Smith) has never been recorded from
Alberta. Collections NMC60-345 taken
in the Red Deer River (a more exact
locale was not given), June 1915 and
NMC60-35 at Morrin, July 15 and 17,
1916, by George F. Sternberg, proved to
be this species. The specimens are readily
separable from their close relative the
walleye, Stizostedion virtreum vitreum,
also known from Alberta, by the rows of
spots in the first dorsal fin, the well-scaled
cheeks, the 4 to 8 pyloric caeca and the
18 rays in the second dorsal fin. One of
the Morrin specimens of sauger was sent
to the Royal Ontario Museum.

D. E. McALListTER

Curator of Fishes

National Museum of Canada
Ottawa, Ontario

15 September 1961

Range Extensions of Crow-foot
violet and Butterwort

For A NUMBER Of years I have seen plants
of Viola pedatifida on the Upper Camp-
bell Beach near Brokenpipe Lake, about
15 miles north-west of Dauphin.

Specimens were collected in 1959, and
identified at the National Museum of
Canada. This site is about 75 miles north
of the most northerly listing for pedati-
fida in Scoggan’s Flora of Manitoba (1957,
Bull nat. Mus. Canada 140).

The Upper Campbell was a gravel
beach of glacial Lake Agassiz during one
of the major periods of stability and is
now followed by Manitoba highway No.
10 in this sector. Botanically it is a salient
of prairie flora in the surrounding Park-

land.
In 1961 numerous plants of Pinguicula

NotTEs

125

vulgaris were found in an outlier of Bor-
eal forest on Sec. 20-26-22 W.1, about 8
miles north of Gilbert Plains. Plants were
growing on sphagnum moss on the tam-
arack shaded border of a spring fed pool
from 2 to 6 inches above water line.
Specimens and photos are filed with the
National Museum. Scoggan’s most south-
erly listing for Manitoba is Gillam, about
350 miles north of this site. This appears
to be the first collection of Butterwort
from the Parkland farming area.

James L. Parker
Box 99, Gilbert Plains
Manitoba
23 January 1962

A Saskatchewan Specimen of
the Greater Scaup

THE OCCURRENCE of the Greater Scaup in
Saskatchewan has heretofore been regard-
ed as hypothetical (Mitchell, Can. Field-
Nat. 38: 105; 1924). Recently Mr. E. M.
Callin (in litt.) suggested to me that it
would be desirable to examine an old
mounted scaup from Saskatchewan listed
as a Greater Scaup many years ago by
Harlan I. Smith (Handbook of the Rocky
Mountains Park Museum, p. 44; 1914).
Fortunately the specimen is still extant
in the Banff National Park Museum,
Banff, Alberta, and through the courtesy
of Mr. D. B. Coombs and Dr. G. M.
Stirrett, National Parks Branch, I have
been able to borrow it for examination.
It proves to be a Greater Scaup, Aythya
marila nearctica Stejneger, a female taken
at Indian Head, Saskatchewan, in 1892
by William Spreadborough, thus estab-
lishing unquestionably the occurrence of
that species in Saskatchewan.

W. Eart Goprrey
National Museum of Canada
Ottawa, Ontario
10 January 1962

126 Tue CaNnapiAN FirLtp-NaATuURALIST Vol. 76

RESERVE FUND FOUNDATION

Dover Publications Inc., 180 Varick Street, New York, 14, N.Y. has recently published
at $1.35 a new unabridged edition of The Common Spiders of the United States by James
H. Emerton. The original edition of this work was published by Ginn and Company in
1902 and has long been unavailable. A new key and selected bibliography by S. W.
Frost, Professor Emeritus, the Pennsylvania State University, has been added.

Access to this work of the late J. H. Emerton should be of special interest to members
of the Ottawa Field-Naturalists’ Club, for he was a member of the club and an authority
and writer on Canadian Spiders. He recorded in the Canapian Frevp-Naturauisr. (34:
106-108, September 1920) that he had recently published a catalogue of the known spiders
of Canada, 342 species, in the Transactions of the Canadian Institute. In the same article
in the Fretp-Narurauist, he gave an account of Canadian studies dating from 1846. One
of our early members who collected for Emerton was J. B. Tyrrell: others, mostly
members, whom he mentioned are E. M. Walker, T. B. Kurata, N. B. Sanson, M. Taylor,
Robert Matheson, C. W. Townsend, Norman Criddle, Mrs. J. B. Faull, Charles Macna-
mara, F. W. Waugh, Mrs. W. W. Hippisley, A. B. Klugh, C. G. Hewitt and Arthur
Gibson.

How deeply he appreciated the contacts is shown in the Report of the Council for
1931 (Can. Field Nat. 44: 19, January 1932) where Council acknowledged with deep
gratitude the bequest of five hundred dollars made to the Club by the will of the late
J. H. Emerton, of Boston, Massachusetts.

This was one of the early building blocks in the foundation of our Reserve Fund
and as such continues to assist in the work of the Club to this day.

Hoyers Lioyp

Request For Information

In making a study of the Purple Martin, Progne subis, | have gathered
much information from my own observation and from the available literature.
I now need more information on migration and population trends. I should —
like to complete coverage for all states in the U.S.A. and the provinces of
Canada.

1. First arrival for this year and any other years you may have: date, time,
summary, of weather at your colony house, and to the south for the
previous week.

2. Date when most or all of your birds appear to be back.

3. Date of first serious nest building activity.

+. Date when most birds finished making nests and settle down.

5. Last departed bird: date, time, summary of weather a week prior to
departure.

6. Was there a peak of departure (on what date), or did birds gradually

leave until the last left on the date mentioned in question No. 5.
7. Number of young fledged and left for the south per pair of parents or per
colony and thus the average number of young raised per pair.
8. Any other comments, date, etc.
Anyone interested in gathering this information please write: J. C. FINLAY,
6710 - 102A Avenue, Edmonton, Alberta.

= 11343 67th St.,
a eae Demurper;

Tt crcont Alta.; s
Librarian, P.

Lanpiei n Daa, i w. Leacu;
rdinal, - F. ALE . STARR.

: Cae: ala ie W.D. eae
V5 Dr. 1. B. Smiru, Box ate

otia . Bird Souew
RRISON F. eas Vice-President,

; ovaneher c + Society of Natural History
a of oe

ee

Manual for Biological Journals is
in general, as a guide for authors.

should be typewritten on one side
nt paper measuring 84 by 11 inches.

rature references, and legends for

ta » app ar in peels should be poderinee:

ew International Dictionary is ine
Jowever, in a case of
a common name, and

are made b by the author-date system.

main pecs of text. For titles in
ons shbald: te used sparingly.
of measurement follow

merican S dards Association i 1-

ae

9 mae after the list of

R Lister; Audubon Bee

4749 Craighurst Ave.,

ext matter, including quotations, foe

double-spaced. Only those words

be listed alphabetically and typed —

ring T. ermis or the equivalent y

Tables and legends for

AFFILIATED SOCIETIES

-Benorr Peermr; Second Vice-President, James P,
CorisTINE; Secretary- -Treasurer, Gerorces A. Lg-
CLERC, 628 Fraser St., Quebec, Que.

Province of Quebec Society for the
Protection of Birds
eieion. W. H. Rawtines; Vice-Presidents,
A. R, Lepinawit, Miss R. B. Suerte Honor-

a ary Treasurer, Miss G. E. Hieparp; Honorary

Secr Bane Miss R. S. Apsorrt.

Toronto Field Naturalists’ Club
President, Frep Bopswortu; Vice-President, Dr.
Bruce Farts: Secretary- Treasurer, Mrs. H. Rosson,
Toronto 12, Ont.; Assistant
Secretary, Miss Runs MarsHaty; ‘Junior ECE N-G:,
Roserr J. MacLeian, 416 St. Clements Ave., Tor

~ onto 12, Ont.

- Vancouver ‘Natural History Society
Honorary President, Dr. N. A. M. Mackenzig;

Past President, Frank Sanrorp; President, Dr. R.
_ Srace-SmitH; Vice-President, Dr. K. I. Beamisu;
_ Honorary Secretary, J. Y. New, 622 East 8th St.,
> North Vancouver, B.C.; Recording Secretary, Miss

K. Mmroy; Program Scorer Mrs. E. N. Cop-
pine; Honorary Treasurer, Mrs. J. Y. Nemo;

Librarian, Mrs. H. Prnpen-Moss: Editor of Bulletin,
_C. B. W. Roeerrs.

ADVICE TO CONTRIBUTORS

AGihars are’ asked to share the cost of publication by paying for each
- page of an article that is in excess of the limit of twelve journal pages,
Ny the: cost of ase Snoue and of SCRIEE small-sized type and tables.

references. Each table and all the legends should

_ be on separate pages.

Notes should bear the name of one author only

and references in notes should be incorporated

directly in the text.

Illustrations

All figures, including each ae of the sine
should be numbered consecutively in arabic
numerals. The author’s name, title of the paper,

and figure number should be written in the lower
_ left corner of the sheet on which the illustration

appears. The legend should not be incorporated :

in the figure.

Line drawings should be made with India ink

on white drawing paper, blue tracing linen, or
blue-lined co-ordinate paper. Co-ordinate lines

that are to appear in the reproduction should be
ruled in black ink. Descriptive matter should be
lettered, not_ typewritten, and all parts of the

drawing should permit easy legibility even if a

reduction is made.
Photographs should have a glossy finish and

_ show sharp contrasts. For reproduction as a com-

plete plate they should be mounted without space

between prints.

For large drawings and mounted vee
the ratio of height to width should conform to
that of the journal page (43 by 74 inches) but the
height should be adjusted to allow for the legend.

Reprints
Reprints, with or without covers may be bought.
The cost is given on the reprint order form which

_is attached to the eaaley oe

Reprints of

A GUIDE TO THE GEOLOGY
OF THE OTTAWA DISTRICT

by

Atice E. WILson

and

A GUIDE TO THE GEOLOGY
OF THE GATINEAU-LIEVRE DISTRICT

by

Dona.Lp D. HocartH

may be obtained at a cost of one dollar each.

For orders, please write:
The Canadian Field-Naturalist
W. J. Copy, Business Manager
Central Experimental Farm
Ottawa, Canada

Bae

: Rudolph Martin Naderson 18761064 - J. Dewey Soper
ot gee Mode pee ; | Panu M. YOUNGMAN
i Austin W. Gas
N otes on iis Skylark on yanetver ad ~_D. Stirvine and R. Y. Epwarps
i urth: Additions to the Birds of Simcoe County, Ontario Orto E. Devitr

on eS Collection of Amphibians from the Southwestern Ukraine, U.S.S.R.
. and caliae oe ae | STANLEY W. GorHaM

Hansrorp T. SuackLErtE

Rev: Rion of the Reindeer and Caribou, Genus Renate — The Anite and Reptiles of

Illinois — Wildlife Sketches Near and Far — The Lake Sturgeon, a History of Its
_ Fishery and Problems of Conservation — Our Synthetic Environment — A Book of
ee — ese. Orchids of British Columbia — The Heather Family

| J. E. UnpDERHILL

a of the Field aes in Manitoba . Harotp V. Hosrorp
ca : - Roserr K, Lane
on of iopag ears ialatid a. Sy : Caso. Davp B. PEAKALL
ispersion of Banded Canada Geese e pone eres Kuyr
otted Skipper at the Pas, Manitoba ea Westy . fi -- Watrer Krrvpa
uthed Salamander, Mew to ag Fauna of Canada Tuomas M. Uzze1t, Jr.

127
134

142
147
(yee

1593

162,

168

177

178
178
179

- 180

181
182

THE OTTAWA FIELD-NATURALISTS? CLUB
_Founpep IN 1879. elas :

— Patrons — y
a ExcELLENCIES THE GovERNOR GENERAL AND Mapante Vater

The objects of the club are to foster an acquaintance with and a love of natu
encourage investigation and to publish the results of se research and « obse
in all branches of natural history. — ee

The club is a corporate member of the Federation of Ontario Natu lists
affiliated with the American Association for the Advancement of Sciences, =

MEMBERS OF COUNCIL

President: DON R. Beckett, 36 Canter Blvd., Ottawa, Ontario
First Vice-President: W. Winston Mair |

Second Vice-President: DonaLp A. SMITH
— Miss ANNE BANNING, Box ay, Postal Station E, Ottawa, Ontario

Auditors: ae M. Gierr and R. J. Micte |
Additional Members of Council: Miss CuaRrLorTe Dit, Mrs. G. R, Hee mee
Hawxssripce, Miss Mary Stuart, Messrs. W. K. W. Batpwin, D. A. Benson, |
BousFiELp, K. Bowes, A. H. CLARK, Jr., F. R. Cook, R. Frit, J. M. Gutetr Ww
Goprrey, H. Grou, J. W. Groves, G. R. Hangs, D. D. Hocartu, H. Luoyp, | rae
LAREN, R. J. Moors, C. R. Patrerson, A. E. PorsiLp, L. S. RUSSELL, D. +B. O. Ss.
F. H. Scuvuttz, H. J. ‘ScoGcAN, V.E.F. SOLMAN. aa

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

Editor: Francis R. Cook : Business Manager:
National Museum of Canada, Ottawa, Ontario Central Experimental Farm, Ott

Associate Editors: F. J. ALcock (Geology), Joun W. ARNOLD (Entomology Ww. A
(Paleontology), J. SuHerman Bieakney (Herpetology), ArTuur H. C
(Malacology), Wittiam G. Dore (Botany), J. R. Dymonp (Ichthyology
Goprrey (Ornithology), A. G. HuntsMAn oo a PHILLIP. )
(Mammalogy).

The Canadian Field-Naturalist is published que) . the Oras F ield-N
Club with assistance of the affiliated societies listed on the inside back cover. Ma
representing personal observations or the results of original research in any branc
tural history are invited. In the preparation of papers authors should cons
recent issue and the information for contributors on the inside back cover. A ly
rates and prices of back numbers of this journal and its predecessors, TRANSA'
OF THE OTTAWA FIELD-NATURALISTS’ CLUB, 1879-1886, and the |
NATURALIST, 1887-1919, are obtainable from the business mantpey. :

MEMBERSHIP AND SUBSCRIPTION

The annual membership fee of $5 covers subscription to the journal.
however, may subscribe at the same rate as that for membership. Single current
of regular issues are $1.50. A money order should be made payable to the Otta
Naturalists’ Club and sent to the treasurer. Notice of ak of address ore
sent to the treasurer.

Authorized ag second-class mail by the Post Office Department at Ottawa, Ontario ; ; 3

Gan

JA

The Canadian Field-Naturalist |

|

VoLUME 76 JULY-SEPTEMBER 1962 NuMBER 3

— IN MEMORIUM:

RUDOLPH MARTIN ANDERSON
1876 - 1961

J. DEWEY SOPER
Department of Zoology, University of Alberta, Edmonton, Alberta

IN THE DEATH of Dr. Rudolph Martin Anderson, Canada has lost one of its
most illustrious naturalists. A host-of relatives, lifelong friends and colleagues
mourn the passing of this dedicated and notable zoologist. It is no exaggera-
tion to say that for those of us who were closely associated with him in
various ways during the past forty or fifty years, the Canadian scene can
never again be quite the same without him. He was richly gifted in the
science of his choice. With outstanding skill, perception, scholarship and
indefatigable energy he brought distinction to his almost innumerable accom-
plishments during a highly productive period of over half a century.

Dr. Anderson was born in Winneshiek County, Iowa, on June 30, 1876.
He was the eldest son of John E. Anderson, B.A., M.A., LL.B. (University of
Iowa) and Martha Ann Johnson, of Swedish and Norwegian descent. His
mother went to lowa from Wisconsin in 1850, settling in Winneshiek County,
and his father moved from Illinois to Winnebago County, Iowa, in 1860. On
January 22, 1913, Rudolph married Mae Belle Allstrand, B.A., M.A.; the union
was blessed with three daughters—Dorothy Ann, Mary Lois and Isobel. For
about four decades the family home was located at 58 Government Driveway,
Ottawa—a familiar meeting place of warm hospitality and many pleasant
memories. Dr. Anderson died there on June 21, 1961, in his eighty-fourth year
and was buried in Beechwood Cemetery.

His days of schooling were crowded with studies, campus activities and
academic achievements of the highest order. In retrospect, one cannot but
marvel that he found time for so many and varied accomplishments. After
routine public schooling he acquired his high school education at Forest City,
lowa.

From the beginning he had a passion for wildlife, forest and stream. Birds
were his first love. Ever present was a consuming desire to know the different

Mailing date of this number: 28 December, 1962
127

N= 91963

128 THe CANADIAN FIeLpD-NATURALIST Vol: 76

species, one by one, and add to his knowledge of their nesting and other
habits. To this end he thought nothing of getting into the woods by day-
break to achieve his purpose before the school bell announced another day
of confinement; but he took these necessary interruptions in his stride, con-
stantly looking forward to more wildlife adventures far from class-rooms and
teachers.

Consequently, through his later boyhood and early manhood, the budding
naturalist lost no opportunity to roam the countryside in pursuit of the
objects of his affection. At this time he learned to prepare study skins of
birds and then went on to gradually build up a fine, private collection of
specimens and a wealth of field notes. As the teenage years drifted by,
Rudolph step by step developed into a keen and accurate observer well on
his way to becoming a young ornithologist of marked ability, with dawning
aspirations to publish some of the results of his original observations.

In 1893, at the early age of 17, he published his first paper entitled, The
Marsh Hawk, and this was followed, in 1894 and 1895, by short papers on
Nesting of the Whooping Crane; The Saw-whet Oul in captivity; The Black
Tern; and The Blue-winged Teal. From now on his development was rapid.
At the age of twenty-one he produced his most important paper, to date—A
list of the birds of Winnebago and Hancock Counties, lowa (1897), and ten
years later the Davenport Academy of Sciences published his excellent state
list, The birds of Iowa, which ran to a length of nearly 300 pages. Coincident
with this fruition he was in steady attendance at the State University of lowa
where he earned his Ph.B. degree, in 1903, and his Ph.D., in 1906, specializing
in systematic zoology, comparative anatomy and animal morphology.

For several years it appears that Anderson’s major concern continued to
be ornithology. In any event, after The birds of Iowa, he published short
papers exclusively on birds in 1908 and 1909, among them, Nesting of the
Pine Siskin at Great Slave Lake; Nesting of the Bohemian waxwing |near Fort
Smith N.W.T.]; and Breeding of Dendroica striata at Great Slave Lake, N.W.T.
His first published dealings with mammals appeared in 1913 as an addendum
in Vilhjalmur Stefansson’s book, “My life with the Eskimo”, entitled, Report
of the natural history collections of the expedition. ‘his was followed shortly
by Arctic game notes; from this time hence-forward he was chiefly preoc-
cupied with mammals.

Concurrently, and even earlier, Anderson was on the road to prominence
as an athelete with development of physique and stamina that were to prove
of unique value to him in the strenuous years of Arctic activities that lay
ahead. First, he trained in the cadet corps, Department of Military Science
and Tactics, University of Iowa, 1897-1903, and emerged an honour graduate
as cadet officer with the rank of Major. He then served with Company F,
Fifty-second Infantry Volunteers in the Spanish-American War, 1898, and
with Company I, Fifty-fourth Infantry, National Guard of Iowa, 1900-1906.
During this period he served in all grades from Private to First Lieutenant,
with several details as Battalion Adjutant; was expert rifleman with bar, 1904-
1906 and Captain of the National Guard of Missouri, 1906-1908. Years later

1962 Soper: In Memorium: R. M. ANDERSON 129

Dr. R. M. Anderson and modified Alpine tent of his own design. Canadian Arctic
Expedition 1913-16.

130 THe CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST , Vol. 76

(1913-1916) he was in charge of vessels related to the patrol of northern waters
in the Canadian Department of Naval Service.

Reverting to his years of academic training we find that Anderson was
Captain of the University track team for two years and holder for several
years of the Varsity record in the 120-yard high hurdles and the 220-yard low
hurdles. He received the Larabee prize in zoology, 1902; the Max Mayer
Cup, 1903; admitted to the Iowa Chapter of Sigma Xi, 1903; and was the first
eminent archon of Iowa Betta Chapter of the Sigma Alpha Epsilon Fraternity
in 1905. Both before and after graduation (1902-1906) Dr. Anderson was
acting taxidermist and assistant zoologist and curator in the Iowa University
Museum. It was sometime during this period of his career that he became
deeply attracted to the science of mammalogy to which he contributed so
much during the remainder of his life.

At about this juncture he departed from the scenes of his youth to engage
in zoological field work in far-flung regions of northern North America. His
first engagement of this nature was in the capacity of general field agent and
assistant mammalogist of the American Museum of Natural History, New
York, from 1908 to 1912; four years of this period were spent in exploratory
and biological work in Arctic Alaska, Yukon Territory, and east in the
Northwest Territories to Coronation Gulf, Coppermine River and Great Bear
Lake. On this expedition he was the first white man to cross the Hula-hula
River Pass from the Arctic Ocean to the Yukon River drainage.

Early in 1913 Anderson became a naturalized British subject. “The same
season he was appointed zoologist to the Geological Survey of Canada, a post
that he held until 1920. In this capacity he was made Chief of the Southern
Scientific Party of the renowned Canadian Arctic Expedition, 1913-1916,
under the Department of Naval Service; during this highly responsible period
numerous categories of scientific research were dealt with by specialists along
the Arctic coast of Alaska and from the Alaska-Yukon International Boundary
east to Bathurst Inlet. Upon return to Ottawa, Dr. Anderson was appointed
general editor in connection with the government scientific reports of the
expedition—a time-consuming and exacting task that ultimately ran to about
sixteen volumes.

With the latter work disposed of, in 1920 he received a permanent ap- _
pointment as Chief of the Division of Biology, National Museum of Canada;
this position he held unbrokenly and with distinction until his retirement in
1948. In-so-far as pioneer field work is concerned, Anderson will doubtless
be best remembered for his many years of Arctic investigations—a rugged life
in which no scientific, year-round worker is apt to be confronted with more
inconveniences, frustrations, handicaps and privations. ‘These he faced with
his habitual drive, aplomb and good humour, displaying the air of one revelling
in the peculiar excitement attendent upon the meeting and mastering of diffi-
culties.

However eminent his Arctic achievements, no less in another way were
his accomplishments, elsewhere, in the three decades following his appointment
to the National Museum of Canada. His active mind unceasingly saw many

1962 Soper: In Memorium: R. M. ANDERSON 131

inviting opportunities for bettering our technical understanding of Canadian
mammals. As a result of this insight and the field returns that successively
blossomed from them, there erupted a steady stream of published papers on
the subject that far eclipsed anything previously known for the areas involved.
Every summer he was off to collect data and specimens in promising territory,
during which his working camps were scattered widely across the face of
Canada.

Among the southern areas in which he carried out new inquiries, at this
time, were parts of Cape Breton and Prince Edward Islands; New Brunswick;
Gaspé Peninsula; the eastern townships of Quebec, the Gatineau Valley;
Ontario, various sections of Saskatchewan and Alberta (including Wood
Buffalo ‘Park and the Rocky Mountains); and the Columbia River Valley in
southern British Columbia. I particularly recall his enthusiasm at the prospect
of again visiting polar lands when, in 1928, he embarked on the S.S. Beothic
as naturalist to the Canadian Arctic Expedition, of that year, which visited
western Greenland and the eastern Canadian Arctic from Ellesmere Island to
Hudson Strait. With the termination of this voyage he had spent seven
winters and ten summers north of the Arctic Circle.

Dr. Anderson was a lover of the wilderness, a skillful outdoorsman and
a tireless collector of specimens when time and opportunity offered. As a
result of his lifetime efforts the mammal and bird collections of the National
Museum of Canada and other institutions were greatly enriched. Only with
an abundance of specimens could he attain to those exact determinations so
dear to his ideals and aspirations in systematic zoology. One may say that
this was especially true in the field of mammalogy to which he devoted much
the greater part of his scientific labours after 1910. In this respect his industry
yielded far-reaching results. Critical examination of thousands of specimens
from various large areas of Canada, led to his detection and published des-
criptions of numerous new geographical races. In fact, he described over 30
newly recognized subspecies represented by the seventeen genera—Sorex,
Blarina, Marmota, Eutamias, Tamiasciurus, Glaucomys, Perognathus, Peromy-
scus, Synaptomys, Clethrionomty s, Phenacomys, Microtus, Zapus, Napaeozapus,
Camis, Lutra and Phoca. Subspecies named in his honour were: Thomomys t.
andersom Goldman; Microtus m. andersoni Rand; and Alces a. andersoni
Peterson.

Despite constant pressures in various routine activities within and outside
the museum, Anderson still found time for other responsibilities and forms of
service. Over a long term of years, for example, he was consulting zoologist
of the old Lands, Parks and Forest Branch, Department of Mines and Re-
sources; a member of the Advisory Board on Wildlife Protection; also con-
sultant on the Interdepartmental Reindeer Committee. For years he served as
Chairman of the Library Committee, Bureau of Geology and Topography
and the National Museum. He was also special editor on furs and fur-bearers
for Webster’s International Dictionary, 1935, and Associate Editor (mam-
malogy) of The Canadian Field-Naturalist, 1917-1955.

132 THe CANADIAN FiIELD-NATURALIST Vol. 76

At different periods the normal, office work-day was all too short.
Those of us familiar with his labours were well aware of the fact that on
numerous occasions he felt obliged to work overtime, including weekends and
holidays. By this means he was able to secure absolute quiet and escape
interruptions imposed by administrative duties, the telephone and official cor-
respondence, thus, often, it was possible to forge ahead on important research
projects and major literary undertakings that would otherwise have come to
a complete standstill. Such action accounts, in part, for the surprising output
of his pen despite the multiplicity of other routine duties.

In relation to this, in a separate article, it is shown by Mr. Philip Young-
man that between 1893 and 1951 Dr. Anderson published a total of 134
papers. Many of these are brief, or relatively short, and deal with a single
proposition, or finding; others, again, are of considerable length, depth and
complexity that demanded prolonged thought and skill in their preparation.
In total there is much that is highly meritorious and valuable. Through
Anderson’s work a knowledge of Canadian mammals was elevated to a level
previously unknown in the history of the nation. Two of his publications
particularly admired by this writer are: Methods of collecting and preserving
vertebrate animals (1932) and Catalogue of Canadian recent mammals (1946).

Dr. Anderson was affiliated with the following scientific societies: Amer-
ican Society of Mammalogists (Charter); American Ornithologists’ Union,
Cooper Ornithological Club, Wilson Ornithological Club; Iowa Ornithologists’
Union; Pacific Northwest Bird and Mammal Society, American Society of
Ichthyologists and Herpetologists; Ottawa Field-Naturalists’ Club (President,
1922); Corresponding Member: Zoological Society, London; La Societe Pro-
vancher d’histoire naturelle du Canada. Honorary Member: Ornithologisches
Verein zu Dresden; Arctic Institute of North America. Fellow: Royal
Society of Canada; Canadian Geographical Society (Charter); Biological
Society of Washington, and the American Association for the Advancement
of Science. He was also active in the Professional Institute of the Civil Service
of Canada.

The writing of this memorial naturally conjures up many pleasant me-
mories. In his hey-day it was a richly stimulating experience to be associated
with Anderson whether in field or study. For me, the beginning of these
treasured recollections had its advent on the occasion of our first collecting
trip together at Point Pelee in March, 1919; his warm friendship, quiet humour
and arresting tales of the Arctic are still vividly remembered. ‘These nar-
ratives were particularly fascinating to me, as R.M.A. was the first Arctic
explorer that | had met with up to this time and he probably quite uncon-
ciously fired my ambition more than ever to become a professional naturalist-
collector in the polar regions. A few years later he made this possible—a
kindly act that I always valued very deeply, indeed.

My personal enjoyment of the doctor was at its best away from cities
and in the heart of the great open spaces. He was invariably a boon com-
panion of highly efficient habits on such outings and perennially keen on
experimenting and generally seeking out superior methods of collecting and

1962 Soper: IN Memorium: R. M. ANDERSON 133

preserving specimens. One could usually count on learning something new.
Enthusiasm, laughter and love of wilderness life pervaded these camps.
’ g P Pp

Throughout his life Dr. Anderson was always generous with his time and
attention in giving a helping hand to beginners, or codperating with profes-
sional zoologists in the subspecific identity of newly acquired specimens, or
some other particular line of research. In reflecting on Dr. Anderson’s ac-
complishments in this country, since 1908, one feels impelled to regard him
as the greatest mammalogist that Canada has ever had. His last paper, The
fur animals of arctic Alaska, was published in 1951. For many years he had
planned on producing a popular, well-illustrated book on the mammals of
Canada; to this end much material was accumulated, but he could not find
time to work on it before retirement and ill-health prevented him from
realizing this dream thereafter.

Concerning R.M.A., an old, Arctic colleague, Dr. Diamond Jenness, wrote,
in part, as follows (1961, Arctic 14(4):268) “A reserved man, rather diffident,
he was never more happy than when he was sitting at the door of a tent, legs
outstretched, skinning a mixed bag of shrews, marmots, sandpipers, and per-
haps one or two eiders, the while keeping both ears attuned to the murmur
of wind and water, and the twittering of the birds. Indians and Eskimos
alike trusted and admired him, because he shared so fully their own love of
nature and its wildlife...

“He was too individualistic, too absorbed in his own biological work, to
be a forceful expedition-leader or a dynamic administrator in a museum, but
he gave his subordinates every facility at his command and allowed them un-
trammelled freedom in carrying out their duties. In the field he was a
splendid companion who cheerfully carried his share of the load and lent a
helping hand whenever it was needed.

“. .. I like best to remember him as the indefatigable traveller, cheerfully
marching through the snow at the head of his weary dog-team in the waning
twilight of an arctic day.”

Ws

BIBLIOGRAPHY OF RUDOLPH MARTIN ANDERSON

Puittie M. YouNGMAN
National Museum of Canada, Ottawa, Ontario

BETWEEN 1893 AnD 1951 Rudolph Martin Anderson published 134 papers.
These were published under the names R. M. A.; Rudolph Martin Anderson and
R. M. Anderson. Each title in this bibliography has been taken from the
original publication. The exact date of issue is not known for many titles,
therefore, the order in which they are listed may not always be correct.
Direct French translations of papers previously published in English are mark-
ed with an asterisk. Grateful acknowledgment is made to Mr. Gaston Tessier
for his assistance.

1893
1. The Marsh Hawk. The Ornithologist and Oologist 18(10): 140.

1894
1. Nesting of the Whooping Crane. The Oologist 11(8): 263-264.
2. The Saw-whet Owl in captivity. The Iowa Ornithologist 1(1): 26.
3. The Black Tern. The Oregon Naturalist 1(2): 15-16.
1895
1. The Blue-winged Teal. The lowa Ornithologist 1(4): 75-76.

1897
1. Notes from Forest City, lowa. The Iowa Ornithologist 3(2): 30
2. A list of the birds of Winnebago and Hancock Counties, Iowa. Privately

printed, Forest City, lowa.
3. Nesting habits of Kriders Hawk. The Museum 3: 188-190.

1907
1. The birds of Iowa. Proceedings of the Davenport Academy of Sciences 11:
125-417.
1908

1. Nesting of the Pine Siskin at Great Slave Lake. The Condor 10(6): 234-235.
2. An addition to the birds of Iowa. The Auk 25(2): 215.

1909
1. Nesting of the Bohemian Waxwing (Bombycilla garrulus). The Auk 26(1):
10-12.
2. Breeding of Dendroica striata at Great Slave Lake, N.W.T. The Auk 26(1):
80

3. Northward range of Ammodramus lecontei. The 26(1): 80

1913

1. Report of the natural history collections of the expedition. p. 436-527. In
Vilhjalmur Stefansson. My life with the eskimo. Macmillan, New York.

2. Arctic game notes. American Museum Journal 13(1): 5-21.

3. Notes on muskoxen. p. 186-187. Im J. A. Allen. Ontogenetic and other varia-
tion in muskoxen, with a systematic review of the muskox group, recent
and extinct. Memoirs of the American Museum of Natural History. New
Series 1 (part 4).

134

1962

=
*

YouNGMAN: BriBLioGRAPHY OF R. M. ANDERSON 135:

1915
Canadian Arctic Expedition, 1913-14. Summary Report of the Geological
Survey Department of Mines for the Calendar year 1914. p. 163-166.

1916
Canadian Arctic Expedition 1915. Summary Report of the Geological Survey
Department of Mines for the Calendar year 1915. p. 220-236, 263-264.

1917
Canadian Arctic Expedition 1916. Summary Report of the Geological Survey
Department of Mines for the Calendar year 1916. p. 314-330.
The Canadian Arctic Expedition of 1913. Report of the Southern Division.
In George V Sessional Paper No. 38A. 1918. Report of the Department of
the Naval Service for the fiscal year ending March 31, 1917. p. 28-64.
Canadian Arctic Expedition, 1916—zoology. Summary Report of the Geo-
logical Survey Department of Mines for the calendar year 1916. p. 374-384.
Recent explorations on the Canadian arctic coast. The Geographical Review
4(4): 241-266.

1918
Some notes on the mammals of Jasper Park, Alberta. The Canadian Alpine
Journal 9: 70-75.
Eskimo food—how it tastes to a white man. The Ottawa Naturalist 32(4):
59-65.

1919
Recent zoological explorations in the western arctic. Journal of the Wash-
ington Academy of Science 9(11): 312-314.
[Review of] Food, feeding and drinking applicances and nesting material to
attract birds, by Edward Howe Forbush. The Ottawa Naturalist 32(9): 172-
173.
The Brant of the Atlantic coast. Parks Branch Leaflet. 4 p. Ottawa.
La Bernache commune de la cote de |’Atlantique. Parks Branch Leaflet. 4 p.
Ottawa.

1920
Field study of life-histories of Canadian Mammals. The Canadian Field-
Naturalist 33(5): 86-90.
[Review of] Wild animals of Glacier National Park, by Florence Merriam
Bailey. The Canadian Field-Naturalist 33(5): 101-102.
Breeding of the Mourning Dove, near Ottawa, Ont. The Canadian Field-
Naturalist 33(6): 117-118.
[Review of] Six new fishes from Northwestern Canada, by Francis Harper and
John Treadwell Nichols. The Canadian Field-Naturalist 34(1): 19.
[Review of] Notes on some of the more common animals and birds of the
Canadian Rockies, by William Spreadborough. The Canadian Field-Naturalist
34(3): 58-59.
[Review of] Migrations of the gray squirrel (Sciurus carolinensis), by Ermest
Thompson Seton. The Canadian Field-Naturalist 34(3): 59.

1921
[Review of] Report of the Second Norwegian Arctic Expedition in the “Fram”
1898-1902. The Canadian Field-Naturalist 34(6): 115-116.
John Macoun, 1832-1920. Journal of Mammalogy 2(1): 32-35.
[Report from the Chief of the Biology Division] Report of the Department of
Mines for 1921. p. 27.

136

THe CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST Vol. 76

1922
Memorandum on barren ground caribou and musk-ox, p. 72-76. In Report
of the Royal Commission to Investigate the Possibilities of the Remdeer and
Musk-ox Industries in the Arctic and Sub-arctic Regions of Canada. Depart-
ment of the Interior. Ottawa.
[Review of] The conservation of wild life of Canada, by Gordon C. Hewitt.
The Canadian Field-Naturalist 36(7): 139-140 and 36(8): 157-158.
[Report from the Chief of the Biology Division] Report of the Department of
Mines for 1922. p. 27-28.

1923
Further notes on the European hare in Ontario. The Canadian Field-Na-
turalist 37(4): 75-76.
[Report from the Chief of the Biology Division] Report of the Department of
Mines for 1923. p. 33-35.

1924
Range of the moose extending northward. The Canadian Field-Naturalist
38(2): 27-29. |
The present status and future prospects of the larger mammals of Canada.
The Scottish Geographical Magazine 11: 321-333.

1925
[Review of] Birds and mammals of the Skeena River region of northern
British Columbia, by Harry S. Swarth. The Canadian Field-Naturalist 39(4):
87-88.
[Report from the Chief of the Biology Division] Report of the Department of
Mines for 1924. p. 43-47.
[Report from the Chief of the Biology Division] Report of the Department of
Mines for 1925. p. 44-50.

1926
[Report from the Chief of the Biology Division] Report of the Department of
Mines for 1926. p. 42-52.

1928
[Review of] Fur farming for profit, by Frank G. Ashbrook. The Canadian
Field-Naturalist 42(7): 179-180.
[Review of] Mammals and birds of Mount Ranier National Park, by Walter P.
Taylor. The Canadian Field-Naturalist 42(7): 180-182.
The work of Bernhard Hantzsch in arctic ornithology. The Auk 45(4):
450-466.
The fluctuation in the population of wild mammals, and the relationship of
this fluctuation to conservation. The Canadian Field-Naturalist 42(8): 189-191.
[Report from the Chief of the Biology Division] Annual Report for 1926.
National Museum of Canada Bulletin 50, p. 13-25.
[Report from the Chief of the Biology Division] Report of the Department
of Mines for 1927. p. 35-36.
[With Anderson, M.B.A.] [Translation of] Contribution to the knowledge of
the avifauna of north-eastern Labrador, by Bernhard Hantzsch. The Cana-
dian Field-Naturalist 42(1), 43(3). 70 p.

1929

Fur-bearing animals (land). In Encyclopedia Brittanica, 14 ed. vol. 9.
[Review of] A faunal survey of the Lake Nipigon Region, Ont. by J. R.

1962

10.

YOUNGMAN: BIBLIOGRAPHY oF R. M. ANDERSON 137

Dymond, L. T. Snyder and E. B. S. Logier. The Canadian Field-Naturalist
43(5): 109.

[Review of] A faunal survey of the Lake Abitibi Region, Ont. by Staff of the
Royal Ontario Museum of Zoology. The Canadian Field-Naturalist 43(5):
109-110.

The water shrew (Sorex palustris) in Ontario. The Canadian Field-Naturalist
43(6): 136-137.

[With Laing, H. M. as senior author] Notes on the mammals of Upper Chin-
tina River Region, Alaska. Canada Department of Mines Bulletin 56. p.
96-107.

[Report from the Chief of the Biology Division] Annual Report for 1927.
National Museum of Canada Bulletin 56. p. 14-31.

[With Laing, Hamilton M. and P. A. Taverner as senior authors] Birds and
mammals of the Mount Logan Expedition. Annual Report for 1927. Na-
tional Museum of Canada Bulletin 56. p. 69-107.

[Report from the Chief of the Biology Division] Report of the Department of
Mines for 1928. p. 36-39.

[Report from the Chief of the Biology Division] Annual Report for 1928.
National Museum of Canada Bulletin 62. p. 10-18.

[Report from the Chief of the Biology Division] Report of the Department of
Mines for 1929. p. 31-33.

1930

[Review of] Field book of North American mammals, by H. E. Anthony.
The Canadian Field-Naturalist 44(4): 97-99.

[Review of] Provisional list of land mammals of the state of Washington, by
Walter P. Taylor and William T. Shaw. The Canadian Field-Naturalist 44
(6): 151-152.

[Review of] The mammals of Ontario, by E. C. Cross and J. R. Dymond.
The Canadian Field-Naturalist 44(7): 168-169.

Notes on the musk-ox and the caribou. p. 49-53. Im Conserving Canada’s
Musk-oxen. Department of the Interior, Ottawa.

1931

[Review of] Animal life of Yellowstone National Park, by Vernon Bailey.
The Canadian Field-Naturalist 45(4): 92-93.

.. [Report from the Chief of the Biology Division] Annual Report for 1929.

National Museum of Canada Bulletin 67. p. 12-22.

[Report from the Chief of the Biology Division] Report of the Department of
Mines for 1930. p. 33-37.

[Report from the Chief of the Biology Division] Report of the Department
of Mines for 1931. p. 31-33.

1932
[Report from the Chief of the Biology Division] Annual Report for 1930.
National Museum of Canada Bulletin 68, p. 13-21.
Methods of collecting and preserving vertebrate animals. National Museum
of Canada, (Biological Series 18) Bulletin 69. 141 p.
[Report from the Chief of the Biology Division] Annual Report for 1931.
National Museum of Canada Bulletin 70. p. 11-17.
Five new mammals from British Columbia. Annual Report for 1931. Na-
tional Museum of Canada Bulletin 70. p. 99-119.

138

*

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST Vol. 76

1933
Sutton on Southampton Island: a review. The Cardinal 3(6): 132-139.
[Report from the Chief of the Biology Division] Annual Report for 1932.
National Museum of Canada Bulletin 71. p. 11-18.
[Report from the Chief of the Biology Division] Report of the Department of
Mines for 1933. p. 22-23.

1934

[Review of} Birds and mammals from the Kootenay Valley, southeastern B.C.,
by Joseph Mailliard. The Canadian Field-Naturalist 48(1): 21-24.

Effect of the introduction of exotic animal forms. Proceedings of the Fifth
Pacific Science Congress 1933. 1: 769-778.

Notes on the distribution of the hoary marmots. The Canadian Field-Natural-
ist 48(4): 60-63.

Sorex palustris brooksi, a new water shrew from Vancouver Island. The
Canadian Field-Naturalist 48(8): 134.

The distribution, abundance, and economic importance of the game and fur-
bearing mammals of Western North America. Proceedings of the Fifth
Pacific Science Congress 1933. 5: 4055-4075.

[Report from the Chief of the Biology Division] Report of the Department of
Mines for 1934. p. 22-23.

[Report from the Chief of the Biology Division] Annual Report for 1933.
National Museum of Canada Bulletin 73, p. 12-20.

1935

Mammals of the eastern arctic and Hudson Bay, p. 67-108. Im Canada’s
Eastern Arctic. Department of the Interior, Ottawa.
Arctic flora. p. 133-137. Im Canada’s Eastern Arctic. Department of the
Interior, Ottawa.
[Report from the Chief of the Biology Division] Annual Report for 1934.
National Museum of Canada Bulletin 76, p. 10-17.
[Report from the Chief of the Biology Division] Report of the Department of
Mines for 1935. p. 23.

1936
[Report from the Chief of the Biology Division] Annual Report of the Na-
tional Museum for 1935-36. National Museum of Canada Bulletin 82, p. 8-17.
[Report from the Chief of the Biology Division] Report of the Department
of Mines for 1936, p. 28-29.

1937
Faunas of Canada, p. 29-52. In The Canada Year Book, 1937. Domimion
Bureau of Statistics.
La Faune du Canada. p. 5-30. Im L’Annuaire du Canada, 1937. Bureau féderal
de la Statistique.
Mammals and birds. In Canada’s Western Northland. Department of Mines
and Resources, p. 97-122.
[Report from the Chief of the Biology Division] Annual Report of the
National Museum for 1936-37. National Museum of Canada Bulletin 89, p.
10-18.

1938

The present status and distribution of the big game mammals of Canada.
Transactions of the North American Wildlife Conference 3: 390-406.

1962

YOUNGMAN: BiIBLIoGRAPHY oF R. M. ANDERSON 139

[Report from the Chief of the Biology Division] Annual Report of the
National Museum for the fiscal year 1937-38. National Museum of Canada
Bulletin 91. p. 8-15.

[Report from the Chief of the Biology Division] Report of the Department
of Mines and Resources for 1937. p. 34-35.

1939
[Report from the Chief of the Biology Division] Report of the Department
of Mines and Resources for 1938, p. 42.
Mammals of the Province of Quebec. Annual Report 1938. Provancher
Society of Natural History of Canada, p. 50-114.
[Report from the Chief of the Biology Division] Annual Report of the
National Museum for the fiscal year 1938-39. National Museum of Canada
Bulletin 95, p. 12-18.

1940

1* Mammiferes de la Province de Québec. Rapport Annuel 1939 Société Pro-

2.

3.

Paid

vancher d’Histoire Naturelle du Canada, p. 37-111.
[Report from the Chief of the Biology Division] Report of the Department
of Mines and Resources for 1939, p. 48-49.
[Review of] The recent mammals of Idaho, by William B. Davis. The Can-
adian Field-Naturalist 54(4): 60-61. |
The spread of the cottontail rabbits in Canada. The Canadian Field-Naturalist
54(5): 70-72.

1941
[Report from the Chief of the Biology Division] Report of the Department
of Mines and Resources for 1940, p. 39-40.
Two species of bats added to the list of Quebec mammals. Annual Report,
1940. The Provancher Society of Natural History of Canada, p. 23-30.
Deux espéces de chauves-souris ajoutées a la liste des mammiféres de la
Province de Quebec. Rapport Annuel 1940 Société Provancher d’Histoire
Naturelle du Canada, p. 31-37.
[Report from the Chief of the Biology Division] Report of the Department
of Mines and Resources for 1941, p. 35-36.

1942
Canadian voles of the genus Phenacomys with a description of two new
Canadian subspecies. The Canadian Field-Naturalist 56(4): 56-60.
Six additions to the list of Quebec mammals with descriptions of four new
forms. Annual Report 1941 Provancher Society of Natural History of
Canada, p. 31-43.
Six additions a la liste des mammiféres de la Province de Québec avec des-
criptions de quatre nouvelles formes. Rapport Annuel 1941 Société Pro-
vancher d’Histoire Naturelle du Canada, p. 45-57.

1943
Summary of the large wolves of Canada, with description of three new arctic
races. Journal of Mammalogy 24(3): 386-393.
Two new seals from arctic Canada with key to the Canadian forms of hair
seals (family Phocidae). Annual Report 1942 Provancher Society of Natural
History of Canada, p. 23-34.
Deux nouveaux phoques de l’arctique Canadien et clef pour les formes Can-
adiennes de Phoques communs (famile Phocidae). Rapport Annuel 1942
Société Provancher d’Histoire Naturelle du Canada, p. 35-47.

140

4.

Tue CANnapIAN FIELD-NATURALIST Vol. 76

Nine additions to the list of Quebec mammals with descriptions of six new
forms. Annual Report 1942 Provancher Society of Natural History of Can-
ada, p. 49-62.

Neuf additions 4 la liste des mammiféres de la Province de Québec avec des-
cription de six nouvelles formes. Rapport Annuel 1942 Société Provancher
d’Histoire Naturelle du Canada, p. 63-77.

[With Rand, A. L.] Variation in the porcupine (genus Erethizon) in Canada.
Canadian Journal of Research 21: 292-309.

[With Rand, A. L.] Townsend vole (Microtus townsendi) in Canada. The
Canadian Field-Naturalist 57(4, 5): 73-74.

A prior name revived for the bean mouse. The Canadian Field-Naturalist
57(4, 5): 92.

[With Rand, A. L.] A new lemming mouse (Synaptomys) from Manitoba with
notes on some other forms. The Canadian Field-Naturalist 57(6): 101-103.
[With Rand, A. L.] Status of the Richardson vole (Microtus richardsoni) in
Canada. The Canadian Field-Naturalist 57(6): 106-107.

|Report from the Chief of the Biology Division] Report of the Department
of Mines and Resources for 1942, p. 23-24.

1944

[With Rand, A. L.] Notes on the chipmunks of the genus Ewtammas in Canada.
The Canadian Field-Naturalist 57(7, 8): 133-135.

[Report from the Chief of the Biology Division] Report of the Department
of Mines and Resources for 1943, p. 34-35.

[With Rand, A. L.| The long-tailed meadow mouse (Microtus longicaudus)
in Canada. The Canadian Field-Naturalist 58(1): 19-20.

1945
[Report from the Chief of the Biology Division] Report of the Department
of Mines and Resources for 1944, p. 30-34.
[With Rand, A. L.] The varying lemming (genus Dicrostonyx) in Canada.
Journal of Mammalogy 26(3): 301-306.
“"..notes on the... grizzly bears...”, p. 8-10. Im A. E. Porsild Mammals
of the Mackenzie Delta. The Canadian Field-Naturalist 59(1): 4-22.
[With Rand, A. L.] A new form of dusky shrew from the Prairie Provinces
of Canada. The Canadian Field-Naturalist 59(2): 47-48.
[With Rand, A. L.] A new shrew from arctic North America. The Canadian
Field-Naturalist 59(2): 62-64.
Summary of Canadian black bears with description of two new northwestern
species. Annual Report 1944 Provancher Society of Natural History of
Canada, p. 17-33.
Resumé sur les ours noirs du Canada avec description de deux nouvelles
espéces du nord-ouest. Rapport Annuel 1944 Société Provancher d’Histoire
Naturelle du Canada, p. 34-52.
Three mammals of the weasel family (Mustelidae) added to the Quebec list
with descriptions of two new forms. Annual Report 1944 Provancher Society
of Natural History of Canada, p. 56-61.
Trois mammiféres de la famille des belettes (Mustelidae) ajouteés a la liste de
la Province de Québec, avec description de deux nouvelles sous-espéces.
Rapport Annuel 1944 Société Provancher d’Histoire Naturelle du Canada,
p. 62-68.

1962

YouNGMAN: BIBLIOGRAPHY OF R. M. ANDERSON 141

1946
Richardson’s ermine added to the list of Quebec mammals—with a survey of
weasels found in the Province. Annual Report 1945 Provancher Society of
Natural History of Canada, p. 20-26.

2* La belette hermine de Richardson ajoutee a la liste des mammiféres de la

Province de Quebec avec une étude sur les belettes trouvées dans la Province.

Rapport Annuel 1945 Société Provancher d’Histoire Naturelle du Canada,
. 27-32.

iResore from the Chief of the Biology Division] Report of the Department of

Mines and Resources for 1945, p. 29-30.

Catalogue of Canadian recent mammals. National Museum of Canada (Bio-

logical Series 31) Bulletin 102, 238 p.

1948

A survey of Canadian mammals of the North. Annual Report of the Pro-
vince of Quebec Association for the Protection of Fish and Game, p. 9-17.

1951

The fur animals of arctic Alaska. Proceedings of the Alaskan Science Con-
ference. National Research Council Bulletin 122, p. 105-106.

Ws

ANNUAL MEETING

The eighty-fourth annual meeting of the Ottawa Field-

Naturalists’ Club was held on Tuesday, December 4, 1962, at

8.15 p.m., in the auditorium of the National Museum of Canada.

MAMMALIAN DISPERSAL IN RELATION TO
AN ARTIFICIAL LAND BRIDGE

Austin W. CAMERON
Redpath Museum, McGill University, Montreal, P.Q.

IT WAS POINTED out in a previous paper (Cameron, 1958) that Cape Breton
Island lacks four species of mammals which are reasonably abundant on nearby
peninsular Nova Scotia. These four, the woodchuck (Marmota monax),
porcupine (Erethizon dorsatum), raccoon (Procyon lotor) and striped skunk
(Mephitis mephitis), probably are absent from the Island because they reached
peninsular Nova Scotia too late to take advantage of the land bridge which I
believe connected the Island with the mainland in post-glacial times. I hold
the view that such a land bridge must have existed because certain species of
mammals, such as shrews and moles, and about fourteen species of reptiles
and amphibians occur on the Island, and these species are almost invariably
absent from islands where no suitable land connection has been available for
mainland species to invade the island. Furthermore, the mammalian fauna of
Cape Breton Island is balanced (Lack, 1944) in contrast to the disharmonic
faunas of Newfoundland and Anticosti, for example. In addition to the
zoological evidence, much is known about the geological history of the region
which would support the view that Cape Breton Island has had a post-glacial
land bridge.

Although it seems reasonable to suppose that the absence of these four
mammals on Cape Breton Island is due to their late arrival in eastern Canada
following the retreat of the Wisconsin ice sheet, the possibility that they may
have occurred on the Island but disappeared before the arrival of the white
man cannot be entirely dismissed. That this is not an improbable supposition
is shown by the fact that skeletal remains of raccoons have been found in
Indian kitchen middens in peninsular Nova Scotia that pre-date the first white
explorers (Rand, 1943), yet the historic evidence would seem to indicate
that this species first invaded the area about 1800. It is possible, therefore,
that raccoons existed on Cape Breton Island prior to the arrival of the white
man, but there is no archaeological or other evidence to support such a view.
A number of species which do not now occur on peninsular Nova Scotia or
are recent arrivals may have occurred at an earlier time, perhaps during a
period of climatic amelioration such as is recorded for 5,000 B.P. (Dunbar,
n.d.). On the basis of such evidence as we have, however, it seems most
probable that none of the four species have ever occurred on Cape Breton,
and that this absence is due to their late arrival in eastern Canada after the
postulated land bridge had disappeared.

Despite the absence of a land connection which these species might have
used as an immigration route to the Island, it is somewhat surprising that they
did not reach it by other means. Cape Breton is separated from peninsular
Nova Scotia by the mile-wide Strait of Canso and it seems likely that these
mammals might have been accidently carried to the Island on floating ice or

142

1962 CAMERON: MAMMALIAN DISPERSAL 143

TABLE 1—NUMBERS OF INDIVIDUALS OBSERVED AT WESTERN TERMINUS OF CAUSEWAY*

Woodchuck | Porcupine| Raccoon | Skunk Remarks
Numbers Observed: 21 A7 Al 19 Includes indi-
viduals killed on
highways.
Hours of Observation: 43 63 57 52
Distances Travelled: 211 178 127 148 On foot and by

automobile; mile-
age recorded only
for suitable
habitat.

*Observations were carried out in the period one hour before sunset to two hours after and from
two hours before sunrise to one hour after in the case of the porcupine, raccoon and skunk.
Observations on the woodchuck were made only between sunrise and sunset.

debris. In addition, St. George’s Bay, which lies just north of the Strait,
freezes over each winter so that an ice bridge has been available.

In 1955 a rock causeway connecting peninsular Nova Scotia with Cape
Breton Island was completed, thus providing what appears to be an excellent
means for these species to cross to the Island. The causeway, which carries
both a two-lane highway and a railroad, is 90 feet wide and 30 feet above
high-tide mark; herbaceous plants and grasses have taken hold along the
margins thus providing sparse cover for small mammals.

In an attempt to determine what species, if any, had taken advantage of
this artificial land bridge, I spent two months in the summer of 1960 carrying
out field studies in southern Cape Breton and eastern peninsular Nova Scotia
under the sponsorship of the Redpath Museum, McGill University. The
first step was to determine the relative abundance of the four species in the
immediate environs of the causeway on the peninsular side. By means of
direct observation, trapping and the systematic plotting of tracks and other
signs, as well as from information obtained from local residents, it was deter-
mined that all four species do occur within a quarter-mile radius of the
peninsular terminus of the causeway. It was found that porcupines and
raccoons were common, skunks fairly common and woodchucks moderately
so (see Table 1). The low density of the last-mentioned is probably due to
the scarcity of suitable habitat.

Porcupines occur commonly throughout the coniferous forest belt that
stretches across the eastern part of the peninsula and extends to within 300
yards of the causeway terminus. Extensive barking of trees was observed
within a quarter-mile radius of the causeway and animals killed by automobiles
were commonly seen on the roadways near the terminus. At least one was
seen every evening between sunset and two hours afterwards.

As is evident from the observations recorded in Table 1, raccoons are
common, and by some local residents considered abundant, in the area near
the causeway. Their tracks were observed frequently along the margins of
brooks, lakes and lagoons in the area and several were seen on the highway

144 Tue CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST Vol. 76

where they had been killed by automobiles. ‘Toll-keepers on the causeway
informed me that they come regularly to the garbage pails at the toll-house,
which is located at the peninsular terminus of the causeway. They were also
frequently seen feeding along the margin of a lagoon at Auld’s Cove, less
than a mile from the causeway.

Skunks occur rather commonly (see Table 1) in the farming areas within
three miles of the causeway and occasionally in the settlements. Local reports
would seem to indicate a fairly high population, but I found that they were
considerably less abundant than such reports would lead one to suppose.
Nevertheless, the population is sufficiently high that there should be ample
opportunity for the animals to travel on the causeway as they do on other
highways.

The woodchuck population is relatively low in the immediate vicinity
of the causeway terminus largely because open grasslands are much restricted.
Only two active burrows were found within five miles of the causeway,
although there may have been others which were overlooked.

Considering that all four species occur within a mile radius of the cause-
way, it is surprising that none have been reported from the causeway proper.
This applies particularly to the raccoons because fish are often cast up on the
causeway during heavy storms, thus providing a readily accessible source of
food.

The absence of reports of porcupines on the causeway is equally surpris-
ing. These mammals make long forays along roadways and across open
Spaces with no apparent objective in mind, such journeys do not appear to
be in search of food or denning sights because both are bypassed without any
effort being made to explore them. ‘Therefore, it might be expected that on
occasion an individual would wander across the causeway. ‘There is no sub-
stantiated report, however, of their having done so. Were such travels at
all common, it is likely that there would be some highway mortality; yet,
according to the toll-keepers, no carcasses have been seen on the causeway.

Skunks, likewise, might be expected to follow the causeway as they do
other highways, but again no evidence could be obtained to the effect that
they do so. The cast-up fish would seem to offer an attraction as in the
case of the raccoons.

Because of their low density and the fact that they are not so likely to
wander widely over unvegetated areas, it is perhaps less surprising that wood-
chucks have not crossed.

It is not considered likely that traffic on the causeway is heavy enough
to act as a deterrent, since during the early morning hours, when many of the
species in question are active, few vehicles use the roadway. Furthermore,
none of these species is greatly disturbed by heavy traffic as the mortality
figures on highways show.

Every effort was made to secure information on the occurrence of these
four species on Cape Breton Island. Again, as in the case of the study on
the peninsular side of the causeway, local residents were interviewed and field
studies were conducted within a ten-mile radius of the causeway terminus.

1962 CAMERON: MaMMALIAN DISPERSAL 145

No evidence for the occurrence of any of the four species could be obtained,
although one report of a porcupine having been seen six miles east of Port
Hastings was received by Mr. Austin Letcher, Game Warden for the
southern part of the Island. He visited the locality where the animal was
reported seen, but he saw neither the animal itself nor any evidence of feeding.

On Cape Breton, I carefully checked the margins of streams and lakes
for the footprints of raccoons, the trees in the area for signs of barking by
porcupines, and the open fields and pastures for woodchuck workings, all with
negative results. Possible areas were so carefully investigated that if any
individuals of these species were present, their numbers must have been very
low indeed.

On the basis of the available evidence, it is possible only to conclude that
none of the four species has emigrated to Cape Breton Island in sufficient
numbers to become established, and furthermore that few, if any, individuals
have crossed the causeway at any time. The artificial land bridge, therefore,
has not served as an invasion route for these species.

DIscussION

In deciding whether a given island has had a land connection with another
land mass, zoogeographers usually resort to indirect evidence based on the
number of species occurring on the island and their ecology compared with
those found on the adjacent mainland. In most cases, it can be safely assumed
that there has been no suitable land bridge available to the colonizers if there
is a paucity of species and the fauna is “unbalanced” (Lack, 1944). This 1s
particularly true if amphibians and certain mammals, such as shrews, are
absent from the island.

As this study has shown, however, potential colonizers may be absent
from an island which has, or has had, a land connection with the mainland.
The woodchuck, porcupine, raccoon and skunk have had the advantage of a
land bridge between peninsular Nova Scotia and Cape Breton Island for a
period of six years and, nevertheless, have failed to colonize the Island. ‘Thus,
the existence of a land bridge does not, per se, guarantee that colonization will
take place. First of all, it is only reasonable to assume that the land connec-
tion must be ecologically favourable to potential colonizers. A connection of
unvegetated sand, for example, would probably not be utilized by forest
species. Secondly, it appears that conditions at the point of origin must be
such as to stimulate emigration. Population pressure has been regarded by
many ecologists as an important factor in animal dispersal, I concluded that
the slow spread of the introduced Green Frog in Newfoundland is due to
the absence of such pressure (Cameron and Tomlinson, i press).

It is also possible that the land connection is so narrow that potential
colonizers fail to locate it. Matthews (1952) suggests this as a possible
explanation for the absence in southern England of continental species that
must have been present in northern France when a land bridge existed in the
Straits of Dover. _Here again, it may have been that the land bridge was

146 Tue CANApDIAN Fretp-NatTurRALIST Vol. 76

ecologically unfavourable and there may not have been sufficient population
pressure on the continent to stimulate emigration.

In summary, this study has demonstrated that mainland species may be
absent on an island despite the existence of a land bridge. Many species may
not take advantage of a land connection because it is ecologically unfavourable
or because conditions on the mainland are not such as to stimulate emigration.

REFERENCES (

Cameron, Austin W. 1958. Mammals of Lack, Davip. 1944. Ecological Aspects of
the Islands in the Gulf of St. Lawrence. Species-formation in Passerine Birds. Ibis
National Museum of Canada Bulletin 154. 86: 260-286.

Cameron, Austin W. and A. J. ToMLINSON. Marruews, L. Harrison. 1952. British
Dispersal of the Introduced Green Frog Mammals. Collins, London.

ba Newroupdlands le Bree) Rann, A. L. 1943. History of the Rac-
Dunsar, M. J. (n.d.) Faunistic Effects of coon (Procyon lotor L.) in Nova Scotia.

Climatic Change in the North; Encyclo- Canadian Field-Naturalist 57: 95.

pedia Arctica (Zoology); MS.

Received for publication 20 December 1961

NOTES ON THE SKYLARK ON VANCOUVER ISLAND

D. Stirtine and R. Y. Epwarps

Department of Recreation and Conservation, Victoria, B.C.

IN THE AUTUMN of 1903, one hundred pairs of Skylarks (Alauda arvensis L.)
were released near Victoria on Vancouver Island by the Natural History
Society of British Columbia, and in 1913 an additional 49 birds were liberated
in the same area (Carl and Guiguet, 1958). The birds increased slowly and
spread northward until all suitable habitat is now occupied between the city
of Victoria and the north end of the Saanich Peninsula. This constitutes the
only successful introduction of the Skylark into North America (Twomey,
1936).

The Skylark is native to the British Isles and continental Europe south
of the Arctic Circle, northern Africa, and central Asia, withdrawing south-
ward in winter from northern Europe (Bent, 1942). Since it typifies the
fields of England, English settlers in nostalgic mood have introduced these birds
into many lands around the world. It was successfully taken to New Zealand
in the nineteenth century (Oliver, 1930), where it is now a common bird on
both North and South Islands. It was introduced into the Hawaiian Islands
in 1865 from England and in 1870 from New Zealand (Hawaii Audubon Soc.,
1959). It is now common on Hawaii and Maui, and locally so on Oahu. In
Australia it has become established in suitable habitat throughout the coastal
areas of the south and southeast (Cayley, 1956). In North America it has
been introduced at San Jose, California; at Portland, Oregon; at Brooklyn,
New York; and in British Columbia in the lower Fraser Valley and on Van-
couver Island (Twomey, 1936). All North American introductions failed
but the last, although they were initially successful at Portland and Brooklyn.
VANCOUVER ISLAND POPULATION

The area occupied by Skylarks on Vancouver Island is shown in Fig. 1.
This has a total area of about 20,000 acres, but all of this acreage is not avail-
able to Skylarks. Small patches of forest are scattered throughout, and a
complex pattern of land use on small holdings makes much land unsuitable.
Less than half of the 20,000 acres is good Skylark habitat. The three areas
shown isolated from the large one are recent range expansions. In the Belmont
area west of Victoria a singing male was seen in 1960, and other observations
have been made since. Although this area is only two miles from the nearest
breeding area near Portage Inlet, it represents a move across a region of woods
and rocky hills to a limited area of suitable habitat extending westward to
Metchosin. Farther north, Skylarks were found singing in fields north of Mill
Bay in 1961 (Davidson, 1961). Here access from the nearest occupied habitat
on the Saanich Peninsula is across four miles of water. Apparently suitable
habitats on islands east of the Saanich Peninsula have not been colonized, al-
though there are unverified reports of these birds on Saltspring Island, and on
August 14, 1960, a Skylark was seen near Friday Harbour, San Juan Island,
the first record of the bird for Washington (Audubon Field Notes, 1961).

147

148 Tue CanapiAn FIELD-NATURALIST Vol. 76

The habitat selected by the Vancouver Island Skylarks is rather restricted,
and confined to part of an area having a climate unique in Canada. Chapman
and Turner (1956) describe this climate as follows: “On the lee side of
Vancouver Island and Olympic Mountains, precipitation . . . is less than 30
inches per annum over the southeastern coast of Vancouver Island. The lower
annual totals are accompanied by a pronounced summer drought—July and
August together receiving only 2-3 inches.”

“The lee location of most of this climatic region ensures a substantial
reduction of cloudiness in comparison with the west coast and a consequent
increase in the number of hours of sunshine. A long frostless season coupled
with mild winters and cool, but sunny summers provide temperature charac-
teristics suitable for specialized agricultural activities, while the overall climate
makes this region one of the most distinctive in Canada.”

The Skylark is partial to open ground. On Vancouver Island as in Europe
(Witherby, 1943, Nicholson, 1951), they frequent pastures, beaches, cultivated
land, golf courses and airfields. In all cases the horizon about such places
must be low to be suitable, for they avoid narrow valleys and small fields
bordered by trees. The most suitable areas also have low or sparse vegetation,
often with a high proportion of bare soil.

We have conducted no thorough census, but were able to count a large
portion of the population in early March, 1962. The only major snowfall of
the year remained on the ground for a week, covering most skylark habitat.
The snow had covered most of their food, and the flocks were confined to
those areas offering some kind of nourishment. Results are shown in Figure 1.
During this survey we visited all areas known to have more than a few Sky-
larks. Birds were found in most of these areas, but it is probable that we
missed some concentrations, and there are large areas known to be lightly
populated in which we were unable to find birds at all. We counted a total
of 694 Skylarks in three days. We therefore estimate the Vancouver Island
skylark population at about 1000 birds.

PoPULATIONS AND WEATHER

Twomey (op. cit.) has shown, using climographs, that the climate of
Victoria approximates that found in the Skylark’s native range. This could
account for its successful introduction to the Victoria region. Nevertheless,
the numbers of Skylarks there have fluctuated considerably, apparently as a
result of occasionally detrimental winter weather. This population appears
to be resident, and therefore must survive the winters im situ. There is no
retreat from winter like the annual migrations undertaken by Skylarks in
northern Europe.

Winter weather, particularly conditions affecting the length of time the
ground is covered with snow, has an important bearing on Skylark survival.
For example, the winter of 1949-50 was noteworthy for its severity. In
Victoria the January mean of 26.1° F, was the lowest since records began, and
a temperature of 6.4°F on January 13, 1950 was a record low for the area.
A total of 53 inches of snow fell during the winter and, due to cold tempera-
tures, much of it had a long life on the ground. The ground was covered

1962 STIRLING AND Epwarps: Notes oN THE SKYLARK 149

>N Growing
SS Crty Areas

SS

Unoceupied Area Is
Mostly Forested land

Malahat f:
: JO Locotion ~ Number
of Birds Counted!
March 3-5 /96G2
Toto /*69F

Frid ge

Ficure 1. Map showing the extent of skylark distribution near Victoria, with numbers

indicating the Skylarks counted during a partial census.

150 Tue CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST Vol. 76

continuously through one period of four weeks. The following spring ob-
servers reported a general scarcity of Skylarks. Since then, winters have been
generally mild with light falls of snow (Figure 2). Through this same period
the population has increased, and recently has spread to new breeding areas.
This increase is reflected in a general way by the number of Skylarks seen
during annual Christmas bird counts (Figure 2). These counts cannot be taken
as accurate censuses for all birds, but they undoubtedly do reflect major
trends in population sizes for those species that are easy to find and to identify.
Christmas count data in Figure 2 indicates that the population of skylarks
about Victoria was very low in 1950, and after that date took six or seven
breeding seasons to rise to the present population level. It is of more than
passing interest here to note that the winter of 1949-50 was the last of a series
of winters characterized by deep snows throughout much of British Columbia,
and that in this deep snow period a number of mammals suffered high mor-
tality. Edwards (1956) notes population declines to 1950, and increases
thereafter, for deer (Odocoileus hentionus), moose (Alces alces), caribou
(Rangifer tarandus), and several other species.

WINTER SURVIVAL

Winters in the Saanich Peninsula are mainly snowless, but the year is rare
that has no snow at all. In some years there may be heavy falls. In early
March, 1962, several inches of heavy snow blanketed the area and persisted for
a week. The Skylarks were in trouble, some groups more so than others, as
shown by our observations during the last three days that snow covered the
ground.

It was evident that areas known to have Skylarks still had them during
this snowy period even if the available food supply was critical. Each popu-
lation appeared to be sedentary to a considerable degree even under such
critical conditions. On the other hand, large flocks were found in large units
of Skylark range, suggesting fidelity not so much to individual territories,
as fidelity to the unit of range. One flock, marked by 19 in Fig. 1, inhabits
a small range surrounded by forest and suburban housing. They remained
in this area, although their only food there was from a restricted area of weeds
offering seeds. The food was out of reach and they were fluttering up
clumsily to the seed heads in a manner indicating clearly that they were forced
into an unaccustomed and inefficient manner of feeding. Another flock of
Skylarks feeding in this way was accompanied by Horned Larks. The greater
efficiency of the latter in obtaining weed seeds above their heads was clearly
evident.

The largest flocks of Skylarks were found in cabbage and broccoli
fields, daffodil fields, and weedy fields. Smaller numbers found food in
barnyards, or roadside edges, bare soil along highway embankments, beaches,
and under a bird feeding station. In the cabbage and broccoli fields the birds
were feeding on the leaves, some of which were eaten down to skeletons,
having only the major ribs. Bent (1942) mentions this type of food. We
saw no evidence of damage to daffodils, the attraction here being bare soil
along the sides of deep furrows.

1962 STIRLING AND Epwarps: NoTres ON THE SKYLARK 151

ny
°

30

Ss
SS
&
=
&
&
8
&
&
&
x
&
Ny
NI

80

JANUARY SNOWFALL.
Ly)
fe}
No. OF SKYLARKS IN DECEMBER.

cs
fe)

10

&
&
R
8
&
SN
x
S
8
SN
s
NS
Ny
&
Ny
S
=
Ss
&
S
Ny
=
N
x
WN
&
8
Ny
s
ad

VITRITITIT ITI TIT TIT IT TTA

50 51 S2 53 54 S15) 56 57 58 59 60 61

YEAR

Figure 2. A comparison of January snowfall (hatched bars) and Skylark adundance in
the following December (solid line) in the vicinity of Victoria.

Other birds were associated with the Skylarks at more productive feeding
areas, the most numerous being Meadowlarks, Robins, Horned Larks, Starlings
and Brewer’s Blackbirds, oth some Oregon Juncos, White-crowned and
Golden-crowned Sparrows.

There seems to be little doubt that Skylarks, as sedentary populations,
cannot inhabit areas usually covered by snow in winter, and it is probable
that they cannot survive where snowfalls persist for a few weeks every year.

THe FurTure

The Skylarks have had 60 years to expand into suitable habitat on Van-
couver Island. It is reasonable to assume that they have invaded all accessible
and suitable areas. Further expansion must be due to either the finding by
chance of suitable areas more or less inaccessible, or to changing landscapes,
mainly changes made by man, creating new suitable habitat. Some coastal
lowlands on the east side of Vancouver Island, and mainly north of Nanaimo,
seem to be the only large areas that might offer room for expansion.

Territory presently occupied will shrink. Victoria is an expanding city,
and much of its expansion will be into areas now containing Skylarks. Subur-
ban housing destroys Skylark habitat. A major stronghold of the species
now is the municipal airport near Sidney. This should remain a stronghold
for many years, unless new kinds of airports demanded by the aviation of the
future results in the destruction of the present large areas of grass and herbs.

We predict that urban development creeping northward will slowly
reduce the area of skylark habitat, and therefore the numbers of Skylarks.

152 Tue CaAnapiAN Frecp-NaATurRALIST

Vol. 76

SUMMARY

Skylarks, introduced to Vancouver Island in 1903 and 1913, inhabit a
small area of less than 20,000 acres in a climatic region of low snowfall. In
March, 1962, 694 Skylarks were counted and the total population is estimated
to be 1000. Cold winters with persistent snow reduce the population, and
brief snowy periods concentrate the birds. The growth of the city of
Victoria will restrict Skylark habitat, and reduce the total population.

REFERENCES

Avupuson Fietp Notes. 1961. Vol. 15(1): Davinson, A. R. 1961. The skylarks. The
69. Victoria Naturalist 17: 129.

Bent, A. C. 1942. Life histories of North EPwarps, R. Y. 1956. Snow depths and

American flycatchers, larks, swallows, and
their allies. United States National Mu-
seum Bulletin 179.

Cart, G. C., and C. J. Guicuer. 1958.
Alien animals in British Columbia. British
Columbia Provincial Museum, Handbook
No. 14.

Cayiey, N. W. 1956. What bird is that?
A guide to the birds of Australia. Angus
and Robertson, Melbourne.

CuapMaNn, J. D. and D. B. Turner (Eds.).
1956. British Columbia atlas of resources.
British Columbia National Resources Con-
ference, Victoria.

ungulate abundance in the mountains of
western Canada. Journal of Wildlife
Management, 20: 159-168.

Hawai AupUBON SOCIETY.
birds. Honolulu.

1959. Hawaiian

Nicuotson, E. M. 1951. Birds and men.
Collins, London.
Ouivern, W. R. B. 1930. New Zealand

birds. Fine Arts, Wellington.
Twomey, A. C. 1936. Climographic
studies of certain introduced and migra-
tory birds. Ecology 17: 122-132.
Wirnersy, H. F. 1943. The handbook of
British birds. Witherby and Witherby,
London.

Received for publication 2 April 1962

Ws

FURTHER ADDITIONS TO THE BIRDS OF SIMCOE
COUNTY, ONTARIO

Otro E. Devitr
83 Harding Blvd., Richmond Hill, Ontario

WHEN THE ORIGINAL list of birds for Simcoe County was published (Devitt,
1943, 1944) 257 bird species were recorded. ‘To these, ten new species were
added in a revision (Devitt, 1950). Similarly, the original list of breeding
species was augmented by two additions (Devitt, 1950) to bring the total to
138.

The purpose of the present paper is to record further additions and
changes in status of the birdlife that have occurred in the county during the
past eleven years. “en additions have been made to the list of birds previously
recorded and the Mockingbird and Sandhill Crane have been elevated from
their former hypothetical standing in the light of further evidence and now
become added species bringing the total to 279. Definite breeding evidence
for five more species now raises the number of nesting birds to 143.

A heavy mortality of small birds, mostly warblers, vireos and thrushes,
occurred at the Barrie T.V. tower during the week of September 20-27, 1960.
An account of the tragedy has been reported by Westman (1960). On the
four nights, September 23 to 26 inclusive, 936 ‘birds of 45 species were killed
by hitting the 708 foot tower or its supporting guy wires. None of the
species killed, however, was new to the county list.

Acknowledgments are due to the many observers who have supplied
information on the birds of the county. In particular, | wish to thank the
following: Mr. Frank Munro, who resided at Camp Borden from 1946 to
1953; Mrs. J. L. Westman, Tollendal; Miss A. M. Hughes, Barrie; Mr. Hugh
Currie, Barrie; and Mr. A. J. Mitchener, Collingwood.

ANNOTATED List

Wauire Pexrican Pelecanus erythror- ance in Florida in 1948. In Ontario the
hynchos. The second occurrence of a_ first one turned up in 1956 (Baillie,
White Pelican in the county was record- 1960). It was considered, therefore, only
ed at Lake Simcoe in 1959. It was first a matter of time before one would be
seen by Mr. Thomas Miller of Keswick sighted in this part of the province. To
in Cook’s Bay on June 26. Conservation Mr. Jerry Shemilt goes the credit of
Officer Harold Van Wyck told the finding the first Cattle Egret for the
writer that he saw this bird on June 28, county on May 22, 1960. It was in a
at the south end of Cook’s Bay behind flooded field along the Nottawasaga
Begg Island and was able to get within River, a few miles north of Angus. Mr.
200 yards of it. A few days later it dis- Beverly Geale saw it the next day. An
appeared after being chased by two boys’ excellent coloured photograph of the
in an outboard motorboat. egret, taken by Dr. Donald Gunn on

Cattte Ecrer Bubulcus ibis. This May 24, as it perched on a fence post
species has spread rapidly over eastern _ beside the flooded field, is in the writer’s
North America since its initial appear- possession.

153

154

Common Ecrer Casmerodius albus.
The following additional observation of
this species has been recorded by Currie
(1953): “No less than 4 of these south-
ern wanderers were seen by Mr. Rich-
ards of Toronto on or about October
5, 1953. The birds were in a marsh about
two miles south of Gilford.” On July
26, 1961, one was seen feeding in a
shallow pond at the outskirts of Colling-
wood by Mr. A. J. Mitchener.

Guossy Isis Plegadis falcinellus. The
second county occurrence and the first
reported since 1828 was a flock of three
Glossy Ibises found by David Elder of
Toronto on May 1, 1960 in a flooded
field along the Nottawasaga River, a
few miles north of Angus. They remain-
ed until May 8, at least, and were seen
by many observers from Barrie and
Toronto.

SHOVELER Spatula clypeata. ‘The first
summer occurrence for this species was
recorded on July 9, 1953, when Miss A.
M. Hughes and Mrs. R. Carman ob-
served a male circling in an agitated
manner over. a grassy marsh northwest
of Angus (Currie, 1953). On June 5,
1956, the writer observed two male
Shovelers pursuing a female in court-
ship flight over the Holland River Marsh
near Cook’s Bay.

Harieguin Duck Histrionicus his-
trionicus. (his handsome duck was
added to the county list when two were
found feeding with Common Golden-
eyes in the open bay off Sunset Point,
Collingwood, by Mr. A. J. Mitchener
on December 31, 1958 (Mitchener, 1959).
They were present for about a week
during which time they were seen by
several members of the Brereton Field
Naturalists’ Club of Barrie.

Common Ewer Somateria mollissima.
Currie (1953) has recorded finding a
female of this species at the head of
Kempenfelt Bay on November 14, 1953.
The bird remained in the area for several
days where it was seen by observers
from Barrie and Toronto. Another was

Tue CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

Vol. 76

identified at Collingwood on January 2,
1961 by Mr. A. J. Mitchener and Mrs.
J. L. Westman.

ComMon Scorer Oidemia nigra. The
following additional observations for this
rare fall transient may be listed: a fe-
male at Collingwood by Mr. A. J.
Mitchener on November 11, 1953 (Cur-
rie, 1953) and one at Allandale during
the period December 14-16, 1956 by
Mrs. J. L. Westman.

RepD-BREASTED MercGanser Mergus ser-
rator. On July 1, 1952, a pair of Red-
breasted Mergansers was found on the
Nottawasaga River by Mr. F. E. Cour-
tice while canoeing in the vicinity of
Fisher’s Rapids below Jack’s Lake. On
July 16, Mr. Courtice and Mr. A. J.
Mitchener again found this pair in the ~
same area. Mr. Mitchener writes: “Mr.
Courtice and I canoed on the same part
of the river and saw the female with
not less than six young accompanied by
the male. The female performed the
broken wing act while the male flew off
and was seen again a few hundred feet
further down stream.” In this species,
according to Bent (1923), both parents
take part in the raising of the young
while the male of the Common Mer-
ganser deserts the female when incuba-
tion commences. This is the first breed-
ing record for the county.

Gyrratcon Falco rusticolus. ‘wo
additional observations of this rare hawk
have been recorded by Currie (1953):
a white-plumaged bird by Mr. A. J.
Mitchener at Collingwood on Decem-
ber 17, 1952 and a dark-phased individual
near Barrie on November 3, 1953 by Mr.
John Westman.

SANDHILL CRANE Grus canadensis.
Previously listed as hypothetical on the
basis of Sagard’s mention of cranes in
1623 (Wrong and Langton, 1939), this
species is now added to the county list.
Mr. Dale Nash informed the writer that
he had seen a Sandhill Crane at his
farm in the sixth concession of North
Orillia Township in October, 1960. He

1962

described it as a large greyish bird that
stood as tall as his shoulder and having
a reddish patch on its face. There was
ample opportunity to observe the crane
as it was present for about two weeks,
frequenting a field occupied by a herd
of cattle.

Sritt SANDPIPER Micropalama himanto-
pus. Since the single record for this
species was established in 1945 at Barrie,
Mr. A. J. Mitchener has identified it on
two occasions at Collingwood; on July
24, 1957 and August 6, 1961.

Marsiep Gopwir Limosa fedoa. ‘This
large wader was added to the county
list on May 27, 1961, when one was seen
at the Rifle Butts, Collingwood by Mr.
A. J. Mitchener, Mrs. J. L. Westman
and several other members of the Bre-
reton Field Naturalists’ Club. The God-
wit was feeding with several Knots and
Dunlins and was studied for some time
through a Balscope and binoculars from
a distance of fifty yards.

Rep Puararope Phalaropus fulicarius.
A single bird seen by Mr. A. J. Mitchen-
er at the mouth of the Nottawasaga
River on October 10, 1952 has been
recorded by Currie (1953). This marks
the fourth occurrence of this rare tran-
sient for the county.

Parasitic JAEGER Stercorarius parasiti-
cus. Several additional observations of
this uncommon visitor are now at hand.
One was watched by Mrs. J. L. West-
man as it harried a flock of Common
Terns at Allandale on October 2, 1949
(Currie, 1953) and Mr. A. J. Mitch-
ener identified another at Collingwood
on October 16, 1956.

IceLtanp Gut Larus glaucoides. This
gull was first recorded for the county
in January 1956, at Collingwood by Mr.
A. J. Mitchener who viewed one from
a distance of 25 feet with the aid of a
telescope. Mitchener (1960) again re-
ported two Iceland Gulls at Colling-
wood on December 28, 1959. These birds
were with two Glaucous Gulls and the

Devitt: Birps oF SImcoz CouNtTY 155

difference in size and other characteris-
tics were noted.

FRANKLIN’s Guit Larus pipixcan. A
third county record for this western
species was established on November
20, 1956 when Mr. A. J. Mitchener saw
one with Bonaparte’s Gulls in Colling-
wood harbour. Its slightly larger size,
dark legs and feet, dark mantle with a
dark patch around the head were all
seen to good advantage.

Littte Gutit Larus minutus. This
interesting European gull was added to
the county list on October 27, 1957,
when one was identified by Miss A. M.
Hughes, who later pointed it out to
members of the Brereton Field Natural-
ists’ Club. The bird was feeding with
a flock of Bonaparte’s Gulls along the
shore of Kempenfelt Bay at Barrie.

Brown Creeper Certhia familiaris.
Mr. A. J. Mitchener found a nest with
six eggs on May 24, 1958 in Nottawa-
saga Township, near Wasaga Beach. It
was behind the loose bark of a decayed
balsam fir in dense woods. This is the
second nesting record for the county.

Carotina Wren Thryothorus ludo-
vicianus. Since the initial occurrence of
this wren in Innisfil Township in 1939,
it has been reported on three subsequent
occasions. Currie (1953) has recorded
a singing bird found by Mrs. J. L. West-
man on May 12, 1953 at Tollandal near
Barrie and also states that Mr. Frank
Munro saw this species during his stay
at Camp Borden from 1946 to 1953. Mrs.
Westman reported a wintering Carolina
Wren which was present at Tollandal
from December 16, 1956 to February
13, 1957.

Mockinepirp Mimus polyglottos. This
species, which was previously listed as
hypothetical on the basis of one sight
record at Big Cedar Point, Lake Simcoe
in 1941, is now added to the county
list. One was present at the feeding
station of Mr. Albert Kirby, Robinson
Street, Collingwood almost daily from

156 Tue CanapiAn Frecp-NaTurRALIST

February 1 to 9, 1958, where it was ob-
served by Mr. A. J. Mitchener. Another
Mockingbird was seen by Miss A. M.
Hughes on May 17, 1959, in the fourth
concession of Vespra Township.

Brown THRASHER Toxostoma rufumi.
The first winter record for this species
was established on December 30, 1951,
when one was noted at the feeding sta-
tion of Mr. Reg. Smith, Duckworth
Street, Barrie by members of the Bre-
reton Field Naturalists’ Club during
their annual Christmas census (1952).

BLuE-cRay GwnatcatcHer Polioptila
caerulea. he first observation of this
species for the county was made on May
8, 1953, when Mr. A. J. Mitchener saw
one at Sunset Park, Collingwood (Cur-
rie, 1953).

BowEMIAN Waxwine Bombycilla gar-
rula. This species is occasionally noted
in winter but the unusual invasion that
occurred during the winter of 1958-59
reached such proportions as to be
worthy of special mention. The advance
guard of this flight was first reported by
Mr. R. G. Dingman on December 24,
1958, when he saw a flock of sixty at
his home in Barrie. During the Christmas
census on December 27, 1958, 116 were
counted in the Barrie area (Hughes,
1959).

On December 30, 1958, Mr. A. J.
Mitchener found flocks of fifteen and
forty, respectively, feeding on the abun-
dant crop of mountain ash berries at
Collingwood. On January 11, 1959, Mr.
Charles Molony, A. J. Mitchener and
the writer saw sixty at the Collingwood
Fish Hatchery.

Messrs. E. Stark, W. W. Smith and
R. W. Trowern counted 400 Bohemian
Waxwings on January 4, 1959 in Barrie.
Mr. Charles Molony and the writer saw
110 near the Royal Victoria Hospital on
January 11 and Mr. J. L. Baillie noted
ninety-seven on Poyntz Ave., Barrie on
January 24, 1959.

Vol. 76

Such large numbers, unprecedented
within living memory, attracted natural-
ists from as far away as Buffalo, N.Y.

YELLOW-THROATED VirEo Vireo flavi-
frons. Mr. D. S. Miller had a pair of
Yellow-throated Vireos under observa-
tion from July 1 to 4, 1954 at Oro Beach,
Lake Simcoe. Actions of the birds indi-
cated probable nesting but the actual
nest was not located.

GOLDEN-WINGED WarBLER V ermiivora
chrysoptera. Currie (1953) has record-
ed that he and Miss A. M. Hughes found
a pair of these birds established near Mac
railway station (west of Barrie) in the
summer of 1952 and that at least four
others were seen during that summer in
or near the Minesing Swamp.

Mr. Douglas Sumner informed the
writer that he located a male and female
near Mac on July 13, 1956 and on the
following day saw a young bird out of
the nest being fed by an adult. This
constitutes the first breeding record for
the county.

BREWsTER’s WarBLER V ermivora chry-
soptera x pinus. The first observation
of this interesting hybrid near the junc-
tion of the Pine and Nottawasaga Rivers
by Mr. Frank Munro on July 31, 1949
has been reported by Currie (1953).
Another was noted by Miss A. M.
Hughes and Mr. H. Currie on May 15,
1955 along the Sunnidale Road about
three miles from Barrie. A third Brews-
ter’s Warbler was seen on May 23, 1956
by Mrs. J. L. Westman at Tollendal.

CERULEAN WarBLeR Dendroica ceru-
lea. Mrs. J. L. Westman and Mr. W. A.
Bell found a singing male in the Mine-
sing Swamp on June 20, 1954, establish-
ing the first record for the county.
Presumably the same male was singing
in the same locality when viewed by
Mrs. Westman, Dr. E. G. Bilkey, Mrs.
O. E. Devitt and the writer on June 27.
On May 21, 1956, another was seen on
the tenth concession sideroad of Vespra

1962

Township by Mrs. Westman and other
Barrie observers.

Hoopvep Warsier Wilsonia citrina.
The first occurrence of the Hooded
Warbler in the county was established
on June 9, 1959, when Mrs. J. L. West-
man found a singing male at Tollendal
near Barrie. This bird was under ob-
servation for almost an hour.

WestTERN MeapowtarKk Sturnella ne-
glecta. The initial observation of this
species in the county by Mr. Frank
Munro some three-quarters of a mile
west of Holly on May 9, 1953 has been
recorded by Currie (1953).

Mr. George North and Mr. George
McBride discovered another singing male
on highway 88, one and one-half miles
west of Bradford on July 28, 1957. In
the same general area on July 31, the
writer was able to secure a young West-
ern Meadowlark, not long out of the
nest, to establish the first breeding re-
cord for the county. The specimen is
now in the Royal Ontario Museum.

Rurous-sipep TowHee Pipilo erythro-
phthalmus. This species was noted in
winter for the first time at the feeding
station of Mrs. J. L. Westman at Tol-
lendal and was recorded on the Barrie
Christmas census of December 27, 1958
(Hughes, 1959). Another towhee was
seen on January 7, 1961 during the an-
nual Christmas census at Barrie.

GRASSHOPPER SPARROW Ammodramus
savannarum. ‘The first county breeding
record for this species as recorded by

Devitt: Birps or Simcor CouNTY 157

Currie (1953) was that of a nest con-
taining four eggs discovered by Mr.
Frank Munro on June 21, 1953, at Camp
Borden.

HENsLow’s Sparrow Passerherbulus
henslowti. Besides the two_ locations
previously reported for this rare spar-
row (at Holland River and just west of
Barrie), a third summering area was
discovered by Dr. C. H. D. Clarke, May
26, 1955, on the north side of Cranberry
Lake in Tiny Township.

CLAy-cOLORED Sparrow Spizella pal-
lida. The first two breeding records for
the county as recorded by Currie (1953)
were: Mr. Frank Munro watched a
young bird, just able to fly, being fed by
a parent on July 13, 1952, between the
Camp Borden landing field and the
Camp Borden-Alliston highway; again
on July 11, 1953, he found a nest con-
taining four young birds in the same
area.

WHITE-CROWNED SPARROW Zonotrichia
leucophrys. An individual seen in Bar-
rie on December 27, 1958, during the
annual Christmas census of the Brereton
Field Naturalists’ Club, was the first
winter occurrence for the county
(Hughes, 1959).

Fox Sparrow Passerella iliaca. The
initial winter observation of this hand-
some sparrow was made on January 28,
1961, when one was noted in a small
flock of juncos on the seventh concession
sideroad of Essa Township, near Ivy by
Mrs. J. L. Westman.

REFERENCES

Banu, J. L. 1960. Heron who gets
around. Wildlife column in the Telegram,
Toronto, Dec. 3, 1960.

Bent, ArTHUR CLEVELAND. 1923. Life His-
tories of North American Wild Fowl.
Order Ansers (Part) United States Na-
tional Museum Bulletin 126.

BrereETON Fie~p Narurawists’ Crus. 1952.
Barrie, Ont. p. 62. In Christmas Bird Cen-
sus—1951. Canadian Field-Naturalist 66:
59-66.

CurriE, Hueu. 1953. Some recent bird
records from Simcoe County, Ont. The
Intermediate Naturalist No. 8, pp. 11-13.

158 Tue CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST Vol. 76

Devirt, O. E. 1943. The Birds of Simcoe Census—1958. Barrie, Ont. Canadian Field-

County, Ontario, Part One. Transactions Naturalist 73: 33-34.
of the Royal Canadian Institute 24 (pt. 2): Mircuener, A. J. 1959. Christmas Bird
241-314. Census—1958, Collingwood, Ont. Canadian

——— . 1944. The Birds of Simcoe Field-Naturalist 73: 34-35.
County, Ontario, Part Two. Transactions © 1960. Chetan inl
of the Royal Canadian Institute 25 (pt. Census, 1959-1960. Collingwood, Ont.
1): 29-116. Canadian Field-Naturalist 74: 34.

ERE a ow Addition Sue the Birds of Westman, F. 1960. We've Been Thinking
Simcoe County, Ontario. Canadian Field- About’ Casualties) at. Pheu oa

Naturalist 64: 145-148. Tower. Federation of Ontario Naturalists
Hugues, Anastasia. 1959. Christmas Bird Bulletin No. 90, Dec. pp. 4-5.

Received for publication 25 January 1962

NOTES ON A COLLECTION OF AMPHIBIANS FROM THE
SOUTHWESTERN UKRAINE, U.S.S.R. AND ADJACENT
CZECHOSLOVAKIA,

STANLEY W. GorHAM

National Museum of Canada, Ottawa, Ontario

A VALUABLE amphibian collection of approximately one hundred and fifty
specimens was donated to the National Museum of Canada in April 1959 by
Dr. Vadim Vladykov of Ottawa University. These have been catalogued
as NMC 4280-4372 (inclusive). This collection was made during the years
1924 to 1928. A detailed map showing most of the localities and a description
of the Carpatho-Ukraine region may be found in Vladykov (1931). Most of
the localities are in the Carpatho-Ukraine (Russo Sub-Carpathian: Vladykov
1931), but three are in eastern Czechoslovakia. While the majority of speci-
mens bear labels giving locality data, the remainder were labelled with the
indefinite “Pod. K. Rus”. Pod. K. Rus is an abbreviation for Podkarpatska
Rus, a name which was sometimes used for the Carpatho-Ukraine.

RuskAL WES
i NEVITSKE Cap ety )
LucHkI a ae
UZHOROD ize U ue Ss Re
e OL, ina BME ee "
VATANY Ay, ~
, oor e) UKACHEVO “4 iis S
a

LAZESTSINA, \

eBEREHOVA

e PODPLE SIE \

Vet BycHki STOKHOvETS @
HUNGARY

ROMANIA

Figure 1. Map of the southwestern Ukraine (Carpatho-Ukraine), U.S.S.R. and adjacent
Czechoslovakia, after Vladykov (1931) with the addition of Nevitske, Ozirna, Ruskal
and Luchki. The name “Sinatorium’ is doubtful and cannot be located. Also, the
spelling of several place names have been changed slightly from that of Vladykov.
These changes have been made on the authority of Mr. M. Borowyk and are as

follows: Vajani = Vajany, Mukacevo = Mukachevo, Berehovo = Berehova, Vel
Bychiv = Vel Bychki, Lazescina = Lazestsina, Stochovet = Stokhovets.

159

160 Tue CANADIAN FieLp-NaATURALIST Vol. 76

Seventeen species of amphibians have been recorded from the Carpatho-
Ukraine. The Vladykov collection contains thirteen of these species, includ-
ing a series of Tritwrus montandoni, the Carpathian newt. This species is
known only from eastern Czechoslovakia, southwestern Ukraine, U.S.S.R.
and northern Romania.

The collection has been identified by the author to the species level only,
as the necessary comparative material for subspecific determination has not
been available. A list of the species with the number obtained at each locali
has been compiled so that herpetologists may note the number available for
study in the National Museum.

I wish to thank Mr. F. Cook, Mr. D. McAllister and Mr. M. Borowyk
of the National Museum of Canada; also the American Museum of Natural
History for the loan of comparative material.

TABLE 1—List of species in the Vladykov donation with the locality and
quantity of each

Southwestern Ukraine, U.S.S.R. ? | Czechoslovakia
° 3
as seat
| S| eh) ew lS |e » | & 5
elon | Ola] =] se OD} wu - | oo
©) |) 2s) >a| © ° Ss 3 i nm | MM 5 Pal ie a
| Bie | Gic |S) ei eles) Tle = ra 4
Sl Sial| Sse 85/2/22 eine
ae ee =e ei zai iia | SS i Oo | ee
Salamandra salamandra. .1 1
Triturus alpestris........ 9 9
Triturus cristatus....... 33 7 | 2 DY 2
Triturus montandoni... .14 1 4 9
Triturus vulgaris....... 31 ZW | 2 ih) 2 7 1 5
Bombina bombina........1 1
Bombina variegata...... 17 $ | ak 2 2 2 1
Pelobates fuscus......... 1 1
Bufo viridis............. 1 1
Rana arvalis............ 8 2 1 4 1
Rana dalmatina......... 9 4 1 2 2
Rana temporaria........13 | 1 | 1 § By | 2 i 1
Rana esculenta.......... 7 4 | 3

Additional species recorded in the literature from this area but not represented in this
collection are: Bufo bufo, Bufo calamita, Hyla arborea and Rana ridibunda, The latter form
is considered a full species by some herpetologists while others consider it a race of R.
esculenta.

REFERENCES
Boutencer, G. A. 1882. Catalogue of the §—-—-———————— 1882. Catalogue of the
Batrachia Salientia s. Ecaudata in the Batrachia Gradientia s. Caudata and
collection of the British Museum. 2d ed. Batrachia Apoda in the collection of the

British Museum, London. British Museum. British Museum, London.

1962 GorHamM: NotTEs ON A COLLECTION OF AMPHIBIANS 161

——- 1897-1898. The tailless Nuiepen, F. 1923. Amphibia, Anura 1. Das
batrachians of Europe. 2 v. Ray Society, Tierreich, 46: 1-584.
London. Terentjev, P. V., and S. A. TscHErNov.
1949. Opredelitelj presmykajuschtschich-
sja i semnowodnych. 3d ed. State Publish-
ing House Soviet Science, Moscow.

Vuiapykov, V. 1931. Poissons de la Russie
Sous-Carpathique (Tchécoslovaquie). Mé-

ee 1918. On the races and
variations of the edible frog, Rana escu-
Jenta L. Annals and magazine of natural
history, (9) 2: 241-257.

Mertens, R., and H. WermutuH. 1960. moires de la Société zoologique de
Die Amphibien und Reptilien Europas. France, 29: 217-374.
Dritte Liste. V. Kramer, Frankfurt am ZootocicaL Recorp (Amphibia and Reptilia
Main. Section). Zoological Society of London.

Received for publication 31 January 1962

Ws

THE NATURALISTS’ DIRECTORY

Meeting place for naturalists all over the world. Only reference source
of its kind. Contains names of naturalists, their locations and special interests;
also lists museums, societies, clubs and natural science periodicals. ‘Covers all
states in the U.S. and 60 other countries. Over 3,000 listings. Used by pro-
fessional and amateur naturalists to keep in touch with each other on like
interests and by libraries, schools, colleges, universities, science teachers,
government agencies and many others engaged in the field of natural science.
In continuous publication since 1878. Now in its 39th edition. Price post-
paid: U.S.—$5,; Canada & Mexico — $6; Elsewhere — $7.50. 10 day money-
back guarantee.

Order from: THE NATURALISTS’ DIRECTORY, BOX 282,
PHILLIPSBURG, NEW JERSEY, U.S.A.

FIELD OBSERVATIONS OF VARIATION IN
VACCINIUM ULIGINOSUM L.*

Hansrorp I. SHACKLETTE
~ United States Geological Survey, Denver, Colorado

Tue Boc Birrperry or Dwarf Blueberry, Vaccinium uliginosum L., is a very
common shrub in parts of northern North America and northern Europe and
occupies a wide variety of habitats. The writer had the opportunity of
making extensive field observations of this species in 1948 while serving as
a member of the Port Radium Expedition of the Botanical Gardens, University
of Michigan, for the Detection of Hereditary Mutations in Plants. This
expedition was supported by the Bureau of Naval Research, U. S. Navy.
These studies were made in the vicinity of Great Bear Lake and Great Slave
Lake, and at Coppermine on the shore of Coronation Gulf, Northwest Ter-
ritories, Canada. During the summers of 1957, 1958, and 1960, while employ-
ed as botanist for the U. S. Geological Survey, he made numerous observations
on this species through much of Alaska.

This shrub grows in all parts of this state, and is one of the few woody
plants with such widespread distribution (Hultén, 1948, p. 1258-1261). It does
not grow in the densely shaded forests of hemlock and spruce of southeastern
Alaska; otherwise it is to be expected in Alaska wherever any species of
trees are found, and its range extends beyond the tree line into the arctic alpine
and arctic tundra zones. Spetzman (1959, p. 49) gives its habitat in the
Artic Slope of Alaska as “Cutbanks, shrub meadows, wet sedge meadows, and
rocky alpine slopes.” In the Great Bear Lake region it is most commonly
found in moist, peaty soil near the outer margins of Sphagnum bogs. It also
occurs in the isolated humus deposits that form in small ravines and depressions
of the extensive igneous outcrops of this region.

The shrub is commonly decumbent, or ascending to 6 dm high. How-
ever, in alpine situations near its altitudinal limit it may be completely
depressed, having only the leafy branch tips protruding from the moss or
lichen mat, its rate of growth just keeping pace with the growth of these
associated plants. This often results in the development of thick woody
stems a meter or more in length buried almost horizontally in the organic
accumulation. This main leafless stem bears only a few leafy branches. In
such situations it is suggested that the rate of moss and lichen growth may be
rather accurately determined by correlating the thickness of this mat directly
above such a buried stem with the age of the stem (determined by ring counts)
at this point. At one site in the Alaska Range near Mount McKinley pre-
liminary studies showed a mat thickness of approximately 8 cm directly over
a fifteen-year-old stem. As conditions become less favorable for the Vac-
cinium, the mosses and lichens may grow at a faster rate than does the shrub,
and so eliminate it from the community. On the other hand, this species

*Publication authorized by the Director, United States Geological Survey.

162

1962 SHACKLETTE: VARIATION IN Vaccinium uliginosum 163

may grow as an erect shrub as high as 1.5 m in moist, protected ravines,
particularly if forced into the upright habit by the growth of dwarf birch
(Betula nana subsp. exilis (Sukatch) Hult.) or other competing shrubs.

In some parts of its range the fruit is reported to be sweet and widely
used for food. Anderson (1959, p. 372-373) writes, “This is the common
blueberry of interior Alaska and used in large quantities. In southeast Alaska
it is largely a bog or alpine dweller and not much used.” Wiegand (1947, p.
3424) quotes W. M. Munson as follows: “. .. its fr. [fruit] though of poor
quality, is used for food by the natives of the Northwest.” Fernald (1950,
p- 1132), Rehder (1947, p. 752), and Britton and Brown (1936, p. 699) each
characterize the fruit as “sweet”. In describing this plant in the Canadian
Eastern Arctic, Polunin (1940, p. 315) says, “Vaccinium uliginosum var. al-
pinum is one of the outstanding plants over much of our area, giving the most
brilliant tints to the hillsides in autumn, the most delicious fruits to all around,
and often dominating considerable areas of sheltered country.” Hultén (1948,
p- 1261) writes of this species, “The form of the fruit is very variable in
Europe as well as in America, and it seems to me that the berries of var.
alpinum have a sweeter taste than those of the main type. They are good
to eat, which is not the case with the berries of the Scandinavian plant, which
have a very astringent taste.” Hultén (op. cit.) considers the var. alpinum
Bigel. to be one of two races of this species which occur in Alaska and else-
where, and believes that it is hardly possible to separate the races by a distinct
line of demarcation.) Harshberger (1928, p. 232), in writing of a variety
of this species which he described from Pedro Dome near Fairbanks, Alaska
says, “The writer in finding Vaccinium uliginosum var. pedris feels that he
has discovered a new variety of whortleberry. The fruit of this form is
elongated and ellipsoidal, instead of spherical, and the berries are sweet instead
of tart, as in Vaccinium uliginosum. In other characters, the presence of
bloom on the fruit and in the vegetative characters, the new variety agrees
with the species.” However, it should be noted that on the same page the
Latin diagnosis of this variety states, “Bacca ovata; fructus dulcissimus.”

It has been the experience of the writer that throughout Alaska the
fruit is rather uniformly sweet and pleasant to the taste, and that the fruits
from Pedro Dome are not especially unique in this respect. However, in
the Great Bear Lake region, the tasting of hundreds of fruits revealed but
few that were distinctly sweet and edible. By far the greater number were
rather insipid, or had a slightly tart, somewhat astringent taste not very
pleasant to this observer. One outstanding exception was found, Specimen
No. 2949, collected July 14, 1948, bore fruits which were rather large (about
1 cm long), of a dark blue-black color overlain with a dense bloom, and
which were distinctly sweet and pleasant to the taste. This plant was grow-
ing in sandy soil of a burned-over spruce forest two miles northeast of the
R.C.A.F. camp, Sawmill Bay. Other plants growing adjacent to it bore the
usual insipid fruits. From these experiences it may be summarized that fruits
of the Bog Bilberry in this region ordinarily are scarcely edible, they are
certainly inferior in this respect to the fruits of the Red Bearberry (Arcto-
staphylos alpina subsp. rubra Hult.) with which they often grow.

164 Tue CaANnapiAN FieLtp-NaATURALIST Vol. 76

The color of the fruits was found to be quite uniform throughout the
entire range studied—black or bluish-black, covered with a heavy white
bloom. ‘This agrees with the literature cited in this paper. However, in the
Great Bear Lake region an exception was found. Specimen No. 3247, col-
lected July 30, 1948, in rich humus at the foot of a clay hill just below the
lower rapids of the Sloan River, Hunter Bay, bore fruits that were almost
black, with no trace of white bloom. Otherwise the fruits were similar to
those of surrounding plants, and were equally insipid.

The species ordinarily shows some variation in fruit shape, the fruits
being most commonly ovoid to spherical, but may have modifications of these
shapes. Large fruits often tend to be somewhat elongated or cylindrical
whereas small fruits are usually more nearly spherical. Anderson (1959, p.
372) describes the fruits as being “ .. . from oblate to cylindrical, 6-15 mm.
in diameter.” While collecting specimens in an area of flat, peaty soil over-
lying thin glacial till at the lower end of McDonough Lake, Labine Point,
Great Bear Lake the writer found a striking display of fruit variation in a
“colony” of less than 400 square meters in extent. he plants were all rather
low, ascending to 3 dm in height, and were the dominant plants of the area.
Almost every individual plant showed easily-recognizable variation in fruit
shape, and all fruits on a particular plant tended to vary in the same manner
from the typical fruit shape of this region. In order to ascertain that these
were actually clonal variations, a number of plants were pulled up. It was
found that if apparently separate “plants” were actually clonal offshoots with
root connections, the fruits varied similarly in both “plants.” If the “plants”
were not connected, but actually separate plants, the fruit variation was quite
different. “There was no appreciable variation in other fruit characteristics,
or in vegetative parts. Six clones were selected for study which were con-
sidered to cover the range of variation, and sketches of the mature fruits were
made before putting the specimens in the plant press (Figure 1). These six
variant fruit forms may be described as follows:

1. Ovoid. Fruit ovoid-spherical, slightly asymmetrical. This form is
considered to be the typical fruit shape for the region as a whole.
Specimen No. 3139.

2. Spheroid. Fruit somewhat spherical, but compressed axially. Speci-

men No. 3144.
3. Pyriform. Fruit pyriform, generally asymmetrical. Specimen No.
3138.

4. Subconstricted. Fruit ovoid to somewhat pyriform, with slight con-
striction near the pedicel. Specimen No. 3141.

5. Cylindrical. Fruit large, cylindrical, with prominent constriction at
about one-third the distance from pedicel to calyx. Specimen No.
3140.

6. Subcylindrical. Fruit subcylindrical, often as broad as long, occasion-
ally somewhat spherical. Specimen No. 3143.

1962 _ SHACKLETTE: VARIATION IN Vaccinium uliginosum 165

Nora 3 139 No. 3144 No. 3138
Ovoid Spheroid Pyriform

No. 3141 No. 3140 — No. 3143
Subconstricted Cylindrical Subcylindrical

oe Cent

Figure 1. Fruit variation in Vaccinium uliginosum L. The numbered groups represent
the range of fruit shape borne on a single clone. The upper right drawing in each
group represents the typical fruit shape of the clone, and the other three drawings
represent variants. All drawings were made from fresh mature fruits.

166 Tue CANnapIAN FieLtp-NaATURALIST Vol. 76

These fruits were quite ripe when collected on July 23 and had the usual
insipid taste of the fruits of this region.

It is interesting to note that Gates observed similar fruit variation in this
same species in Russian Lapland, which he describes (1928, p. 152) as follows:
“I observed a variety of Vaccinium uligimosum with quadrate fruits, another
variety with pear-shaped, and a third with elongated cylindrical fruits.”

Although the variation in fruit shape observed at Great Bear Lake is
not in itself especially remarkable, the occurrence of so much variability in
such a small area seems quite striking when contrasted with the slight vari-
ability in fruit shape that was found throughout the area. It may be signi-
ficant that directly underlying this interesting colony is a vast deposit of
pitchblende, and surface outcrops of this mineral can be observed a few
yards away. hese deposits are very localized, especially the surface ex-
posures, and are not known to occur in adjacent areas of this region where
great numbers of this plant were observed. The long and continuous ex-
posure of this colony to radiation from the uranium deposits directly beneath
it may have been a factor initiating genetic change of this species, giving rise
to the fruit variation described above, which has been perpetuated through
vegetative reproduction of these clones.

The late Professor H. H. Bartlett of the Department of Botany, Univer-
sity of Michigan commented on these forms (written communication) as
follows: “In the case of your Vaccinium forms an ancient, stable genetically
isolated type has produced new forms which can reasonably be conceived of
as having been caused by local unusually intense radiation. The original
modification of each chromosome locus presumably produced a whole, or
more likely, a partial plant which was in a hybrid condition. By Mendelian
segregation it presumably produced a stable, hereditary form. My opinion
is that your forms are taxonomic entities of a low grade, probably single-
factor types. They would not necessarily be given any taxonomic status at
all if they had been produced in horticulture by the crossing of closely allied
types, followed by segregation. They have, however, a very different and
far more interesting status. There can hardly be any doubt that they are
genetic entities. They have a degree of difference which entitles them to
be considered varieties or forms, not subspecies or species.” The writer,
however, does not propose to give them taxonomic status in this paper.

If this wide range of variation in this small area is in fact related to
radiation mutation, this characteristic variability may be useful in geobotanical
exploration as an indication of subsurface radioactive deposits.

The writer wishes to acknowledge the encouragement of this study by
the late Professor H. H. Bartlett, who was the director of the Port Radium
Expedition. He also wishes to express appreciation to Dr. William C. Steere,
the leader of the field party, for his advice and assistance on many matters
throughout this field season.

1962

SHACKLETTE: VARIATION IN Vaccinium uliginosum 167

REFERENCES

ANDERSON, J. P. 1959. Flora of Alaska and
adjacent parts of Canada. Iowa State
University Press, 543 pp.

Britton, N. L. and Brown, Appison. 1936.
An illustrated flora of the northern
United States, Canada and the British
Possessions, vol. 2, New York Botanical
Garden, New York. 735 pp.

Fernatp, M. L. 1950. Gray’s manual of
botany, eighth edition. American Book
Company, New York. 1632 pp.

- Gates, R. R. 1928. Notes on the tundra
of Russian Lapland. Journal of Ecology
16: 150-160.

HarsHBercer, J. H. 1928. Tundra vegeta-
tion of Central Alaska directly under the
Arctic Circle. Proceedings of the Ameri-
can Philosophical Society of Philadelphia,
67: 215-234.

Hutren, Eric. 1948. Flora of Alaska and
Yukon. Lunds Universitets Arsskrift, new
series, section 2, 44 (1): 1201-1342.

Potunin, Nicworas. 1940. Botany of the
Canadian Eastern Arctic, Part I, Pteri-
dophyta and Spermatophyta. National
Museum of Canada Bulletin 92 (Biology
series 24) 408 pp.

REHDER, ALFRED. 1947. Manual of culti-
vated trees and shrubs. Macmillan, New
York. 996 pp.

SPETZMAN, L. A. 1959. Vegetation of the
Arctic Slope of Alaska. United States
Geological Survey Professional Paper 302-
B, 58 pp.

Wiecann, K. M. 1947. Vaccinium, p.
3421-3425. In L. H. Bailey [editor]. The
standard cyclopedia of horticulture. vol.
3. Macmillan, New York.

Received for publication 29 April 1962

We

CORRECTION NOTE

On page 112, Line 8 of Vol. 76, No. 2, in
John L. Kirwan’s article Geology of part

of the townships of March, Huntley and

Nepean. Carleton County, Ontario, “grano-
blastic” should be corrected to read
“granitic”.

REVIEWS

A Revision of the Reindeer and Caribou,

Genus Rangifer

By A. W. F. Banrietp. National Museum
of Canada Bulletin 177, Biological Series
66. 1961. 137 p. $2.00.

The task of making a comprehensive
study of a genus of large mammals with
a holarctic distribution is so formidable
that few have made the attempt. It is
virtually impossible to bring together in
one place any substantial part of the
available specimens of a large, antlered
mammal so that they can be readily
available for the searching study that is
So necessary to reach valid conclusions.
For this reason most of the attempts to
present a world appraisal of speciation
in the genera of the Cervidae have in-
volved more intuition than objective
analysis. Such was certainly true of the
treatment of the genus Rangifer by
Jacobi (Das Rentier, Akad. Verlog.
m.b.H., 1931) and by Ellerman and
Morrison Scott (Checklist of Palearctic
and Indian Mammals, British Museum
1951). The study under review, however
has made a serious effort to circumvent
these difficulties and has brought to-
gether, for the first time, the quantita-
tive data covering available specimens of
New World and Old World Rangifer.
In all, 855 skulls were studied.

The revision presents a summary of
the information available on individual
variation, difference due to sex, to age
and to season as they influence systema-
tic judgements. Some cranial and dental
abnormalities are also discussed.

A praiseworthy attempt has been made
to relate the few known fossil reindeer
and caribou remains to the current un-
derstanding of the systematic status of
recent species and subspecies. The con-
clusion reached is that 4 Quaternary and
9 recent subspecies are recognizeable, all
part of a single species complex Rangi-
fer tarandus. In North America the

168

tundra area east of the Mackenzie River
is assigned as the range of the subspecies
R. t. groenlandicus, while the forested
areas from Labrador and Newfoundland
to the mountains of British Columbia are
found to be occupied by a single sub-
species R. t. caribou. R. t. pearyi, R. t.
granti and R. t. dawsoni complete the
New World group. One of the problems
that arises in the downgrading of vari-
able species with their subspecies groups
to the status of subspecies is what status
to assign to the populations, former sub-
species, that have certain distinctive
characteristics, but can no longer be
regarded as subspecies. Banfield has re-
ferred to these as demes but unfortunate-
ly the deme concept and its application
to the present study are not discussed
as such in the text material.

Under each subspecies there is given
a most useful outline of past and present
distribution, present status, taxonomic
history and a list of the specimens exam-
ined and the museums in which they are
housed.

In any study of this length and com-
plexity some errors of spelling and gram-
mar are to be expected and excused.
The present paper has perhaps exceeded
this quota somewhat.

Certain features of a technical nature
merit further comment. In the matter
of interpreting the systematic status of
the fossil reindeer, I fail to see any evi-
dence to support the separation Ot ene
fennicus of the recent from R. t. quet-
tardi (Demarest), the subfossil form of
western Europe. If this is the case, the
latter name becomes the valid one for
Eurasian forest reindeer of the recent.
Rangifer tarandus fricki Schultz and
Howard, of the Alaskan Quaternary de-
posits, merits further and more searching
analysis to discover whether or not it
rests its recognition on grounds that
would be accepted for living subspecies.

1962

The author has obviously done much
work on amassing his quantitative data,
sorting it and resorting it. He has cal-
culated standard errors and standard
deviations for the useable samples repre-
senting several characters for both sub-
species and demes. Various techniques
of statistical analysis and presentation
were tried and finally the Duncan Mul-
tiple Range test decided upon as the
one best suited to the problem. To me
the reasons behind nomenclatural deci-
sions taken would have been more easily
appreciated had a modified Dice-Leraas
or Hubbs graph been presented. This,

however, may be my own bias.

The absence of any text reference to
the actual differences in quantitative
characteristics differentiating between
adjoining subspecies or demes makes this
work somewhat difficult to use in the
interpretation of newly taken material.
Nowhere are the details presented upon
the graphs and tables discussed in the
text in support of the conclusions drawn.
The linear graphs given on Figures 8 to
14 bear no legend to explain the signi-
ficance of the boxes erected upon the
range lines. Are the open boxes one
standard deviation and the black boxes
one standard error on each side of the
mean? If so, why not show 2 standard
errors, so that differences significant to
the .05 level could be approximated by
direct reading of the graphs? It would
have greatly facilitated comparisons if
the sexes had been placed upon separate
graphs.

On Table 8 in Appendix I asterisks
are used for two purposes. To learn
what the asterisks in the vertical co-
lumns mean it is necessary to refer to
p. 15. Referring further to these, and
subsequent tables, the placement of the
asterisks makes it difficult to tell which
comparisons are being indicated as signi-
ficant.

Despite these shortcomings this re-
vision is a valued addition to the litera-
ture on Holarctic mammals and it should

REVIEWS 169

become part of the working library of
any student of mammals and of wildlife
management in the Northern Hemi-

sphere.
I. McTaccert Cowan

Department of Zoology
University of British Columbia
Vancouver, B.C.

The Amphibians and Reptiles of Illinois

By Puiie W. Smirn. Illinois Natural His-
tory Survey, Bulletin 28(1). Urbana, II-
linois, 1961. 298 p. $3.00.

The Amphibians and Reptiles of Illi-
nois is a comprehensive work covering
the 109 forms recorded for that state.
“The objectives of this report on the
amphibians and reptiles of Illinois are
threefold. The first is to provide a cri-
tical review of the species and subspecies
known to inhabit Illinois. The second is
to present detailed distributional infor-
mation for these animals in the hope that
the data may contribute to the knowl-
edge of the ecology and biogeography
of Illinois. The third is to call attention
to variation trends that I have discerned
within Illinois and that will enable future
investigators to utilize character analyses
for populations occurring in limited
parts of the state.”

The life histories of many amphibians
and reptiles are adapted to narrow eco-
logical limits and, consequently, they
make excellent indicators of climatic
zones. In Illinois, only twenty-five

species are state wide in their distribu-

tion, and the rest form all sorts of
distribution patterns. These patterns are
a reflection of both the present-day
climate, and the post glacial climatic
sequence. Therefore, not only do these
animals demonstrate natural ecological
divisions within the state of Illinois, but
their distribution patterns also indicate
the direction from which they entered
the area after the retreat of the glaciers.
At present, there are sixty-nine species
which have met limiting barriers to their
dispersal somewhere in Illinois. This sort

170 THe CANADIAN FieLp-NATURALIST

of analysis of the amphibians and rep-
tiles within one area is of great conse-

quence to the taxonomist, for it shows .

how species can disperse, become iso-
lated, differentiate into various forms,
and make contact again. In this manner
the taxonomist can describe relationships
of recent forms, both in space and in
time.

This publication is printed on glossy
paper, 7 x 10, which allows for large
illustrations. In fact, the photographs of
many species are several times larger
than life. The maps are also excellent
because of their large size. The distribu-
tion maps deserve special comment be-
cause, in addition to the map depicting
the distribution of the species within
Illinois, there is a small insert map indi-
cating the entire range of the species
within the United States. The distribu-
tion maps for Illinois have both general
shaded areas and the actual spot records
on which the shaded areas are based.
There is also an extensive list of refer-
ences and a fine index.

The book is especially recommended
to those interested in amphibians and
reptiles, and in the subject of Zoogeo-
graphy, and to others because of the
excellence of the photographs and maps.

J. SHERMAN BLEAKNEY

Biology Department
Acadia University
Wolfville, Nova Scotia

Wildlife Sketches — Near and Far —

By Bruce S. Wricur. Fredericton, N.B.
Brunswick Press, 1962. 288 p. $5.95.

There have been few more sobering
words penned in the endless plea for
conservation than the starkly resigned
epilogue to this volume: “Wildlife
habitat is decreasing all over the world
as the human population grows. It fol-
lows that we who live today can see
more of the great and small creatures
that populated the earth before our own
kind dominated the scene than will our

Vol. 76

great-grandchildren . . . I am thankful
that my turn came for my brief “run
on deck” before the erupting masses of
my own species crowded off the planet
the last lion, caribou or blue whale. So
far I have made the best of it”.

The vivid pages of the text carry the
truth of the epilogue home—the glimpses
of the author’s “run on deck” range
from his beloved New Brunswick to
Africa and include the necessarily limit-
ed but enlightening observations of wild-
life seen through the cloud of a man-
made war. Throughout the text is the
stamp of perceptive personal observa-
tion and diligent literature research. For
those who have neither the time, pa-
tience, or opportunity to search for in-
formation through the often woefully
dry original scientific reports on a wide
variety of wildlife this will serve, in ad-
dition to its value for prose and message
alone, as a palatable source of facts
combined with conjecture.

The individual chapters were original-
ly written and published as entities in
themselves and have, as the writer ex-
plains in his introduction, not been ex-
tensively reworked. This unfortunately
leaves a certain repetition of style and
professional cliches. A trifle grating is
the tendency in certain selections to
talk down to his reader and use such
phrases as “Mr. Respectable Citizen”
which are perhaps more suitable for the
eventide serialized mature stories many
of us were raised on.

However, nothing can detract from
the rugged force and deep, honest ap-
preciation for wilderness and wildlife
that pulses through every phrase. These
stories will open new vistas of perspec-
tive to the uninitiated and conjure warm,
often familiar images to those who have
personally tasted at nature’s fountain. In

-addition, it should admirably perform

its co-aim and win staunch supporters
for the crucial conservation crusade.

Francis R. Cook

1962

The Lake Sturgeon, a History of Its

Fishery and Problems of Conservation

By W. J. K. Harkness and J. R. Dymonp.
Ontario Department Lands and Forests.
1961. 121 p.

Although there are hundreds of papers
on some species of Canadian fishes,
rarely is this dispersed literature brought
together in one account. It is even more
rare that such an account should be both
enjoyable to read and yet knowledgeful.
The material ranges from graphs of
catch and growth to tall tales and legends
about sturgeons. There are sections on
size (up to 310 pounds), distribution,
habits, food, growth, reproduction, arti-
ficial propogation, caviar, isinglass, com-
petitors, predators, fishing methods, In-
dians and sturgeon, the fishery, and
conservation. Illustrating the booklet are

a map, numerous photographs and
graphs.
The decline of the lake sturgeon

fishery is well documented. For example
the annual catch in Ontario around the
turn of the century was over 1,200,000
pounds, but in the 1950s was under
200,000 pounds. While intensive fishing
contributed its share to the decrease of
the species, also important were the
construction of dams and pollution. The
low effective reproductive rate of the
species prevents rapid recovery. Does
the decline of the lake sturgeon presage
the decline of further species?

To sportsman, fisheries biologists, ad-
ministrators and to ichthyologists the
writing of similar monographs on other
species would be useful and entertaining.

D. E. McALLIsTER

National Museum of Canada
Ottawa

Our Synihetic Environment

By Lewis Herper. A. A. Knopf, New York.
1962. viii + 285 p. $6.50.

Considering the ever-increasing prob-
lems caused by the pollution of the land,
water and air, it is somewhat surprising

REVIEWS 7A

that we had to wait until the year 1962
for the appearance of a book covering
the various ramifications of these prob-
lems. Fortunately, Our Synthetic En-
vironment by Lewis Herber covers this
niche very well.

In his foreword the author states that
the main qualification he can claim on
the subject is a long and patient study
of other men’s works and that the book
is concerned with the problems of our
natural environment as they involve the
needs of man. The author has done an
admirable job in reviewing a _ vast
amount of technical information and by
writing a book in clear, non-technical
language which can be read by the
average interested reader.

Along with the wonderful scientific
advances achieved by our civilization
have come dangers, many of them only
vaguely known to most Of sae lGes
these dangers which are referred to
more specifically.

The first chapter deals with an analy-
sis of the problem. The second chapter
discusses agriculture and health. He
stresses the value of good soil manage-
ment, and points out that the thought-
less use of chemical agents in the pro-
duction of food may well make it pos-
sible to grow crops in great abundance,
but of low quality on soil that is basical-
ly in poor condition. Crop production
has resulted in large expanses of single
crop species and simplification of the
landscape, which in turn creates highly
favorable conditions for an infestation.
If chemical controls become increasing-
ly lethal, the earth may prove to be in-
capable of supporting a viable, healthy
human species.

In the chapter on urban life and
health, the author refers to the urban
man as a “nervous, excitable, and highly
strained individual who is burdened by
continual personal anxieties and mount-
ing social insecurity”.

172 THE CANADIAN FieELD-NATURALIST

In his chapter on the problem of
chemicals in food, the author points out
several implications the average con-
sumer ought to know more about.

The chapter on environment and
cancer is very thought-provoking. The
connection between the rising incidence
of lung cancer and changes in man’s
environment has. affected traditional
thinking about the causes of cancer pro-

foundly.

Radiation and human health, dealt
with in the next chapter, is something
we all should know more about. The
various dangers involved are discussed
under the headings: The effects of
radiation, the problems of X radiation,
fallout and the nuclear age.

When dealing with human ecology in
the next chapter the author arrives at
the conclusion that “by oversimplifying
the natural environment, we have
created an incomplete man who lives
an unbalanced life in a standardized
world. Such a man is ill—not only moral-
ly and psychologically, but physically”.

The final chapter discusses health and
society.

The author states that his book is
guided by a rational humanism, not a
sentimental humanism. On the whole the
reviewer would agree that he has used
a rational approach, but here and there
a certain amount of bias in selecting data
to substantiate his arguments seems ap-
parent. The book is well written and
organized. References are compiled in a
“notes” section, an effective and useful
method of presenting supporting evi-
dence. ,.The book is well edited and it
contains very few typographical errors.
The reviewer can recommend it highly
to any reader who wants to know more
about his place in our artificial environ-
ment with its many problems.

ANTOON DE Vos

Department of Zoology,
Ontario Agricultural College,
Guelph, Ontario

Vol. 76

A Book of Canadian Animals

By Cuartes Paut May. Illustrations by John
Crosby. The Macmillan Company of Can-
ada Limited, Toronto, 1962. 115 p. $2.75.

It is well known to publishers in
Canada that there is a real need for
Canada-oriented nature books for
children. The books that fulfill this need
will serve as important educational tools
and will, it is hoped, be financially suc-
cessful as well. After carefully reading
this book, I feel that it was written in
an attempt to exploit this deficiency for
financial gain, but that the author has
little to say of educational value.

A Book of Canadian Animals, about
some Canadian mammals, not animals in
general, was written by a non-Canadian
who has “visited Canada at various
times”. Mr. May writes in a condescend-
ing style that can be best illustrated by
a few passages.

“If you see a doormat crawling along
the ground, it is probably a badger .. .
Its silvery grey hairs drag along the
ground at its sides so you may not be
able to see its legs .. . The badger likes
country that is open... If you are in
forest, don’t look for the badger.”

“The little brown bat gets its name
from its pretty brown fur, which is soft
and silky. There is also a big brown bat,
but it is actually rather small. Because
it is bigger than the little brown bat, it
is known as the big brown bat.” (1!)

Another gem, “The first time you see
a lemming you may think it is a mouse.
Don’t let this worry you, (italics mine)
as most people think the same thing.”
Mammalogists and Webster’s New In-
ternational Dictionary define a mouse
as “any of numerous species of small
LOGEMES Tse

Twenty-eight species of mammals are
treated (out of approximately 191 species
in Canada) in the same stilted manner,
with paragraphs on general appearance
(sketchy), distribution (not always cor-
rect) and life history (brief). Each

1962

species is illustrated by black and white
drawings of young and of adults.

Mr. May has completely underesti-
mated the ability of children of a read-
- ing age. Children to whom I have shown
this book were either too young to read
it at all, or were old enough for more
mature stuff.

In many instances the text only
borders on the truth and the illustrations
are only fair. The young lynx on page
59 is an anatomical impossibility.

Until something better comes along
children will do better to still reach for
the books of Victor Cahalane, Osa and
Martin Johnson, the Murie brothers, and
Ernest Thompson Seton.

Puittie M. YOUNGMAN

The Orchids of British Columbia

By Apam F. Szczawinsx1, with illustrations
by Frank L. Beebe. British Columbia
Provincial Museum, Handbook No. 16,
Victoria, B.C., 1959. 124 p. 50 cents.

The Heather Family (Ericaceae) of

British Columbia

By Apam F. Szczawinski, with illustrations
by Betty Newton and Ann Hassen. British
Columbia Provincial Museum, Handbook
No. 19, 1962. 205 p. 50 cents.

Guide to Common Edible Plants of

British Columbia

By Apam F. Szczawinski and Georce A.
Harpy, with illustrations by Frank L.
Beebe. British Columbia Provincial Mu-
seum Handbook No. 20, 1962. 90 p. 50
cents.

Among Canada’s ten provinces, Bri-
tish Columbia is by far the most moun-
tainous, having a topography not unlike
that of Switzerland. For that reason
alone botanical exploration has been
most difficult, and vast areas of the
northern and central parts remain largely
unexplored botanically. This is not sur-
prising in view of the sparse population
concentrated mainly in the southernmost
parts, the few botanists who have been
able to carry out exploratory work, and

REvIEWsS 173

the fact that im area British Columbia is
roughly twenty-two times as large as
Switzerland, but with only one fourth
of the population. Although future ex-
ploration may add relatively few species
of vascular plants to those now recog-
nized in the Province, their general and
local distribution is known mainly for
the parts covered by J. K. Henry’s Flora
of Southern British Columbia, published
in 1915, and. now long out of print, and
by J. W. Eastham’s supplement, (Special
Publication No. 1, British Columbia
Provincial Museum, 1947).

Pending the appearance of a modern
flora of British Columbia, the illustrated
handbooks published by the Provincial
Museum meet an urgent need for guides
to groups or families of plants. The first
number in the Handbook series appeared
twenty years ago. It is entitled Fifty
Edible Plants of British Columbia, and
was prepared by G. A. Hardy of the
Provincial Museum staff. Because of a
continuing demand for this popular
guide, long out of print, Dr. Adam F.
Szcezawinski, Curator of the Herbarium
of the Provincial Museum, has now
joined Mr. Hardy to produce an entirely
new and enlarged guide to the edible
plants of the Province, adding new and
better illustrations as well as new data
from the northern parts, an area not well
represented in the earlier edition.

Handbook No. 9, by William A.
Hubbard, entitled Grasses of British
Columbia, published in 1955, is also out
of print, as is T. M. C. Taylor’s The
Ferns and Fern-Allies of British Colum-
bia, published a year later as Handbook
No. 12. The latter provides conventional
keys to genera and species, a glossary of
botanical terms, comprehensive descrip-
tions, notes on habitat and geographic
distribution, and excellent line drawings
of all species known to occur in the
Province. *

In two of the latest volumes of the
“Handbook” series, Dr. Szczawinski has
new dealt with the Orchid and Heath

174

families. To the style and coverage al-
ready set by Dr. Taylor in Ferns and
Fern-Allies, has been added very usful
maps giving the known distribution
within the Province for each of the
thirty species of orchids known from
British Columbia. The interesting pat-
tern of distribution of species, as shown
by these maps, is to some extent the
outcome of insufficient and spotty bo-
tanical exploration; but it is probably
an oversimplification when the author
(Handbook No. 16, p. 18, and again on
p- 13 of Handbook 19) observes that
“---- the maps cannot give a complete
picture, but only a general idea of the
climatic regions in which the species may
occur in favourable habitats.” Surely,
climate alone does not govern plant
distribution. For a number of orchids,
and certainly for a great many other
species in the flora of British Columbia,
historical causes as well as local, edaphic
and topographical features must funda-
mentally affect general and local distri-
bution. A good many wide-ranging
species of the Canadian boreal forest are
“eastern” species that, for historic
rather than climatic reasons, have failed
to reach the Pacific Coast or central
Yukon and Alaska. Conversely, several
Pacific Coast species, and some of Am-
phi-Berigian affinity and ranges, have
penetrated the interior only through
gaps in the coast- and interior ranges.
(Examples among the orchids are Listera
caurina, Habenaria unalascensis and H.
saccata.) Likewise, the occurrence, on
high mountains far south in the Cordil-
lera, of circumpolar arctic species, such
as Koenigia islandica, Phippsia algida,
Eriophorum callitrix, to mention only a
few, must be attributed to past historical
rather than climatic causes.

Calypso (Handbook 16, p. 97) is cor-
rectly noted as a “Monotypic genus
found in boreal and temperate regions
of North America and Eurasia”. It is
puzzling, therefore, to find, on page 100,
Calypso bulbosa referred to as “the lone
representative of the genus in North

Tue CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

Vol. 76

America”, but with “relatives in North-
ern Europe, Russia, and Lapland, as well
as in the East Indies”. Among the very
few typographical errors noted, Liparis
loeselli, as a species excluded from the
flora of B.C., should have been italicized
in the index, on page 121.

Botanists, as well as all those with
only a casual interest in the flora of
British Columbia, will find these two
little volumes a welcome and useful ad-
dition to the rapidly growing list of most
attractive handbooks of the Provincial
Museum Series.

A. E. Porsttp

Mayflies of Michigan Trout Streams

By Justin W. Leronarp and Fannie A.
Leonarb, Cranbrook Institute of Science,
Bulletin No. 43, Cranbrook Press, Ann
Arbor, 139 pp., 82 figs., 6 pl., 1962. Paper
Bound. $6.00, Cloth Bound $7.00.

Fisheries biologists, limnologists, trout
fishermen, and laymen with little or no
formal training in entomology will wel-
come the appearance of this attractive
little booklet on the principal kinds of
mayflies occurring in the smaller and
colder waterways of the Michigan re-
gion. With the aid of twenty-five beau-
tiful colour prints and additional photo-
graphs of adult insects and thirty re-
markable black-and-white drawings of
aquatic nymphal stages, the authors have
exquisitely portrayed the seventy-five
species (in twenty-two genera and eight
families) known from the area to date.
The descriptions also include informa-
tion on geographical distribution, func-
tional morphology, ecological — prefer-
ence, and seasonal emergence of the
nymphs, and on mating and egg-laying
behaviour of the short-lived adults.

Mayflies are among the most primi-
tive existing winged insects, with a fos-
sil record dating back nearly three
hundred million years, and are the only
living insects to undergo a molt in the
fully winged stage. They are very im-
portant in stream ecology as a major

1962

converter of plant to animal tissue and
a principal food of stream fishes. Anglers
will appreciate the information on
matching of artificial flies with the more
common species, and the use of com-
mon names in identification. Simplified
keys to the families and genera of both
adults and nymphs, and an adequate
index, glossary, and list of pertinent
references are provided. Particularly
useful are the authors’ instructions for
collecting, preserving, rearing, and
studying the insects, and their profes-
sional account of photographic methods
and equipment. The booklet is slightly
larger than pocket size, bound in a weak
but artistically pleasing blue paper cover
on which is delicately overprinted in
yellow the outline of a male Stenonema
rubrum. he scholarship and general
format of this booklet should set a
standard of excellence that will endure
for some time to come.

E. L. BousFieLp

National Museum of Canada
Ottawa, Ontario

Native Wild Plants of Eastern Canada

and the Adjacent Northeastern United

States

By F. H. Monreomery. The Ryerson Press,
Toronto. 1962. xxxvi + 193 p., 24 colored
plates + 298 line drawings. $4.95.

There is room in Eastern Canada for
just such a work in the botanical field
as Professor Montgomery has prepared
for the use of a non-technical public.
The need in other directions has been
met, more or less, perhaps because it is
less difficult. The thousands of plant
species in the area are not of equal
general interest, although the manuals,
so essential to the professional botanist,
treat them as if they were. The manuals
are not the answer here. There are po-
pular handbooks, not too well attuned
to our area and, however correct, quite
inadequate. They are, at best, only a
partial answer to the need. And there is

REVIEWS 175

a need. Whatever the fault, pupils
graduate from our secondary schools al-
most immunized to further botanical
pursuits. The study, while of life, is not
as lively as that of zoology and does not
offer the same challenge of a pitting of
wits. But then, even the mineral king-
dom with only its lure of gold and
precious jewels lurking possibly in a
find, scores ahead of the lowly plant.
Somehow a corrective must be found.

In this attractive volume, convenient
in size for field use, much has been done
to gain favor for its subject. The lan-
guage is that which a field naturalist can
understand. Such technical terms as must
be employed, if unfamiliar, are found in
a glossary at the end of the book. Instead
of the rigidly stereotyped treatment of
the manuals, just the attention is given
to each entity that its interest warrants.
Spring beauty, Claytonia caroliniana is
described and illustrated, but its sister
species, C. virginiana only needs to be
distinguished from it. Plants of only
minor amateur interest, such as the dif-
ficult sedges, are dismissed with a
reference to them. Elimination applies
to other sections of the flora which are
adequately treated in other publications
available usually at nominal or no cost—
ferns, grasses, weeds, trees and shrubs.
A bibliography on page 177 is a guide
to these, although the cost is not given.
Omissions in these categories can be
disappointing, but along with restriction
of the scope to plants of concern in our
area only they do allow for the desired
limitation of bulk.

For the use intended, indication of
season, habitat and other distinguishing
peculiarities is welcome. Appeal for
restraint in picking orchids and trilliums
(examples of rarer species and those
abundant but still susceptible to exter-
mination) is imperitive. Equal warning
against picking poison ivy might have
warranted its inclusion since equally
shrubby plants like bittersweet and car-
rion-flower are not excluded.

176

The necessary ilustration is provided
chiefly by line drawings in close assoc-
iation with the descriptions; and also by
color photographs of an appropriate
selection of two dozen species; all by
the author. The drawings are diagram-
matic and, within the limitations of the
two-dimensional, are effective.

The keys provided differ from the
usual in relying more on vegetative
characters. These are present whether
or not the plant is in flower, and are
less dependent on magnification of parts
with a lens. For larger families comple-
tion of the keying is, to advantage, at
these several places. The arrangement
of families is in the order familiar to
most in Gray’s Manual. Latin and com-
mon names are those currently in use,
some of the latter duplicated for local
preference—outside French Quebec!

The format is pleasing and the pro-
duction is in keeping with an apparent
trend toward excellence regardless of
cost. The older governmental policy of
keeping output free or within easy

Tue CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

Vol. 76

reach for wide distribution would seem
to be giving way to outside production.
Not so sponsored, the result here is also
good generally. There are instances of
imperfect utilization of space, as on page
29. Page margins are sometimes invaded
almost to the grief of print, see page
163. Line drawings are identified only
by reference to the like numbers in the
text. Rather close sequence of parts
throughout contributes excusably to the
compactness required for field use.

For one who got his start on Gray’s
How Plants Grow and Spotton’s High
School Botany, the present time seems
replete with helps. Native Wild Plants
is confidently recommended to any
beginner searching out our wild flower
heritage. Professor Montgomery, long
at work in Waterloo and Wellington
counties in Ontario as well as a wider
eastern range, is fully competent and
has well sensed the need of a large seg-
ment of the community.

Hersert Grou

We

NOTES

Notes on Pika in Captivity

THE FOLLOWING notes on pika, Ochotona
princeps, were made in July and August
of 1961 at the Manning Park Nature
House, where a few small mammals are
put on display during the summer
months.

On several occasions during the past
four summers rodents caged in the Na-
ture House have produced young. In
none of these cases has there been a
subsequent successful rearing of the
young.

On July 15 we trapped a mature
female pika. Her gravid condition was
not apparent, though she was examined
to ensure that she was not lactating. She
was taken to the Nature House and put
on display in a standard 48” x 15” x 15”
glass cage. Throughout her stay she was
kept supplied with fresh foliage consist-
ing of clovers, usually with Fragaria,
Achillea, Lupinus or Taraxacum.

At about 8 p.m. on July 19 the pika
gave birth to three young, one of which
was stillborn. No special steps were
taken to promote a successful rearing
for we expected to find the young dead
by morning.

On July 20 the young were still active
so the cage was not cleaned but a corner
was filled with soft cotton.

At birth the young were densely fur-
red with short blackish hair. They fre-
quently made high-pitched chirping
sounds, and almost at once were capable
of crawling several inches from the nest.
They were quickly retrieved from these
trips by the mother who carried them
by the scruff of the neck.

177

On July 22 we concealed the nest
corner with a group of flat rocks. Daily
cleaning of the interior of the cage
began on July 24 without any apparent
effect upon the activities of the female.

By July 27 both young had some adult
hair. They had become more active, but
less inclined to stray from the nest.

On the morning of July 29 both
young, now almost 10 days old, opened
their eyes for the first time. The follow-
ing morning they made their first real
exploring trip away from the nest corner,
moving about the cage for almost an
hour. On following days an increasing
amount of time was spent away from
the nest, but it remained their base of
operations until about August 5.

On July 31 the young were first
observed taking nibbles from foliage
supplied by the mother. It appeared that
weaning commenced about this date, for
the mother’s actions in thrusting away
the young, and the cries of the young,
indicated that they were not being milk-
fed as often as desired. At this date the
young were estimated to be nearly half
as long as the mother, and roughly one-
fifth her volume.

Until about August 18 the young
continued to make periodic attempts to
obtain milk, but with no apparent suc-
cess. Their diet from early August was
the same foliage mixture supplied to the
adult. From the time they started to eat
solids there was no observable difference
in their choice of food from that chosen
by the adult.

We noted that pikas produce two dis-
tinctly different types of feces. One is
the small round pellet, accumulations of

178 THe CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

which are easily found on the rock slides
where these animals occur. The other is
soft, roughly cylindrical, tapered at each
end, and about 12 inches long by 3/16
inches in diameter. Although I was not
aware of it at the time, these two kinds
of feces are known for several kinds of
rabbits (H. V. Thompson and A. N.
Worden, 1956, The Rabbit, Collins),
and the larger type is reingested to the
nutritional advantage of the animal.
Actual reingestion was not observed for
pikas.

In most animals caged in the Nature
House we are able to recognize behav-
iour patterns apparently associated with
the animals’ confinement. In the present
instance the female pika early adopted
the custom of plucking nervously and
rapidly with her teeth at the wire mesh
of the cage bottom. Usually she chose
the centre of the cage for this activity,
and she frequently carried a length of
plant stem across the back of her mouth
through part or all of this performance.
After about August 20 the young were
sometimes seen in the same activity, per-
haps in imitation of their mother.

By August 25 the young had attained
a volume estimated at half to two-thirds
that of the mother. They were well fur-
red and fat, apparently in good health.
On most mornings they indulged in
active play periods, leaping and dashing
about the cage.

We found the pika to be an unusually
good cage animal, easy to care for, easily
tamed, and in being mainly diurnal, a
good animal to put on public display.
There would seem, also, to be some
possibility of using it successfully as a
laboratory mammal.

The author would like to acknowledge
the assistance of Mr. R. Y. Edwards in
the preparation of this note.

J. E. UNpeRHILL

Parks Branch

Dept. of Recreation & Conservation
Victoria, B.C.

5 February 1962

Vol. 76

Breeding Record of the
Field Sparrow in Manitoba

On June 30, 1960, near Winnipeg, the
writer flushed a small dark sparrow
from a grassy clearing in a tract of
second-growth aspen. I was unable to
get a clear view of the bird which ap-
peared very nervous and remained low
in the grass. A short search of the area
from which the bird flushed revealed
a nest containing two eggs. One of the
eggs was that of a Cowbird, Molothrus
ater, the other was smaller with a pale
green ground colour and finely spotted
with reddish-brown.

Observations on July 1, 2 and 3 con-
vinced me that the bird was a Field
Sparrow, Spizella pusilla. It was on July
3 that a clear view of the bird was
obtained and the characteristic field
marks of the species noted. On July 6,
Mr. Angus H. Shortt saw the bird and
confirmed identification. Further con-
firmation was obtained when Mr. R. W.
Sutton, Director of the Manitoba Mu-
seum, saw the bird on July 14.

On July 6 the Cowbird egg hatched
and the nestling was fed and brooded
until July 15 when the nest was found
empty. The sparrow egg never did
hatch and on July 14 it had been col-
lected. Subsequent examination by Mr.
Sutton showed it to contain a desiccated
embryo about 6 days old.

The above observations constitute the
first recorded breeding of the Field
Sparrow in Manitoba.

Haroitp V. Hosrorp

4116 Roblin Blvd.,
Charleswood 20, Manitoba
2 April 1962

A Short-tailed Albatross off
British Columbia

On June 11, 1960, an immature Short-
tailed Albatross, Diomedea albatrus, was
sighted and photographed in the Pacific
Ocean within 40 miles of Vancouver

1962

Island, British Columbia. This observa-
tion was made from the Canadian re-
search vessel, C.N.A.V. Oshawa, en-
gaged in an oceanographic survey (Lane,
Meikle, and Hollister. 1960. Fisheries
Research Board of Canada MS Report
Series, (Oceanography and Limnology),
No. 76).

The subject was present within a
group of the common Black-footed Al-
batross, Diomedea nigripes. Identifica-
tion was based upon the large pink bill,
the pale feet, the size (larger than the
Black-footed), and it’s raucous attacks
upon scraps thrown overboard.

The identification was confirmed,
from the color photograph, by the Bri-
tish Columbia Provincial Museum. In-
formation from the Museum (PC: D. J.
Guiquet, June 23, 1960) and from Pough
(1957, Audubon Western Bird Guide
Doubleday and Co., Garden City, N.Y.)
indicates that it is somewhat of a rarity.
By 1933, feather exploitation and the
volcanic eruption of the breeding island
were thought to have rendered the bird
extinct. However, in “recent years”
(Pough, 1957) some 20 birds have re-
turned to breed. The last British Colum-
bia record of this species was in 1898.

More recently, another sighting has
been claimed off the Oregon coast
(Wyatt, Oregon State University, De-
partment of Oceanography—in prepara-
tion).

Rosert K. Lane

Department of Oceanography,
Oregon State University,
Corvallis, Oregon

9 February 1962

Gannet population of
Bonaventure Island

Durine A visir to Bonaventure Island,
Quebec, from July 10 to 13, 1961, I
made an estimate of the breeding popu-
lation of the Gannet, Morus bassanus.
The breeding population of Gannets
can be divided into two groups, one
breeding on ledges on the cliffs and the

Notes 179

other breeding on the top of the island.
All the cliffs on which Gannets were
breeding were photographed from the
sea. The counts of the birds on the
ledges were made from the negatives
using a low-powered microscope with a
ruled eyepiece. No difficulty was en-
countered in distinguishing Gannets
from other seabirds, but often the Gan-
nets themselves were grouped so close
together that counting was made diffi-
cult. Several groups of non-breeding
Gannets at the base of the cliff were
excluded from the count.

Two methods of counting were used
for the Gannets breeding on the ledges.
The first was counting all the Gannets,
then multiplying this figure by the ratio
of birds to nests. This ratio was obtained
by counts from the tops of the cliffs
looking down at certain convenient
points. The ratio of birds to nests was
found to be 100:77. Using this method,
the cliff-breeding population was cal-
culated as 8200 x 77/100 = 6300 pairs.
The other method was suggested to me
by James Fisher and consisted of count-
ing the number of apparently occupied
nests directly from the photographs,
making judgment during counting as to
whether two birds close together were
nestmates. After a little practice, starting
with those photographs taken at the
least distance, this method seemed to
work well. The count obtained by this
method was higher, probably because
in using the previous method nestmates
had been, in some cases, counted as a
single bird. The count by the second
method was 6800. Before any final con-
clusion can be made the two methods
would have to be used on a colony of
known size, but the second method ap-
pears the more reliable.

On the top of the island groups of a
few hundred were counted. These
groups were then used as units for esti-
mating the population of the colony.
This estimation was checked by counts
from photographs for some of the
colony. There was generally a line, two

180 THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

or three deep, of birds without nests on
the edge of the colony. These birds,
totalling about 800, were excluded from
the count. The ratio of birds to nests
was found to be 100:75. The number
of nests on the cliff tops was 8600 x
75/100 = 6450.

The total number of nests was thus
estimated at 13250 (6800 on the ledges
of the cliffs and 6450 on the top of the
island). This shows that there has been
a considerable increase since 1940 when
the total population was estimated at
6680 (Fisher, J., and H. G. Vevers,
1943, Journal of Animal Ecology 12:173-
213),

Davip B. PEAKALL

Upstate Medical Center
Syracuse, New York.
19 February 1962

Northward Dispersion of
Banded Canada Geese

THIS NOTE CONCERNS aN apparent pre-
moulting, northward migration of
prairie-raised Great Basin Canada Geese,
Branta canadensis moffitti, into the sub-
arctic regions of the District of Kee-
watin, Northwest Territories.

During the period June 16 to July 25,
1960, my assistant and I carried out
preliminary field studies of interrelations
between barren ground caribou and
wolves. Our field camp was located on
the shore of the Thelon River about 175
miles west of Baker Lake, Keewatin. On
June 19 we were canoeing several miles
upstream from camp, at approximately
101° 48’ W, 64° 21’ N. Moulting and
premoulting Canada Geese, unable to
fly very far, were seen in many places
on the river or feeding on the grassy
vegetation along the shore. Usually the
geese would avoid the approaching canoe
by swimming out into the river. Once,
however, a trio of large Canada Geese
elected to run inland, directly away
from the river. My Labrador retriever
had been running along on the shore,
and immediately set off in pursuit when

Vol. 76

she picked up the fresh scent. Several
minutes later the dog returned with one
of the geese. The bird carried United
States Fish and Wildlife Service Band
number 518-45560. After recording the
band number I released the bird into the
river.

From correspondence with the Can-
adian Wildlife Service and United States
Fish and Wildlife Service I learned that
the bird was banded on June 23, 1957,
at Bowdoin National Wildlife Refuge,
Malta, Montana. It was recorded as a
flightless male bird of the year. The
recovery site is ten degrees east of north
in relation to Malta, Montana, at a dis-
tance of approximately 1,150 air miles
from the Bowdoin Refuge.

Although I saw several hundred of the
“large-type” Canada Geese during the
summers of 1959 and 1960, I did not see
any nests or young. However, Clarke
(1940, National Museum of Canada Bul-
letin 96:1-135) found broods, and Han-
bury (1904, Sport and Travel in the
Northland of Canada, not seen vide
Clarke, op. cit.) located nests of Canada
Geese on the upper Thelon. Specimens
taken there by Clarke were referred by
P. A. Taverner to B. c. leucopareia, a
smaller type Canada (Clarke op. cit.).
According to Delacour (1954, The
Waterfowl of the World. Vol. 1), the
Thelon River is in the breeding range
of the Lesser Canada Goose, B. c. par-
vipes, and local breeders may be all of
this subspecies. The area which we in-
vestigated near our campsite was mainly
used by non-breeding large Canada
Geese.

There is also evidence of a much
longer northward flight of non-breeding
Canada Geese. On July 14, 1960, I ob-
served amongst a small group of four-
teen large Canada Geese two individuals
carrying 23- to 3-inch wide yellow neck-
bands. A week later another Canada
Goose was seen carrying a blue neck-
band. Both observations were made
within twelve miles of the poimt of cap-
ture of the leg-banded bird.

1962

‘According to Canadian Wildlife Serv-
ice records, authority to use blue and
yellow neckbands on Canada Geese was
given by the United States Fish and
Wildlife Service to the Lower Souris
National Wildlife Refuge (blue bands)
and the Missouri Conservation Commis-
sion (yellow bands). Both studies were
to be terminated in 1959. The New
Mexico Department of Fish and Game
_ was authorized to use both yellow and
blue neckbands on Canada Geese in a
study which was to be completed on
March 31, 1959.

Although no positive proof is available,
I suggest that the neckbanded geese that
I observed were banded in New Mexico.
Blue and yellow neckbanded birds are
frequently observed on the Bowdoin
National Wildlife Refuge and these were
proven to be banded by the New
Mexico Department of Fish and Game
in the Rio Grande Valley, some 1,075
miles to the south of Bowdoin. (Refuge
Manager B. N. Carter, pers. comm.).

I surmise that the leg-banded Canada
Goose travelled from the Bowdoin Re-
fuge to the Rio Grande Valley, New
Mexico, as that is the traditional winter-
ing area (Carter, op. cit.). After winter-
ing there the bird may, during any of
the next three seasons, have associated
with geese which summer in the Thelon.
The flight northward from the Rio

Grande is more than 2,200 air miles.

Delacour (op. cit.) mentions the great
summer wandering of non-breeding
Canada Geese as a general group charac-
tenstie. ‘Pherefore, the. presence of
numbers of large-type Canadas on the
Thelon may be a recent phenomenon,
which could be attributed to the increas-
ing drought conditions on the traditional
moulting areas of the U.S. and Canadian
prairies or a population increase in the
Great Basin Canada Goose. Further in-
vestigation may reveal that such pre-
moulting flights of non-breeders into the
subarctic are, or will become, part of a
yearly pattern for this subspecies.

Nores 181

In this connection Cowan (1954,
Murrelet 35(3):45) has recorded two
specimens of moffitti banded as juveniles
in southern British Columbia which were
later recovered in the Bathurst Inlet
area, Mackenzie.

I am grateful to Mr. A. Dzubin for
critically reviewing the material con-
tained in this note.

ES iSuyn

707 Dufferin Avenue,
Saskatoon, Saskatchewan.
8 May, 1962

The Silver Spotted Skipper
at The Pas, Manitoba

THE SILVER SPOTTED SKIPPER, Epargyreus
clarus Cramer (Lepidoptera), though
common throughout the eastern United
States, is indeed a great rarity at the
latitude of The Pas, Manitoba. I was
consequently greatly surprised to see it
netted by Frank Chermock who was at
the time visiting the writer at The Pas
(July 7, 1961). The event took place
some miles north, up the road from the
Indian Cemetery, on the hill, at Big
Eddy, overlooking Pike Lake.

The specimen was flying together with
such local things as Papilio machaon
hudsonianus, Boloria dawsoni, Colias
gigantea and Hesperia borealis? along
the roadside. All these, except the Hes-.
peria, which settled on the gravel of the
road, were going to dog-bane, Apocy-
num andromaesifolium, then heavily in
flower since about July 1.

The Epargyreus, though not saved
(Chermock thought it common locally
and so released it!), was a somewhat
worn male specimen and is certainly a
migrant. No others were seen through-
out the entire summer’s collecting at The
Pas and no other specimens are known
from The Pas area, even though the
author has collected there now for thir-
teen years. The species belongs to the
fauna of the central eastern and south-
ern United States and extends south-
ward into South America.

182 THe CanapiAn Fietp-NaturaList

I am indebted to Paul and Frank
Chermock for netting the specimen and
so drawing attention to its presence at
the rather northern latitude of 53°N at
The Pas, Manitoba.

Wat.rTeER Krivpa
Park Naturalist

Riding Mountain National Park, Manitoba
29 July 1962

The Small-mouthed Salamander,
New to the Fauna of Canada

IN THE couRSE of examining collections
of salamanders of the Ambystoma jef-
fersonianum complex at the University
of Michigan Museum of Zoology and
Royal Ontario Museum, two specimens of
the Small-mouthed Salamander, Amby-
stoma texanum (Matthes), from Pelee
Island, Essex Co., Ontario, were dis-
covered. These two specimens are the
basis for an addition to the faunal list
of Canada.

One of the specimens, UMMZ 52195,
was collected by A. G. Ruthven, July
6 or 7, 1917. It and other salamanders
were taken from logs at the south end
of the island. The specimen is an im-
mature female, 27 mm. from tip of snout
to posterior end of vent. .

The second specimen, ROM 8094,
was collected by A. Reid, June 6, 1950.
It is a mature female, 70 mm. snout to
vent.

Vol. 76

These specimens were both removed
from series of salamanders identified as
Ambystoma jeffersonianum. \ have
examined eight specimens of the A. jef-
fersonianum complex, four males and
four females, from Pelee Island. They
are Ambystoma laterale. Mature males
are from 45 to 61 mm snout to vent,
mean 53.7. They are considerably small-
er than the size range (70-90 mm) in-
dicated by Minton (1954, Herpetologica
10: 173-179) for Ambystoma jeffersoni-
anum. Vhey are dark, almost black, ex-
cept when faded whereas most preserved
specimens of Ambystoma jeffersonianum
are gray-brown.

The specimens of Ambystoma texa-
num differ from the specimens of Am-
bystoma laterale in lacking lateral
patches of vomerine teeth, in having
the plicae of the tongue forming a dis-
tinct groove, in having the mandibular,
maxillary, and vomerine teeth in two
more or less well defined rows, and in
having 13 rather than 12 costal folds
between the fore and hind limbs.

Specimens of Ambystoma texanum are
known from some of the Lake Erie
islands of Ohio. None have been taken
on the north shore of Lake Erie.

I wish to thank E. B. S. Logier for
permitting me to examine the Royal
Ontario Museum (ROM) specimen.

Tuomas M. Uzze tt, Jr.

University of Michigan
Ann Arbor, Michigan
13 June 1962

WZ

; Pian: Bird Club |
emt, Dr. ‘de Hoies; Vice-President, pb.
1aMs; Secretary-Treasurer, W. G. L. Twicce,
ty 7th Street, Edmonton, Alta.,; Field Secre-
sary A. Braves; Librarian, H. Montcomery;
Re “Listen; Audubon Representative, R.

nt, aay F. Ss. Cane Past Paine Dr.

nding Secretary, Mrs. A. M. Coors, 644
ine oe London, ae Recording Secretary,

RSON; Migration Secretary, J. W. Leacu;
r of The Cardinal, Dr. F. A. E. Srarr.

tural History Society of Manitoba |
ent, G. S. Corer; Treasurer, W. D. Kye;
ee): Mrs. A. E. AxceLt. —

N ova Scotia ee Society

i
T h ‘Style Manual for ‘Biolowieal decenals is.

Pierce” he
ecommende d, in general, as a guide for authors.

: ipts should be typewritten on one side
Slee ee naa | 83 by 11 inches.

A a matter, including quotations, foot-
tables, literature references, and legends for
uld be double-spaced. Only those words
tl appear in italics should be underlined.
sheet of the Sees should be number-

sis Pepin: Dictionary is the

8 are made oye the author-date Son,
d be listed Pe tne and typed at

< — be see and numbered consecu-
in arabic numerals, Tables and legends for
es should be placed after the list of

erent ices. Each table and all the eae should

s ara PES

Monro; Vice-President, W. R. JaRMain;

uy ae However, in a case of —

_ AFFILIATED SOCIETIES

CoristINE; Secretary-Treasurer, Grorces A. Le-
CLERC, 628 Fraser St., Quebec, One:

Province of Quebec Society for the
Protection of Birds
President, Mrs. G. H. Monrcomery; Vice-
Presidents, Dr. IAN: McLaren, Miss R. B. BiLan-
cHarp; Honorary Treasurer, Miss G. E. Hresarp;
Honorary Secretary, Miss R. S. Assorr, 164 Sen-
neville Road, Senneville, P.Q.

Toronto Field Naturalists’ Club
President, Dr. D. Hoenicer; Vice-President,
R. F. Norman; Secretary-Treasurer, Mrs. H. Ros-
son, 49 Craighurst Ave., Toronto 12, Ont.; As-
sistant Secretary, Miss Ruta MarsuHatyi; Junior
T.F.N.C., R. J. MAcLELLAN, 416 St. Clements ANE
Toronto 12, Ont.

Vancouver Natural History Society

Honorary President, Dr. M. Y. Wituiams; Past.
President, Dr. R. Stace-Smitu; President, Dr. J. E.
Armstronc, Vice-President, Dr. J. F. BENpELL;
Treasurer, Mrs. E. N. Copprine, 890 Seymour Blvd.,
North Vancouver, B.C.; Programme Secretary,
Miss G. Waicut; Recording Secretary, Muss
KatHERINE Mirroy; Secretary, E. N. Coppine;
Editor of Bulletin, C. B. W. Rocers; Librarian,
Mrs. H. Prnper-Moss.

“ADVICE To CONTRIBUTORS
Authors are asked to share the cost of publication by paying for each

- page of an article that is in excess of the limit of twelve journal pages,
the cost of illustrations and of setting small-sized type and_tables.

illustrations

All figures, including each figure of the plates,
should be numbered. consecutively in arabic

numerals. The author’s name, title of the paper,

and figure number should be written in the lower
left corner of the sheet on which the illustration
appears. The legend should not be incorporated
in the figure.

Line drawings should be made with India ink
on white drawing paper, blue tracing linen, or
blue-lined co-ordinate paper. Co-ordinate lines
that are to appear in the reproduction should be —
ruled in black ink. Descriptive matter should be
lettered, not typewritten, and all parts of the
drawing should permit easy legibility even if a
reduction is made.

- Photographs should have a glossy finish and
show sharp contrasts. For reproduction as a com-
plete plate they should be mounted without space
between prints.

For large drawings and mounted ‘photographs
the ratio of height to width should conform to
that of the journal page (43 by 7% inches) but the
height should be adjusted to allow for the legend.

Reprints
Reprints, with or without covers may be bought,

_ The cost is given on the reprint order form which

is attached to the pale prog

: Handbook Series Cate Jess
Nori: Fifty Edible Plants of British: Columbia, ¢ moe

2

3. ‘The Reariles of British Columba G. Clifford Car
No. 4. Some eo & oie Fungi of B. CL G Ad Hardy

5

6

The Birds of BC: Q) The Woodpeckers Q) Grows, ;
and Their Allies. C. J. Guiguet. ee

7. The Barnacles of B.C. LE. Cornwall. pot ake

No. 8. The Birds of B.C.: (3) The Shorebirds. _ ee A Guigner

9. The Grasses of B.C. W. A. Hubbard.

No. 10. The Birds of B.C.: 4 Upland Game a . Gui
No. 11. The Mammals of BC. 1 McT. Cowan & ae J. G

No. 13. The. Birds Gi B.C: G) Gulls, Cc i le ae
No. 14. Alien Animals in B iC. ie 1D, Carl: & C. J. Guiguet.

No. 15. The Birds of B.C.: (6). Waterfowl. C.J Guiguet ;
No. 16. The Orchids of B.C. A. F. ‘Szczawinski. ate
No. 17. The Intertidal Bivalves of B.C. D. B. Quayle.

No. 18. The Birds of B.C.: (7) Owls. Gh Guiguet. ee
‘No. 19. The Heather Family (Ericaceae) of B.C. A. F. Szezawins

No. 20. Guide to Common Edible Plants of B.C. A F. eo .
. and G. A. Hardy —

No. 21 Guide to Marine Life of British Columbia, G Gifford Ca

Oceasional Paper Series

Nos. 1-9 melusive out of print.

No. 10. An Ecological Study of Goose nd BC, saith speci al
reference to mammals and birds. Cc. J. ey

No. 11.

C. I. Guiguer

‘Special Publications

No. 1. Supplement to “Flora. of Boaters British Columbia”
(J. K. Henry). J. W. Eastham, ;

No. 2. A Review of the Bird Fauna of Brivbh Columbia,
J. A. Munro and I. McT. Cowan. ee

Available from Provineial Museum, Victoria, B. a

& ELD-NATU RALIS :

ar ges in the Distribution of the Snowshoe Hare in 2 |

_ Southern Ontario = _ ANTOON DE Vos
Nes ng of the Yellow Rail in oi Bee Manitoba — | Joun LANE
it Bird Notes from the Blue Sea Lake Ar ea in Quebec Ira N. GaABRIELSON

hogs rrences of the Orchid Listera australis in the Vicinity of
Oe Gy, ces eate W. Gaeenwoop

. Oy vcsle on ae Breton Téland IVAN V. Hatt anp Lewis E. Aapers

Plans Records from District of AineKensic Northwest Territories
Joun W. Tuterer

s

ae Gea Breeding i in the Thelon aie. NWI E. Kuyr>

| Yolour Mutant of the Yellow Perch from Lake Erie E. J. Crossman
Additions to the Nipissing Region, Ontario, Bird-lists Louise pe Kirtine Lawrence
ge Extension and Behaviour Notes for the Banded Rudderfish in Nova Scotia

on New Brunswick Bats ee es Srantby W. GoruamM anv Davin H, Jounston

ae eS oe Compiled by Mrs. G. R. Hanus

Field Nat. | Vol. 76

No. 4 1 |p. 18 183-238 [ous O¢ October-December 1

ATHOLL SUTHERLAND Brown AND HucH Nasri

J. SHERMAN BLEAKNEY |

pec anne aie ANN

Decgnrmentet

ig:

183
189
192

199
203

206

209

220

223
224
224.
225
226
228

229

os

THE OTTAWA FIELD-NATURALISTS’ CLUB

FOUNDED IN 1879

— Patrons — grace
Tuer ExceLLencies THE GOVERNOR GENERAL AND MADAME VANIER ee

The objects of the club are to foster an acquaintance with and a love of na
encourage investigation and to publish the results of original research and obset
in all branches of natural history. . Pee

The club is a corporate member of the Federation of Ontario’ Naturalists
affiliated with the American Association for the Advancement of Science.

MEMBERS OF COUNCIL

President: Donatp R. Beckett, 36 Canter Blvd., Ottawa, Ontario — a
First Vice-President: W. eee Mair Pee, 3°,
Second Vice-President: DoNALp A. SMITH ;
Treasurer. Miss ANNE BANnninG, Box 4099, Postal Station E, Ottawa, Ontario
Secretary: A. W. FRANK BANFIELD, National Museum of Canada, Ottawa, Ontario
. Auditors: J. M. Grxett and R. J. Moore hie
Additional Members of Council: Miss CHarLoTTEe DILL, Mrs. G. R. Hae ‘Naa:
Hawxssripce, Miss Mary Stuart, Messrs. W. K. W. Batpwin, D. A. BENnso
BousFiELp, K. Bowes, A. H. CLARK, Jr., F. R. Coox, R. Fritu, a :
Goprrey, H. Grou, J. W. Groves, G. R. Hanes, D. D. Hogart, H. Lioyp, Br :
LAREN, R. J. Moors, C. R. Patrerson, A. E. Porsixp, L. S. Russet, D.B: De AN
F. H. SCHULTZ, | Pd ‘ScoccAN, V. E. F. Sopman. a

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST —

Editor: Francis R. Coox Business Manager: W. a C
National Museum of Canada, Ottawa, Ontario _ Central Experimental Farm, Ottawa,

Associate Editors: F. J. ALcock (Geology), Joun W. ARNOLD (Entomology), W. A. BE
(Paleontology), J. SHERMAN Breaxney (Herpetology), ArrHur H. = ;
(Malacology), Witt1am G. Dore (Botany), J. R. Dymonp (Ichthyology), a
Goprrey (Ornithology), A. G. Huntsman (Marine peey): PHILLIP M. Yc
(Mammalogy).

The Canadian Field: Naturalist is published quarterly by the Ona Field- ra.
Club with assistance of the affiliated societies listed on the inside back cover. |
representing personal observations or the results of original research in any branch
tural history are invited. In the preparation of papers authors should consult.
recent issue and the information for contributors on the inside back cover. Adverti
rates and prices of back numbers of this journal and its predecessors, TRANSAC
OF THE OTTAWA FIELD-NATURALISTS’ CLUB, 1879-1886, and the ¢
NATURALIST, 1887-1919, are obtainable from the business eat

MEMBERSHIP AND SUBSCRIPTION

The annual membership fee of $5 covers subscription to the journal.
however, may subscribe at the same rate as that for membership. Single current n
of regular issues are $1.50. A money order should be made payable to the Ottaw
Naturalists’ Club and sent to the treasurer. Notice of change of address shoulg
sent to the treasurer.

Authorized as second-class mail by the Post Office Department at Ottawa, Ontario

AAG AMaAtan Fe
MUS. COMP. Z

'

The Canadian Field-Naturalist, ,,

==

Vowume 76 OCTOBER-DECEMBER 1962 Numi ne

bap

CHANGES IN THE DISTRIBUTION OF THE SNOWSHOE
HARE IN SOUTHERN ONTARIO

ANTOON DE Vos
Department of Zoology, Ontario Agricultural College, Guelph, Ontario

Near THE Limits of an animal’s distribution there is often a marginal zone in
which the species exists in low numbers. This is attributed to environmental
conditions becoming increasingly marginal as the range boundary is approach-
ed. Since snowshoe hare populations seemed to be reduced near the range
boundary, efforts were made to obtain further data about the actual distribu-
tion of the species along its southern range boundary and about environmental
factors prevailing in and around the areas inhabited by hares. This paper
deals with a description of the past and present status of snowshoe hares
(Lepus americanus Erxl.) in southern Ontario, while another paper will dis-
cuss the influence of environmental factors on the status of the species in more
detail (de Vos, Austin and Mason, MS).

Since pioneer days, the snowshoe hare has disappeared from many parts
of the east and mid-west as a result of clearing forests for agricultural land.
In the Great Lakes area this has resulted in a recession of the range northward.

In Michigan snowshoe hares were once found over the entire state, but
they are now restricted to an area north of a line west of Saginaw Bay (Burt,
1948). In Wisconsin, the species formerly occurred in favorable habitats in
the central and southeastern parts of the state. The south boundary did not
retract further in a northerly direction after 1930 (Leopold, 1947). It now
runs through the center part of the state, although hares are absent also from
the counties along the Wisconsin River.

Several papers refer to the early status of the snowshoe hare in Ontario.
These include those written by Brooks (1905), Clarke (1944), Fleming (1913),
Snyder (1930) and Soper (1923). Much information about the biology of
the species is contained in the paper by MacLulich (1937). Peterson (1957)
describes changes in the mammalian fauna of Ontario.

The southern boundary of the snowshoe hare in Ontario has been
gradually receding northward over the past half century or more. It seems
likely that before white settlement started the species was present throughout
most or all of southern Ontario where it was a resident mainly of evergreen
swamps (Saunders, 1932). In Figure 1, various locations are indicated where
these hares were present after the turn of the century, but had disappeared

Mailing date of this number: January 7, 1963
183

torn
Lbasririin g
, ’ i}

184 Tue CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST Vol. 76

before 1931. Further, the southern boundary is shown as it was considered
to be about 1931. Hares were then absent from large sections along the
north shores of Lake Erie and Lake Ontario. Finally, the distribution is given
for the year 1961.

Data regarding the distribution of snowshoe hares in southern Ontario
were obtained from personnel of the Ontario Department of Lands and
Forests, from other individuals who had knowledge of the situation, from the
literature, and questionnaires of the Royal Ontario Museum covering the
period 1931-34. These data were screened as much as was possible for their
validity. Letters reporting various observations are on file in the Department
of Zoology of the Ontario Agricultural College. Since 1953 the author and
various students visited numerous swamps within a driving distance of forty
miles from Guelph to ascertain the presence of snowshoe hares.

STATUS DURING THE 1930's

Hares were reported absent during the 1930’s from the following coun-
ties: Essex, Kent, Lambton, Elgin, Haldimand, Welland and Lincoln. Ap-
parently in the 1920’s Wainfleet Swamp west of Welland was still frequented
by a good population. Hares became extinct in Welland County around
1929 (R.O.M. records).

The species was considered very scarce or locally present in the tier of
counties including Middlesex, Oxford, Norfolk, Brant, Wentworth, Halton,
Peel and York. W. E. Saunders (1934) reported that there were almost no
hares within a fifteen mile radius around London. According to C. H. D.
Clarke (pers. comm.) hares were very numerous in 1921 in the Komoka
Swamp, situated about 20 miles west of London. Hares were also present in
Dorchester Swamp, east of London in the 1920’s (H. Zavitz, pers. comm.).
The last hare recorded for the southern part of Norfolk County was killed
in 1932 in Charlotville Township (Hall, pers. comm.). While hares were still
common in the northern part of Oxford County in 1934, they were rare
(R.O.M. records). The only two places where hares were recorded to occur
in Brant County in 1931 were Burford Swamp and Lynden Swamp. The
main stronghold for hares in Wentworth County was Beverley Swamp. In
Halton County, hares were absent from the southern one-third. In Peel
County snowshoe hares were still abundant in 1931 around Caledon, rare
north of Brampton and absent south of there. In York County hares were
absent within a fifteen mile radius from the city limits of Toronto, but still
common in the central and northern parts of the County.

In the tier of counties north of those discussed, hares were still locally
abundant mainly in isolated swamps, but they had disappeared from the urban
and intensely cultivated agricultural areas. In Huron, Perth, Waterloo, On-
tario and Durham counties, hares were absent or rare in the southern parts,
but still locally abundant in the northern parts. In Durham County, north
of the village of Hampton, hares were abundant in the mid-twenties in a cedar
swamp (A. E. Allin, pers. comm.). In Northhumberland County, hares had
also become quite scarce due to much hunting (O. E. Kelly, pers. comm.).

1962 De Vos: SNowsHOE Ha4rE IN SOUTHERN ONTARIO 185

— Present south-
ern boundary

— southern hare
boundary about
1931

—local population
present after
1900

Scale in Miles
t
40

Figure 1. The present and past distribution of snowshoe hares in southern Ontario.

In Prince Edward County hares were scarce. On February 12, 1937 one
track was seen in a swamp near Hillier and during the winter 1936-7 six hares
were reported shot (Snyder, 1941).

STATUS, PERIOD 1940-1950

It appears from data obtained regarding the distribution of the snowshoe
hare covering the period 1940-1950 that the range continued to shrink, al-
though more gradually than during preceeding decades.

In Waterloo County, a few hares remained in the Philipsburg area near
New Hamburg (Nith Valley Conservation Report, 1951). In the winter of
1939-40, a few hares were seen and shot in the Roseville Swamp, a few miles
west of Galt (P. C. Hilborn, pers. comm.). In Wellington County, a few
hares were shot in Puslinch Township in the southern part of the Township
(Wm. Steele, pers. comm.). In Brant County two hares were shot in 1950
in Oakland Township, Concession IV. No reports could be obtained of ob-
servations in York County south of Newmarket since about 1949.

STATUS, PERIOD 1950-PRESENT

A reduction of range of the snowshoe hare took place at a slower pace
than during the period 1940-1950, and apparently consisted mainly of a few
small populations becoming extinct in isolated swamps. ‘The first account of
a spread in range comes from Prince Edward County where hares have been
observed in at least three isolated colonies since the winter of 1960-61 (Depart-

186 THE CaNnapIAN FIELD-NATURALIST Vol. 76

ment of Lands and Forests records). Reference will be made to a few
observations made in places where hares were considered rare.

In the nothern part of Waterloo County few hares survive in Wellesley
and Woolwich Townships (Report of Department of Lands and Forests). A
few hare tracks were seen by A. de Vos in Beverley Swamp, Wentworth
County on February 21, 1956. A few hares survive in isolated woodlot areas
in the northern part of York County (D. Johnston, H. Van Wyck, pers.
comm.). Mr. J. J. Armstrong saw what he considered a snowshoe hare
track in a swamp in Oakland Township, Brant County, on February 27, 1960.
Mr. Harold Reeve (pers. comm.) reported two isolated populations in Durham
County south of highway no. 2 in 1955. Mr. F. M. Helleiner (pers. comm.)
observed one hare two miles north of Glen Major in Ontario County on
January 22, 1950. In 1958, J. Catcher reported one shot in Caledon Town-
ship, Peel County.

During recent years, as was the case during previous decades, snowshoe
hares are uncommon or rare along the southern boundary of the species. The
distribution is scattered, and hares are mainly restricted to poorly drained or
swampy areas in which there is heavy coniferous cover. Stands of white
cedar, black and white spruce, or a mixture of these, appear to offer the most
suitable habitat.

In order to obtain a clearer picture of the recent distribution of the species
along its south boundary, large swampy forest areas in the southern and
central part of Wellington County were searched systematically for the pre-
sence of snowshoe hares. In Figure 2 are shown the various locations which
were visited between 1952 and 1958. The location, vegetation, size of the
area, and the presence of hares were recorded on each visit. Of the sixty-
seven locations visited twenty-two did not contain hares. The areas which
did not contain hares were generally more open and contained predominantly
white elm, trembling aspen, willows and red maple, although some also con-
sisted largely of mature white cedar, spruce or hemlock. Several woodlots,
overgrazed by livestock, did not contain hares. A glance at Figure 2 shows
how discontinuous the distribution of hares is in the southern part of the
County.

Snowshoe hares fluctuate in numbers at fairly regular intervals attaming
a relatively high abundance every nine to eleven years (MacLulich, op. cit.).
During periods of abundance certain individuals will egress from their prefer-
red habitat which may initiate either a permanent or a temporary extension
of range, depending on environmental conditions in the newly occupied range.

It appears that man’s activities in modifying the habitat have produced
the necessary change to eliminate hares.

Reasons for the reduction in range of the species in southern Ontario ~
include drainage and other man-made changes in the vegetation of swampy
areas. Particularly the removal of white cedar, but also to a lesser extent of
other conifers, has had an influence on diminishing suitable range. conditions.
Other reasons are depletion of suitable food and cover by overgrazing of
livestock and overshooting of isolated populations of hares,

1962 De Vos: SNowsHOoE Hare IN SOUTHERN ONTARIO 187

V

Legend:

@— hares present

o— hares absent

occupied
ipa. cange

Figure 2. Distribution of snowshoe hares in the vicinity of Guelph, Ontario, 1960.

Scale 1 inch = approximately 5 miles.

188 Tue CanapiAN Firtp-NaTurRALIST Vol. 76

Reforestation efforts during recent decades and farm desertion may change
the trend reported on in this paper. Recent evidence indicates that some
reforested areas in the Lake Simcoe Forest District are being re-occupied.
Thus there is no stable southern limit to the distribution of snowshoe hares,
but rather it is fluctuating within a marginal zone. Occupancy of habitat
can be favourably or unfavourably altered by man’s activities.

SUMMARY

Changes in the distribution of the snowshoe hare are described for southern
Ontario, covering the period 1930 to the present. The species has receded in
range in a northerly direction during that period. Reduction in range may
have come to a halt and there is some evidence that limited range extension 1s
taking place, particularly where reforestation and farm desertion is in progress.
Reasons for reduction in range include drainage and changes in the vegetation
of swampy areas by logging and overgrazing by livestock, as well as over-
shooting of isolated populations. Occupancy of habitat can be favourably and
unfavourably altered by man’s activities.

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

The author wishes to thank the following individuals for making data
available to him: Dr. C. H. D. Clarke, Dr. R. I. Peterson, and Messrs. D.
Austin, R. E. Mason, A. B. Stephenson, J. C. McHardy and D. W. Simkin.
He also wishes to acknowledge the cooperation of various field officers of the
Ontario Department of Lands and Forests and private sportsmen who supplied
information.

REFERENCES

Anonymous. 1951. Nith valley conserva- Ontario, Canada. Canadian Institute, Tor-
tion report. 41 pp. onto, pp. 206-211.

Brooks, A. 1905. The mammalia of north- Jackson, H. H. T. 1961. Mammals of
ern Wellington. Ontario Natural Science Wisconsin. University of Wisconsin Press,
Bulletin No. 1, pp. 25-26. 504 pp., illus.

Burt, W. H. 1948. The mammals of Leroporp, A. 1947. The distribution of
Michigan. University of Michigan Press, Wisconsin hares. Transactions Wisconsin
288 pp., illus. Academy of Science, Arts & Letters 37:

1-14.

Crarke, C. H. D. 1944. Gleanings from
the natural history of Huron County, MacLuticu, D. A. 1937. Fluctuations in

Ontario, Canadian Field-Naturalist 58(3) : the numbers of varying hare (Lepus
82-84. americanus). University of ‘Toronto
Studies, Biological Series, No. 43, pp. 1-

DE Vos, A., D. Austin And R. E. Mason. 136.

Factors affecting the distribution of cot- ‘
tontails and snowshoe hares in Wellington Peterson, R. L. 1957. Changes in the

County, Ontario (unpublished MS). mammalian fauna of Ontario Jn; Changes
in the fauna of Ontario. University of
Freminc, J, N. 1913. Mammals in the Toronto Press, Royal Ontario Museum,

natural history of the Toronto region, pp. 43-58.

1962 De Vos: SNowsHOE Hare IN SOUTHERN ONTARIO 189

‘Saunpers, W.E. 1934. Notes on the mam- Prince Edward County, Ontario. Jn: Uni-
mals of Ontario. Transactions of the versity of Toronto Studies, Biological
Royal Canadian Institute No. 40, Vol. Series, No. 48, pp. 12-24.

XVII, Part 2, pp. 271-309, University Soper, J. D. 1923. The mammals of Wel-
TUPOMEO Pages) lington and Waterloo Counties, Ontario.
Snyper, L. L. 1941. The mammals of Journal of Mammalogy 4: 244-252.

Received for publication 5 November 1962

WZ

NESTING OF THE YELLOW RAIL IN SOUTHWESTERN
MANITOBA

JouHn LANE
38 Lorne Avenue East, Brandon, Manitoba

On June 11, 1962, I flushed two Yellow Rails, Coturnicops noveboracensis,
from the edge of a boggy area, about two miles from the city of Brandon,
Manitoba. This type of wetland is known in western Canada as “buffalo-
wallows’, and is usually in the form of a regular succession of grassy hum-
mocks and water-filled depressions. As this was the first time I had ever
encountered this rail, after more than forty-five years of birding in the Bran-
don area, I determined to research the species. I was aided in this work by a
house guest, Oscar M. Root, of North Andover, Massachusetts.

By June 22 I had found four areas each of which harbored one pair of
Yellow Rails. These four locations were within one mile or less of each
other, and all were subjected to thorough searches for nests, during the last
part of June and the first two weeks of July.

I chose Area Two for the first search, since the spot is by far the smallest,
about 13 acres in extent, and has very little willow or other concealing growth
init. [entered this expanse of sedgy humps-and-hollows early in the morning
of June 17, and at 9:30 found my first nest of the Yellow Rail. Angus H.
Shortt, of Winnipeg, Manitoba, tells me that this is Manitoba’s first recorded
nest of this species. Containing four eggs, it was sunk into the crown of a
low hummock, was made entirely of dead grass, had a canopy of last year’s
sedge grass overhanging it, and was further hidden by the growth of new,
green, sedge grass. Only the glint of sun on eggs betrayed the nest.

The nest-hummock was surrounded by eight inches of water, and the
small opening into the nest was only several inches above water-level. The

190 Tue CaAanapian Firtp-NaATURALIST Vol. 76

external diameter of the nest was 54 in.; the internal diameter, 34 in.; the inside
depth, 3 in. By June 24 no more eggs had been added and incubation was
evidently under way. On June 26 I found that a high wind had sifted debris
into the nest, partially covering the eggs, and it was apparent that the female
rail had abandoned her nest. “This desertion must be blamed on human inter-
ference.

Area One—where the species was first seen—was subjected to several
intense searches without success. ‘This terrain has an expanse of about 3 acres,
with a few willows scattered about the edge, but much the same character
as Area Two. Indicating the thoroughness of the hunts for a nest at this
location, nests of Northern Yellowthroat, Sharp-tailed Sparrow, and Common
Snipe were found as by-products of the search. The loud, rapid, “Tc-tic,
tic-tic-tic” call of the Yellow Rail was always present during the earlier
searches, but entirely lacking in the later hunts. I never heard this call come
from more than one spot at once, and assume that only the male gives it.

I gave Area Three a good combing on three occasions, the last two with
Mr. Root as a companion, but here again no nest was found, although the
ticking call was heard constantly during the first two searches. This is an
area of quaking bog, about 23 acres in extent, and is bordered on three sides
by willows, with a few others growing out in the bog.

Area Four is another quaking bog, and it is spring-fed. I first heard a
Yellow Rail here on June 22 and found the nest on July 2, with only one egg.
By July 10 the full clutch of nine eggs was laid. I visited the nest several
times during incubation and found the eggs arranged in three rows of three,
except that one visit revealed one egg on top of the other eight. This was
the only instance of ‘piling’ noted. Hatching occurred on July 23, so the
incubation period was 13 days, assuming incubation to have started only after
the last egg was laid. ‘Terrill (1943) believed this to be the case.

The following notes on this nest and its location are furnished by Oscar
M. Root: :

“The nest was sunk into the crown of a hummock, about six inches above
the water, which was only two inches deep at this spot. Both old and new
sedge were present in profusion. Young shoots of hoary willow (Salix
candida) grew out of the hummock on two sides of the nest, and again a
canopy of dead sedge had been so skilfully arranged as a screen that only a
most searching look could penetrate to the nest. The bog, of the usual buffalo-
wallows type, is about two acres in size and is surrounded by willows, with
others up to ten feet in height occurring in numbers throughout the bog.

“Other nesting species found in some or all of the four areas included
Red-winged Blackbird, Short-billed Marsh Wren, Sora Rail, Northern Yellow-
throat, Sharp-tailed Sparrow, Common Snipe, Bobolink, and LeConte’s Spar-
row.”

Following the desertion of the first nest, Mr. Root and I returned to Area
Two on July 4, to search for another. To our amazement we found a new
nest in the same hummock from which we had removed the first nest, after
the desertion. Since much of the sedge growth had been taken when we

1962 Lane: NESTING OF THE YELLOW RAIL 191

lifted the original nest, this second effort was very poorly hidden, the over-
head cover being especially scanty so that the lone egg was in plain view. We
left this nest strictly alone until July 11, when a return visit revealed just the
one egg there, the hen quite evidently had abandoned this second attempt,
and the absence of call-notes from the male indicated that the pair had left
the area. It is worthy of note that, on the evening of July 9, the male Yellow
Rail in this area was heard to call incessantly from a spot about 200 yards
from the buffalo-wallows, in a region of heavy marsh-and- “prairie grass growth.
I am inclined to believe that that day marked the crisis in the affairs of this
pair, and from then on, the area was silent.

I have reached the following conclusions on the breeding activities of the
Yellow Rail:

The birds appear to be mated on arrival. Not more than one pair
inhabit a given area. Only the male calls. The calling stops when the
young are born. This call can be heard at least one-third of a mile on a
quiet evening. During the incubation period the male is very alert, and it
is impossible to approach the nesting area without the ticking starting up—a
warning to the sitting female. Since at least one bird was flushed into full
view from each of the four areas, and bearing in mind the very great distance
the calls can be heard, I believe this is a much easier species to locate than
the Virginia Rail, for instance. The female Yellow Rail is second to none in
her ability to hide her nest. Incubation period is 13 days, plus a few extra
hours in the case of the final egg. Once hatched, the young rails join their
parents in maintaining a complete silence. This species must be considered
quite nomadic when seeking a breeding location.

REFERENCES

Territt, L. Mct. 1943. Nesting Habits of the Yellow Rail in Gaspé County, Quebec.
The Auk 60: 171-180.

Received for publication 17 August 1962

Ws

RECENT BIRD NOTES FROM THE BLUE SEA LAKE AREA
IN QUEBEC

Ira N. GABRIELSON
Wildlife Management Institute, Wire Building, Washington, D.C.

A PAPER ON THE summer birds of Blue Sea Lake was published by the writer
(Gabrielson, 1938) and subsequently some supplementary information cov-
ering the time spent in this area from 1938 to 1947 inclusive was printed
(Gabrielson, 1949).

Since that time I have been in the Blue Sea area nearly every summer up
to and including 1961. I have visited most of the other lakes, marshes, fields,
and forests covered in the earlier reports though not as extensively as in the
earlier years. Obvious changes in bird populations have taken place, some
of which appear to be clearly associated with ecological changes; in others the
relationship is not at all obvious if indeed they are at all connected with local
ecological patterns.

Among the water birds loons and Common Mergansers have shown a
marked decrease especially on Blue Sea Lake itself. “There has been a con-
siderable growth of human use of the shores and islands on which these two
species formerly nested which could account for this change in numbers.

Since 1948 Ring-necked Ducks have been completely absent from the small
ponds on which they formerly bred; although I can see no obvious ecological
change nor any change in human use of the lakes or the adjacent shoreline.
All of the emergent and submerged acquatics that were common years ago
are still present though there may be differences in their relative abundance.

On the other hand Pied-billed Grebes, Black Ducks, Hooded Mergansers
and Ring-billed and Herring gulls are more numerous both on Blue Sea Lake
and the adjacent lakes which I visit regularly.

There has been no obvious change favorable to the erebes, Black Ducks
or Hooded Mergansers that would account for their increased abundance but
the fact remains that both individuals and the number of broods seen have
increased.

There is no gull colony known to me in the territory regularly worked
and the build-up in the number of individuals in late July and August indicates
a considerable post-breeding movement into the territory.

Until 1947, three to six Herring gulls were the usual number present while
since that time the species has been more regular and in some years, notably
1959, more numerous.

The Ring-billed Gull was not noted until 1953 and has been the most
numerous water bird since about 1956.

Among the land birds the following species have been noticeably less
numerous since 1948: Bald Eagle, Osprey, Bluebird, Red-eyed Vireo, Black-
and-white Warbler, Magnolia Warbler, Black-throated Blue Warbler, Chest-
nut-sided Warbler, Ovenbird, Canada Warbler, Redstart, and Indigo Bunting.

192

1962 GABRIELSON: Birp Notes From Biur Sea LAKE AREA 193

The reduction in the number or the frequency of observation of the
Bald Eagle, Osprey, and Bluebird are perhaps associated with the widely
reported decrease of these species, the reduction in Magnolia and Chestnut-
sided Warblers and Indigo Buntings in the territory studied is probably due
to obvious vegetative changes that have taken place; but I am not able to
associate the lesser numbers of Red-eyed Vireo, Black-and-white Warbler,
Black-throated Blue Warbler, Ovenbird, Canada Warbler or Redstart with any
significant vegetative changes in the areas they have always occupied. All
these forms are present but in smaller numbers.

On the other hand the Red-shouldered Hawk, Broad-winged Hawk,
Barred Owl, Nighthawk, Blue Jay, Raven, Nashville Warbler, Bay-breasted
Warbler, Blackburnian Warbler, Cowbird, Red-winged Biackbird, Evening
Grosbeak, and Purple Finch have increased. The two hawks and the Barred
Owl may have extended their breeding range to include this local area and
the Evening Grosbeaks certainly have done so. I am not able to give any
logical reason for the upswing of some of the woodland warblers that utilized
much the same habitat as some of those that have decreased markedly in
recent years.

The following species accounts bring up to 1961 the more noticeable
changes that have occurred since 1947.

Gavia immer (Briinnich): Common Loon

Noticeably less abundant on Blue Sea Lake and on many of the neigh-
boring lakes.

Podilymbus podiceps podiceps (Linnaeus): Pied-billed Grebe
Much more frequently seen and more numerous on several lakes, marshes
and ponds especially in 1949 and 1953.

Anas rubripes Brewster: Black Duck

Definitely more abundant since 1949. Greatest numbers of broods and
individuals seen in 1953 and 1955 but it has been more common until 1961.
In that year the number of broods dropped considerably.

Mareca americana (Gmelin): American Widgeon

On July 31, 1952, a female with five partly-grown young were seen on a
little lake just north of Lake Baskatong. This is the only record for the
species.

Aythya collaris (Donovan): Ring-necked Duck
I have not seen a single individual of this species since 1948.

Bucephala clangula americana (Bonaparte): Common Goldeneye

One of two birds was collected on Blue Sea Lake on October 4, 1951, and
a female with four young was watched for some time on a small wooded lake
xear the Lapine Depot on the Gene de Terre River.

194 THe CANADIAN FiELD-NATURALIST Vol. 76

Lophodytes cucullatus (Linnaeus): Hooded Merganser

This bird has become more numerous as the Common Merganser has
decreased. It is now second in numbers to the Black Duck among the water-
fowl. Broods seen nearly every season since 1949.

Mergus merganser americanus Cassin: Common Merganser

Greatly decreased as a breeding bird on Blue Sea Lake and some decrease
on adjacent lakes. F ormerly two or more broods were seen regularly on
Blue Sea but in recent years the sight of a brood excites comment.

Accipiter gentilis atricapillus (Wilson): Goshawk

A single bird at Lapine Depot July 31, 1952; a bird near Ellard Island on
Blue Sea Lake on July 30, 1954; and another individual at the north end of
the same lake on August 18, 1954.

Buteo lineatus lineatus (Gmelin): Red-shouldered Hawk

This species is seen more frequently since 1949. One or more birds are
seen several times each season about Ellard Island and Sheep Islands in Blue
Sea Lake. Occasional birds have been seen on other lakes since 1950.

Buteo platypterus platypterus (Vieillot): Broad-winged Hawk

This species bred on Big Island in 1947 and in several subsequent years
I have seen newly fledged young on the island. In addition individuals have
been seen in widely scattered localities in the territory. It is now one of the
more common hawks in the area.

buteo lagopus s. johannis (Gmelin): Rough-legged Hawk

On August 6, 1959, a specimen in typical plumage was seen along the
road on the west side of Blue Sea Lake. It is the only one noted in the.
territory at any time.

Hatliaeetus leucocephalus (Linnaeus): Bald Eagle

The Bald Eagle was never common but I have only seen one since 1942
and that was a single individual on July 15, 1958. It has not been observed in
a much larger territory in recent years.

Pandion haliaetus carolinensis (Gmelin): Osprey
Only two Ospreys were observed since 1947, one at Blue Sea Lake on
July 30, 1954, and another on August 6, 1959.

Falco sparverius sparverius Linnaeus: Sparrow Hawk

This species has become somewhat more numerous since 1949. It has
been seen frequently with records of two to four individuals on one day.
The highest daily count was on August 6, 1959.

Canachites canadensis (Linnaeus): Spruce Grouse
Two specimens taken near Forks Lake on August 1, 1950,

1962 GaABRIELSON: Birp Notes From Biue Sea LAKe AREA 195

Tringa solitaria solitaria Wilson: Solitary Sandpiper
Two birds noted near Lapine on July 27, 1949.

Totanus melanoleucus (Gmelin): Greater Yellowlegs
One bird on a beach on Big Island on July 19, 1952.

Larus argentatus smithsonianus Coues: Herring Gull

Larus delawarensis Ord: Ring-billed Gull

The Herring Gull, which has been present each year in small numbers,
has increased noticeably since 1955. The Ring-billed Gull was first recorded
on August 25, 1953, when a single bird appeared on Blue Sea Lake. It was
present in 1955 and 1957 and has been numerous each year since that time.
The largest number of birds actually counted was 83 on one little island on
August 24, 1959. This was a mixed flock with the Ring-bills greatly out-
numbering the Herring Gull. Similarly sizable flocks were seen in that and
subsequent years.

Zenaidura macroura (Linnaeus): Mourning Dove

A single bird was noted sitting on a telephone wire near Grand Remous
on August 1, 1952.

Bubo virginianus (Gmelin): Great Horned Owl

A single horned owl was seen on the north side of Lake Baskatong on
August 22, 1950, and again on August 1, 1952.

Strix varia varia Barton: Barred Owl

While Taverner’s notes listed one as seen by R. M. Anderson in October
1922, this species was not noted again until 1957. I did not visit the area that
year but a Dr. Fred Glenny reported that it nested on Big Island. Since that
time it has been present every summer. Adults and young (sometimes as
many as four) have been seen each summer. A young male was collected
August 11, 1959.

Dryocopus pileatus abieticola (Bangs): Pileated Woodpecker

This species has become markedly more common and since 1950 has been
regularly seen on the larger islands and adjoining mainland of Blue Sea Lake.
It has also been seen frequently on the shores of other lakes in the territory.

Nuttallornis borealis (Swainson): Olive-sided Flycatcher

On August 1, 1949, one of two birds was collected west of Blue Sea
Lake near Eagle River. Two were seen in the same area July 27, 1950, single
birds on both August 20 and 21 near Lake Baskatong and others in the same
area on July 31 and August 2, 1952. A single bird was noted on August 6,
1959, on the west shore of Blue Sea Lake.

196 THe CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST Vol. 76

Petrochelidon pyrrhonota pyrrhonota (Vieillot): Cliff Swallow
A good sized nesting colony of this regular summer bird was first dis-
covered near Eagle Depot on July 27, 1950.

Perisoreus canadensis canadensis (Linnaeus): Gray Jay

Taverner’s notes furnished the only records until I collected specimens
near Lapine Depot on July 29, 1949. Since then I have several times seen
them about Baskatong Lake and one bird appeared on Ellard Island on Blue
Sea Lake on September 23, 1951.

Cyanocitta cristata bronia Oberholser: Blue Jay
Noticeably more numerous since 1950. It has been noted more regularly
and in greater numbers.

Corvus corax principalis Ridgway: Common Raven

Recorded only once prior to 1951. Since then it has been seen on many
occasions in Blue Sea Lake, Long Lake, and Lake Baskatong. On July 14,
1958, four were seen on Big Island and a similar number on Lake Baskatong
on July 18 of the same year.

Sitta carolinensis cookei Oberholser: White-breasted Nuthatch

I collected one near Eagle River on August 1, 1949, and saw two others
there the next day. One bird was seen on Big Island on August 23, 1953.

Telmatodytes palustris dissaeptus (Bangs): Long-billed Marsh Wren

I am able to add a second record of this bird as one was seen on the
north end of Blue Sea Lake on July 29, 1959.

Sialia sialis sialis (Linnaeus): Eastern Bluebird

There has been a marked decrease in this species since 1950 with no
records at all since 1953 in the territory normally worked. A few have been
noted outside the area.

Sturnus vulgaris vulgaris Linnaeus: Starling

The Starling has occupied all the suitable area in the territory and is now
a conspicuous and abundant species.

Vireo olivaceus (Linnaeus): Red-eyed Vireo
Found regularly in all suitable area but has been noticeably less numerous
since 1953.

Vireo philadelphicus (Cassin): Philadelphia Vireo
Two recent records of this species were obtained on Big Island, one on
August 31, 1953, and the second on August 26, 1960.

Mniotilta varia (Linnaeus): Black-and-white Warbler

1962 GapriELson: Birp Notes From Biur Sea Lake AREA 197
Dendroica magnolia (Wilson): ‘Magnolia Warbler

Dendroica caerulescens (Gmelin): Black-throated Blue Warbler

Seiurus ai capil aurocapillus (Linnaeus): Ovenbird

Setophaga ruticilla tricolora (Miller): American Redstart

The above warblers have all been noticeably less numerous on the islands
and shorelines of Blue Sea Lake since 1949 and 1950.

Vermivora ruficapilla ruficapilla (Wilson): Nashville Warbler
Dendroica fusca (Miller): Blackburnian Warbler

Dendroica castanea (Wilson): Bay-breasted Warbler

These three species have become more numerous than the numbers of
the preceding groups in the same habitats. The Nashville has increased since
1951, the Blackburnian since 1947, and the Bay-breasted since 1950.

Vermivora celata (Say): Orange-crowned Warbler

A single bird noted on the north shore of Lake Baskatong on August 23,
1950.

Dendroica tigrina (Gmelin): Cape May Warbler

A newly fledged juvenile was collected out of a group of four on Big
Island on August 27, 1950, and two birds were seen on the same island on
July 30, 1954.

Dendroica striata (Forster): Blackpoll Warbler

Two birds on Big Island on August 31, 1953, and others on August 26
and 28, 1955.

Wilsonia pusilla pusilla (Wilson): Wilson’s Warbler
One on Big Island on August 25, 1960, the second record for the area.

Passer domesticus domesticus (Linnaeus): House Sparrow

Regularly seen about farm yards, towns and grain fields but in smaller
numbers since 1950.

Agelaius phoeniceus phoeniceus (Linnaeus): Red-winged Blackbird

The noticeable increase in the breeding population of this bird seems
to be due to the birds going into fields, the edges of thickets, and other
previously unused nesting sites.

198 Tue Canapian FIELD-NATURALIST Vol. 76

Molothrus ater ater (Boddaert): Brown-headed Cowbird

This bird has become fairly regular since it was first collected July 13,
1955, on Blue Sea Lake. It has been noted in most subsequent years. “Taver-
ner’s notes furnished the only prior record.

Passerina cyanea (Linnaeus): Indigo Bunting

The Indigo Bunting is no longer present in the areas where it was formerly
a regular resident. The progress of natural reforestation has changed the
environment to the extent that the birds have abandoned it and are now °
found in other places mostly outside the area worked.

Hesperiphona vespertina vespertina (Cooper): Evening Grosbeak

The most striking change in the bird life has been the invasion of the
Evening Grosbeak as a breeding species. Prior to 1949 I had a single summer
record and one fall record.

On August 1, 1949, a single bird was noted in the village of Caymont on
the southern corner of the area and on July 27, 1950, I saw two birds at Cedar
Lake. On August 2, 1950, a number were seen near Forks Lake just north
of Lake Baskatong. On August 20, 1950, a flock of ten were seen along the
road near Lapine Depot and 10 or 12 were feeding about our camp near
Forks Lake that afternoon. On August 22 about 25 grosbeaks, about 15
White-winged Crossbills and a number of Purple Finches were present ap-
parently eating dirt near an old lumber camp cook shack. It is probable
that sale or some other substance had been spilled there. On August 20, 1955,
I watched a female feed a well-fledged young in Maniwaki and saw numbers
in the same part of town on August 23, 1955. On August 21 one bird was
near our cabin on Blue Sea Lake. Again on September 8, 1955, the street
trees in Maniwaki held numbers of grosbeaks including several young that
frequently begged for food. In 1956 and 1958 I was not in the territory
long enough to make any extended field trips, in 1957 I did not get there at
all and in 1960 I was able to observe only the birds I could see from the
cabin or from a boat in Blue Sea Lake so my notes are confined to Blue Sea
Lake itself in those years. On July 26, 1959, four birds were seen at the
north end of Blue Sea Lake and three birds were present on the west shore on
August 6. No grosbeaks were noted at either Maniwaki or the Baskatong
although both areas were worked. In 1961 a part of the territory around
Baskatong and all of the other parts of the area were worked without seeing
any grosbeaks. The peak year of abundance according to my notes was 1955
but they could have been equally abundant in any of the three succeeding
years when I was not able to do the normal amount of field work. Birds
collected were of this race.

Loxia curvirostra Linnaeus: Red Crossbill

Four Red Crossbills were seen near Forks Lake on August 21, 1950. A
group of four or more were noted from our cabin on August 27, 1959.

1962 GaBRIELSON: Birp Nores From Biue Sea LAKE AREA 199

Loxia leucoptera leucoptera Gmelin: White-winged Crossbill

Several were collected and a flock of fifteen noted near Forks Lake on
August 22, 1950.

REFERENCES
GaprIELSON, IRA N. 1938. Summer Notes ————— . 1949. Additional Notes on the
from Blue Sea Lake, Quebec. Canadian Birds of Blue Sea Lake, Quebec. The
Field-Naturalist 52: 79-87. Canadian Field-Naturalist 63: 137-143.

Received for publication 26 April 1962

2

OCCURRENCES OF THE ORCHID LISTERA AUSTRALIS
IN THE VICINITY OF QUEBEC CITY

Epwarp W. GREENWOOD
Ramsayville, Ontario

In 1947, THE wRITER discovered a few plants of the Orchid Listera australis
Lindl., in a small and shallow boggy area in Sillery, P.Q., a suburb of Quebec
City. The entire bog was destroyed the next year by a housing development.
The unexpected discovery, however, at least trained the eye to find this most
inconspicuous plant and gave hope that the occurrence was not unique for
the area. Subsequent visits to other areas within easy reach of Quebec City
soon fulfilled this hope.

Listera australis appears to be quite widely distributed in the Quebec
area, being found in a majority of the sites which seem to meet its habitat
requirements. In this region the preferred habitat probably is acid peat bogs,
but primarily those parts of the bog offering a rather specific range of micro-
climate. Since the following conclusions are derived from a limited number
of observations, they are only tentative.

Plants were found growing amid living Sphagnum, with the root system
buried to a depth of three or four inches, so that it lay in a zone of saturated,
dead but undecomposed moss. ‘The plants always occurred among rather thin
growths of shrubs, primarily Kalwia polifolia, which would provide a little
broken shade. They were not found in heavy shade. Lustera australis seems
to prefer very bright light. It is perhaps noteworthy that all the plants
observed grew singly in open patches of Sphagnum at least two or three
inches from the nearest shrub stems.

200 THe CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST Vol. 76

Although a very few specimens were found in completely open bog
areas with no trees and only very short (six to eight inch) Kalymas, the
majority of specimens were found along the southern or eastern edges of
stands of Tamarack, Larix laricina, and Black Spruce, Picea mariana; or in open
stands of these trees where inter-tree distances of ten to fifteen feet gave open-
ings for the typical Sphagnum/Kalmia carpet to develop. Such zones would
tend to have a more stable microclimate than the open bog through blocking
of wind by the trees. They would also have a heavier winter cover of drifted
snow. Either or both of these factors may be important to this Listera,

Since 1947, the writer has found L. australis at five distinct sites in the
Quebec City region:

(1) Sillery, P.Q.—bog edge (now destroyed).

(2) South of Charny, P.Q.—edge of mossy woods.

(3) “Mud Lake” at Lac St. Joseph, P.Q.—floating bog.
(4) Small Arms Range, CARDE, Val Rose, P.Q.—bog.
(5) Ste. Catherine, P.Q.—large peat bog.

Advantage was taken of a short trip to Quebec City to examine the last
two sites again in early June, 1962. “The two sites are described below.

1 June 1962. Small Arms Range, Canadian Armament Research and
Development Establishment (on the grounds of Valcartier Camp), Val Rose,
P.Q.

This area is an extremely flat valley floor about a mile wide at the site
of the bog. It was formerly the bed of a lake which disappeared when the
Jacques Cartier River began to flow into the St. Lawrence. In 1947, except
for some lanes cut for lines of fire and buildings for the small arms ranges,
the whole area was covered by swampy and boggy woods of mixed com-
position but predominantly evergreen, particularly in the slightly lower and
wetter areas which were semi-open bog. Except for much more extensive
clearing nearby, the area is much the same to-day.

The topsoil is black or brown forest peat about one or two feet thick,
overlying cross-bedded fine sand extending to bed-rock and with occasional
patches of quicksand, gravel and erratic boulders. These last show only at
the foot of the boundary hills and on their slopes. “The sand is mostly quartz
and feldspar with visible amounts of mica and magnetite. The surrounding
hills are mostly igneous and igneous metamorphic rock, so alkaline drainage
to the bog is minimal. In addition, the drainage systems appear to be along
the base of the hills with local run-off only reaching the edge of the wet area.

The bog in which L. australis was examined is perhaps 100 yards by 50
yards in extent. It is a semi-open bog with scattered Tamarack and Black
Spruce, and is bounded north and south by closed wet forest. The area is
well-covered, Kalmia polifolia and K. angustifolia growing in a carpet of
Sphagnum. The moss is wet but the footing is so firm that only after rain
will anyone crossing it get wet feet.

1962 GREENWoop: LisTERA AUSTRALIS IN VICINITY OF QuEBEG CITY 201

Nineteen specimens of L. australis were observed in one hour. One plant
had three flowers open, seventeen plants were in bud, and one had only leaves
with no flower spike. A supernumerary leaf appears rather commonly in
this species and is usually smaller and narrower than the main leaves; one of
the specimens had this extra leaf.

At the time, the most conspicuous plants in flower in the bog were
Kalmia polifolia and Andromeda glaucophylla. Cypripedium acaule was in
the middle bud stage, a week or two from flowering. The most prevalent
plant companion to the Listera was Smilacina trifolia, which showed only a
few early flowers open. Nearby, both Painted Trillium, T. wndulatum, and
Rhododendron canadense were in full flower.

Since this site is on the property of the Department of National Defence
(Defence Research Board), it is not accessible to the general public.

2 June 1962. Ste. Catherine, P.Q.

The Ste. Catherine peat bog is similar in origin to that at Val Rose, being
on part of the same lake bed but several miles further west on the other side
of the Jacques Cartier River. It is most easily reached by car by driving to
the vicinity of the Ste. Catherine railway station and walking east on the
railway embankment which runs longitudinally through the bog just north
of its center.

This is a very large bog, several miles across in any direction. From the
air it can be seen to be a predominantly open bog, with scattered groups of
trees and a few patches of heavy wet woods, particularly along its edges.
Drainage is radial, the bog being slightly domed. There are a large number
of open ponds in somewhat parallel curvilinear patterns. These are predo-
minantly in the western half of the bog, forming a typical ridge-bog structure.
Since the actual bog is very shallow, only some of the ponds being overgrown
by floating bog, it is possible to walk almost anywhere on its surface without
going above ankle depth in water and to approach within a foot of the edge
of most of the ponds.

In about one hour of searching, nine plants of L. australis were found, all
in full flower. One specimen was in the open bog in low Kalmia—scrub about
one hundred yards from the nearest trees. The other plants were at and
among the southeast edge of a scattered group of Tamarack and Black Spruce.

Other plants in flower at the same time were those of the other site des-
cribed except the Szilacina which was in full flower, not just beginning to
bloom.

Living and pressed specimens of the Listera were taken for distribution
to the herbarium of the National Museum of Canada and to the growing
houses of the Canadian Department of Agriculture at Ottawa.

Observation of the living specimens indicates that, as seems to be normal
in this genus, elongation of the main stem and floral axis continues until the
fruits mature. The writer has seen individual plants in seed which were over
seven inches high above ground. (The photograph of L. australis in Morris
and Eames Our Wild Orchids is of a plant in seed.)

202 THe CANnapIAN FIELD-NATURALIST Vole

Knowledge of the life cycle of many of our orchids is fragmentary. The
Department of Agriculture at Ottawa is starting a program for studying wild
plants, including orchids, under controlled cultural conditions; so that we
can hope for more information in a few years. The Listera australis plants
now at the Experimental Farm were mostly in bud when collected. Arrange-
ments have been made to exclude insects from the plants in order to learn
whether this species is self-fertilizing.

Listera australis is commonly considered one of the rarest orchids in
Canada, having been collected previously only from the Mer Bleue, Ontario
(Fletcher 1893) and Ste. Dorothea, P.Q. (Mouseley 1940). These references
are to herbarium specimens in the collection of the National Museum of
Canada, Ottawa. From the experience of the writer, it is more likely that
the species is simply overlooked far more often than not. The plants are
very small, ordinarily grow in shrubby cover taller than themselves and,
perhaps more important, blossom very early in the spring. By the time the
bog flora becomes more spectacular and plant hunters more attracted to it,
there is much more to distract a searcher. Careful attention to suitable habitat
areas will probably result in wide extension of the recorded distribution of
this species. I hope that the specific information given in this note will
encourage field workers to search for Listera australis whenever possible, and
to report their findings.

Received for publication 5 July 1962

We

A NATURAL HYBRID BETWEEN VACCINIUM
MY RTILLOIDES AND VACCINIUM BOREALE
ON CAPE BRETON ISLAND*

Ivan V. HALL and Lewis E. AALpERS

Research Station, Canada Department of Agriculture, Kentville, N.S.

Two SPECIES OF DIPLOID lowbush blueberry occur in Eastern Canada (Hall and
Aalders, 1961). Vaccinium myrtilloides Michx. occurs throughout the region
except in Newfoundland. It is relatively tolerant of shade and typically
grows in open woods and in commercial lowbush blueberry fields, especially
those recently derived from woodland. Vaccinium boreale Hall and Aalders
occurs in Newfoundland growing on exposed headlands and open barrens.
It has been collected in northern Cape Breton Island in similar cold and exposed
habitats. For the most part, the habitats of the two species are different as
well as being geographically disjunct, and opportunities for hybridization
have thus been rare.

In October 1961 we visited a commercial lowbush blueberry field at
Frizzleton, Inverness County, Nova Scotia, and found the composition of the
blueberry stand to be rather unusual. Although the tetraploid Vaccinium
angustifolium Ait. was the dominant species in the field, V. myrtilloides and
V. boreale were also growing there in considerable numbers. Since we had
already crossed the two latter species in the greenhouse and had obtained hy-
brid progeny from them without difficulty, and since their flowering periods
overlap sufficiently in the field for cross-pollination, we were anxious to see
if hybrids occurred under natural conditions. A search was made for inter-
mediate types and they were found sporadically throughout the area.

A comparison of the suspected natural hybrids with the artificially pro-
duced ones showed them both to be intermediate between the parents in
general plant form and shape of leaf. V. myrtilloides typically has entire
ovate to elliptical leaves with an obtuse base, and is strongly pubescent on
both stem and leaves. V. boreale is much more branched and typically has
elandular-serrate lanceolate to ovate leaves, often with oblique base, and has
little or no pubescence. The naturally occurring plants were intermediate
~ in stem pubescence, but resembled V. myrtilloides more closely in leaf serra-
tion. The artificially produced hybrids tended toward V. myrtilloides in
stem pubescence and toward V. boreale in leaf serration. Chromosome counts
showed that the naturally occurring plants were diploid (2N—24) as would be

expected if they were hybrids of diploid parents.
The artificially produced F. hybrids were intercrossed and an F: genera-
tion of sixty-two plants was grown and studied. ‘These were scored for plant
form, stem pubescence, leaf serrations and shape of leaf, giving a value of 0
for a V. boreale expression, a value of 4 for a V. myrtilloides expression, and

*Contribution No. 1108 from the Research Station, Canada Department of Agriculture, Kentville,
Nova Scotia.

203

204 Tur CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST Vol. 76

TABLE 1—SCORES FOR CHARACTER EXPRESSIONS OF 62 F. PLANTS OF THE
Cross V. boreale X V. myrtilloides

No. of plants receiving a score of
Character zi
0 1 2 3 4
Plant form 0 23 28 11 © 0
Stem pubescence 9 25 23 5 0
Leaf serrations 1 25 28 8 0
Shape of leaf 0 19 29 14 0

intermediate values for intermediate expressions. All of the F. plants were
intermediate for at least two characters, and most were intermediate for all
four characters (Table 1). The four scores were then totalled to give an
overall value for each plant. The overall scores indicate that the F, progeny
exhibited a continuous range of variation intermediate between the two
parental species (Figure 1).

The plants growing at Frizzleton differed somewhat from the F; species
hybrids in the expression of certain characters, but since they were within
the range of variation of the F2 plants, they may have been recombined one
or more generations beyond the F;. It is also possible that F: hybrids similar
to the ones found at Frizzleton would have been produced if different parental
plants of V. boreale and V. myrtilloides had been used in artificial crossing.
There can be no doubt, however, that the intermediate type plants found
growing with V. boreale and V. myrtilloides arose through hybridization
between these two species. Similar intermediate type plants have been found
in northwestern Quebec and have been named V. angustifolium var integri-
folium Lepage (1951). Specimens of this taxon have been examined and they
are undoubtedly also hybrid in origin. They indicate that the distributions
of V. boreale and V. myrtilloides overlap sufficiently to allow hybridization
in northwestern Quebec as well as in northern Cape Breton Island.

The two diploid species V. boreale and V. myrtilloides differ in several
major genetic and morphological factors, are geographically separate, and grow
for the most part in different habitats. Therefore, the fact that they can and
do hybridize under natural conditions in no way nullifies their status as
separate species.

Species hybrids growing under natural conditions have been found in
many plant genera. Natural hybrids between Vaccinium myrtillus L. and
V. vitis-idaea L. occur in Europe (Ritchie 1955a, 1955b), and hybrids between
V. angustifolium and V. corymbosum L. occur commonly in eastern North
America wherever the two species grow in close proximity. The hybrids
between V. boreale and V. myrtilloides provide a further example of natural
species hybridization within the genus.

1962 HALL anp AaAtpers: A Natrurat Hysrip 205

15
ep)
ke
a
=< 10
=
Qa
Le
fe)
o 5
2

O

OM Qh Sst Sto Orit Be Se MO NAc Sa 4 AS) 16

TOTAL SCORE FOR CHARACTER EXPRESSION

Figure 1. Frequency of total scores for character expression of 62 F, plants of the cross
V. boreale X V. myrtilloides.

REFERENCES

Hat, I. V. anp L. E. Aatpers. 1961. Cy- Vaccinium. 1. The structure, performance
totaxonomy of lowbush blueberries in and chorology of the cross Vaccinium
Eastern Canada. American Journal of intermedium Ruthe. New Phytologist 54:
Botany 48: 199-201. 49-67.

Lepace, E. 1951. Entites nouvelles dans la ___.__ . 1955b. A natural hybrid in Vac-
flore du Quebec. Naturaliste Canadien 78: ciniwm. II. Genetic studies in Vaccinium
341-352. intermedium Ruthe. New Phytologist 54:

Ritcwig, J. C. 1955a. A natural hybrid in 320-335.

Received for publication 17 May 1962

Ws

NEW PLANT RECORDS FROM DISTRICT OF
MACKENZIE, NORTHWEST TERRITORIES

Joun W. THIERET

University of Southwestern Louisiana, Lafayette, Louisiana

AMONG THE PLANTs collected in the District of Mackenzie during the 1961
Northwest Territories Botanical Expedition of Chicago Natural History
Museum are specimens representing either unrecorded taxa from the area or
significant extensions of known range. These records are summarized in this
paper. The field work, which was made possible by a grant from the Na-
tional Science Foundation, was carried out along the Great Slave Lake High-
way from the Mackenzie River to Yellowknife. Unless otherwise noted, all
specimens are in the herbarium of Chicago Natural History Museum (F),
and the collection numbers are those of the author and his field assistant,
Robert J. Reich. References to the few publications concerned with the
flora of southwestern District of Mackenzie are listed by Thieret (1961) and
need not be repeated here.

In the catalogue below, the arrangement of families is based on the
Engler system. Specimens are cited by brief data to indicate locality and by
collection number. Localities are given by miles either northbound from the
Mackenzie River (e.g., mile 31 N) or southbound from Yellowknife (e.g.,

mile 16 S).

NaJADACEAE

Potamogeton pusillus L. Water 2 feet
deep in creek, mile 7.7 S, 7816; water 8
inches deep in roadside ditch, mile 13.2
S, 7860. In District of Mackenzie pre-
viously recorded only from Norman
Wells (Cody, 1960).

Potamogeton zosteriformis Fern. Shal-
low water in small lake, mile 36.4 S,
8351. New to the flora of District of
Mackenzie. Previously reported in the
Mackenzie basin only in Wood Buffalo
Park, Alberta (Raup, 1936). Our ma-
terial is sterile. Mr. Ray Murdy, who
also collected and observed P. zosteri-
formis in the area, was similarly unable
to locate flowering or fruiting material.

GRAMINEAE
Glyceria borealis (Nash) Batch. In
mud along stream, mile 20.5 S, 7893; in
mud in roadside ditch, mile 20.7 S, 7905.
Not previously reported from District
of Mackenzie, although a collection

206

from just south of the Northwest Ter-
ritories-Alberta border near Fort Smith
is cited by Cody (1957).

CYPERACEAE

Eriophorum gracile W. D. J. Koch.
Among Carex at edge of small lakes, mile
35 S, 6741, and mile 11.5 S, 7840. First
record for District of Mackenzie. Found
in Alberta just south of the Northwest
Territories border near Fort Smith
(Cody, 1957):

Scirpus hbudsonianus (Michx.) Fern.
Marshy area at roadside, mile 86 N,
6878; disturbed peaty soil at roadside,
mile 110.7 N, 8134. Previously reported
in District of Mackenzie only from the
eastern tip of Great Slave Lake (Raup,
1936).

Scirpus pumilus Vahl ssp. rollandu
(Fern.) Raymond. In deposit of lake
marl, mile 110.5 N, 7091. New to the
flora of District of Mackenzie. Previous-
ly known from the Gulf of Saint Law-

1962

rence, from southwestern Saskatchewan,
from Banff and Jasper, and from Color-
ado (Porsild and Crum, 1961).

JUNCACEAE

Juncus vaseyi Engelm. On mucky
shore of lake, mile 16.5 S, 7882; shore of
Frame Lake, Yellowknife, 8344. Pre-
viously reported in District of Macken-
zie only at Fort Simpson (Raup, 1947).

SALICACEAE
All our willow collections were iden-

tified by George W. Argus.

Salix calcicola Fern. et Wieg. In black
spruce-larch woods, mile 119.4 N, 7099.
New to the flora of District of Macken-
zie. Said by Raup (1959) to be a “pre-
dominantly eastern American species”
that is “common in places at Hudson
Bay, but with a single western locality
in the vicinity of Banff.”

Salix pyrifolia Anders. “Bush” along
overgrown roadway, mile 4.2 N, 6616;
peaty depression on granite outcrop,
mile 4.7 S, 6703. Previously reported in
District of Mackenzie only in the south-
eastern corner (Raup, 1959).

CHENOPODIACEAE

Atriplex patula L. (typical) Disturbed
peaty soil at roadside, mile 6 N, 8248;
waste place, mile 60 N, 8407; disturbed
clay, roadside, mile 8.9 N, 8427. Typical
Atriplex patula was previously unreport-
ed for District of Mackenzie, although
a collection of var. hastata is cited from
the Salt Plains near Fort Smith by Cody
(1957).

Chenopodium rubrum L. Disturbed
soil, mile 60 N, 8406; disturbed soil, mile
75 N, 8396; disturbed wet sand, mile
71.5 N, 8177. New to the flora of Dis-
trict of Mackenzie.

CERATOPHYLLACEAE
Ceratophyllum demersum L. In 40
acre pond, mile 38.5 S, Murdy 132A (in
Herb. University of Southwestern
Louisiana). New to the living flora of

Tureret: New Piant Recorps From NortTHwest TERRITORIES

207

District of Mackenzie, although pre-
viously reported in fossil form (Teras-
mae and Craig, 1958). A single collec-
tion from Wood Buffalo Park, Alberta,
was the only previous record for the
Mackenzie Basin.

ONAGRACEAE

Epilobium: angustifolium L. forma
spectabile (Simmons) Fern. Disturbed
sandy soil at roadside, mile 90 N, 7681.
New to the flora of District of Mac-
kenzie. The flowers of our collection
had pinkish white petals and reddish
green sepals.

UMBELLIFERAE

Cicuta bulbifera L. Sedge zone around
small lake, mile 12.7 S, 7859; marshy area
among willows, mile 45.5 S, 7948. Pre-
viously reported in District of Macken-
zie only at Norman Wells (Cody, 1960).

LABIATAE

Mentha arvensis L. (typical) Deposit
of lake marl, mile 39.8 N, 7404. Previous
records of M. arvensis from District of
Mackenzie are of var. villosa (—M. cana-
densis var. glabrata), distinguished by its
lanceolate or lance-oblong, cuneate- or
attenuate-based leaves. Of our nine col-
lections of M. arvensis, eight are var.
villosa. Number 7404, however, which
has ovate to elliptic leaves rounded to
their petioles, is clearly M. arvensis var.
arvensis. Our specimens have the angles
and sides of the stem equally appressed
pubescent and so are forma puberula.

CoMPOSITAE

Aster brachyactis Blake. Disturbed clay
soil at roadside, mile 75 N, 8395; in de-
posit of lake marl, mile 65.6 N, 8402.
New to the flora of District of Mac-
kenzie.

Aster johannensis Fern. (duplicate
determined by Arthur Cronquist) On
Calamagrostis-dominated mucky shore
of Great Slave Lake, mile 62.7 S, 8373;
among Juncus on shore of Great Slave
Lake, mile 64.6 S, 8376. New to the flora
of District of Mackenzie. Previously

208 Tue CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

known in Canada only from Manitoba
to southern Ontario and eastward (Scog-
gan, 1957).

Bidens cernua L. In mud along shore
of Stagg River, mile 49 S, 8308. Pre-
viously known in District of Mackenzie
only from near Fort Smith (Cody,

Vol. 76

1957). Our collection extends the known
North American range of this species
northward some 190 miles.

Tanacetum vulgare L. Weedy area on
bluff overlooking Mackenzie River, mile
3.5 N, 8428. New to the flora of District
of Mackenzie.

REFERENCES

Copy, W. J. 1957. New plant records for
northern Alberta and southern Mackenzie
District. Canadian Field-Naturalist 70:
101-130.

1960. Plants of the vicinity of
Norman Wells, Mackenzie District, North-
west Territories. Canadian Field-Natural-
ist 74: 71-100.

Porsitp, A. E., and H. Crum. 1961. The
vascular flora of Liard Hotsprings, B.C.,
with notes on some bryophytes. National
Museum of Canada Bulletin 171: 131-197.

Raup, H. M. 1936. Phytogeographic
studies in the Athabaska-Great Slave Lake
region. I. Catalogue of the vascular plants.
Journal of the Arnold Arboretum 17:
180-315.

——--—— 1947. The botany of south-
western Mackenzie. Sargentia 6: 1-275.
————— 1959. The willows of boreal

western America. Contributions from the
Gray Herbarium, Harvard University
185: 3-95.

Scocean, H. J. 1957. Flora of Manitoba.
National Museum of Canada Bulletin 140.

TerasMaeg, J., and B. G. Crate. 1958. Dis-
covery of fossil Ceratophyllum demersum
L. in Northwest Territories, Canada.
Canadian Journal of Botany 36: 567-569.

Turret, J. W. 1961. New plant records
for southwestern District of Mackenzie.
Canadian Field-Naturalist 75: 111-121.

Received for publication 3 August 1962

Ws

THE GLACIATION OF THE QUEEN CHARLOTTE
ISLANDS*

ATHOLL SUTHERLAND BROWN

Department of Mines and Petroleum Resources, Victoria, B.C.
and

HucH NaAsMITH
R. C. Thurber and Associates Ltd., Victoria, B.C.

INTRODUCTION

Tue Queen Cuartotte Islands which lie off the mainland coast of British
Columbia were completely glaciated during the Pleistocene epoch. The
glaciation is known to be that of the Wisconsin stage because of its freshness,
the superposition of glacial sediments, and one Carbon 14 date. Evidence of
earlier stages is either modified or destroyed, but the evidence of the latest
glaciation is abundant, fresh, varied, and widespread. Nevertheless, biologists
of many specialties have thought that these islands were either unglaciated,
only partially glaciated, or unglaciated in the latest stage. In their view,
problems of endemism and species distribution are best explained by a lack of
glaciation. Statements by biologists have ranged from unqualified ones that the
islands were unglaciated to carefully reasoned arguments that such must have
been the case. The pervasiveness of the idea and variety of its adherents is
partly shown by the following quotations.

1. “While there may be room for scepticism regarding the survival on Van-
couver Island of a pre-ice age residual fauna, there can be no doubt
concerning the Queen Charlotte Islands. Here there is no evidence of an
overriding ice cap and the distinctive fauna, including such unique mammal
species as Rangifer dawsoni, Martes nesophila and Mustela haidoreum, the
races Ursus americanus carlottae, Peromyscus sitkensis prevostensis and
Sorex obscurus prevostensis, together with well characterized races of
Steller Jay, Pine Grosbeak, Hairy Woodpecker and Saw-whet Owl testi-
fies to a long period of isolation. ‘That part, at least, of this fauna is of
preglacial or interglacial origin seems to be an inescapable conclusion.”
(McCabe and Cowan, 1945, p. 158).

2. “No evidence of glaciation is found at certain places, and it is further a
possibility that existing biota have been derived from these areas of the
preglacial land mass... If parts of the upland were not covered by the
glacier complex, it seems reasonable to assume, in view of existing distri-
butions, that plants could survive there and tolerate the rigor of the

*Published by permission of the Chief, Mineralogical Branch, Department of Mines and Petroleum
Resources, Victoria, B.C.

209

210 Tue CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST Vol. 76

environment ... [Langara] Island has a maximum elevation of 523 feet
and shows no indication of having been glaciated.” (Heusser, 1955. p.
44), 443, 447),

3. “... our field observations indicate that, although there was a limited
alpine Pleistocene refuge on the summit of the Queen Charlotte Range,
the lowlands seem to have been fully glaciated and there is no evidence
any lowland plants persisted.” (Calder and Saville, 1959, page 64).

4. “Langara Island and much of the Queen Charlotte Islands escaped glacia-
tion.” (Beebe, 1960, page 153).

The writers cannot judge the validity of the biological evidence and
interpretation but they do wish to state the evidence of glaciation simply and
unequivocally so that biologists will consider alternative explanations for the
anomalies.

GEOLOGICAL STUDIES

Published geological works about the islands are few, most are old, and
all with the exception of G. M. Dawson’s (1880) refer but little to glacial
features. Dawson visited the islands for 24 months in 1878, travelling by a
small sailing schooner in what was evidently a particularly poor summer. He
had not the benefit of air photographs or road cuts. Nor did he climb any
mountains. Moreover, his studies included the whole range of natural history.
Nevertheless the number and accuracy of his glacial observations is remarkable
and his general outline sound considering the limitations. Dawson (1880, p.
89B) summarized his observations in the following sentence, “We find every-
where in the Queen Charlotte Islands evidence of the descent of glacier ice
from the axial range of mountains toward the sea, and little or none of the
passage across the group of any more ponderous ice mass.”

MacKenzie (1916) studied the bedrock geology of Graham Island and
particularly the coal-bearing Cretaceous rocks, but his glacial observations
were meager and largely incorrect. For example, he postulated that Yakoun
Lake was unglaciated although roches moutonnées and striae can be observed
on the very islands he cites as evidence. Furthermore the north end of the
lake is dammed by a terminal moraine opening south that was formed at a
late valley glacier stage. MacKenzie has been widely quoted by those looking
to the geological literature to support their beliefs.

More recent studies also have been chiefly concerned with bedrock
geology or mineral exploration. Holland and Nasmith (1958) studied the
beach sands of Graham Island in connection with their black sand content.
Sutherland Brown and Jeffrey (1960) issued a preliminary geological map of
the southern part of the islands. Studies by the British Columbia Department
of Mines and Petroleum Resources have been continued with a view to
publishing a bulletin on the geology of the whole of the Queen Charlotte
Islands.

1962 SUTHERLAND Brown AND NAsmirH: GULacIATION oF Q.C.I. 211

COLANGARA DIXON ENTRANCE
I.

ROSE SPIT

MASSET

EAGLE HILL

CAPE BALL

GRAHAM : HECATE

RENNELL SOUND

aut
ISLAND SKIDEGATEINLET
O\ SANDSPIT
STRAIT

PACIFIC

+ d SHEWA INLET ==
MORESBY LOUISE |.
ym

KOOTENAY
INLET
TASU SOUND

POCKET INLET

ISLAND SCAAT HBR.

Mee

27.20 10 20 KUNGHIT
SCALE >= MILES ANTHONY I. © Ie

Physiographic boundary

Figure | 527

Figure 1. A map of the Queen Charlotte Islands, British Columbia, ae the physio-
graphic subdivisions and the localities mentioned in the text.

212 THe CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST Vol. 76

Tue GLAcIAL CONCEPT

The concept of a widespread ice age was first proposed in Europe by
Louis Agassiz in 1837 less than forty years before Dawson’s studies in the
Queen Charlotte Islands. Agassiz originally believed that the ice sheet that
covered much of Europe was an expansion of Arctic ice. It was not until
the middle of the century that he recognized that continental ice masses
originated as expansions of existing ice fields brought about by climatic
change.

Glaciers form in regions of high snow precipitation and low melting rate
where an accumulation of winter snow remains unmelted throughout the
summer season and is buried by the snows of the following winter. The
pressure of the load of succeeding annual increments of snow converts the
snow to ice which then extrudes from the area of accumulation to some
point below the snow line where the glacier melts. The position of the
terminus of the glacier is determined by the equilibrium established between
winter accumulation and summer melting. The glaciers expand or contract
in response to changes in the pattern of precipitation and melting.

The onset of a major ice age is initiated by a radical change in climate
which produces expansion of local mountain glaciers first through a stage of
valley glaciers which then coalesce to form piedmont glaciers. “The piedmont
glaciers in turn build up to thicknesses which exceed the heights of the
mountains which were the gathering grounds in the earlier stage of glaciation.
The ice sheet then takes on the proportions of mountain ranges and pro-
foundly influences the climate, perpetuating the ice sheet until a radical
amelioration of climate brings about the decay and disappearance of the ice
sheets, the pledmons, glaciers, the valley glaciers, and in some places even the
local alpine glaciers.*

Evidences of each stage of glaciation remain to confirm the eee and
extent of the ice sheets during the ice age. “The existence of former alpine
glaciers in locations where they do not exist today is shown by cirques, erratic
boulders, and striated and polished bedrock. ‘The period of intensive valley
glaciation in mountainous regions is marked by bold topographic features, such
as glacially eroded U-shaped valleys and fiords, as well as roches moutonnées,
striated bedrock, and erratic boulders. The period of piedmont glaciers is
marked by all the foregoing features but in addition lineal features show con-
verging trends in the mountains and a fanning out or diverging trend beyond
the mountain front. The magnitude and extent of the ice sheet at its maximum
stage is revealed by the distribution of glacial deposits and erratic boulders, by
patterns of striations and grooving of bedrock and unconsolidated deposits,
and by a softening of the topography of mountainous regions overridden by
significant quantities of ice.

*This sequence of stages is described in detail by Davis and Mathews (1944) and the interested
reader should consult that paper.

1962 SUTHERLAND BROWN AND NaAsmiIrTH: GLACIATION OF Q.C.I. 213

OUTWASH PLAIN

aeeeme ICE DIVIDE

ye) 10
SCALE ceo eo NILES

Figure 2

Figure 2. A diagram showing the direction of ice movement indicated by striae, roches
moutonnées, flutings, and drumlins observed on the ground and on airphotos. An ice
divide and late glacial outwash plain are shown.

214 THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST Vol. 76

EvmENCE OF GLACIATION OF QUEEN CHARLOTTE ISLANDS

The Queen Charlotte Islands were completely glaciated. ‘This is shown
substantially by Figure 2 which illustrates the direction of ice movements in-
dicated by glacial striae, roches moutonnées, flutings, and drumlins observed
on the ground and on air photographs. Good examples of these features from
widely separated localities are shown on Figures 3, 4, 6, and 7. In particular,
Figure 3 is a mosaic of air photographs of Langara Island and vicinity and
illustrates the intensely fluted and drumlinized character of this low area that
has been said by biologists to be unglaciated. Almost certainly they have
judged this area to be unglaciated because of the character of the shoreline
where glacial features have been largely destroyed. A drop in sea level from
a post glacial high about 25 feet above the present level has left a relatively
wide zone affected by wave cutting. The limits of this cutting are clearly
shown on the figure. In general, glacial features have only been completely
destroyed along exposed sea coasts formed of poorly lithified, weak, or highly
jointed rocks; elsewhere they are abundantly evident.

The surface of the Queen Charlotte ice sheet is judged by topographic
features, erratic boulders, and striae to be about 3,000 feet. Peaks above 3,000
feet tend to be matterhorns with very steep slopes. They could have projected
above the main ice surface as nunataks but would have been subject to a
rigorous climate swept by gales and snowslides. Only 3.5 square miles of
land surface are above the 3,000-foot elevation.

On the west coast the glaciers would discharge freely to the open sea and
the idea might be entertained that between the glacier filled fiords there might
have been unglaciated terrains. However, evidence of the level of the perma-
nent snowline is given by the elevation of the floors of the lowest group of
cirques and these are at or below present sea level. “Therefore the only open
ground might have been on some of the steep slopes which like the nunataks
would have been subject to severe climatic conditions and swept by snowslides.
Figure 10 shows a small cirque lake on the west coast near Kootenay Inlet
which has its base below sea level. Similar cirques are well illustrated on maps
of the National Topographic Series of the west coast, particularly sheets
103B/12. west, 103C/16 west, and 103F/2 east.

The ubiquitous distribution of glacial till further shows the complete
glaciation of the islands. Lower slopes and hills in mountain and plateau
regions are mantled by till from Kunghit to Langara Islands and the whole
of the lowland is covered by it. Commonly two tills are evident with some-
what differing characteristics. At low elevations the lower till is rudely
stratified and is evidently a stony marine clay to till. The tills are the young-
‘est deposits except for outwash sands and gravels. In the triangular area from
Masset to Cape Ball to Rose Spit the till is overlain by thick outwash sand and
gravels deposited in an active stage during the general waning of the latest
ice age. Figure 5 shows a thick section of Pleistocene deposits exposed on
the shore near Eagle Hill in which two tills and overlying outwash sands are
evident.

1962. SUTHERLAND Brown Anp NasmitH: GLactATIon oF Q.C.I. 215

Ficure 3. A mosaic of airphotos showing the intense fluting of Langara and adjacent
Graham Islands. The Recent wave-cut bench on which glacial features have been
destroyed is outlined and the approximate location is marked of a bog sample by
Heusser from which peat at the bottom gave Carbon 14 age of 10,850800 years B.P.

216 Tue CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST Vol. 76

The pattern shown on Figure 2 indicates that all the ice traversing the
islands was generated on them. ‘The ice moved outward from an ice divide
along the general height of land. The ice flowing westward probably formed
a small ice shelf whereas that flowing eastward had a pattern impressed on it
by contact with the ice sheet from the mainland. The natural flow of much
of the Queen Charlotte ice would be to the southeast in the direction of the
topographic gradient were it not in equilibrium with mainland-generated ice.
The actual flow was toward the northwest except south of Burnaby Island.
The vigour of the Queen Charlotte ice field was such that equilibrium was
established well off the present shoreline and mainland ice was diverted sea-
ward through Dixon Entrance and Queen Charlotte Sound. Major ice shelfs
formed seaward of Langara and Kunghit Islands.

The age of the glaciation may be judged to be Wisconsin by the freshness
of the erosional features, by the unweathered nature of the glacial deposits,
and by the absence of significant overlying non-glacial deposits. This con-
clusion is confirmed by the one absolute age as yet available (Broecker and
Kulp, 1957, p. 1325) which is quoted as follows:

“Sample of limnic peat at a depth of 6.6 m in muskeg on Langara Island.
Pollen profiles reveal a very early postglacial record. The sample should
closely date the retreat of the Cordilleran ice from the ocean border.

Submitted by C. J. Heusser. Age (yr) 10,850+800”

The approximate location from which this sample was taken is marked on
Figure 3. The material is from the bottom of the organic part of the boring
of a peat bog. Heusser (1955, p. 439) notes in regard to the portion from
which the sample was taken. “This lower portion of Period I may be con-
sidered a late-glacial subdivision.”

Figure 4. Glacial striations and grooves in rocks near the entrance to Tasu Sound are
indicative of the intense glacial erosion produced by an ice tongue flowing out this
channel. Glacial erosion is believed to be responsible for the deep fiords which
indent the coast of both the mainland of British Columbia and the Queen Charlotte
Islands.

Figure 5. A section of Pleistocene and Recent deposits exposed in a wave-cut cliff at
Eagle Hill on the east coast of Graham Island consists of stony clay, till, and outwash
sands and gravels typical of the glacial deposits found elsewhere along the British
Columbia coast.

FicureE 6. Glacial striae on rock surfaces at sea level on Anthony Island. Weathering
rapidly destroys these features and clear examples are commonly found only where
protective overburden has recently been stripped away. They were, however, observed
in all parts of the islands.

Figure 7. Glacial grooves and striations on shales near Sandspit recently exposed and
rapidly being destroyed by stream erosion in a small rill.

1962 SUTHERLAND Brown anv NasmitH: GraciATIon or Q.CI. 217

218 Tue CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST Vol. 76

CONCLUSIONS

The evidence obtained from geological studies clearly indicates that
during the Wisconsin period the Queen Charlotte Islands were buried by
glacial ice. “This ice was generated in the mountainous regions of the islands
and flowed outward to join ice from glaciers in the coastal mountains. At the
maximum stage of glaciation probably not more than 3.5 square miles of the
land surface stood above the glacier ice and this small area was subject to
severe arctic climate and swept by snow and rock slides to produce a most
inhospitable environment.

Although details regarding the timing and sequence of glacial events are
uncertain, a Carbon 14 date on material from Langara Island suggests that the
islands became ice-free about the same time that the general retreat of glaciers
was occurring throughout the rest of British Columbia and North America.

REFERENCES
Beese, F. L. 1960. The Marine Peregrines ————— 1960. Late-Pleistocene Environ-
of the Northwest Pacific Coast. The ments of North Pacific North America.
Condor 62: 145-189. American Geographic Society Special
Broecker, W. S., and Kuzp, J. L. 1957. Publication No. 35.

Ho ttanp, S. S., and NasmitH, H. W. 1958.
Investigation of Beach Sands. British Co-

Lamont Natural Radiocarbon Measure-
ments IV. Science 126: 1324-1334. sia aD ae
mip: t t 5
Carper, J. A., and Savitte, D. B. O. 1959. M G = T as g he T4045
Studies in Saxifragaceae. Brittonia 11: 49- CUBE, 2s iy BG 2 aan i
Peromyscus maniculatus macrorhinus and
67. ; :
the Problem of Insularity. Transactions
Royal Canadian Institute 1945: 117-215.

MacKenziz, J. D. 1916. Geology of Gra-
ham Island, B.C. Memoir 88, Geological
Survey of Canada.

SUTHERLAND Brown, A. 1960. Physio-
graphy of the Queen Charlotte Islands.

Dawson, G. M. 1880. Report on the
Queen Charlotte Islands. Report of Pro-
gress 1878-79. Geological Survey of Can-
ada.

Davis, N. F. G., and Matuews, W. H.
1944. Four Phases of Glaciation from

Southern British Columbia. Journal of
Geology 52: 403-413.

Heusser, C. J. 1955. Pollen Profiles from
the Queen Charlotte Islands, B.C. Can-

Canadian Geographical Journal 61: 30-37.
SUTHERLAND Brown, A., and JEFFREY, W. G.
1960. Preliminary Geological Map,
Southern Queen Charlotte Islands. Bri-

adian Journal of Botany 33: 429-449. tish Columbia Department of Mines.

Received for publication 7 June 1962

Ficure 8. An example near Pocket Inlet of one of the small matterhorns that may have
projected above the Queen Charlotte ice sheet.

Ficure 9. Erratic boulder of pillow basalt at Scaat Harbour typical of numerous glacial
transported boulders observed throughout the Queen Charlotte Islands up to elevations
of 2,000 feet. Subdued topography of the mountains in the background indicate that
they were overridden by ice during the maximum stage of glaciation.

Ficure 10. A view looking southwesterly toward entrance of Kootenay Inlet shows a
small lake occupying a cirque basin. The present lake level is 115 feet above sea
level and it is clear that when the cirque was being formed: the local snow line was
near present sea level.

1962 SUTHERLAND Brown AND NasmirH: GLACIATION OF Q.CLI. 219

REVIEWS

Silent Spring

By Racuet Carson. The Riverside Press,
Cambridge, Massachusetts. 1962. 368 p.,
illus. $5.95.

If you are a good citizen, farmer,
biologist, gardener, fisherman, legislator,
-bird watcher, forester, doctor or a
chemical producer, then you should read
this book by one of the world’s fore-
most scientific writers. It receives the
reviewer's highest recommendation.

Silent Spring discusses the deletarious
effects of chemicals used in the control
of insects and weeds. Following the dis-
covery of DDT, a host of control chem-
icals have come into the world: dieldrin,
aldrin, endrin, the alkyl phosphates.
More are being created. With the pre-
liminary findings on the utility of certain
chemicals in killing certain organisms,
the miracle of modern industry and
advertising systems have produced tons
of these compounds which are being
spread across the land by farmers,
gardeners, as well as government agen-
cies of all levels. It is only now that the
disturbing side effects of these chemicals
are coming to be known and that studies
are being begun on the effects of the
poisons on organisms other than those
they were intended to kill. Many of the
chemicals are highly toxic to man, many
cause cancer or sterility. A_ single
example of toxicity from the book will
suffice: “In Florida two children found
an empty bag and used it to repair a
swing. Shortly thereafter both of them
died and three of their playmates be-
came ill. The bag had once contained
an insecticide called parathion, one of
the organic phosphates; tests established
death by parathion poisoning.” (Keep
pesticides out of reach of children!).

220

Nor is it only the direct effects of
these poisons which are to be feared.
Spraying of spruce budworms in Canada
has killed salmon and the invertebrates
they feed upon. Spraying for Dutch elm
disease has decimated the bird popula-
tions in many cities. They kill many
other insects which are not only neces-
sary to the balance of nature but also in
the fertilizing of useful plants and trees.
In many cases, control through chem-
icals is a crutch and not a cure. Re-
spraying is required. Immunity to sprays
has developed in several species.

Is this book a panicy negative attack
by a nature lover? No! It is a carefully
and elegantly written report by a noted
biologist—the author of the book The
Sea Around Us. Not only are the follies
of chemical control pointed out, but
alternate means of control are suggested.
Positive as well as negative criticism is
presented. Biological controls may be
permanent, selective, inexpensive and
leave no poisonous residues. This re-
quires basic research into the lives of
animals and plants. The female gypsy
moth lures the male with perfume. Syn-
thetic perfume can be used to trap or
confuse males. Another new method is
releasing infertile male insects with the
consequence normal males are displaced
and the female lays eggs which do not
hatch. With this method houseflies were
nearly wiped out from an island in only
five weeks. The screw-worm fly has
been eliminated from the southeastern
states.

It is evident that chemical insecticides
and herbicides must be subject to legis-
lative control (just as much as in the
field of medical chemicals, as has been

1962

shown during the recent thalidomide
cases). Proper labelling of containers as
to toxicity, antidotes, and full precau-
tions in use is required. Minimal levels
of spraying on farm products for new
chemicals need to be determined. Spray-
ing of large areas of land should require
permission from the departments whose
resources will be effected—water, wild-
life, fishery, forest and public health. To
Save one resource while endangering
others is not justifiable. Certain chem-
icals might require withdrawal from the
market. Further research is required on
the effects of pesticides, by industry
and/or governments. Now is the time
for considered action to be taken.

While it may be expected that there
will be resistance from the unenlighten-
ed portion of the chemical industry to
ideas in this book, it is expected that the
more advanced portion will modify their
practices and take advantage of possibi-
lities in biological controls. The same
may be said of the organizations that
utilize pesticides.

It is just as important to test pesticides
for their long and short term effects on
health as it is to properly test medicinal
drugs. For the pesticides are sprayed on
the food we eat, in the air we breathe
and the water we drink.

Basic biological research, as well as
increasing the fund of human knowl-
edge, provides a well of information
which can be drawn upon for practical
application, such as biological control of
pests.

Rachel Carson is to be commended
for the excellent style in which this
book is written and for the care she has
taken in documentation. She is to be
commended for her good citizenship in
writing it. It is to be hoped that she wi'l
be rewarded by a spring which is no
longer silent but resounds with the carol-
ling of birds.

D. E. McALuisTer

National Museum of Canada
Ottawa, Ontario

REvIEWsS 221

The Saturday Morning Gardener

By Donatp Wyman. MacMillan, New York
1962. 236 p.

This is not a book for the specialist
who treasures his collections of irises,
lilacs, roses and many of the other stand-
ard garden plants. The emphasis in this
book is on easy maintenance. The au-
thor, Donald Wyman, is Horticulturist
at the Arnold Arboretum, Boston, Mas-
sachusetts. He is a noted author of books
on trees, shrubs and ground covers and
of many articles on ornamental plant
materials. In this book he has successful-
ly approached the subject of gardening
from a new and helpful point of view.

This is an up-to-date book containing
not only the newest cultivars but also
many newly introduced species of both
herbaceous and woody plant materials.
The author discusses not only trees,
shrubs and ground covers but also
perennials, bulbs, vegetables and fruits.
Lawns are referred to, but not in detail.
It is encouraging to see that many of the
better native herbaceous and woody
plants are recommended. Dr. Wyman
has also gone into considerable. detail
on the latest labour saving materials for
mulches, and chemical aids for the
gardener. The author recommends
against any plants which require time-
consuming spraying, pruning, or other
types of care. His observations, however,
are often made because of troubles with
plants in his area. These same problems
do not always afflict the plants in other
regions.

Many of the plants, as the author

states, are new or rare in cultivation but

these varieties of better quality must be
recommended in books of this type if
the gardening public is to be made aware
of them. It is often only through re-
peated demands by the public that
nurserymen will be persuaded to grow
many of these newer or better, but often
difficult-to-propagate varieties.

This book will be a definite aid to the
Canadian gardener who does not want .

222

to spend all of his free time in the
garden weeding, spraying or pruning.
However, as this book’ is written first
for gardeners in the eastern and central
United States those in the colder regions
of Canada will not find many of their
dependable ornamentals recommended,
but only because there are many more
plants to choose from in the milder
climates. This book will, however, bring
the gardeners of this country up-to-date
on the latest in materials and plants for
a low maintenance, yet attractive garden.

L. C. SHERK,

Ornamentals Research Officer,
Plant Research Institute,
Ottawa, Ontario

The Strange Lives of Familiar Insects

By Epwin Way Teate. Dodd, Mead and
Company, New York. 1962. 203 p., il'us.
$500 (Canada)

Edwin Way Teale has long been re-
cognized as an enthusiastic naturalist
and a writer with a talent for charming
his readers. This talent is displayed again
in his present book. It is by no means his
best work, but it is nonetheless an enjoy-
able introduction to the world cf the
insects. What he says here has been said
before in much the same way by other
authors, but the Teale touch makes it
somehow much more appealing.

The strange world of the insects is
too large to be sampled easily and Mr.
Teale has ventured to portray it mainly
through the lives of some of its familiar
inhabitants. The book is divided into

THe CANnapiAN FIELD-NATURALIST

Vol. 76

three parts. Part I, “The Strangeness of
Insect Life”, introduces the theme with
tales of oddities among the insects, Part
II, “What Life is Like for an Insect”,
sketches the essentials of insect physio-
logy. Here we are acquainted with how
an insect is born and how it grows, sees,
smells, tastes, breathes, communicates,
etc. The final part, “Lives of Familiar
Insects” is the main portion and is de-
voted to accounts of the lives of four-
teen insects selected to represent some
of the main orders of the phylum. Most
of these insects, for example the may
fly, cricket, house fly, and dragon fly,
will be quite familiar to readers but the
stories of their lives may come as some-
thing new and strange. Some of the
other ones such as the cinch bug, lace-
wing fly, and cicada-killer wasp are
perhaps less well known and their lives
still more astonishing. The book is illus-
trated with twenty-six expert black and
white photographs by the author and a
series of charming drawings by Su Zan
N. Swain.

Recent knowledge on some facets of
insect life, for example the migrations
of the monarch butterfly, have been
overlooked or ignored by the author and
his bibliography contains few references
to new texts. However this does not
detract seriously from the stories he tells
and the book should appeal to any of
Teale’s many followers and to all who
are curious about insects and wish to
explore their lives more closely.

J. W. ArnoLp

We

NOTES

The Spread of the European
Hare to the Ottawa Region of
Ontario

THE spreaD of the European hare
Lepus europaeus in Ontario, to 1952,
has been documented by Reynolds (1955,
Canadian Field-Naturalist 69(1): 14-20).
In 1912 seven hares are thought to have
escaped from captivity about three miles
south of Brantford, Brant County, On-
tario. Since that time the species has
successfully colonized much of southern
Ontario. Reynolds (1955) recorded the
most eastern specimen, known to him,
from highway 38 near Hartington, Fron-
tenac County, collected in 1948.

On January 14, 1961 Mr. Gifford
Johnson, of Ottawa, shot a large brown
hare that had been with a group of
snowshoes rabbits. The specimen, now
in the National Museum of Canada, is
an adult male; total length 590 mm; tail
72 mm; hind foot 152 mm; ear 114 mm;
NMC 28657, from 12 miles south of
Ottawa, Carleton County. This specimen
represents a north-easterly range exten-
sion of approximately eighty miles.
During the winter of 1961-62 I received
reports of several European hares in
the Ottawa region and one road kill
from five miles east-northeast of Ottawa
was examined by me.

At present there are few European
hares in the Ottawa district. However, a
questionnaire kindly answered by
twenty-seven Conservation Officers of

the Ontario Department of Lands and:

Forests support these indications of a
true easterly extension of range. Un-

7093

suitable environment probably limits
much northern movement. The record
from Burks Falls, Parry Sound County,
reported by Downing (1948, Royal On-
tario Museum of Zoology, Miscellaneus
Publications 2:1-11) is far north of the
present range of the species and was
probably the result of an unsuccessful
local introduction.

European hares are abundant and in-
creasing in numbers in the area of Madoc
in Hastings County, but swampland
north of Mill Bridge has prevented
further movement north. More north-
ern distribution may, however, result
from planned introductions by the co-
Operative efforts of the Bancroft Fish
and Game Association and the Frank-
ford Fish and Game Club.

Hares seem firmly established in the
Gananoque-Lansdowne area in Leeds
County and sightings have been reported
a few miles north of Maitland, Gren-
ville County and in the vicinity of Smiths
Falls in Lanark and Leeds Counties.

If recent records and the records of
Reynolds (1955) are plotted on a map
it will be noted that the European hare
has extended its range, in Ontario, ap-
proximately 300 miles easterly since
1912.

I am indebted to Conservation Of-
ficers, R. L. Ramsbottom, A. J. Ruxton,
J. J. Thibadeau, C. D. Thompson, R.
Lorne Irvine, E. W. Munro and E. E.
Blackman for much of the above distri-
butional information.

Pumire M. YouNGMAN

' National Museum of Canada

Ottawa, Ontario
17 May 1962

224

White-fronted Geese Breeding
in the Thelon Valley, N.W.T.

CiarKE, (1940, National Museum of
Canada Bulletin 96:1-135) saw only one
flock of fifteen White-fronted Geese,
Anser albifrons ssp., on the Thelon and
concluded there was doubt whether this
area should be included in the breeding
range of the species. Kelsall (1952, The
Thelon Game Sanctuary, MS in files of
Canadian Wildlife Service) saw White-
fronted Geese only on August 3 and 4
during a two-week canoe trip down the
Thelon River from the Hanbury-Thelon
junction to Beverly Lake. He observed
eleven downy young in almost the exact
area of our 1960 summer investigations.
(As a matter of interest I might add here
that Kelsall (pers. comm.) banded two
of the eleven young White-fronts, one
of which was shot near Winnipeg in
1955). Kelsall (op. cit.) records his
doubt that White-fronted Geese were
breeding along the Thelon to any ex-
tent.

Judging from the many broods of four
to six downy young observed, the
White-fronted Goose was an abundant
breeder in 1960 in the area near our
camp on the river. Our field camp
was located on the shore of the Thelon
River about 175 miles west of Baker
Lake, in the Keewatin District, North-
west Territories. Barry (pers. comm.)
noted at least thirty broods of White-
fronts between Beverly and Aberdeen
Lakes and in a small marshy area beside
the Thelon River, ten miles west of the
end of Beverly Lake, during an aerial
census on August 22, 1960. Earlier,
Snyder (1957, Arctic Birds of Canada.
University of Toronto Press) also de-
lineated both the Baillie and Back Rivers
and Beverly Lake areas as known nest-
ing grounds for the White-fronted
Goose. Similarly, Mowat and Lawrie
(1955, Canadian Field-Naturalist 69(3):
93-116) reported a brood of nine White-
fronts at Beverly Lake on July 23, 1949.

Tue Canapian Frevcp-NaTuURALIST

Vol. 76

There is no doubt, then, that in
recent years the Thelon River area has
gained considerably in importance as a
breeding area for White-fronted Geese.

E. Kuyt

707 Dufferin Avenue,
Saskatoon, Saskatchewan.
18 May, 1962

A Colour Mutant of the Yellow
Perch from Lake Erie

A STRANGELY cCoLOURED yellow perch,
Perca flavescens, has been forwarded to
the R.O.M. (Cat. No. 21833) by Dr.
H. Regier, Research Division, Ontario
Department of Lands and _ Forests,
Wheatley, Ontario. It was collected on
June 4, 1962 by Wm. Krause on the
west side of Pt. Pelee in a pound net
set six miles north of the tip of the
point. It was shipped frozen and on ice
and arrived in a very fresh condition.
When caught measurements were as
follows: 6.7 inches fork length, 7.0
inches total length and 0.14 Ibs. weight.
It was three years of age. The general
body shape of this individual was typical
of a yellow perch. However, the ground
colour was bright orange instead of
yellow to yellow-green and there were
no dark vertical bars.

Colour Description: An ektachrome
slide was taken after the fish was thawed
out in water and colour notes and a
colour sketch were made immediately
afterward.

The back, sides (to an irregular, wavy
line below the lateral line) and top of
head were a solid, bright, but trans-
parent orange. The closest colour in the
Villalobos Colour Atlas is 017-12° (Vil-
lalobos-Dominquez, C. and J. Villalobos,
1947. Colour Atlas, Buenos Aires, El
Ateneo: 46 pp. + colour charts). The
lower sides and ventral surface were
milky’ white. There were, on the top of
the head between the eyes and between
the nares, patches of black composed of
densely concentrated black speckles.

1962

There was a black mid-dorsal line, from
the occiput to the origin of the spiny
dorsal, formed in the same manner. The
remainder of the back and orange part
of the sides were finely speckled with
black. Some areas on the sides were
darker as a result of the coalescence of
many of these speckles. There were no
vestiges, on the fresh unpreserved animal
or after preservation in formalin, of the
usual broad, dark green, vertical bars on
the sides. The cheek and lower opercu-
lum were brilliant metallic-silver and
very mirror-like. The upper one-fifth of
the operculum was orange.

The first dorsal spine was black, sub-
sequent spines had orange to yellow
bases and terminal sections and were
clear between. The first interspine mem-
brance was totally black; the other mem-
branes had a terminal band of black
gradually decreasing in depth from the
second spine.

The first ray of the soft dorsal was
orange. The tips of all other rays were
orange to yellow and speckled with
black. The dorsal edge of the soft dorsal
fin appeared to be black bordered as a
result of the speckling on the rays. The
orange on the last rays created the im-
pression of an orange patch at the upper
rear edge of the soft dorsal.

The rear edge of the caudal appeared
black as a result of the fact that the tips
of the rays were pigmented. The bases
of the caudal rays were orange to yel-
low. Neither orange nor black pigment
was present on the membrane of the
caudal fin.

The pectoral fin rays had orange tips
with black specks. The mid section of
the first ray of the pelvic fins was deep
orange. Otherwise the fin was clear.

The central third of each anal ray,
from the second and excluding the last
two, was bright orange. The membrane
and remainder of the anal rays were
clear. Where not pigmented with orange
or black, the rays, spmes and membranes

Notes

225

of the fins were clear and transparent,
not dusky.

The pupil of the eye was black. The
upper crescent section of the white-of-
the-eye was the same orange colour and
speckled with black. The tips of the
upper and lower jaws had patches of
black pigment. The ventral edges of the
preopercular and subopercular bones
were typically serrated.

The fin formula was as follows: Dor-
sal fins (1) XIII (2) II 13; Anal II 7;
Ventrals I 5; Pectorals 12.

After preservation in 10°% formalin
for two and one-half days, most of the
orange pigment had disappeared leaving
a colourless body with black speckles.
Except for colouration, this specimen
Is a typical yellow perch (Perca flave-
scens) and does not seem to indicate a
hybrid condition intermediate between
this species and any other. Only one
individual of this kind was found in the
catch and this form had never been seen
before by Mr. Krause. It would then
appear that this is a colour mutant of
the yellow perch.

E. J. Crossman

Department of Ichthyology and Herpetology,
Royal Ontario Museum, University of Toronto
Toronto 5, Ontario.

7 June 1962

Recent Additions to the
Nipissing Region, Ontario,
Bird-lists

THE sIGHT RECORDS of four new species
of birds in the Pimisi Bay area, Long.
79° O01’, Lat. 46° 16’, represent a further
eastward penetration of one species, a
northward extension of range in two
species, and a hitherto unmapped migra-
tion route for the fourth species.

On May 2, 1961, Doris McLaren of
Rutherglen asked me to name a bird in
her field whose singing was unlike any-
thing she had heard before. Upon hear-
ing it, I tentatively identified it as a
Western Meadowlark, Sturnella neglecta.

226

Some time later, Dr. Szizz of the Uni-
versity of Toronto banded the bird and
confirmed my identification. In 1962 this
meadowlark returned to the same terri-
tory for the third consecutive year.

On May 13, 1961, I saw in the Mc-
Laren barn-yard a grey bird whose
size and white markings on wings and
tail identified it as a Mocking-bird,
Mimus polyglottos. 1 observed it for
about 10 minutes during which time it
flew about the yard, sang from a fence
post, and fed on the ground at no greater
distance than I could plainly see its
lemon-yellow irises. Previous well do-
cumented sight records of the species
have been obtained by Hazel Petty who,
on May 3, 1956, found a Mocking-bird
along the shore of Lake Nipissing and,
on May 9, 1957, observed another in
the same vicinity for three days.

At a curve of the road running along
Pimisi Bay, I came upon a large raptor-
like bird on May 6, 1962 just as it was
coming down to feed on a beaver killed
by a car. At a distance of no more than
150 feet, the bird caught sight of me,
veered awkwardly, flapping its huge
wings to regain altitude, found a weak
thermal updraft upon which it slowly
soared skywards out over the lake. I
had time to note the solidly dark plum-
age as well as the peculiarly pinkish-
yellowish head with its hooked beak.
Now soaring, the bird disclosed an
evenly broad contour of the wings
without marked bends or kinks, held at
a distinctly dihedral angle to identify
it as a Turkey Vulture, Cathartes aura.
As the vulture returned once more to
the beaver carcass, a Common Crow,
Corvus brachyrhynchos, attacked it, giv-
ing me a good Opportunity to compare
sizes. But finding me still there, the
bird soared aloft. As it coasted down-
wind out of sight, I caught fleeting
glimpses of it through windows in the
wispy clouds.

Just before sunset on May 15, 1962,
my husband and I saw a flock of about

THe Canapian Fietp-NaturAtist

Vol. 76

85 large honking snow-white birds with
conspicuous black wing-tips flying south
over Pimisi Bay. With little hesitation
we identified them as Snow Geese, Chen
hyperborea. Vhe next morning three
more flocks were seen flying southwards,
giving a total of 215 Snow Geese sight-
ed. Six days later, I came upon a lone
Snow Goose feeding in a field. As I
crept up within 100 feet of it, the bird
took flight, circling into the wind low
over my head to make positive identi-
fication doubly assured.

Louise pe Kiriingt LAwreNcEe

Pimisi Bay, R. R. No. 1,
Rutherglen, Ontario
26 June 1961

A Range Extension and
Behaviour Notes for the
Banded Rudderfish in
Nova Scotia

THE BANDED RUDDERFISH, Seriola zonata
(Mitchill), is considered uncommon in
Canadian waters according to recent
publications (Bigelow and Schroeder,
1953, United States Fish and Wildlife
Service, Fisheries Bulletin No. 74; Leim
and Day, 1959, Journal of the Fisheries
Research Board of Canada 16(4)). Only
two specimens have been reported from
Nova Scotia; a 1928 record from near
Liverpool, and one from the Canso
Causeway in 1955. The fish discussed
here was seen in Louisbourg Harbour,
Cape Breton County, in 1961 and ex-
tends the official northern range limit
about seventy miles to the northeast.
Whether this paucity of reported
specimens reflects the true situation is
questionable when one considers the
statement by Vladykov and McKenzie
(1935, Proceedings of the Nova Scotia
Institute of Science 19(1): 90) that the
species “is quite well known” to Nova
Scotia fishermen who see juvenile speci-
mens around buoys and other floating
objects during the summer season. The
following account is therefore offered

1962

because it represents a specific locality
record and because of the observations
made on the behaviour exhibited by this
fish towards inanimate and animate ob-
jects at the surface and submerged.

During part of the field season of
1961, I was on loan from the Nova
Scotia Museum of Science to the Acadia
University Institute, and worked with
a team of scuba divers on a preliminary
archeological survey of the underwater
relics of the 1758 Siege of Fort Louis-
bourg. It was during these operations
that I observed a banded rudderfish and
had opportunity to note its interesting
behaviour underwater. At the time, the
distinct banded pattern and its com-
panionable behaviour towards the divers
and their equipment, led to the assump-
tion the fish was its better publicized
relative, Naucrates ductor, the pilotfish.

The fish was first seen on August 24
at a sixteen inch white plastic buoy
anchored about 400 feet offshore from
what was the town waterfront of Fort
Louisbourg in 1758. The buoy marked
the corner of an area under survey. As
four of us approached, we noticed an

inactive fish, about eight inches long,
beside the buoy. Our presence did not
frighten the fish away and it merely
darted beyond our reach when grabbed
at and then circled back towards the
buoy again. This behaviour was entirely
new in our underwater experience. Be-
fore continuing the survey work, I men-
tally noted the colour pattern and
proportions of the fish. The compressed
body, pointed snout, six dark bands, and
deeply forked tail with white tips agree
with the juvenile banded rudderfish as
described by Bigelow and Schroeder
(1953).

The next afternoon, I encountered the
same fish (or an identical one?) in the
same area, and it stayed with me for
approximately one hour. I had entered
the water in full diving gear and swum
diagonally across the corner of the cove
to untie a survey line at that shore.

Nores

227

Kneeling in three feet of water, I turned
away from shore and was startled to
find a banded rudderfish staring into
my face mask. I changed my position
several times and noted the fish kept
orienting itself to stay at the same level
as my face mask and in front of it.
Whenever I reached towards the fish, it
swam around to one side of my head
out cf my field of vision. At this point,
I swam to an underwater sled and spent
the next hour being towed by an out-
beard motorboat back and forth along
the parallel lines of our survey grid, and
the fish stayed with me the entire period.
The sled with its diver presented a most
unfishlike object. The sled consisted of
an aluminum pipe frame with a joy
stick that controlled the angle of two
lateral bright yellow ailerons. During
the survey sweeps, the depth varied from
eight to eighteen feet and occasionally
the sled was brought to the surface. In
addition, the sled was stopped now and
again to examine objects noted on the
sea floor, and yet every time it stopped,
the banded rudderfish would go coast-
ing around in front of me into my field
of vision. After one such stop, a small
tuft of filamentous alga caught on the
tow rope and as the sled again picked
up speed, the fish darted in behind the
waving seaweed and swam vigorously
and steadily, now directly in line with
my forward vision. A few moments
later, I looked up and the alga had been
swept away and the fish was again be-
hind me. Unfortunately, the manipula-
tion of the sled and searching the sea
bettom for artifacts demanded all my
attention and I could never determine
whether the fish was following close
behind my head or my feet. This
tenacious association continued for an
hour, then I dropped the sled and swam
into shore. Swimming into the shallows,
I suddenly rolled over and looked back
ard there, at mask level, was the banded
rudderfish. It remained stationary star-
ing into my face, until I stood up in the
waist deep water and looked down on

228

it, whereupon it immediately turned and
darted straight away from shore.

During the eighteen days of diving
(June 26-July 2, August 16-26) in Louis-
bourg Harbour, Seriola zonata was ob-
served only on August 24 and 25.

J. SHERMAN BLEAKNEY

Nova Scotia Museum of Science
Halifax, Nova Scotia
30 July 1962

Notes on New Brunswick Bats

Durinc Aucust and early September
1959, S. W. Gorham and D. H. Johnston
(National Museum of Canada field party
under the direction of Dr. Austin
Cameron) collected mammals and birds
in southern New Brunswick. Among
the specimens collected were sixteen
bats, one of these being a big brown
bat, Eptesicus fuscus fuscus. The speci-
mens were identified by Dr. A. W. F.
Banfield, Chief Zoologist, National
Museum of Canada. This specimen ap-
pears to be the first record of the big
brown bat for the province of New
Brunswick. Morris (1948, Journal of
Mammalogy, 29(2): 168) states: “The
big brown bat probably occurs in New
Brunswick but there are no definite
records”. He stated that a specimen had
been taken at Eastport, Maine.

The following is a list of the species
collected: Big Brown Bat, Eptesicus
fuscus, skin and skull, sex ?, (NMC
27731) collected by D. H. Johnston,

THe CANADIAN Frie_p-NaATuRALIST

Vol. 76

September 4, 1959, near St. Andrews,
N.B.; measurements 128-55-12, forearm
46, tragus 8 mm. Silver-haired Bat,
Lasionycteris noctivagans, skin and skull,
male, (NMC 27730) collected at Rusi-
gornis, N.B., August 14, 1959. Besides
the two records mentioned by Morris
(1948) there is one specimen which is
the property of the High School at
Gagetown, N.B. Eastern Red _ Bat,
Lasiurus borealis borealis, skin and skull,
male, (NMC 27732) collected near St.
Andrews, N.B. on. August 26, 1959.
Morris (1948) mentioned one definite
record. Hagmeier (1957, Canadian Field-
Naturalist, 71: 35) mentioned an identi-
fication from the vicinity of Long Lake,
Tobique Valley, as the second record
for New Brunswick. Three specimens
were collected by a National Museum
field party at St. Leonard, N.B. in 1957.
Little Brown Bat, Myotis lucifugus luct-
fugus, thirteen specymens (NMC 27787-
27799) were collected at St. Andrews,
N.B. from August 25 to September 5,
1959. Hoary Bat, Lasiurus cinereus, a
bat (almost certainly this species) was
observed in flight on August 26, 1959,
near St. Andrews, N.B. It was seen at
dusk at a height of approximately forty
feet. Morris (1948) mentioned a definite
record from Grand Manan, N.B.

STANLEY W. GorHaM
Davin H. JoHNsTON
National Museum of Canada

Ottawa, Ontario
30 May 1962

2

MUS

|

a atl cies

AN 1 {

i JAN & VU

(963 | Yd

INDEX TO VOLUME 76

Compiled by Mrs. G. R. Hanes

Accipiter gentilis atricapillus, 194

Acer negundo, 72; nigrum, 102

Achillea, 177 -

Agelaius phoeniceus phoeniceus, 197

Agropyron repens, 72; trachycaulum, 72

Agrostis stolonifera, 72

Alauda arvensis, 147-152

Albatross, Black-footed, 179; Short-tailed,
178

Alberta, The brassy minnow, river shiner
and sauger new to, by D. E. McAllister,

124

Alces alces, 150; a. andersont, 131

Alopex lagopus, 56

Ambystoma jeffersonianum, 182; laterale,
182; texanum, 182

Amelanchier alnifolia, 72

Ammodramus savannarum, 157

Amphibians and Reptiles of Illinois, The,
reviewed by J. S. Bleakney, 169

Amphibians, Notes on a collection of, from
the southwestern Ukraine, U.S.S.R. and
adjacent Czechoslovakia, by S. W. Gor-
ham, 159

Amphibians, The comparative numbers of
species of, in Canada and other countries
by S. W. Gorham, 90

Anas rubripes, 193

Anderson, Rudolph Martin, 1876-1961, In
memoriam:, by J. D. Soper, 127

Anderson, Rudolph Martin, Bibliography of,
by P. M. Youngman, 134

Andromeda glaucophylla, 201

Andropogon gerardii, 102; scoparius, 102

Anser albifrons, 224

Apios americana, 102

Apocynum androsaemsfolium, 182

Arctostaphylos alpina, 164

Arnold, J. W.
Review of: The Strange Lives of Fami-

liar Insects, 222

Aster brachyactis, 208; johannensis, 208

Atriplex patula, 207

Auk, Razor-billed, 79, 81

Aythya collaris, 194; marila nearctica, 125

229

Badger, 77

Balaenoptera musculus, 63: physalus, 62

Bat, big brown, 228; eastern red, 228; hoary,
228; little brown, 73, 228; silver-haired,
73, 228

Bats, Notes on New Brunswick, by S. W.
Gorham and D. H. Johnston, 228

Betula nana, 163

Bibliography of Rudolph Martin Anderson,
by P. M. Youngman, 134

Bidens cernua, 208

Bird notes, Recent, from the Blue Sea Lake
area in Quebec, by I. N. Gabrielson, 192

Birds, non-passerine, Eighth census of, in
the bird sanctuaries on the north shore
of the Gulf of St. Lawrence, by G. Moi-
san, 78

Birds of Simcoe County, Ontario, Further
additions to the, by O. E. Devitt, 153

Birds of the Caribbean, reviewed by W. E.
Godfrey, 116

Blackbird, Brewer’s 151; Red-winged, 191,
193, 197, Yellow-headed, 122

Blackbirds, Yellow-headed, breeding at
Rainy River, Ontario, by C. S. Churcher,
122

Bladdernut shrub at Ottawa, by W. G.
Dore, 100

Blarina, 72, 131; brevicauda, 73

Bleakney, J. Sherman
A range extension and behaviour notes
for the banded rudderfish in Nova Scotia
226
Review of: The Amphibians and Rep-

tiles of [llinois, 169

Bluebird, 193; eastern, 196

Bobolink, 191

Boloria dawsoni, 182

Bombycilla garrula, 156

Book of Canadian Animals, A, reviewed by
P. M. Youngman, 172

Bousfield, E. L.
Review of: Mayflies of Michigan Trout

Streams, 175

230

Branta canadensis leucopareia, 180;
fitti, 180; c. parvipes, 180

Brassy minnow, river shiner and sauger
new to Alberta, by D. E. McAllister, 124

Breeding record of the Field Sparrow in
Manitoba, by H. V. Hosford, 178

British Columbia, A Short-tailed Albatross
ott, by Ro Ke Waneni79

British Columbia, Some new data on intro-
gression in Flickers from, by A. J. Ers-
kine, 82

Bubo virginianus, 195

Bubulcus ibis, 120, 153

Bucephala clangula americana, 194

Bunting, Indigo, 193, 198

Buteo lagopus s. johannis, 194;; lineatus line-
atus, 194; platypterus platypterus, 194 -

Butterwort, Range extensions of, by J. L.
Parker, 125

c. mof-

Caecilians, 90-99

Calypso bulbosa, 174

Cameron, Austin W.
Mammalian dispersal in relation to an
artificial land bridge, 142

Canachites canadensis, 195

Canis, 131; latrans, 76, lupus, 56, 76; 1. gris-
eoalbus, 76; 1. nubilus 76

Caribou, 150, barren-ground, 57

Casmerodius albus, 154

Castostomus commersoni, 124

Cathartes aura, 226

Celtis occidentalis, 102

Ceratophyllum demersum, 207

Certhia famuiliaris, 155

Changes in the distribution of the snow-
shoe hare in southern Ontario, by A. de
Vos, 183

Chen hyperborea, 226

Chenopodium rubrum, 207

Chrosomus eos, 124

Churcher, Charles S.
Yellow-headed Blackbirds breeding at
Rainy River, Ontario, 122

Cicuta bulbifera, 207

Citellus franklinti, 74;
tridecemlineatus, 74

Claytonia caroliniana, 176, virginiana, 176

Clethrionomys, 72, 131; gappert, 75, 76

Cloud Forest, The, reviewed by J. R. Tam-
sitt, 116

Clupea pallasti, 117

Cody, W. J.
Sorbaria sorbifolia (L.) A. Br., false
spiraea, persisting and spreading after
cultivation in Canada, 104

richardsonu, 74;

THe CaANnapiAN Fie_p-NATURALIST

Vol. 76

Colaptes auratus, 82, 83, 84, 87; ayresi, 82,
cafer, 82, 83, 86, 87

Colias gigantea, 182

Colour mutant of the yellow perch from
Lake Erie, A, by E. J. Crossman, 224

Comparative mime of species of amphi-
bians in Canada and other countries, by
S. W. Gorham, 90

Cook, Francis R.
Review of: Wildlife Sketches — Near

and Far, 170

Cormorant, Double-creasted, 79 80, 81;
European, 79, 80, 81

Corvus brachyrhynchos, 226;
cipalis, 196

Corylus americana, 72

Coturnicops noveboracensis, 189

Couesius plumbeus, 124

Cowan, I. McTaggert
Review of: A Revision of the Reindeer

and Caribou, Genus Rangifer, 168
Cowbird, 178, 193; Brown-headed, 198

corax prin-

-Coy ote, 76 123

Coyotes, An observation of a Golden Eagle
dominating, by D. R. Flook and D. C.
Tomas, 123

Crane, Sandhill, 153, 155

Creeper, Brown, 155

Crossbill, Red, 198; White-winged, 198

Crossman, E. J.

A colour mutant of the yellow perch
from Lake Erie, 224

Crow, Common, 226

Cy.anocitta cristata bromia, 196

Cypripedium acaule, 201

Deer, 150;; white-tailed, 77
Delphinapterus leucas, 64+
Dendrocygna bicolor, 120
Dendroica caerulescens, 197; castanea, 197,
cerulea, 157; fusca, 197;
striata, 197, tigrina, 197
Desmodium canadense, 102
Devitt, Otto E.
Further additions to the birds of Simcoe
County, Ontario, 153
De Vos, Antoon
Changes in the distribution of the snow-
shoe thaze in southern Ontario, 183
Review of: Our Synthetic Environment,
171
Dicrostonyx, 56
Diomedea albatrus, 179,
Dodds, Donald G.
Late breeding in Newfoundland snow-
shoe hare, 60

nigripes, 179

magnolia, 197;

iia

1962

Dolphin, white-beaked, 62; white-sided, 62,
64

Dore, William G.
Poison sumac in eastern Ontario, 121
The bladdernut shrub at Ottawa, 100
Review of: Michigan Wildflowers, 118

Dove, Mourning, 195

Dryocopus pileatus abieticola, 195

Duck, Black, 79, 81, 192, 193; Fulvous Tree,
120; Harlequin, 154; Ring-necked, 192,
194

Duck, Fulvous Tree, in New Brunswick,

by W. A. Squires, 120

Eagle, Bald, 193, 194; Golden, 123

Eagle, Golden, dominating coyotes, An ob-
servation of, by D. R. Flook and D. C.
Thomas, 123

Egret, Cattle, 153; Common, 154

Egret, Cattle, First New Brunswick record

for the, by W. A. Squires, 120

Eider, Common, 79, 80, 81, 154

Eighth census of non-passerine birds in the
bird sanctuaries on the north shore of the
Gulf of St. Lawrence, by G. Moisan, 78

Elymus wiegandii, 102

Epargyreus clarus, 181

Epilobium angustifolium, 207

Eptesicus fuscus fuscus, 228

Erethizon dorsatum, 142

Eriophorum callitrix, 174, gracile, 206

Ermine, 56, 76

Erskine, Anthony J.
Some new data on introgression in
Flickers from British Columbia, 82

Etheostoma exile, 124

Eucalia imconstans, 124

Eumeces fasciatus, 88

Eutantias, 131

Exceptional height for Ree on ieon lap-
ponicum, by J. W. Thieret, 123

Falco rusticolus, 15
195

Field observation of variation in Vaccinium
uliginosum LL. by H. T. Shacklette, 162

Pinch, Purple, 193

First New Brunswick record for the Cattle
Egret, by W. A. Squires, 120

First record of the keeled slug, Milax gag-
ates (Drap.), in Nova Scotia, by C. J. S.
Fox, 122

Fishes of the Pacific coast of Canada, re-
viewed by D. E. McAllister, 117

Flickers, Some new data on introgression
in, from British Columbia, by A. J. Ers-
ge, 82

5; sparverius sparverius,

INDEX 231

Flook, Donald R. and Donald C. Thomas
An observation of a Golden Eagle dom-

inating coyotes, 123

Flora of the Alaskan Arctic Slope, A, re-
viewed by D. B. O. Savile, 70

Flycatcher, Olive-sided, 196

Pox, GG) JS.
First record of the keeled slug, Milax
gagates (Drap.), in Nova Scotia, 122

Fox, arctic, 56; red, 76

Fragaria, 177

Fraxinus pennsylvanica, 72

Fulvous Tree Duck in New Brunswick, by
W. A. Squires, 120

Further additions to the birds of Simcoe
County, Ontario, by O. E. Devitt, 153

Gabrielson, Ira N.
Recent bird notes from the Blue Sea
Lake area in Quebec, 192

Gadus macrocephalus, 117

Gannet population of Bonaventure Island,
by D. B. Peakall, 179

Garden Flowers of China, The, reviewed by
R. A. Hamilton, 69

Gavia immer, 193

Geese, Canada, Northward dispersion of
banded, by E. Kuyt, 180

Geology of part of the Townships of
March, Huntley and Nepean, Carleton
County, Ontario, by J. L. Kirwan, 108

Glaciation of the Queen Charlotte Islands
The, by A. Sutherland Brown and H.
Nasmith, 209

Glaucomys, 131

Globicephala melaena, 63

Gnatcatcher, Blue-gray, 156

Godfrey, W. Earl
A Saskatchewan specimen of the Greater
Scaup, 125
Review of: Birds of the Caribbean, 116

Godwit, Marbled, 155

Goldeneye, Common, 194

Goose, Canada, 180; Snow,
fronted, 224

Gopher, pocket, northern, 74

Gorham, Stanley W.
Notes on a collection of amphibians
from the southwestern Ukraine, U.S.S.R.
and adjacent Czechoslovakia, 159
The comparative numbers of species of
amphibians in Canada and other count-
ries, 90

Gorham, Stanley W., and David H. John-
ston
Notes on New Brunswick Bats, 228

Goshawk, 194

226; White-

232 THe CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

Grampus orca, 62

Grebe, Pied-billed, 192, 193

Greenwood, Edward W.
Occurrences of the orchid Listera austra-
lis in the vicinity of Quebec City, 199

Groh, Herbert
Review of: Native Wild Plants of East-
ern Canada and the Adjacent North-
eastern United States, 175

Grosbeak, Evening, 193, 198; Pine, 209

Grouse, Spruce, 195

Grus canadensis, 155

Guide to Common Edible Plants of British
Columbia, reviewed by A. E. Porsild, 173

Guide to the geology of the Gatineau-
Lievre district, A. by D. D. Hograth, 1

Guillemot, Black, 79, 80, 81

Gull, Franklin’s, 155; Great Black-backed,
79805081: rlerring, 979,180, Si, 192) 15.
Iceland, 155; Little, 155; Ring-billed, 79,
80 81, 192, 193, 195

Gyrfalcon, 155

Habenaria saccata, 174; unalascensis, 174

Haliaeetus leucocephalus, 194

Hall, Ivan V., and Lewis E. Aalders
A natural hybrid between Vaccimum
myrtilloides and Vaccinium boreale on
Cape Breton Island, 203

Hamiuton, Robert A.
Review of: The Garden Flowers of
China, 69

Hare, arctic, 57, European, 223, snow-
shoe, 73, 183-189

Hare, snowshoe, Changes in the distribution
of the, in southern Ontario, by A. de
Vos, 183

Hare, snowshoe, Late breeding in New-
foundland, by D. G. Dodds, 60

Hawk, Broad-winged, 193, 194; Red-should-
ered, 193, 194; Rough-legged, 194; Spar-
row, 195

Heather Family (Evicaceae) of British Col-
umbia, The, reviewed by A. E. Porsild,
173

Helianthus tuberosus, 102

Hesperia borealis, 182

Hesperiphona vespertina vespertina, 198

Histrionicus histrionicus, 154

Hogarth, Donald D.
A guide to the geology of the Gatineau-
Liévre district, 1

iTordeum jubatum, 72, 75

Hosford, Harold V.
Breeding record of the Field Sparrow in
Manitoba, 178

Hybognathus hankinsoni, 124

Vol. 76

Ibis, Glossy, 154

In memoriam: Rudolph Martin Anderson
1876-1961, by J. Dewey Soper, 127

Island of the Lost, reviewed by L. A. Lear-
month, 118

Jaeger, Parasitic, 155
Jay, Blue, 193, 196; Gray, 196; Steller’s 209
Judd, William W.
Observations on the food of the blue-
tailed skink in Rondeau Park, Ontario, 88
Junco, Oregon, 151
Juncus vaseyi, 207

Kalmia angustifolia, 200; polifolia, 199-201

Kirwan, John L.
Geology of part of the Townships of
March, Huntley and Nepean, Carleton
County, Ontario, 108

Kittiwake, 79, 80, 81

Koenigia islandica, 174

Krivda, Walter
The silver spotted skipper at The Pas,
Manitoba, 181

Kuyt, E.
Northward dispersion of banded Can-
ada Geese, 180
White-fronted Geese breeding in the
Thelon Valley, N.W.T., 224

Lagenorhynchus acutus, 62; albirostris, 62

Lake Sturgeon, The, a History of Its Fish-
ery and Problems of Conservation, re-
viewed by D. E. McAllister, 171

Lane, John
Nesting of the Yellow Rail in southwest-
ern Manitoba, 189

Lane, Robert K.
A Short-tailed Albatross off British Col-
umbia, 178

Larix laricina, 200

Lark, Horned, 151

Larus argentatus smithsonianus, 195; dela-
awarensis, 195; glaucoides, 155; minutus,
155; pipixcan, 155

Lasionycteris noctivagans, 73, 228

Lasiurus borealis borealis, 228; cinereus, 228

Late breeding in Newfoundland snowshoe
hare, by D. G. Dodds, 60

Lawrence, Louise de Kiriline
Recent additions to the Nipissing region,

Ontario, bird-lists, 225

Learmonth, L. A.
Review of: Island of the Lost, 118

Lemmus, 56

Lepus, americanus, 73, 183-189; arcticus, 57;
europaeus, 223; townsendii, 73

1962

Limax maximus, 122

Limosa fedoa, 155

Liparis loeselli, 174

Listera australis, 199-202; caurina, 174

Loon, 192, 193; Red-throated, 79, 81

Lophodytes cucullatus, 194

Loxia curvirostra, 198; leucoptera leucoptera,
199

Lupinus, 177

Lutra, 131

Lycopus asper, 102

Mammalian dispersal in relation to an arti-
ficial land bridge, by A. W. Cameron,
142

Mammals, Observations on some, in Cum-
berland Peninsula, Baffin Island, in 1953,
by Adam Watson, 56

Mammals of the Delta Marsh region of
Lake Manitoba, Canada, by J. R. Tam-
sitt, 71

Manitoba, Breeding record of the Field
Sparrow in, by H. V. Hosford, 178

Manitoba, Nesting of the Yellow Rail in
southwestern, by John Lane, 189

Manitoba, The silver spotted skipper at The
Pas, by W. ‘Krivda, 181

Mareca americana, 193

Marmota, 131; monax, 74, 142

Marten, 76

Martes americana, 76, nesophila, 209

Mayflies of Michigan Trout Streams, re-
viewed by E. L. Bousfield, 175

McAllister, D. E.

The brassy minnow, river shiner and
sauger new to Alberta, 124

Review of: Fishes of the Pacific Coast of
Canada, 117

Review of: Silent Spring, 220

Review of: The Lake Sturgeon, a His-
tory of Its Fishery and Problems of
Conservation, 171

Meadowlark, 151; Western, 157, 226

Meganyctiphanes norvegica, 63

Megaptera novaeangliae, 63

Melilotus officinalis, 72

Menispermum canadense, 102

Mentha arvensis, 207

Mephitis mephitis, 74, 77, 142

Merganser, Common, 192, 194; Hooded, 192,
194; Red-breasted, 79, 154

Mergus merganser americanus, 194;
serrator, 154

Michigan Wildflowers, reviewed by W. G.
Dore, 118

Micropalama himantopus, 155

INDEX 233

Microtus, 72, 131; m. andersoni, 131; pen-
nsylvanicus, 75

Milax gagates, 122

Mimus polyglottos, 156, 226

Mink, 77

Minnow, brassy, new to Alberta, by D. E.

McAllister, 124

Mniotilta varia, 197

Mockingbird, 153, 156, 226

Moisan, Gaston
Eighth census of non-passerine birds in
the bird sanctuaries on the north shore
of the Gulf of St. Lawrence, 78

Molothrus ater, 178; a. eter, 198

Monodon monoceros, 64

Moose, 150

Morus bassanus, 179

Mouse, deer, 74; Gapper’s red-backed, 75;
house, 76, meadow jumping, 76

Murre, Common, 79, 80, 81; Thick-billed, 81

Muskrat, 75

Mustela erminea, 56, 76; frenata, 77;
haidoreum, 209, rixosa, 77; vison, 77

Myotis lucifugus, 73, 1. lucifugus, 228

Napaeozapus, 131

Narwhal, 64

Native Wild Plants of Eastern Canada and
the Adjacent Northeastern United States
reviewed by H. Groh, 175 :

Natural hybrid between Vaccinium myrtil-
loides and Vaccinium boreale on Cape
Breton Island, A, by I. V. Hall and L.
E. Aalders, 203

Naucrates ductor, 227

Nemobius, 88, 89

Nesting of the Yellow Rail in southwestern
Manitoba, by John Lane, 189

New Brunswick bats, Notes on, by S. W.

Gorham and D. H. Johnston, 228

New Brunswick, First record for the Cattle
Feret, by W. A. Squires, 120

New Brunswick, Fulvous Tree Duck in,
by W. A. Squires, 120

Newfoundland snowshoe hare, Late breed-
ing in, by D. G. Dodds, 60

New plant records from District of Mac-
kenzie, Northwest Territories, by J. W.
Thieret, 206

Nighthawk, 193

Northward dispersion of banded Canada
Geese, by E. Kuyt, 180

Northwest Territories, New plant records
from District of Mackenzie, by J. W.
Thieret, 206

234 Tue CANADIAN FieLp-NATURALIST

Northwest Territories, White-fronted Geese
breeding in the Thelon Valley, by E.
Kuyt, 224

Notes on a collection of amphibians from
the southwestern Ukraine, U.S.S.R. and
adjacent Czechoslovakia, by S. W. Gor-
ham, 159

Notes on. New Brunswick bats, by S. W.
Gorham and D. H. Johnston, 228

Notes on North Atlantic whales, by B. S.
Wright, 62

Notes on pika in captivity, by J. E. Under-
hill, 177

Notes on the Skylark on Vancouver Island,
by D. Stirling and R. Y. Edwards, 147

Notropis blennius, 124

Nova Scotia, A range extension and behav-
iour notes for the banded rudderfish in,
by J. S. Bleakney, 226

Nova Scotia, First record of the keeled slug,
Milax gagates (Drap.), in, by C. J. S.
Fox, 122

Nuthatch, White-breasted, 196

Nuttallornis borealis, 196

Observation of a Golden Eagle dominating
coyotes, by D. R. Flook and D. C.
Thomas, 123

Observations on some mammals in Cum-
berland Peninsula, Baffin Island, in 1953,
by Adam Watson, 56

Observations on the food of the blue-tailed
skink in Rondeau Park, Ontario, by W.
W. Judd, 88

Occurrences of the orchid Listera australis
in the vicinity of Quebec City, by E.
W. Greenwood, 199

Ochotona princeps, 177

Odocoileus hemionus, 150; virginiana, 77

Oidemuia nigra, 154

Olor buccinator, 120

Ondatra zibethicus, 75; z. albus, 75; 2. cin-
namominus, 75; z. zibethicus, 75

Ontario, Changes in the distribution of the
snowshoe hare in southern, by A. de
Vos, 183

Ontario, Further additions to the birds of
Simcoe County, by O. E. Devitt, 153

Ontario, Geology of part of the Town-
ships of March, Huntley and Nepean,
Car’eton County, by J. L, Kirwan, 108

- Ontario, Observations on the food of the
blue-tailed skink in Rondeau Park, by
W. W. Judd, 88 ;

Ontario, Poison sumac in eastern, by W. G.
Dore, 121

Vol. 76

Ontario, Recent additions to the Nipissing
region, bird-lists, by L. de K. Lawrence,
225

Ontario, The spread of the European hare
hare to the Ottawa region, by P. M.
Youngman, 223

Ontario, Yellow-headed Blackbirds breed-
ing at Rainy River, by C. S. Churcher,
122

Orchids of British Columbia, The, reviewed
by Ag, ES Porsild: p73

Osprey, 193, 195

Ottawa Field-Naturalists’ Club
Financial Statement, 1961, 68
Report of Council, 83rd Annual Meet-
ing, 65 -

Our Synthetic Environment, reviewed by
A. de Vos, 171

Ovenbird, 193, 197

Owl, Barred, 193, 195; Great Horned, 195;
Saw-whet, 209

Pandion haliaetus carolinensis, 195

Papilio machaon hudsonianus, 182

Parcoblatta pennsylvanica, 88, 89

Parker, James L.
Range extensions of crow-foot violet and
butterwort, 125

Passer domesticus domtesticus, 197

Passerella iliaca, 158

Passerberbulus henslowti, 157

Passerina cyanea, 198

Peakall, David B.
Gannet population of Bonaventure Island
179

Pelecanus erythrorhynchos, 153

Pelican, White, 153

Perca flavescens, 224

Perch, yellow, from Lake Erie, A colour
mutant of the, by E. J. Crossman, 224

Perisoreus canadensis canadensis, 196

Perognathus, 131

Peromyscus, 72, 131; maniculatus, 74, 75, 76;
m. bairdii, 75; m. osgoodti, 75; sitkensts
prevostensis, 209

Petrochelidon pyrrhonota pyrrhonota, 196

Pha’arope, Red, 155

Phalaropus fulicarius, 155

Phenacomys, 131

Phippsia algida, 174

Phoca, 131

Phocoena phocoena, 63

Phragmites communis, 72, 75

Physeter catoden, 64

Picea mariana, 200

Pika, 177

Pilotfish, 227

1962

Pimephales promelas, 124
Pintail, 79
Pipilo erythrophthalmus, 157
Plegadis falcinellus, 154
Plover, Semipalmated, 79
Poa pratensis, 72
Podilymbus podiceps, 193
Poison sumac in eastern Ontario, by W. G.
Dore, 121
Polioptila caerulea, 156
Populus deltoides, 72
Porcupine, 142-146
Pocellio rathkei, 88, 89
Porpoise, common, 63
Porsild, A. E.
Review of: Guide to Common Edible
Plants of British Columbia, 173
Review of: The Heather Family (Eri-
caceae) of British Columbia, 173
Review of:, The Orchids of British Col-
umbia, 173
Potamogeton pusillus, 206; zosteriformts, 206
Procyon lotor, 76, 142
Progne subis, 126
Prosopium oregoniumt, 124, williamsoni, 124
Prunus virginiana, 72
Puccinellia nuttalliana, 72
Puffin, Common, 79, 80, 81

Quebec, Recent bird notes from the Blue
Sea Lake area, by I. N. Gabrielson, 192
Quercus macrocarpa, 72

Rabbit, white-tailed jack, 73

Raccoon, 76, 142-146

Rail, Sora, 191; Virginia, 191

Rail, the Yellow, in southwestern Manitoba
Nesting of, by John Lane, 189

Range extension and behaviour notes for
the banded rudderfish in Nova Scotia,
by J. S. Bleakney, 226

Range extensions of crow-foot violet and
butterwort, by J. L. Parker, 125

Rangifer, 168, arcticus, 57; dawsoni, 209,
tarandus, 150, 168; t. caribou, 168; t. daw-
sont, 168; t. fennicus, 168; t. fricki, 169;
t. granti, 168; t. groenlandicus, 168; t.

' pearyl, 168; t. quettardi, 169

Rat, Norway, 75

Rattus norvegicus, 75

Raven, 193, 196

Recent additions to the Nipissing region,
Ontario, bird-lists, by L. de K. Law-
rence, 225

Recent bird notes from the Blue Sea Lake
area in Quebec, by I. N. Gabrielson, 192

Redstart, 193, 197

INDEX 235

Revision of the Reindeer and Caribou, Gen-
us Rangifer, A. reviewed by I. McT.
Cowan, 168

Rhinichthys cataractae, 124

Rhoda inermis, 63

Rhododendron canadense, 201; lapponicum,
123

Rhododendron lapponicum, Exceptional
height for, by J. W. Thieret, 123

Rhus radicans, 72, 102; vernix, 121

Ribes americanum, 72

Robin, 151

Rudderfish, the banded, in Nova Scotia, A
range extension and behaviour notes for,

by J. S. Bleakney, 226

Salamander, 90-99; Jefferson’s,
mouthed, 182

Salix amygdaloides, 72; calcicola, 207; can-
dida, 191; interior, 72; lucida, 72; niger,
72; pyrifolia, 207

Salt, W. Ray
Trumpeter Swans nesting in Saskatche-
wan, 120

Sambucus pubens, 72

Samolus floribundus, 102

Sandpiper, Solitary, 195, Spotted, 79, 81,
Stilt, 155

Saskatchewan, A specimen of the Greater
Scaup, by W. E. Godfrey, 125

Saskatchewan, Trumpeter Swans nesting in,
by W. R. Salt, 120

Saturday Morning Gardener, The, reviewed
by L. C. Sherk, 221

Sauger new to Alberta, by D. E. McAllister,
124

Savile, D.B.O.
Review of: A Flora of the Alaskan
Arctic Slope, 70.

Scaup, the Greater, A Saskatchewan speci-
men of, by W. E. Godfrey, 125

Schizonotus sorbifolius, 104

Scholochloa festucacea, 72

Scirpus acutus, 72; hudsonianus, 207, pumi-
lus, 207

Sciurus carolinensis, 74

Scoter, Common, 154

Seiurus aurocapillus aurocapillus, 197

Seriola zonata, 226

Setophaga EAN tricolora, 197

Shacklette, Hansfort T.
Field observations of variation in Vac-
cinium uliginosum L., 162

Sherk, L. C.
Review of: The Saturday Morning Gar-
dener, 221

88; Small-

236

Shiner, river, new to Alberta, by D. E.
McAllister 124

Short-tailed Albatross off British Columbia,
A, by R. K. Lane, 178

Shoveler, 154

Shrew, arctic, 73; masked, 73; short-tailed,
73; water, 73

Sialia sialis sialis, 196

Silent Spring, reviewed by D. E. McAllister
220

Silver spotted skipper at The Pas, Manitoba,
by W. Krivda, 181

Sitta carolinensis cookei, 196

Skink, the blue-tailed, Observations on the
food of, in Rondeau Park, Ontario, by
W. W: Judd, 88

Skipper, The silver spotted, at The Pas,
Manitoba, by W. Krivda, 181

Skunk, striped, 77, 142-146

Skylark on Vancouver Island, Notes on
the, by D. Stirling and R. Y. Edwards,
147

Slug, keeled, First record of the, in Nova
Scotia, by C. J. S. Fox, 122

Sma!l-mouthed salamander, new to the
fauna of Canada, by IT. M. Uzzell, Jr.,
182

Smilacina trifolia, 201

Snipe, Common, 191

Somateria mollissima, 154

Some new data on introgression in Flickers
from British Columbia by A. J. Erskine,
82

Soper, J. Dewey
In memoriam: Rudolph Martin Ander-
son 1876-1961, 127

Sorbaria sorbifolia (L.) A. Br., false spirea,
persisting and spreading after cultivation
in Canada, by W. J. Cody, 104

Sorex, 131; arcticus, 73; cinereus, 73, obscu-
rus prevostensis, 209; palustris, 73

Sorghastrum nutans, 102

Sparrow, Clay-colored, 157; Field, 178; Fox,
158; Golden-crowned, 151; Grasshopper,
157; Henslow’s, 157; House, 197; Le-
Conte’s, 191; Sharp-tailed, 191, White-
crowned, 151, 157

Spartina, 73; pectinata, 72

Spatula clypeata, 154

Sphagnum, 199

Spiraea sorbifolia, 104

Spizella pallida, 157; pusilla, 178

Spread of the European hare to the Ottawa

region of Ontario, by P. M. Youngman,
223

Tue CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

Vol. 76

Squires, W. Austin
First New Brunswick record for the
Cattle Egret, 120
Fulvous Tree Duck in New Brunswick,
120

Squirrel, Franklin’s ground, 74; gray, 74;
Richardson’s ground, 74; thirteen-lined
ground, 74

Staphylea trifolia, 100-102

Starling, 151, 196

Stenonema rubrumt, 175 .

Stercorarius parasiticus, 155

Stirling, D., and R. Y. Edwards
Notes on the Skylark on Vancouver
Island, 147

Stizostedion canadense, 125, virtreum vit-
reum, 125

Strange Lives of Familiar Insects, The, re-
viewed by J. W. Arnold, 222

Strix varia varia, 195

Sturnella neglecta, 157, 226

Sturnus vulgaris vulgaris, 196

Sumac, poison, in Eastern Ontario, by W.
G. Dore, 121

Sutherland Brown, Atholl, and Hugh Na-
smith. The glaciation of the Queen Char-
lotte Islands, 209

Swallow, Cliff, 196

Swans, Trumpeter, nesting in Saskatche-
wan, by W. R. Salt, 120

Symphoricarpus occidentalis, 72

Synaptomtys, 131

Tamiasciurus, 131
Tamsitt, James R.
Mammals of the Delta Marsh region of
Lake Manitoba, Canada, 71
Review of: The Cloud Forest, 116
Tanacetum vulgare, 208
Taraxacum, 177
Taxidea taxus, 77
Teal, Green-winged, 79
Telmatodytes palustris dissaeptus, 196
Tern, Arctic, 79, 80, 81; Black, 80; Caspian,
79, 81; Common, 79, 80, 81
Thieret, John W.
Exceptional height for Rhododendron
lapponicum, 123
New plant records from District of
Mackenzie, Northwest Territories, 206
Thomomys talpoides, 74, t. anderson, 131
Thrasher, Brown, 156
Thryothorus ludovicianus, 156
Totanus melanoleucus, 195
Towhee, Rufous-sided, 157
Toxostoma rufum, 156
Trillium undulatum, 201

1962

Tringa solitaria solitaria, 195

Trochosa pratensis, 88, 89

Trumpeter Swans nesting in Saskatchewan,
by W. R. Salt, 120

Typha latifolia, 72

Ulmus americana, 72

Underhill, J. E.
Notes on pika in captivity, 177

Ursus americanus carlottae, 209

Uzzell, Thomas M., Jr.
The small-mouthed salamander, new to
the fauna of Canada, 182

Vaccinium angustifolium, 203-205; boreale,
203-205; corymbosum, 205; myrtilloides,
203-205; myrtillus, 205, uliginosum, 162-
167; vitis-idaea, 205

Vaccinium uliginosum L., Field observa-
tions of variation in, by H. T. Shack-
lette, 162

Vermivora celata, 197; chrysoptera, 156,
chrysoptera | pinus, 157; ruficapilla rufi-
capilla, 197

Viola pedatifida, 125

Violet, crow-foot, Range extensions of, by
Jaenebarker 125

Vireo, Philadelphia, 197; Red-eyed, 193,
197; Yellow-throated, 156

Vireo flavifrons, 156; olivaceus, 197; phil-
adelphicus, 197

Vulpes vulpes, 76

Vulture, Turkey, 226

Warbler, Bay-breasted, 193, 197; Black-
and-white, 193, 197; Blackburnian, 193,
197; Blackpoll, 197; Black-throated Blue,
193, 197; Brewster’s, 157; Canada, 193;
Cape May, 197; Cerulean, 157; Chestnut-
sided, 193; Golden-winged, 156, Hooded,
157; Magnolia, 193, 197; Nashville, 193;
Orange-crowned, 197; Wilson’s, 197

INDEX

237

Watson, Adam
Observations on some mammals in Cum-

berland Peninsula, Baffin Island, in 1953,
56

Waxwing, Bohemian, 156

Weasel, least, 77; long-tailed, 77

Whale, baleen, 63; blue, 63; fin, 62-64;
humpback, 63; killer, 62, 63; pilot, 63,
sperm, 64; white, 64

Whales, Notes on North Atlantic, by B. S.
Wright, 62

White-fronted Geese breeding in the Thel-
on Valley, N.W.T., by E. Kuyt, 224

Widgeon, American, 193

Wildlife Sektches — Near and Far, reviewed
by F. R. Cook, 170

Wilsonia citrina, 157; pusilla pusilla, 197

Wolf, 566; timber, 76

Woodchuck, 74, 142-146

Woodpecker, Hairy, 209; Pileated, 195

Wren, Carolina, 156; Long-billed Marsh,
196; Short-billed Marsh, 191

Wright, Bruce S.
Notes on North Atlantic whales, 62

Xanthocephalus xanthocephalus, 122
Xysticus, 88, 89

Yellow-headed Blackbirds breeding at Rainy
River, Ontario, by C. S. Churcher, 122
Yellowlegs, Greater, 195
Yellowthroat, Northern, 191
Youngman, Phillip M.
Bibliography of Rudolph Martin Ander-
son, 134
The spread of the European hare to the
Ottawa region of Ontario, 223
Review of: A Book of Canadian Ani-
mals, 173

Zanthoxylum antericanum, 102
Zapus, 72, 131

Zenaidura macroura, 195
Zonotrichia leucophrys, 157

Ws

238 Tue CanapiAn FIEtp-NATURALIST Vol. 76

_A Note on the Production of the Journal

The Canadian Field-Naturalist conforms to recommendations on the lay-
out of periodicals issued by the International Organization for Standardization.
It is set by linotype in Janson. The title is Kennerley. Boldface headings
are Bodoni. Coverstock is ‘Mayfair’ by Howard Smith and text paper is
Provincial Paper ‘Thriftcoat’. The journal is printed by The Runge Press
Limited, Ottawa, Ontario.

The Publications Committee acknowledges with thanks the contribution
of the Conservation Council of Ontario toward the publication of this volume.

Sounds of Nature
The Ontario Federation of Naturalists has released Volume 7 of their
Sounds of Nature series.
The newest LP is entitled Prairie Spring and was produced, as were
the other records in this series, by Field Secretary Dr. W. W. H. Gunn.
Seven LP’s are now available in the Sounds of Nature series:
Volume 1 — SonGs oF SPRING
Volume 2—A Day In ALGoNnQquiINn Park
Volume 3 — Birps oF THE FOREST
Volume 4— Warsters (In conjunction with Dr. D. Borror)
Volume 5—A Day ar Fiores Morapas
Volume 6 —Frincues (In conjunction with Dr. D. Borror)

Volume 7 — Prairie SPRING
All records are 12” — 33% rpm., priced at $5.95
Illustrated brochure available on request.

Write: Federation of Ontario Naturalists, Edwards Gardens, Don Mills,
Ontario.

~ Tuompson; Treasurer, Miss Mary
ae ei eee W. ae

terature eae and Fiosee for
be double-spaced. Only those words
a8 in italics should es underlined.
of the manuscript should be number-

a oo ews International Dictionary is te
ch for spelling. However, in a case of
cr nce in the spelling of a common name, and
fe of a variant name, a decision of a

IC: eh is preferred.

re made by the author- dake system.
be listed alphabetically and typed at
he main ee of text. All titles of

es sh _ be Bee after the Hist of

abic 1 sumerals, apice 4 iescade ie

3 os a AFFILIATED ‘SOCIETIES

Coristine; Secretary-Treasurer, Georces A. LE-
le 628. Fraser St., Quebec, Que.

Province of Quebec Society for the
Protection of Birds
Mrs. G. H. Montcomery;

President, Vice-

_ Presidents, Dr. Ian McLaren, Miss R. B, Brian-

cHARD; Honorary Treasurer, Miss G. E. Hresarp;
Honorary Secretary, Miss R. S. ABBOTT, 164 Sen-
neville Road, Senneville, P.Q. -

Toronto Field Naturalists’ Club
President, Dr. D. Horntcer; Vice-President,
R. F. Norman; Secretary-Treasurer, Mrs. H. Ros-
son, 49 Craighurst Ave., Toronto 12, Ont.; As-

sistant Secretary, Miss Ruta Marsuaiy; Junior

T.F.N.C., R. J. MacLetian, 416 St. Clements Ave.,
Toronto 12, Ont.

Vancouver Natural History Society
Honorary President, Dr. M. Y. Witu1aMs; Past

President, Dr. R. Srace-Smiru; President, Dr. J. E.

ARMSTRONG, Vice-President, Dr. J. F. BENnpeELL;
Treasurer, Mrs. E. N. Corrine, 890 Seymour Blvd.,
North Vancouver, B.C.; Programme Secretary,
Miss G. Whricut; Recording Secretary, Muss
KaTHERINE Mitroy; Secretary, E. N. Coppine;
Editor of Bulletin, C. B. W. Rocrrs; Librarian,
Mrs. H. Prnper-Moss.

ADVICE TO CONTRIBUTORS :
Authors are asked to share the cost of publication by paying for each

‘page of an article that is in excess of the limit of twelve journal pages,
the cost of oo and of setting small-sized type and tables.

illustrations

All figures, including each fare of the plates,
should be numbered consecutively in arabic
numerals, The author’s name, title of the paper,
and figure number should be written in the lower
left corner of the sheet on which the illustration
appears. The legend should not be incorporated
in the figure.

Line drawings should be made with India ink
on white drawing paper, blue tracing linen, or

blue-lined co-ordinate paper. Co-ordinate lines

that are to appear in the reproduction should be
ruled in black ink. Descriptive matter should be

lettered, not typewritten, and all parts of the

drawing should permit easy legibility even if a
reduction is made.

Photographs | should have a aay finish and
show sharp contrasts, For reproduction as a com-
plete plate they should be mounted without space
between prints.

For large drawings and mounted photographs
the ratio of height to width should conform to
that of the journal page (43 by 74 inches) but the
height should be adjusted to allow for the legend.

Reprints

Reprints, with or without covers may be bought,
The cost is given on the reprint order form which

is attached to the galley proofs.

v

ERNST MAYR LIBRARY